CMFRI bulletin 43

APRIL 1989

MARINE LIVING RESOURCES OF THE OF - An Indicative Survey With Suggestions For Development

CENTRAL MARINE FISHERIES RESEARCH INSTITUTE (Indian Council of Agricultural Research) P, B. No. 2704, E. R. G. Road, Cochin-682 031, CMFRI bulletin 43

APRIL 1989

MARINE LIVING RESOURCES OF THE UNION TERRITORY OF LAKSHADWEEP- An Indicative Snrvey With Suggestions For Development

>«»">>,

\ *- "tonmTV- ^

CENTRAL MARINE FISHERIES RESEARCH INSTITUTE (Indian Council of Agricultural Rasaarch) P. B. No. 2704, E. R. G. Road, 682031, India Bulletins are issued periodically by Central Marine Fisheries Research Institute to interpret current knowledge in the various fields of research on marine fisheries and allied subjects in India

Copyright Reserved ©

Published by

P. S. B. R. JAMES Director Central Marine Fisheries Research Institute Cochin 682031, India

Edited by C. SUSEELAN Scientist Central Marine Fisheries Research Institute Cochin 682031, India

Limited Circulation CONTENTS

Preface lii Introduction P. S. B. R. James ...... 1

History of Marine Research in Lakshadweep P. S. B. R. James ...... 9

Some Observations on the Fisheries of Lakshadweep P. S. B. R. James, P. P. Pillai and A. A. Jayaprakash ...... 25

Tuna Resources and Plan for Development P, S B. R. Jam«s, P. P. Pillai and K. P. S. Koya ...... 33

Live-Bait Resources and Development M. Kumaran, and 4 others ...... 39

Resources of Ornamental Fishes V. S. Murthy, M, Kumaran and R. S. Lalmohan ...... 46

Other Finfish Resources M. Kumaran, R. S. Lalmohan and V. S. Murthy ...... 6S

Crustacean Resources G. S. Rao, C. Suseelan and M. KathirTcl ...... 72

Molluscan Resources K. K. Appukuttan and 4 Others ...... 77

Potential for Development of Pearl Culture K. Alagarswaml, A. Cbellam and A. C. C. Victor ...... 93

Echinoderms of Lakshadweep and their Zoogeography D. B. James ...... 97

Beche-de-mer Resources D. B. James ...... 144

Sponge Fauna P. A. Thomas ...... ISO

Seaweed and Seagrass Resources N. Kaliaperumal, P. Kaladharan and S. Kallmutbu ...... 162

Turtle Resources R. S. Lalmohan ...... 167

The Coral Fauna C. S. G. Pillai and S. Jasmine ...... 179 Some Observations on the Marine Mammals and Marine Birds R. S, Lalmoban ...... 195

Hydrobiology of the Lagoons K. G. Girijavallabban, I. Daridraj and S V. Alavandi ...... 200

Environmental Damage and Consequences P. S, B R. James and 4 others ...... 212

Underwater Observations in the Lagoons A. C. C. Victor, A. Chellam and K. Ramadoss ... 227

Mariculture Potential R. S. Lalfflohan, D.B.James and S. Kalimuthu ...... 243

Suggestions for Establishing a National Marine Park P. S. B. R. James and C. S. G. Pillai ...... 248

Development of Fisheries-Recommendations P. S. B. R.James and 3 otliers ...... 253 PREFACE

The Union Territory of Lakshadweep located in the southern is endowed with many natural resources. Since isolated from the mainland of India, however, the inhabitants of these islands had to live for ages in utter baclcwardness, ill-health and poverty. After the islands became a Union Territory of India in 1956, there has been rapid progress in the field of agriculture, fisheries, education, health etc. Next in importance to agriculture, the fisheries sector plays an important role in the economy of the islands.

Realising that the marine fisheries has to play a key role in maintaining and upgrading the standard of living in the Lakshadweep islands, the Central Marine Fisheries Research Institute established a Research Centre at in 1956 with limited facilities. This centre has carried out extensive research on tunas, live bait fishes, coral reefs and fishery oceanography of the area more particularly around Minicoy. The /esults of studies so far conducted on the marine fisheries and related aspects in Lakshadweep have been recently reviewed in a special issue of the Marine Fisheries Information Service : Technical and Extension Series (No. dd) published by this institute.

Of late, the Government of India have assigned top priority for 'planned development of its island territories and in 1985 the Hon'ble Prime Minister Shri. Rajeev Gandhi himself visited the Islands to personally appraise himself of the problems faced by the islanders and to usher a speedy development programme. He observed that fisheries being a major natural resource of the Union Territory there was urgent need for systematic planning and implementation of fisheries development schemes. Keeping this in view and to widen our knowledge of the marine living resources of the islands and related environmental parameters which would help in accelerated development of the fisheries sector, the Central Marine Fisheries Research Institute has carried out a comprehensive survey of the fishery potential of the Islands from January to M^rch 1987 involving 24 expert scientists under my leadership. The survey has been very successful in that the scientists were able to collect considerable amount of data and scientific material from all the inhabited and most of the uninhabited islands.

The present Bulletin embodies the scientific results of this survey assessing the various types of fishery resources and their potential; impact of environmental damages of the endangered ecosystems such as coral reefs; evaluating the ancillary marine resources such as sea cucumbers, sponges and ornamental fishes; identifying areas and suitable for mariculture in the islands and suggesting measures that would help the administration and development agencies in perspective planning and development of fisheries in Lakshadweep.

I deeply appreciate the hard work, sense of devotion and unfailing enthusiasm evinced by my colleagues in fulfilling this mission-oriented and time bound survey programme bringing to light considerable amount of fresh information on the fishery potential of Lakshadweep as reflected in the various contributions included in this Bulletin.

My sincere thanks are due to Dr. C. Suseelan for editing the papers and bringing out this bulletin.

P. S. B. R. James Director Central Marine Fisheries Research Institute INTRODUCTION

P. S. B. R. James

The Union Territory of Lakshadweep, con­ grow only to a height which would prevent its sisting of several inhabited and uninhabited exposure during low tides. A reef may be about islands, lie between 08°00'N and 12°30'N 300 m across with channels in its perimeter latitudes and 7r00'E and 74°C0'E longitudes. which allow the inflow of tidal waters in the The remoteness of the island territory from the lagoon. The islands are formed by the accumu­ mainland has forced the inhabitants to live in lation of coral sand in the form of sand bars isolation amidst injustice, poverty, ignorance and with the action of wind, waves and currents. ill health. and tuna formed the mainstay Later it got compressed into sand stone. In of the economy of the islanders. The lagoons course of time vegetation got established and and the surrounding waters are replete with a the consequent ecological succession took place. wide variety of flora and fauna. The tunas and The height of the land above sea level in the the food fishes were being exploited ever since islands is generally 1-2 metres. Coral boulders human settlement. The islands became a Union are heaped up on one side of some of the Territory of India in 1956. Since then there has islands due to natural calamities like cyclones been rapid progress especially in the fields of and heavy storms. agriculture, fisheries, education, health etc. Next in importance to agriculture, the fisheries The archipelago consists of 12 , three sector, plays an important role in the economy reefs and five submerged banks. There are 36 of the islands. islands covering an area of 32 Sq. km. Of these only 10 islands, namely, Androth, Amini, Agatti, Geomorpho/ogy , Chetlat, Kadmat, , , and Minicoy are inhabited. Among the unhabit- The tiniest of Union Territory of India, ed islands, Bangaram is a tourist resort and Lakshadweep is located on the Laccadive- Suheli is a coconut growing and fishing centre. Chagos ridge which is supposed to be the or the bird island is small reef with sand continuation of the Aravali mountains. The bank covering an area of 1.2 hectare lying islands are believed to be the remnants of the north west of Kavaratti where terns in thousands submerged mountain cliffs and formed as a visit for nesting. The details of inhabited result of coral formation. The submarine bank islands are given in table 1. that supports the atolls rises from depth ranging from 1500 metres to 4000 metres. The Information in detail about Lakshadweep Laccadive, IVIaldive and Chagos Archipelagoes relating to georaphical features, land flora and form a contiguous submarine bank covering a fauna, history etc are given by Ellis (1924) and distance of over 2000 km. The atolls of the Mannadiar (1977). Except Androth all the island rest on an underwater platform of about islands have a lagoon, some of which are fast 100 fathom deep. The islands have formed as getting filled up by calcareous sand. Bitra has a result of many thousand years of reef building perhaps the most magnificient lagoon. Minicoy activity and the geological changes took place has a large and deep lagoon with a boat channel especially during Pleistocene period. The on the northern side giving safe access and subsidence of a volcanic island resulted in the anchorage to vessels of about 3 m draught. formation of a fringing reef and the continued The outer edges of atolls drop precipitously subsidence allowed this grow upwards. With to the ocean floor. Mostly on the eastern side the submerging of the island the is formed the atolls overhang the precipitous shelf. The encircling the lagoon. The rim of the atolls can eastern side is generally more sheltered from Table 1. The names and details of the inhabited island in the UT of Lakshadweep.

Georgraphic Distance from Area in Area in Population Language Name location Cochin (N. M) Sq. km. hectares 1971 1981

Agatti Let. 10°51'N 248 2.7 271 3155 4111 Malayalam Long. 72''11'E

Amini Lat.ir07'N 220 2.6 259 4542 5367 II Long. 72''44'E

Androth Lat. 10°49'N 158 4.8 484 5424 6812 II Long. 73°4rE

Bitra Lat. 11 ''36'N 261 0.1 10 112 181 II Long. 72°43'E

Chetlat Lat. ir4rN 233 1.0 104 1200 1484 1 Long. 72''10'E

Kadmat Lat. 11°13'N 220 3.1 213 2416 3114 II Long. 72''47'E

Kalpeni Lat. 10°05'N 155 2.3 228 3152 3543 " Long. 73°39'E

Kavaratti Lat. 10''33'N 213 3.6 363 4420 6604 II Long. 72°38'E

Kiltan Lat. ir29'N 218 1.6 163 2046 2375 II Long: 73°E

Minicoy Lat. 08=17'N 215 4.4 437 5342 6658 Mahl Long. 73''04'E (Divehi) wind and current. The islands, ranging in area and the most serious recorded being the one from 1 ha. to nearly 440 ha., are little specks that struck Kalpeni and Androth on April 15, in the . They are beautiful, idyllic 1847 (Mannadiar, 1977). The subsequent ones and strategically located from the point of were in 1891, 1922, 1948, 1963 and 1965 but view of economic and defence considerations never of the magnitude of the first one (Jones of India. Being oceanic islands, the continental 1986) shelf around them is limited to about 4336 sq. km. But considering the lagoon area of about Mineral resources 4200 sq.km., 20,000 sq. km. of territorial waters The mineral resources of the island consist and about 400,000 sq. km. of oceanic zone, of low grade phosphate derived out of bird Lakshadweep is one of the largest territories of droppings before the islands were colonised by our nation. man and calcium carbonate sands. Exploitation of these are linked with the very existence of the Climate islands and any attempt made in this direction The climate, more or less comparable to should not turn out suicidal. that of the coastal areas of Kerala, is warm and Natural resources humid but bearable. The average rainfall is about 1640 mm for Minicoy and 1504 mm for The most important items coming under the Amini. The rainiest months are June to flora and fauna of the islands are the coconut September with June receiving the maximum. trees and fishes which form the mainstay of the Maximum temperature may range from 35''C economy of the islands. Though there are to 38°C and minimum from 17''C to IB'C. several kinds of plants in the islands none of Occasionally cyclonic storms occur, the oldest them has as much importance as the coconut

CMFRI tree. It forms the real tree of life of islanders Social and cultural background and every part of it is of use to them. No cereal of any significant importance is grown in the The people in the islands are all muslims islands. The flora of the islands consists mainly who are very devoted to their religion. They Banana (Vazha) (Musa paradisiaca), Chembu are peace loving, and criminal records are few, (Colocasia antiquorum), drumstick 'Moringakki' though litigation cases arising out of property {Moringa oleifera) bread fruit - 'Chakka' {Arto- disputes are rather high. carpus Incissa) and Wild (Terminalia The early migrants were mostly from the catappa) Some of the shrub plants are Kanni mainland India, especially from Malabar. A (Scaevola koenigii). Punna {Ca/ephyllum certain type of caste system was in existence inophyllum), Chavok {Casuar/na equisetifolia) and Cherrani (Thespesia populnaa) which are unevenly grown throughout the islands. Tapioca, AREA:2 7Sq. km. yam, gourds, legumes etc are also cultivated- (271 Ho.) A variety of wild herbs and shrubs grow and new plants occasionally introduced from the mainland. The area available is so limited, the population is on the increase and there is shortage of fresh water leaving very little scope for large-scale cultivation.

Until the territory came under the Central Administration, large-scale fishing has been in vogue in Minicoy. Remarkable strides have N been made in fishery development during the 51' 10' last thirty years. The CMFRI made a compre­ hensive study of the fish fauna of the entire archipelago. There is no land fauna of any

special importance except perhaps the tree rat, .•JS^'^KALPITTI It. which is of a very distructive nature.

r 1 r LAKSHADWEEP GROUP OF ISLANDS 72»H'E

Chtrbanioni or ; BaliopanryamRltf Fig. 2. Agatti and Kalpitti Islands

Byromgoft or Choriyoponiyom Reef before Islamisation. The social structure in Minicoy bears close affinities with that of ILTANl Perumol por (j[Hi Maldives. The Attiri or village system is of JlKADMATi special kind there and women play a dominant

AGATTIJ^ip. •,g=>'lANORQTffl role in the society, unlike anywhere else KolpiTTn ^ iKAVARATTll among the Muslims. The social conditions in

, . Cheriyom the Lakshadweep bears close resemblance to Pitli;;^;! those in Maldives. The people of the southern Tile>komy|KALPENI most island, Minicoy, are ethinically related to Maldivians and speak the Mahl Chalet or Divehi language while the rest of the islanders speak Malayalam with a characteristic local slang. Culturally they are closely related to

WIrlngill Kerala.

72'E Realising the importance of oceanic tuna fisheries, the Central Marine Fisheries Research Fig. 1. The Lekshadweep group of Islands. The Islands marked inside boxes indicate those surveyed during Institute established a Research Centre at the present investigation. Minicoy in 1958, and the Department of Fisheries

BULLETIN 43 Lakshadweep was established in 1959. During Technology, Government of India, and the the past 30 years research activities carried out Lakshadweep Administration has identified by the scientists of CIVIFRI as well as scientists definite areas for evaluation under each subject, of other research organisations mainly going such as agriculture, fisheries etc. Based on the from the mainland have furthered our knowledge S&T inputs suggested at this workshop and also on the fishery reaources, their potential, fishing the main objective of the Institute during the methods, fishery biology of commercially impo­ VII Plan, viz., to assess the underexploited and rtant tunas and bait fishes, and environmental unexploited resources of the EEZ, the CMFRI undertook a comprehensive and indicative survey of the fishery potential of the various islands AREA: 2 6 Sq km. under the leadership of Dr. P. S. B. R. James, (259 Ha.) Director, CMFRI. An action plan for the survey was drawn up by the end of 1986. Regarding the modalities for uniform collection of data and facilities and equipments needed for the survey the team leaders and members had detailed briefing at Headquarters, Cochin. The survey was accomplished by 24 scientists of CMFRI from identified fields, divided into three teams and each team surveying a group of islands for a period of one month, from January to March 1987.

The comprehensive survey mainly aimed at an overall assessment of the various fishery resources, especially tunas and baitfishes, their potential, evaluation of ancillary marine resources such as ornamental fishes, sea cucumbers and 44' 72*43'E sponges, impact of environmental damages Fig. 3. Amini Island caused to the ecosystems such as coral reefs, identifying areas and species suitable for mari- characteristics. Research on corals and coral culture in the islands and for suggesting reefs has been strengthened. But, except for the measures that would form fhe basis for evolving useful information available from Minicoy in the suitable strategies of exploitation. south, little is known trom the northern islands, mainly because the Institute could not under­ take survey/research programmes for want or AREA: 4 3 Sq. km. manpower and infrastructural facilities. (484 Ha.)

The recent interest in the development of 4 3' Lakshadweep through modern scientific and technological inputs has brought into a sharper focus on-the marine wealth. The efforts aim at assessing these resources for exploitation for the N 10* economic benefits of the people of the islands 48' as well as for improving the national economy without jeopardising the ecosystem and the resources which are unique to these islands.

The Futurology workshop held in July 1986 73»40'E 41' 42' organised by the Department of Science and Fig. 4. Androth Island

4 CMFRI Since survey of this nature would not be possible during the southwest monsoon, January to March 87 was chosen for carrying out the programme. The first team was in the S7' islands from 3 January to 8 February and surveyed Amini, Kadmat, Kiltan and Chetlat. The second team surveyed the islands Agatti. Kali- C LAGOON PARALl.^ *^ patti, Bangaram, Tinnakara, Parii and Bitra TINNAKARA 56' from 5 February to 4 March. The third team conducted survey of Kavaratti, , BANGARAM J \ Minicoyand Kalpeni from 5 March to 3 April. The Project Leader Dr. P. S. B. R. James, Director, N 53' CMFRI, along with two other Scientists Dr. P. P. 10 *»«M»; Piilai and Shri A. A. Jayaprakash visited Mini- coy, Kavaratti, Agatti and Bangaram to make an on-the-spot study of the pole-and-line fishery 72«I6'E 17' te' for skipjack, live-bait fishes, coral reef ecosystem, Fig. 5, Btngirsm, Tinnakaia and Tareli Islrnds the associated flora and fauna and other ancillary marine resources. The discussions he held with The objectives as defined covered the the Administrator and Director of Fisheries following : Lakhshadweep could identify the major const­ raints and programmes to be implemented for 1) Collection of basic information on the future development. present status of exploitation of the marine fishery resources including data on infrast­ ructure facilities and manpower. AREA: OlSq.km. 2) Identification and estimation of non- (10 Ha.) conventional, underexpioited and unex- ploited resources. N 3) Faunistic survey with estimates of 36' abundance of ancillary resources, such as 11 ornamental fishes, echinoderms, sponges- molluscs, and seaweeds. o* 4) Aimed survey of the bait fish resources in the lagoon, reef flat and adjacent sea, LAG CON looking into possibilities for development of these resources. 5) Investigation of ecology of lagoon, reef \ and adjacent sea to understand the V environmental parameters and producti­ vity. .^ J ^ 6) Survey of the mariculture potential of the islands in terms of species, seed sol. 72»10'E availability and suitablity of sites. Fig. 6. Bitra^laland 7) Estimation of ecological damage caused by man-made changes on the entire marine The composition of the various teams were as ecosystem, particularly coral reef and follows : possibilities of protection/rebuilding of Project Leader: Dr. P. S. B. R. James, the ecosystem. Director, CMFRI, Cochin 8) Consideration of setting up of National Team 1: Dr. C. S. Gopinadha Piilai (Associate Marine Parks in the islands. Leader), Dr, V. S. R. Moorthy, Dr.

BUUETIN43 establishing marine parks and reserves in this —1 1 area. Studies on hydrology and ecology of the AREA: lOSq.km. (104 Ha.) lagoon, reef and adjacent sea have been made. Special emphasis was laid to survey the mariculture potential of the islands. The materials collected during the survey were analysed inde­

ff 1 \ •» tf 1 \' pendently and collectively by the scientists who 42' // / \\ prepared reports according to their speciali­ sations, using all the materials and data collected by the three teams. > > Earlier studies as well as the present survey o / have indicated the need for further exploitation of " ., /• the untapped resources of tuna. Introduction of 41' /• -/ / . large pole-and-line units, purse seiners and ! / longliners can augment production. The reported potential is 90,000 tonnes (Jones & Banerji 1973). Finfishes other than tuna could be exploited by gillnetting and hooks and lines. Since FADs can augment production, experi­ N ments to fabricate these having a long life will

• be worth trying. Attention should be focussed 40' 1 1 to conduct experiments on artificial breeding 72*40'E 41' and culture of live-baits. Experiments to reduce Fig. 7.

G. Sudhakara Rao, Dr. D. B. James, S/Shri K. Ramdoss, K. Kaiadharan, AREA: 3 1 Sq. km (213Ha.) I. David Raj (Scientists) and K. K. 15' Kunhikoya (Tech. Asst.)

Team 2 : Shri M. Kumaran (Assoctate Leader), Dr. C. Suseelan, S/Shri K. K. Appu- kuttan, S. V. Alavandi, A. Chellam, K. P. Said Koya (Scientists), 8. 14' Kalimuthu (Tech. Asst.) and P. Kojan Koya (Fieldman).

Team 3 : Dr. R. S. Lai Mohan, Dr. P. A. Thomas, Dr. N. Kaliaperumal, S/Shri 13' IVI. Kathirvel, K. G. Girijavallabhan, A. C. C. Victor, IVI. IVI. Meiyappan (Scientists) and Mohamed Koya (Lab. Attendant). 12' The three teams successfully completed the survey of the different islands (Fig. 1-12) as per schedule. A large volume of data and scientific materials on various resources of fin fishes, crustaceans, molluscs, sea cucumbers, sponges, corals, coral reefs and seaweeds have been collected. The environmental damages caused by natural factors and due to human interference in each island have been assessed 72»46'E 47- and measures suggested including the need for Fig. 8.

CMI^RI " •—1 r- 9' AREA: 2-3 Sq. km AREA:t'6Sq. km. (228 Ho.) (163 Ho.) 30'

8' li 'A A 7' 29'

6' W) N 28' Xi/ 11* 1 ,,.,, —1 5' 73»E t'

Fig. 11. KiJtsn Island

N AREA: 4-4 Sq. km. 10^ (437 Ha.)

73»37'E 38' 39' 40'

Fig. 9. Kalpeni Island

AREA: 3-6 Sq. km. (363 Ha.)

34'

73»rE 2' 3' Fig, 12. Minicoy Island

33' mortality of live-baits during handling, trans­ portation and storing in live-bait tanks is of utmost importance. Immediate attention should be given to carry out demonstration programmes so as to convince fishermen in the use of live N baits other than the traditionally exploited sprats. 32- Trials with artificial baits also have to be made. 10 Manpower development through training as well as by appropriate socio-economic programmes 72»35'E 36' 37' need consideration. The interisland movement of fishermen/boat would result in further Fig. 10. Ktvaratti Island

BULLETIN 43 expansion of the existing pole-and-line fishery. proper linkages between different components Some of the uninhabited islands where fishermen of the entire system. stay should have facilities for camping, repair The Lakshadweep Administration and the and maintenance of the vessel, supply of fresh Directorate of fisheries of the Union Territory water and fuel. An organised marketing system whole heartedly cooperated in the Survey with­ will be beneficial to the fishermen. Product out which it would not have been possible to diversification to suit consumer preference will complete the work. Our grateful thanks are due be ideal. Ways and means of utilisation of the to Shri Jagdish Sagar IAS, then Administrator tuna waste need consideration. of the Union Territory of Lakshadweep. Our special thanks are due to Shri George Varghese, There are prospects for exploitation of a Director, Shri P. A. Raghavan, Asst. Director, number of ornamental fishes and some of the Shri C. G. Koya, Fisheries Officer and their ancillary resources in a limited way. But culture colleagues. Department of Fisheries, Laksha­ of some of these organisms in an organised dweep for their kind cooperation, making manner in the lagoons of some of the islands available their departmental boats and other will be worth trying, in view of the environmental services for executing the survey programme damages caused by man, effective steps are as per the schedule. underway to prevent further deterioration by legal measures and as well by creating greater REFERENCES awareness among the islanders. Steps to trans­ plant and rejuvenate corals in areas of mass ELLIS, R. H. 1924. A short account of the mortality of corals and construction of artificial Laccadive Island and Minicoy. Govt. reefs to attract a variety of reef fishes also have Press, Madras: iv-|-122 pp. to be undertaken. A continuous monitoring of JONES, S. 1986. Lakshadweep — General the resources and a close vigil on the resources features and some considerations. Mar. response to the management measures is a sine- Fish. Infer. Serv. T & £ Ser. 68 : 3-6 qua-non. Moreover, the overall approach and plans to ensure a fast and balanced growth of MANNADIAR, N. S. (ED.) 1977. Lakshadweep. the economy of islands should visualise to bring Gazetteer of India, Administration of to light the complexities of the various problems Union Territory of Lakshadweep, Kava- in the correct perspectives, so as to build up ratti., 375 p

8 CMFRI 2. HISTORY OF MARINE RESEARCH IN LAKSHADWEEP

p. S. B. R. James

INTRODUCTION some environmental parameters. With the reali­ sation of the importance and scope for further The Lakshadweep consisting of a number development, attention is now being paid to of islands, islets and submerged reefs lie scattered take stock of the marine living resources by in the vast Arabian sea on the west coast of India. proper survey to assess and monitor these This geographic isolation has been a major resources to postulate management measures. impediment to maintain status quo with the progress and developmental activities on the The present review is to document all mainland. Of recent, the stress has been to available information on marine research in achieve a conduce growth of the economy of the Lakshadweep. The paper highlights essential islanders so as to improve their standard of aspects concerning the marine biological, living. Besides agriculture the traditional source fisheries and oceanographic research carried out of livelihood of the islanders is fishing which in Lakshadweep. plays an important role in the economy. Since A historical resume of marine fisheries the land area is limited, the scope for large scale research in Lakshadweep has been given by development of land based industries and agri­ James eta/. (1986a). The marine biological culture is meagre, the future programmes have and fisheries research in this area dates back to to be centred on the exploitation of marine living the latter half of the 19th century when attempts resources. Ever since human settlement in these were made by some British naturalists to study islands a variety of marine living resources the flora and fauna of the Lakshadweep and available in the lagoons and in the surrounding Maldive Archipelagoes. The surgeon naturalist oceanic waters have been in different state of A. Alcock set sail on 17th October 1891 by exploitation, mostly in a primitive way. Signi­ R. M. S. Investigator and for two months cruised ficant strides have been made in the field of the Lakshadweep sea. Apart from a graphic fisheries thanks to the various developmental description of the islands Alcock (1894) gave activities carried out by the Department of an account of the deep sea fishes collected from Fisheries, Lakshadweep. The Central Marine the Lakshadweep sea. The Cambridge University Fisheries Research Institute also has played a Expedition under the leadership of Prof. J. key role in research, development and manage­ Stanley Gardiner was a significant event in the ment of the fisheries. Now, the various activities marine biological and oceanographic research in research, development and management are and the results were reported in two volumes of ajixious to break out of the introversion dis­ 'Fauna and Geography of the Maldive and played so far. Laccadive Archipelagoes (J. S. Gardiner (Ed.) 1903-1906). The atoll of Minicoy has been There is general consensus that the living described by Gardiner (1900). Later, Hornell resources in and around the islands hold great (1910) and Ayyangar (1922) described briefly potential for exploitation to a high magnitude. the tuna fishing methods in Lakshadweep. The But from a resource point of view the Laksha­ importance of the marine living resources and dweep archipelago was not surveyed or the need for judiciously,.exploiting them has investigated upon seriously till recently. Most been realised which resulted in the establishment of the studies made, so far, mainly centered of a Research Centre of Central Marine Fisheries around Minicoy. Information that is available Research Institute (CMFRI) and the Department on the living resources is confined to faunistic of Fisheries, Lakshadweep in 1958 and 1959 records, taxonomic studies, observations on the respectively. During the last three decades scientists of CMFRI, NIO and Fisheries Depart­ fishing craft and gear, accounts on the biology ment of Lakshadweep have furthered our of tunas and live-baits, natural history and lUlLETIN 43 9 knowledge on the environmental characteristics, R. V- Varuna in the sea around the islands have fishery resources, fishing methods and fishery been well documented by Silas (1968. 1969, biology of important tunas and live-bait fishes, 1972). corals, coral reefs and ancillary resources. ASSESSMENT OF FISHERY POTENTIAL

STUDIES ON ICHTHYOFAUNA Studies on the assessment of stock of tunas in the Lakshadweep and nearby seas were given Some of the early accounts on the ichthyo- priority in the research programmes of CMFRI in fauna are that of Alcock (1894, 1092) and view of the fact that the steady increase in the Alcock (1890,1892, 1898,1899, 1900). A note­ landings and decrease in mean length of yellow- worthy contribution towards the knowledge of fin tunas exploited by the Japanese tuna fishing the ichthyofauna was made by Balan (1958). He made a visit to the islands Agatti, Kavaratti, fleet. Recent development of the purse seine Amini and Kadmat in March 1954 and docu­ fishery in the western Indian Ocean with mented 80 species of fishes belonging to 65 reference to the repercussions on the stocks of genera. Later, Jones and Kumaran (1959) migratory skipjack tuna have been pointed out while describing the fishing industry of Minicoy by Jones (1986). The present estimate (1986) listed 154 species of fishes from the lagoon and of the total marine fish production in Laksha­ reef, many of which being new records. Jones dweep is 5535 tonnes of which tunas formed (1960a, 1960b, 1969), Jones and Kumaran 4807 tonnes. This figure is quite low compared (1967a, 1967b, 1967c, 1971), Jones er s/. to the reported potential of 90,000 tonnes (Jones (1969,1970) elaborated the list of ichthyofauna. and Banerji, 1973) around the Lakshadweep The publication of the 'Fishes of the Laccadive The skipjack tuna resource of this area has been Archipelago' by Jones and Kumaran (1980) estimated to be 50,000 tonnes (George et al., remains to be the most comprehensive account 1977). on the fish fauna of the Lakshadweep. They have documented 603 species of reef fishes and STUDIES ON TUNAS AND RELATED FISHES bathypelagic forms. Due consideration has There is a well-established traditional system been given to the systematics of commercially for the capture of tunas in Minicoy and some of important tunas and related fishes as well as the the other islands by the pole and line fishing common live-bait fishes. using live-baits. Scientific observations on the EXPLORATORY SURVEY craft and gear and fishing methods were initially carried out by the -erstwhile Madras Fisheries As early as 1928 experimental trawling in Department. Valuable observations on the fishing the seas around Lakshadweep was carried out tackles and tuna fishing industry in the islands by the erstwhile Madras Fisheries Department, are that of Hornell (1910), Ayyangar (1922), Ellis using Steam Trawler Lady Goschen (Sundara (1924), Mathew and Ramachandran (1956), Raj, 1930). The material collected from Basses Jones (1958, 1960a, 1960b, 1964a, 1964b), de Pedro Bank included quality perches such as Jones and Kumaran (1959), Varghese (1971), Lethrinus spp., Epinephelus spp. and Lutjanus Puthran and Pillai (1972), Ben-Yami (1980), spp. A variety of invertebrates also have been Silas and Pillai (1982, 1986), AM (1983), Koya collected. (1984), Madan Mohan et al. (1986), Nair A detailed account of the co-operative (1986), Silas et al. (1986a) and Livingston oceanographic cruises by R. V. Kalava is given (1987c, 1987d, 1987e). by Jones (1959c). Valuable information on the oceanographic conditions and the fishery Eversince the establishment of a Research resources of the seas around Lakshadweep was Centre in Minicoy, the CMFRI has undertaken collected during the cruises of this vessel. Larvaj studies on tunas and live-bait fishes. Aspects fishes such as Xiphias gladius, Istiophorus such as the fishery, length frequency distribution, g/adius, Katsuwonus pelamis, Euthynnus affinis age and growth, length-weight relationship, and Auxis sp. were collected (Jones, 1958a, maturity, spawning, food and feeding habits 1958c, 1959a, 1959b, 1959d, 1960c, 1963). and other biological characteristics of the yellow- The results of the exploratory surveys of fin and skipjack tunas have been studied by

10 CMFHI Raju (1961, 1963, 1964a, 1964b, 1964c), dellcatulus and 5. japonicus (Madan Mohan and Thomas (1964a. 1967), Thomas and Kumaran Koya, 1986c), Chromis caeruleus (Madan Mohan (1963), Appul

BULLETIN 43 11 of the fishery resources of Laccadive Archipelago The early studies on the primary production has been given by Jones (1968). Silas (1968) of tuna grounds of the Lakshadweep are by described the oceanic and demersal fishery Prasad and Nair (1964). The productivity of the resources of the Laccadive Sea. Problems, reefs has been estimated by Nair and Pillai prospects and developmental programmes in (1972). Qasim etal. (1972) made a compre­ fisheries sector, the need for diversification hensive study on the primary production of the of the fishing effort for exploiting various ambient waters and reefs of Kavaratti atoll. The resources have been pointed out by Varghese primary production of the seagrass beds of (1974), Haneefa Koya (1982), Kumaran and Kavaratti atoll has been determined by Qasim Gopakumar (1986), Varghese (1986, 1987a, and Bhattathiri (1971). Other major investigations 1987b). James (1987) and James et al. (1986b, on primary production of Lakshadweep waters 1987b). Silas and George (1970) have described are those of Bhattathiri and Devassy (1979) and the larval and post larval development and Qasim efa/. (1979). Nair er a/. (1986) briefly distribution of the mesopelagic fish Vinciguenia described the productivity of the seas around nimbaria. Lakshadweep.

Many of the reef fishes are colourful and The earliest work on zooplankton is that of attractive and have good demand for home Wolfenden (1906) on copepods. Studies on aquaria in different parts of the world. Cheap to zooplankton assemblages around some of the very expensive ornamental fishes offer scope northern islands have been studied by Jones for export on a limited scale and can be attempted (1959). Silas (1972) estimated the zooplankton vyith suitable arrangements for storage, trans­ biomass closer to the reefs of the islands during portation and marketing (Anon, 1985; Tomey, the cruises of R. V. Kalava. Based on the studies 1985, 1986; George era/., 1986; James, 1987 on the Deep Scatterihg Layer (DSL) closer to the and James e? a/., 1986b, 1987b). islands Silas (1972) suggested that the DSL constituted an important source of forage to the FISHERY ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES pelagic fishes. Tranter and Jacob (1972) made The Central Marine Fisheries Research Insti­ quantitative study of the zooplankton of Kavaratti tute was first to initiate detailed oceanographic and Kalpeni atolls. In spite of the importance of investigations on the environmental features of the zooplankton in the reef ecology, these this region. During the cruises of H.\/. Ka/ava organisms have received vary little attention. and R. V. Varuna a lot of information on the What little information available are due to the physical, chemical and biological parameters of works of Gardiner (Ed.) (1906), Wolfenden the marine environment and also some oceano­ (1906), Prasad and Tempi (1959), Goswamy graphic features such as currents, water masses, (1973,1979, 1983), Silas (1972), Tranter and upwelling etc. have been collected. The Jacob (1972), Madhu Pratapefa/. (1977), Nair importance of the waters in this region with and Rao (1973), Mathew (1982), Rengarajan their special ecological conditions have been (1983) and Silas and Mathew (1987). Qasim shown by Jones (1959c). The investigations of (1970) described some characteristics of a Ramasastry (1959) and Jayaraman et al. (1959) Trichodesmium bloom in the Laccadives. have revealed the existence of four distinct water masses in the Arabian Sea. The influence of the The importance of satellite imageries from nutrient rich Antarctic bottom water in the Landsat and Indian Remote Sensing Satellites Lakshadweep sea area was indicated by Prasad and ocean colour sensing from Coastal Zone (1951) and Jayaraman et al. (1960). Other Colour Scanner (CZCS) of NIMBlJS-7, which noteworthy contributions to the knowledge on can provide general level of productivity, details oceanographic features of this area are those of of water masses in the area and aggregation of Patil and Ramamirtham (1963). Rao and Jaya­ of fish schools, has been shown by Silas et al, raman (1966), Rao and Jayaraman (1970), (1985). Sankaranarayanan (1973), Rao etal. (1976), Sen MARINE INVERTEBRATE FAUNA Gupta era/. (1979) and Ramamirtham (1979). A brief account of the environmental features of The marine fauna and flora of Lakshadweep the sea around Lakshadweep has been given by islands are unique and diverse. The early Nair etal. (1986). information on the marine fauna are mostly

12 CMfRI based or> the various articles published in Marine Chemicals Research Institute. Ansari the two volumes of 'Funa and Geography (1980) observed the benthic micro and macro- of Maldives and Laccadive Archipelagoes' fauna of seagrass {Thalassia hempricheii) bed. (J.S.Gardiner (Ed.) 1903-1906). Results of Jagtap and Untwale (1984) gave an account of the detailed ecological survey of the marine the chemical composition of marine macro- fauna of the Minicoy atoll have been given by phytes, their surrounding water and sediment Nagabhushanam and Rao (1972). The studies from Minicoy. Untwale and Jagtap (1984) carried out on the marine fauna are mainly from described the marine microphytes of Minicoy. Minicoy which included foraminifera (Chapman 1895): Corals (Gardiner, 19C3b, 1906a, 1906b' Crustacea: The prawns and crabs are not fished 1906c; Cooper, 190Cb; Pillai, 1971a, 1971 b, in Lakshadweep, The brachyuran crabs and 1972, 1983a, 1983b, 1985,1986,1987), Sponges lobsters of Lakshadweep have baen studied by (Thomas, 1973, 1979, 1980a, 1980b); turbellaria Alcock (1895, 1896, 1898 1899, 190D) and (Faidlaw, 1903), Coelenterates (Borradaile, Borradaile (1903, 1906). Alcock reported 41 1906d; Browne, 1906a, 1906b; Mamman, 1963; species of crabs and Borradaile 52 species of Rengarajan, 1987), nemertines (Punnet, 1903a), crabs and two species of lobsters. Sankarankutty cephalochordata (Cooper, 1903; Punnet, 1903b), (1961) recorded 36 species out of which 27 enteropneusta (Punnet, 19C6), echiuroids were from Minicoy and the rest from some of (Shipley, 1903a), Sipunculoids (Shipley, the other islands. Meiyappan and Kathirvel 1903b), Stomatopods (Fanchester, 1903) crabs (1978) published some new records of crabs (Alcock, 1895, 1896, 1898, 1899, 1900; and lobsters from Minicoy. Pillai et al. (1985) Borradaile, 1903a, 1903b, 1903c, 1903d, 19C6a, recorded Panulirus versicolor from Minicoy and 1906b, 1906c; Sankarankutty, 1961), lobsters opined that this species is most common with a (Meiyappan and Kathirvel, 1978; Pillai etal. seasonal distribution pattern. According to 1984a), cirripedia (Borradaile, 1903c), amphi-, Meiyappan and Kathirvel (1978) P. Penicillatus poda (Walker, 1906), alphids (Coutiere, 1903, was the most common lobster in Minicoy in the 1905, 19C6), molluscs (Eliot, 1906; Hoyle, 1906; late seventies. Smith, 1906; Hornell, 1910; Buston, 1940; Mollusca: Early records on the molluscan fauna Appukuttan, 1973; Rao er«/., 1974; Namboodiri are that of Smith (1906) and Burton (1940). and Sivadas, 1979; Nair and Dharmaraja, 1983; Ajjpukuttan (1973) observed nine species of Panicker, 1978) and echinoderms (Bell, 1902; coral boring bivalves causing destruction to the Gardiner, 1803a; Buston, 1940; Sivadas, 1977; fringing reef of the islands, Appukuttan and Murty et al., 1970; Mukhopadhyay and Saniana, Pillai (MS) have listed 48 gastropods and 12 1983, James, 1966; Nagabhushanam and Rao, bivalves. Among the gastropods Top shells 1972; Daniel and Haldar. 1974 and Rao and (Trochidae), Spider conch (Strombidae), Cone Misra, 1983). shells (Conidae), Cowries (Cypraedae) and Helmet shells (Cassidae) are commercially ANCILLARY LIVING MARINE RESOURCES important and are exploited by the local fisher­ men. There are a number of ancillary living Sponges: Thomas (1973, i979, 1980a, 1980b) nrarine resources which include seaweeds, made observations on the sponge fauna and crustaceans, molluscs, sponges, echinoderms, reported 41 species including some shell boring reptiles such as turtles, birds etc. Informations forms from Minicoy. The common Indian bath on these resources are based on the faunistic sponge, Spongia »tficianalis has been observed observations on one time or intermittent collect­ in Minicoy. Many of the sponges are rich in ions by different workers. An account of the bromine and iodine. ancillary resources have been given by George etal. (1986). Echinodermata: A number of holothurians suitable for Bache-de-mer are available in the AJgae: The marine algal distribution is generally lagoons of the islands. Early observations by sparce and heterogenous. From a resource Gardiner (1903) recorded both surface living as assessment angle the marine algae have been well as large numbers of white variety living in surveyed (Anon, 1979) by Central Salt and the sand. Later, Burton (1940) observed several eUU^TIN 43 13 species of holothurians in every pool in Chetlat, is a coral paradise (Anon, 1984). Declaration Holothuria atro, H. scabra. Actinopyga mauri- of a few undisturbed and undamaged areas in tiana and A. echinites are most abundant the region as marine parks and reserves are species in Minicoy. James (MS) recorded ten necessary (James, 1987; James sr al, 1987b). species from Kiltan. Quantitative assessment This would have the advantage of not only of the resources has not been made and the preserving the nature but also providing excellent available information points out lesser chances tourist attraction. for large scale exploitation of this resource for POTENTIAL FOR MARICULTURE the Beche-de-mer industry. Limited experiments conducted in Bangaram Turtles and Birds: Bhaskar (1984) has reported lagoon for pearl oyster culture showed encoura­ four species of turtles which occur and nest in ging results. Further research will be required Lakshadweep. They are the hawksbill {Ereth- to study the technical feasibility and economic mochelys imbrlcata), the clive-ridley {Lebidech- viability before large-scale programmes can be e/ys olivacea), the green turtle (Ch0lonia mydas) introduced (Varghese, 1987a; James, 1987; and the leather-back {Dermoche/ys cor/area). James et al. 1986b). It may also be worthwhile The whole sand bank of Pitti island was to undertake investigations on the feasibility of found literally covered with young of two introducing aquaculture programmes suitable to species of terns (Alcock, 1902). The only the island conditions (James et al., 1986b). specific studies on birds are that of Betts (1938) James (1987) has pointed out the need for who reported 44 species including several shore undertaking culture of live-bait fishes. Experi­ and water birds such as plovers, terns, sand ments are underway in the Research Centre of pipers, shear waters, teals and herons. CMFRI at Minicoy. There exist amble scope for culture of finfishes in cages, seaweed culture, CONSERVATJON OF THE ECOSYSTEM creation of artificial reefs and sea-ranching of commercially important fishes as well as Conservation of the ecosystem and the holothurians. marine resources assumes paramount importance in any future plans for the development and as DEVELOPMENT AND MANAGEMENT well to the very existence of these islands. The The problems of Lakshaweep are varied and coral colonies which harbour a variety of flora peculiar by virtue of its geographic location, and fauna are prone to natural senescence. A density and variations of the marine living plethora of events both natural and man-made resources, developing suitable crafts and gears have been creating havoc to the ecosystem. as means of exploitation, meeting the require­ Indescriminate dredging and blasting of the ments of manpower including trained personnel, corals and sea erosion and the consequent making available the credit needed and providing siltation have resulted in the death of corals infrastructure facilities for fish processing, leading to imbalances in the reef ecosystem. transportation and marketing are some of the The details about the oil spill in the Kiltan from important aspects concerned with the develop­ oil tanker 'Transhuron' have been described by ment of marine fisheries (Jones, 1986; Sagar Qasim er al (1974). The lagoon environment 1986; James, 1987; James and Pillai, 1987; of Minicoy has undergone visible change in the James at. al., 1986b; James et. al. 1987b; last decade due to natural causes and human Silas and Pillai, 1986). interference (Pillai, 1983a, 1985, 1986). Possi­ ble threats to marine environment and ecology A wealth of information on the marine flora of Lakshadweep () have been and fauna are now available. Except for conti­ described by Sivadas (1987). The need for nuous monitoring of some of the important preserving these delicate ecosystems has been resources such as tunas, live baits, corals and pointed out by James (1987) and James at. al. seaweeds most of these studies on the flora and (1986b, 1987 b). The islands and the lagoons fauna are based on intermlttant observations at with the corals and a wide variety of flora and Minicoy and a few other islands by various fauna are beautiful' idyllic and exhillarating and authors from time to time. A realistic estimate

14 CMFRI of the various resources both quantitative and ALCOCK, A. W. 1900. Illustrations of the qualitative is essential for any future plans for zoology of the Royal Indian Marine development and the CIViFRI has conducted a Survey Ship, ''Investigator-', Fishes, short and time bound survey. This will remain Part VII, 4 to., Calcutta. as a bench mark for future surveys and develop­ mental programmes. The various teams have ALJ, D. M. 1983. Fish catching methods in collected information on various resources and Minicoy Island M. Sc. Thesis, C.I.F.E., Bombay (Unpub.). their potential, could identify problems and prospects of fisheries development and areas and ANON 1979. A report of survey of marine species for mariculture. Proper implementation algal resources of LakshadweepAQll- of the suggestions and recommendations, it is '79.,- Cent. Salt & Mar. Ch. Res. Insh hoped, would definitely give an uplift to the 48 pp. fisheries sector and finally the economy of the islanders. ANON 1984. The coral paradise. Planning REFERENCES Secretariat, Kavaratti, Govt. Press, Kavaratti: 51 pp. ALAGARAJA, K. 1987. An appraisal of the marine fisheries of Lakshadweep and ANON 1986. Report on the training mission Andaman and Nicobar Islands. CMFRt on ornamental fish export to the Nether­ Special Publication, 3 9: 18 pp. lands. Marine Products Eyiport Deve­ lopment Authority, Cochin: 24 pp. ALCOCK, A. 1894. An account of a recent collection of bathybial fishes from the ANSARI, Z, A. 1980. Benthic micro-and Bay of Bengal and from the Laccadive macrofauna of seagrass {Jhalassia sea. J. Asiat. Soc. Bang.. 63: 115-137, hemprlchii) bed at Minicoy, Laksha­ dweep. Indian J. Mar. Sci, 13 (3): ALCOCK, A. 1895-1900. Material for a carci- 126-127. nological fauna of India. Ibid, 64 (2); 157-291; 65 (2): 134-296; 67 (1): APPUKUTTAN, K. K. 1973. Distribution of coral 67-233; 68 (2) : 1-104,123-169; 69 boring bivalves along the Indian coasts. (2): 279-486. J. mar. biol. Ass. India. 15 (1): 429-432. ALCOCK, A. 1902. A. naturalist in Indian seas; or four years with the Royal APPUKUTTAN, K. K., P. N. RADHAKRISHNAN Indian l\/larine Survey Ship "Investiga­ NAIR AND K. K. KUNHIKOYA 1977. tor". John Murray, London: 328 pp. Studies on the fishery and growth rate of oceanic skipjack Katsuwonus palamis ALCOCK, A. W. 1890. On the bathybial fishes (Linnaeus) at Minicoy Islands from of the Arabian Sea obtained during the 1966-1969. fndianJ.F/sh., 24 {\&2) season 1889-1890. Ann. Mag. net- 33-47. Hist., (6) 6: 295-311.

ALCOCK. A. W. 1892. On the bathybial fishes AYYANGAR, S. R. 1922. Notes on the fauna collected'during the season, 1891- '92. and fishing industries of the Laccadives. Ibid, (6) 10: 345-365. Madras Fish Bull., IB: 45-69

ALCOCK, A, W. 1898. A note on the deep-sea BALAN, V. 1958. Notes on a visit to certain fishes, with descriptions of some new islands of the Laccadive Archipelago, genera and species, including another with special reference to fisheries, J. probably viviparous Ophidioid, Ibid., Bompay nat. Hist. Soc, 55 (2): (7) 2: 136-156. 297-306.

ALCOCK, A. W. 1899. A descriptive catalogue BELL, F.J. 1902. The actinogonidiate achino- of the deep.sea fishes in the Indian donidiate echinoderms of the Maldive Museum collected by the Royal Indian and Laccadive islands. In: J. S. Marine Survey Ship, "Investigator" Gardiner (E. d.) Tha Fauna and Calcutta: 1-222. Geography of the Malidive and

BULLETIN 43 15 Laccadive Archipelagoes. i: 223-233, BROWNE, E. T. 1906a. Scyphomedusae, with Cambridge Univ. Press. Cambridge. a revision of the Williadaeand Petasidae. Ibid: 722-749. BEN-YAMI, M. 1980. Tuna fishing with pole and line. FAO Fishing Mannual 150 BROWNE, E. T. 1906b. Scyphomedusae./6/V/ pp., Fishing News Books Ltd., England. 958-971.

BETTS, F. N. 1938. The birds of the Laccadive BURTON, R. W. 1940. A visit to the islands. J. Bombay nat. Hist. Soc,, 40 Laccadive Islands, J. Bombay nat. Hist. (3): 382-387. Soc, 41 (3): 489-513.

BHASKAR, S. 1984. The distribution and CHAPMAN, F. C. 1895. On some Foraminifera status of sea turtles in India. Proc. obtained by the Royal Indian Marine Workshop on Sea Turtle Conservation. Survey's S. S. Investigator from the 27-29 Feb., 1984, Madras: 22-35. Arabian Sea near the Laccadive Islands. Proc. Zool. Soc. London 4-55. BHATTATHIRI, P. M. AND V. P. DEVASSY 1979. Biological characteristics of the COOPER, C. F. 1903. Cephalochorde. I. Syste­ Laccadive Sea. In: The Laccadive Sea matic and anatomical account.//?: J. S. {Lakshadweep), NIO Technical Reports: GardineA (Ed.), The Fauna ana 182 pp. Geography of the Maidive and Laccadive Archipelagoes 1: 347-360, Cambri­ BORRADAILE, L. A. 1903a. Marine crustaceans. dge Univ. Press, Cambridge. II. Portunidae. In: J. S. Gardiner, (Ed.). The Fauna and Gecgrephy of the COOPER, C. F. 1906. Antipatharia. Ibid: 2: Maldive and Laccadive Archipelagoes, 791-796. l: 196-208, Cambridge Univ. Press., COUTIERE, H, 1903. Note sur quelques Cambridge, Alpheidae des Maldives at Laquedives. BORRADAILE, L. A. 1903b. Marine crustaceans. Bulletin de la Societe Philomathique de III. The Xanthidae and some other Paris. 9 (5): 72-90 crabs. Ibid: 237-291. COUTIERE, H, 1905. Sur les Alpheidae des BORRADAILE, L A. 1903c. Marine crustaceans. Laquedives et des Maldives. Competes V. The crabs of the Catometope Rendus hedomedaires des Seances de families. Ibid.: 429-433. I 'Academic des Sciences', 140: 1ZQ-12Q. BORRADAILE, L. A. 1903d. Marine crusta­ ceans. VI. The sand crabs (Oxystomata) COUTIERE, 1906. Les Alpheidae. In: J. S. Ibid: 434-439. Gardiner (Ed.), The Fauna and Geogra­ phy of the Maldive and Laccadive BORRADAILE, L.A. 1903e. Marine crustaceans. Archipelagoes. 2: 852-921, Cambridge VII. The barnacles (Cirripedia). Ibid: Univ. Press, Cambridge. 440-443. DANIEL, A. AND B. P. HALDAR 1974. BORRADAILE, L. A. 1906a. Marine crustace­ Holothuroidea of the Indian Ocean with ans. IX. The sponge crabs (Dromiacea). remarks on their distribution. J. mar. Ibid., 2: 574-578. biol. Ass. India., 16: {2): 412-436. BORRADAILE, L.A. 1906 b. Marine crustace­ ELLIS, R. H. 1924. A short account of the ans. X. ThespidercrabsfOxyrhyncha). Laccadive Isladds and Minicoy. Govt, Ibid: 681-690. Press, Madras: iv -i-122 pp. BORRADAILE. L.A. 1906c, Marine crustace­ ELIOT, C. 1906. Nudibranchiata, with some ans. XIII. The Hippidae, Thalassinidea remarks on the families and genera and and Scyllaridea. Ibid: 750-754, description of a new , Doridomor- BORRADAILE, L. A. 1906d. Hydroids. Ibid: pha. In: J. S. Gardiner (Ed.), The 836-845. Fauna and Geography of the Maldive

16 CMfRI and LaccadivB Archipelagots, 2: GOSWAMY, S. C. 1973. Observations on some 540-573. Cambridge Univ. Press- planktonic groups of Kavaratti Atoll Cambridge. (Laccadives). Indian nat Sci. Acad., 391 (6): 676-686. ELLIOT, H. F. J. 1972. Island ecosystems and conservation with particular refere- GOSWAMY, S. C. 1979. Zooplankton studies ence for the biological significance of in the Laccadive Sea (Lakshadweep). islands of the Indian Ocean and NIO Tech. Rept, 180 pp consequential research and conservation needs. J. mar. blol. Ass India. 14 GOSWAMY, S. C. 1983. Production and (2): 578-608. zooplankton community structure in the lagoon and surrounding sea at Kavaratti GARDINER, J. S. 1900. The atoll of Minicoy Atoll (Lakshadweep). Indian J. Mar. Proc. Camp. Pfjiii. Soc. blol. Sci, 11 Sci., 12-: 31-34. (1) 22-26. HANEEFAKOYA, C. L. 1982. Ray Fishing of GARDINER, J. S. 1903a. Introduction. In: the Kalpenl Island of the Lakshadweep J. S. Gardiner (Ed.), The Fauna and group of islands. M. Sc. Thesis, C.I.F.E., Geography of the Maldive and Lacca- Bombay. (Unpub). dive Archipelagoes, 1: 1-11, Cambridge Univ. Press, Cambridge. HORN ELL, J. 1910. Report on the results of GARDINER, J. S. ig03b. The Maldive and the fishery cruise along the Malabar Laccadive groups with notes on other coast and the Laccadive Islands in 1908 coral formations in the Indian Ocean. Madras Fish. Bull, 4: 71-126. Ibid: 12-50, 146-183, 313-346, 376-423. HOYLE, W. E. 1906, Cephalopoda. In: J. S. Gardiner (Ed.), The Fauna and Geo­ GARDINER, J. S. 1906a- Madreporaria. I-IV graphy of the Maldive and Laccadive Introduction with notes on variation; II. Archipelagoes, 2: 975-988, Cambridge Astraeidae, 754-790; III. Fungidae; IV. Univ. Press, Cambridge, Turbinoiidae, 933-957. Ibid. JAGTAP, T. G.AND A. G. UNTAWALE 1984. GARDINER, J. S. 1906b. Lagoon deposits. Chemical composition of marine macro- Ibid., 2'. 581-583. phytes and their surrounding water and sediment from Minicoy, Lakshadweep. GARDINER, J. S. 1906c. Notes on the dis- Indian. J. Mar. Sci 13 (3): 123-125. striburion of the land and marine with a list of the coral reefs. JAMES, D. B. 1969. Catalogue of echinoderms Ibid., 1046-1057. in the reference collections of the Central Msrine Fisheries Research GEORGE K. C, P. A. THOMAS, K. K. APPU- Institute. Bull. Sent. Mar. Fish. Res. KUTTAN AND G. GOPAKUMAR 1986. Ancillary living marine resources of Inst. No. 7: 51-62. Lakshadweep, Mar. Fish. Infor. serv. JAMES, P. S. B. R. 1987. Recent observations TaESer.,68: 45-50. on marine fisheries resources of GEORGE, P. C, B. T. ANTONY RAJA AND Lakshadweep. The First Indian Fisheiries K, C. GEORGE 1977. Fishery resources Forum. College of Fisheries, Mangalore. of the Indian Economic Zone. Silver Abstract No. 159. Jubilee Souvenir, IFF: 70-116. JAMES, P. S. B. R. and P. P. Pillai 1987. GOPAKUMAR, G. AND P. P. PILLAI 1988. Strategies for tuna fisheries develop­ Population charscteristics of tuna ment and management in the Indian live-baits in the Lakshadeewp. Symp. Exclusive Economic Zone. CMFRI Tropical Marine Living Resources hAar. Special Publ., 40 Abstract No. 113, Biol. Ass. India, Abstract 210 p. 85.

BULLETIN 43 17 JAMES, P. S. B. R., C. S. GOPINADHA JONES, S. 1958 b. Tuna live bait fishery of PILLAI, P. LIVINGSTON, P. P. PILLAl, Minicoy Island. Ibid., 5 (2): 300-307. AND MADAN MOHAN 1986a. Marine fisheries Research in Lakshadweep—A JONES, S. 1958c. Notes on eggs, larvae and historical resume. Mar Fish. Infor. Serv. juveniles of fishes from Indian waters. TBE Set.. 68: 7-9. I- Xiphias giadius Linnaeus. Ibid, 5 (2): 357-361. JAMES, P. S. B. R., T. JACOB, C. S. GOPI­ NADHA PILLAI AND P. P. PILLAI. JONES. S. 1959 a. Notes on eggs, larvae and 1986b. Prospects of development of iuveniles of fishes from Indian waters. marine fisheries resources in Laksha­ Istiophorus giadius (Broussonet). Ibid., dweep. Mar. Fish. Infor. Serv. T&E. 6 (1): 204-210. Ser., 68: 51-54. JONES, S. 1959 b. Notes on eggs, larvae and JAMES, P. S. B. R. M. SRINATH AND A. A. juveniles of fishes from Indian waters. JAYAPRAKASH 1986c. Stock Assess­ III. Katsuwonuspelamis(Linnaeus) and ment of tunas in the seas around India. IV Neothunnus macropterus Temminck Worthing Paper presented at the Second and Schlegel). Ibid., 6 (2): 360-373. Expert Consultation on the Stock Assessment of Tunas in the Indian. JONES, S. 1959 c. Research vessel Kalava Ocean. Colombo, Sri Lanka, IPTP/FAO, and Co-operative Oceanographic Inves­ 16 pp. tigations in Indian waters. J. mar. biol. Ass. India, 1 (1): 1-6. JAMES, P. S. B. R.. G. GOPAKUMAR AND P. P. PILLAI 1987 a. Small-scale pole JONES, S. 1959d. On a juvenile sailfish and line tuna fishery in Lakshadeep - Istiophorus giadius (Broussonet) from present trend, constraints and strategies the Laccadive Sea. ibid., 1: 225. for future developments. Mar. Fish. Infor. Serv. T& E Ser.. No. 77: 1-10. JONES, S. 1960a. Spratelloldes delicatulus (Bennett) as a potential live-bait for JAMES, P. S. B.R., PP. PILLAI AND A. A. tuna in the Laccadives. J. mar. biol. JAYAPRAKASH 1987 b. Impressions Ass. India. 2 (1): 103- 04. of a recent visit to Lakshadeep from the fisheries and marines •biolbgkal pers­ JONES, S. 1960b. Further notes on Spra­ pectives. Mar. Fish. Infor. Serv. T & E telloldes delicatulus (Bennett) as a Ser. 72: 1-11. tuna live-bait fish with a record of S. japonicus (Houttuyn) from the JAYARAMAN, R., C. P. RAMAMIRTHAM AND Laccadive Sea. Ibid., 2 (2): 267-268. K. V. SUNDARARAMAN 1959. The vertical distribution of dissolved oxygen JONES, S. 1960c. Notas on eggs, larvae and in the deeper waters of the Arabian Sea juveniles of fishes from Indian waters. in the neighbourhood of the Laccadives V. Euthynnus affinis (Cantor). Indian during the summer, 1959, J. mar. bio., J. Fish., 7 (1): 101-106. Ass. India,- 2 [1): 24-34. JONES, S. 1961a. Spratelloldes delicatulus JAYARAMAN, R., C P. RAMAMIRTHAM, (Bennett) as a potential live bait for K. V. SUNDPARAMAN AND C. P. ARA- tuna In the Laccadives. J. mar. biol. VINDAKSHAN NAIR 1960. Hydro­ Ass. India 2 (1): 103-104. graphy of the Laccadive offshore waters. Ibid., 2 (I): 24.35. JONES, S. 1961b. Further notes on Spra- ,. telloides delicatulus (Bennett) as a JONES, S. U58 a. Notts ; on the frigate '« *'tunar'Ffve *i»baHj with a record of mackerels Auxis thazard (Lacepede) S.I japonicus' (Houttuyn) from the and A. tapelnosorna Bleekftir4r,Qm Indian t Laccadive Sep. Indian , J. Fish., waters. Indian J. Fish., 5 (1): 189-194. 2 (2): 267-268. ,

18 CMFRl JONES, S. 1963. Notes on eggs, larvae and J. Fish.. ^^ (1) A: 232-246. Also juveniles of fishes from Indian waters. Adv Abstr. Contr. Fish. Aquat. Sci. XI.. Further observations on the genus India, 1:1. Auxis Cuvier. //>/£/., 8 (2): 413-421. JONES, S. AND M. KUMARAN 1967c. New JONES, S. 1964a. A preliminary survey of records of fishes from the seas around the common tuna bait fishes of Minicoy India. Pt. IV. J. mar. biol. Ass. India, and their distribution in the Laccadive 8 (1); 163-280. Archipelago. Proc Symp. Scomb. fishes. l\/lar. Biof Ass India, IVIandapam JONES, S. AND M. KUMARAN 1971. Camp, a: 643-680. Biogeography of the ichthyofauna of the Laccadive Archipelago. Symp. JONES, S. 1964 b. On the introduction of Indian Ocean and adjacent seas. Mar. Tilapia mossambica (Peters) as a tuna Biol. Ass. India, Cochin, Abstracts: 128. live bait in the island of IViinicoy in the Indian Ocean. Ibid: QS^-Qdl- JONES, S. AND M. KUMARAN 1980. Fishes of the Laccadive Archipelago. Nature JONES, S. 1968. The fishery resources of the Conservation and Aquatic Sciences Laccadive Archipelago. Proc Symp. Service, Trivandrum: 760 pp. Living resources of the seas around India. Cent. Mar. Fish. Res. Inst, JONES, S., M. KUMARAN AND M. ALI Cochin, Abstracts: 10 (1968). MANIKFAN 1970. The ichthyofauna JONES, S. 1969. Catalogue of fishes from the of the intertidal zone in the atolls of the Laccadive Archipelago in the reference Laccadive Archipelago. Symp. Marine collections of the CMFR Institute. Bull Intertidal Ecology, Andhra University, Cent. Mar. Fish. Res Inst., 8: 1 -32. Waltair, Abstracts: 7.

JONES, S. 1986. Lal

JONES, S. AND iVl. KUMARAN 1959. The KUMARAN, M. AND G. GOPAKUMAR 1986. fishing industry of Minicoy Island with Potential resources of fishes other than special reference to the tuna fishery. tuna in Lakshadweep. Mar. Fish. Indian J. Fish., 6 (1): 30-54. Infor. Serv. T& E Ser., 98: 41-45. JONES, S. AND M. KUMARAN 1967a. New LAIDLAW, F. F. 1903. The marine Turbellaria, records of fishes from the seas around with an account of the anatomy of India. Pt. III. J. mar. biol. Ass. India, some of the species. In: J. S. Gardiner 7 (2): 381-400. (Ed.). The Fauna and Geography of the JONES, S. AND M. KUMARAN 1967b. Notes Maldive and Laccadive Archipelagoes, on eggs, larve and juveniles of fishes l: 282-312, Cambridge Uni. Press, from Indian. v*aters.VV"^XiV Pegasus Cambridge. volitans Linnaeus, XV. Dactyloptena ,. r..-,. : , ..'•,>> orientalls ' {Cuw'tet and Valenciennes) LANCHESTifl„W.tf.»1903. IVfarine crustaceans. and XVI. Dactyloptena orientalis (Cuvier VIII. Stomatopoda, with an account of and Valenciennes) and XVI. Dacty­ the varieties of Gonodactylus chlragra. loptena macracanthus (Bleeker) Indian Ibid., r. ^A-AbQ.

BUtiCnN43 19 LIVINGSTON, P. 1987a. Detection of tuna MADHUPRATAP, M.. M. V. M. WAFAR, shoals from observations on sea birds P. HARIDAS, B. NARAYANAN, P. in the sl

LIVINGSTON, P. 1987d. Pole and line tuna MATHEW, K. J. 1982. Distribution, ecology fishing techniques—a comparative study and biology of Euphausiacea of the with reference to Lakshadweep Indian seas. Thesis submitted to the fisheries, ibid, Abstract 80, 69-70. Univ. of Kerala, 397 pp. (unpub.).

LIVINGSTON, P. 1987 e. Pole and line gear MATHEW, M.J. AND T. B. RAMACHANDRAN making industry of Lakshadweep. Ibid., 1956. Notes on a survey of the fishing Abstract 81, p. 70. industry of Laccadive and Amindivi Islands. Fisheries Station Reports and MAD AN MOHAN 1986. Observations on the Year Book 1954-55. Govt. Press. tuna shoals associated with flotsam in Madras', MAZl. the offshore waters of Minicoy Island during 1982-'83 season. Bull. Cent. MEIYAPPAN, M. M. AND M. KATHIRVEL 1978. Mar. Fish. Res. Inst., 36: 196-200. On some new records of crabs and lobsters from Minicoy, Lakshadweep MADAN MOHAN AND K. K. KUNHIKOYA (Laccadives). J. mar. biol. Ass. India, 1986a. Length-weight relationship of 20 (1 &2); 116-119. skipjack Katsuwonus peiamis and yeliowfin tuna Tfiunnus albacares from MUKHOPADHYAY, S. K. AND SAMANTA, T. K. Minicoy waters. /6/

MADAN MOHAN, P. LIVINGSTON AND MUTHUKOYA, M. C. 1978. Problems and K. K. KUNHIKOYA 1986a. Fishery and prospects of fisheries development in bionomics of tunas at Minicoy Island. Lakshadweep. M. Sc. Thesis, C. I. F, E., ibid., 36: 122-137. Bombay, 82 pp (Unpub.)

MADAN MOHAN, C. S. GOPINADHA PILLAI NAGABHUSHANAM, A. K. AND G. C. RAO AND K. K. KUNHIKOYA 1986 b. The 1972. An ecological survey of the biology of the blue-puller Chromis marine fauna of the Minicoy Atoll caeruleus (Pomacentridae; Pisces) from (Laccadive Archipelago, Arabian Sea). Minicoy Atoll. Indian J. fish 33 (4): Mitt. Zool. Mus. Berl., 48 (2): 457-470. 265-324,

20 PMPRI NAIR, K. S. 1986. Fisheries development in PILLAI, C. S. GOPINADHA. 1971 b. Composition Lakshadweep. Fishing Ctiimes, 6 (2): of the coral fauna of the southern coast 20-25. of India and the Laccadives. In: Regional Variatian in Indian Ocean NAIR, N. BALAKRISHNAN AND K. DHARMA- Coral Reefs. C. iVI. Yonge and D. R. RAJ. 1983. Marine wood boring Stoddart (Ed.). Symp. Zool. Soc. Lond., molluscs of the Lakshadweep Archi­ 28: 301 -327. Academic Press. pelago. Indian J. l\/lar. Sci., 12, (2): 96-99. PILLAI, C. S. GOPINADHA. 1972. Stony corals NAIR, P. V. R. AND C. S. GOPINADHA PILLAI. of the seas around India. Proc. Symp. 1972. Primary productivity of some Corals and coral reefs. Mar. Biol. coral reefs in the Indian seas. Proc. Ass. India: 191-216. Symp. Corals and Coral Reefs. Mar. Biol. Ass. India: 33-42. PILLAI, C. S. GOPINADHA. 1983 a. The en­ dangered marine and terrestrial habitats NAIR, P. V. R„ A. V. 8. MURTHY, C. P. RAMA- of Minicoy Atoll in Lakshadweep. Proc. MIRTHAM, D. S. RAO AND V. K. Seminar, World Conservation Deve­ PILLAI. 1986. Environmental features loping Countries, Bombay nat. Hist, in the sea around Lakshadweep. Mar. Soc. (in press). Fish. Infor. Serv. T & E Ser., 68: 10-13. PILLAI, C. S. GOPINADHA. 1983 b. Structure NAIR, P. V. R„ G. SUBBARAJU, K.J. MATHEW, and generic diversity of recent scleract- V. K. PILLAI AND V. K. BALA- inia of India. J, mar. biol. Ass. India, CHANDRAN. 1986. Productivity of the 25: (1 & 2) : 78-90. seas around Lakshadweep. Ibid. 68: 13-15. PILLAI, C,S. GOPINADHA. 1985- Ecological crisis in coastal and marine habitats. NAIR, V. R. AND T. S. S. RAO. 1973. Chaeto- In: Indies's Environment • Crisis and gnaths from the Laccadives with the Responses. Nataraj Publications, Oe- new record of S padella angulata hradun: 120-130. (Tokioka, 1951) In: The Biology of Indian Ocean, Bernt Zeitschel (Ed.) PILLAI, C. S. GOPINADHA. 1986. Status of 319-327, Springer-Verlag, New York. coral reefs in Lakshadweep. Mar. Fish. Infor. Serv. T aESer., 68: 38-41. NAMBOODIRI, P. N. AND P. SIVADAS. 1979, Zonation of molluscan assemblage at PILLAI. C. S. GOPINADHA AND MADAN Kavaratti Atoll (Laccadives). Mahasagar, MOHAN. 1986. Ecological stress in 12 (4): 239-246. Minicoy lagoon and its impact on tuna baits. Mar. Fish. Infor. Serv. T & E Ser., PANICKER, K. C. 1978. Marine gastropod 68: 33-37. shells of Lakshadweep. M. Sc. Thesis^ C. I. F. E., Bombay (Unpub.). PILLAI, C. S. GOPINADHA, MADAN MOHAN AND K. K. KUNHIKOYA. 1984 a. Ob­ PAUL, M. R. AND C.P. RAMAMIRTHAM. 1963. servations on the lobsters of Minicoy Hydrography of Laccadive offshore Atoll. Indian J. Fish., 3o (2): 112-122. waters. A study of the winter conditions. . J mar. blol. Ass. India, PILLAI, C. S. GOPINADHA, MADAN MOHAN 6 (2): 159-169, AND K. K. KUNHIKOYA. 1984 b. On an unusual massive recruitment of the PJLLAI.C.S. GOPINADHA. 1971 a. Distribution reef fish Ctenochaetus strigosus (Be­ of shallow-water stony corals at nnett) (Perciformis: ) to Minicoy Atoll in the Indian ocean. the Minicoy Atoil and its significance. Atoll. Res. Bull.. Wash.. 141:1-12. Ibid: 261-268.

BULLETIN 43 21 PILLAI, C. S. GOPINADHA, MADAN IVIOHAN QASIM, S. Z., P. N. R. NAIR AND P. SIVADAS. AND K. K. KUNHIKOYA. 1986 Fun­ 1974. Oil spill in the Laccadives from ctional Mechanism of co-existence in the oil tanker Transhuroon'. Mahasagar, chromis caeruleus and Dascyllus aru- 7 (^ & 2): 83-91. anus (Pomacentridae: Pisces), /bid. (in press). QASIM, S. Z, er. a/. 1979. Energy pathways in the Laccadive Sea (Lakshadweep). PILLAI, P. P., M. KUMARAN, C. S. G. PILLAI, Indian J. Mar. Sci.. 8 : 242-246. MADAN MOHAN, G. GOPAKUMAR, P. LIVINGSTON AND M. SRINATH. QASIM, S. Z AND V. SANKARANARAYANAN. 1986. Exploited and potential resources 1980. Production of particulate organic of live-bait fishes of Lakshadweep. matter by the reef on Kavaratti Atoll Mar. Fish, in for. Serv T & E Ser., 68: (Laccadives). Limnol. Oceanogr., 15: 25-32. 574-578.

PRASAD R. REGHU. 1951. Geographic and RAJU, G. 1961. A case of hermaphroditism climatic features of India and hydrology and some other conadial abnormalities of the surrounding seas. Handbooli on in the skipjack Katsuwonus pelamis Indian Fisheries, (GoxJ. of India, Mini­ (Linnaeus). J. mar. biol.Ass. India, 2 stry of Agriculture): 57-59. (1) : 95-102. PRASAD, R. REGHU AND P. V. R.NAIR. 1964. RAJU, G. 1963. Spawning of the oceanic Preliminary observations on the pro­ skipjack Katsuwonuspeiemis (Linnaeus) ductivity of certain tuna waters of the in the Laccadive Sea. FAO Fish Rep., west coast of India. Proc. Symp. Sco- (6) 3: 1669-1682. mb. Fishes, Pt. II: 794-797. Mar. Biol. Ass. India. SAJU. G. 1964 a. Studies on the spawning of PRASAD, R. REGHU AND.P. R. S. TAMPI. 1959. the oceanic skipjack Katsuwonus pe­ On a collection of palinurid phylloso- lamis (Linnaeus) in Lakshadweep mas from the Laccadive seas. J. mar. waters. Proc. Symp. Scomb. Fishes. blol Ass. India, l (2): 143-164. Mar. Biol. Ass. India, 1 : 744-768.

PUNNET, R. C. 1903a. Nemertines, In: J. S. RAJU, G. 1964 b. Observations on the food Gardiner (Ed.), The Fauna and Geogra­ and feeding habits of the oceanic phy of Maldive and Laccadiva Archipe­ skipjack Katsuwonus pelamis (Linn.) lagoes, 1 : 101-118, Cambridge Univ. of the Lakshadweep Sea during the Press, Cambridge, years 1958-'59. Ibid., 1 : 607-630. PUNNET, R. C. 1903 b. Cephalochorda. II. Notes RAJU, G. 1964 c. Fecundity of the oceanic on meristic variation in the group. Ibid.i skipjack Katsuwonus pelamis (Linna­ 361-367. eus) of Minicoy. Ibid., 2 : 725-732. PUNNET, R. C. 1906. The enteropneusfa. Ibid., 2:631-680. RAMASASTRY, A. A. 1959. Water masses and the frequency of seawater characteris­ QASIM,S. Z. 1970. Some characteristics of a tics in the upper layers in the south­ Trichodesmlum bloom in the Laccadives. eastern Arabian Sea. J. mar. biol. Ass. Deep Sea Res., 17: 655-660, India, 1 (2) : 233-246. QASIM, S. Z. AND P. M. A. BHATTATHIRI. RAO, G. C. AND A. MISRA. 1983. Meiofauna 1971. Primary productivity of a seagrass from Lakshadweep, Indian Ocean. Cah. bed on Kavaratti Atoll (Laccadives) Biol. Mar., 24 : 51-68. Hydroblol,, 38: 29-38. QASIM,S. Z., P. M.A. BHATTATHIRI AND C. RAO, GANGADHARA, L V. AND R JAYARA- V. G. REDDY. 1972. Primary production MAN. 1966, Upwelling in the Minicoy of an atoll in the Laccadives. Int. Ra­ region of the Arabian Sea. Curr. Sci., ves. Ges. Hydrobiol., 57 (2); 207-225. 3B (15) : 378-380.

22 CMFRI RAO, PANAKALA, D. AND R. JAYARAMAN. SHILPLEY, A. E. 1903 b. Sipunculoidea with 1970. On occurrence of oxygen maxima an account of a new genus Lithacrosip. and minima in the upper 500 metres of hon. Ibid: 131-140. the north-western Indian Ocean. Proc, Indian Acad. Sci., 71 (6) B : 230-246. SILAS, E. G. 1968. Oceanic and demersal fishery resources of the west coast of RAO, PANAKALA, D., R. V. S. SARME, J. S. India and the Laccadive Sea based on SASTRYAND K. PREMCHAND. 1976. exploratory fishing from R. V. Varuna. On the lowering of the surface tempe­ Symp. Living resources of the seas ratures in the Arabian Sea with the around India. Cent. Mar. Fish. Res. advance of the south west monsoon season. Proc. 11th Symp. on Tropical Inst., Cochin, Abstracts: 8-9. Monsoons, Pune, India. SILAS, E. G. 1969. Exploratory fishing by R.V. RAO, K. VIRABHADRA, P. SIVADAS AND L 'Varuna'. Bull. Cent. Mar. Fish. Res. KRISHNAKUMARY. 1974. Onthree rare Inst; 12: 1-86. doridigorm nudibranch molluscs from islands. J. mar. biol. Ass. India, 16 SILAS, E. G 1972. Investigations on the deep (1): 113-125. scattering layers in the Laccadive Sea. In : Proc. Symp. corals and coral Reefs.' RENGARAJAN, K. 1983. Quantitative and 1969. Mar. Biol. Ass. India: 257-274. seasonal abundance of Siphonophores along the southwest coast of India and SILAS, E. G. AND K. C. GEORGE 1970. On the the Laccadive Sea. Ibid, 25 (1 & 2): larval and postlarval development and 17-40. distribution of the mesopelagic fish Vinciguerria nimbaria (Jordan and SAGAR, J, 1986, The future of Lakshadweep. Williams) Family Gonostomatidae) off Paper presented at the Futurology the west coast of India and the Lacca­ workshop for identifying science and dive Sea. J. mar. biol. Ass. India, %^ technology inputs to develop a long range perspective plan for the socio­ (1 &2) : 218-250. economic development of Lakshadweep for the period 1985 to 2005, R.R.L., SILAS, E. G. AND P. P. PILLA 1982. Resources Trivandrum, 21-23, July 1986, 15 pp. of tunas and related species and their fisheries in the Indian Ocean. Bull. SANKARANARAYANAN, V. N. 1973. Chemical Cent. Mar. Fish. Res. Inst., 32 : 1-174. characteristics of waters around Kava- ratti Atoll (Laccadives). Indian J. Mar. SILAS, E. G. AND P. P. PILLAI 1986. Indian Sci., 2 : 23-26. tuna fisheries- development, prospec- tives and management plan. In: Tuna SAAKARANKUTTY, C 1961. On some crabs Fisheries of the Exclusive Economic (Decapoda - Brachyura) from the La­ Zone of India, E.G.Silas (Ed.), Bull. ccadive Archipelago. J. mar. biol. Ass. India, 3 (1 & 2): 121-150. Cent. Mar. Fish. Res. Inst., 36:231- 248. SEN GUPTA. R., CAROLINE MORAES, T. N. KUREISHY, V. N. SANKARANARAYA­ SILAS, E. G. AND K. J, MATHEW 1987. Spatial NAN, T. K. JANA, S. W. A. NAQVI AND distribution of Euphauiacea (Crustacea) M. D, RAJAGOPAL 1979. Chemical in the southeast Arabian Sea. J. mar. oceanography of Arabian Sea. Part. IV- biol. Ass. India, (in press). Laccadive Sea. Indian J. Mar. Sci., 8- SILAS, E. G., P. V. R. NAIR, P. P. PILLAI, G. 215-221. SUBBARAJU, V. K. PILLAI AND V. K. SHILPLEY, A. E. 1903 a. Echiuroidea, In: J. S. BALACHANDRAN 1985. Biological Gardiner (Ed.), The Fauna and Geogra­ productivity of the Indian Ocean. Proc. phy of the Maldive and Laccadive Seminar on Remote Sensing in Marine Archipelagoes, 1 :127-130. Cambridge Resources. Cent. Mar. Fish. Res. Inst., Univ. Press, Cambridge. Cochin: 1-3.

BUUETIN 43 23 SILAS, E.G., K.V.N. RAO, P. P. PILLAI, MA- THOMAS. P. T. 1964 b. A study on the flu­ DAN MOHAN, G. GOPAKUMAR, P. ctuations in the occurrence of the LIVINGSTON AND M. SRINATH 1986a. major tuna live-bait fishes of Minicoy. Exploited and potential resources of //>/(/: 681-690. tunas of Lakshadweep. Mar. Fish. Infor. Serv. T a E Ser., 68 : 15-25. THOMAS, P. T. 1967. Size composition of the oceanic skipjack Katsuwonus pelamis SILAS, E. G., P. P. PILLAI, M. SRINATH, A. A. (Linnaeus) and the yellowfin tuna JAYAPRAKASH, C. MUTHIAH, V. Neothunnus macropterus Temminck BALAN, T. M, YOHANNAN, PON and Schlegel) from the Laccadive seas SIRAIMEETAN, MADAN MOHAN, P. around Minicoy during the season LIVINGSTON, K. K. KUNHIKOYA, M. ^960-'6^. Ibid.. Pt. 3: 1146-1153. AYYAPPAN PILLAI AND P. SADASIVA SARMA. 1986 b. Pppulation dynamics THOMAS, P.T. AND M. KUMARAN. 1963. Food, of Indian tunas. FAO Fish. Fep., 63: of tunas : Stock assessment. Bu//. Cent. 1667. Mar. Fish. Res. Inst., 36 : 20-27. THOMAS, P. T. AND G. RAJU. 1964. Gonadial SIVADAS, P. 1977. Report on the occurrence abnormalities in scombroid fishes. Proc. of Acanthaster sp. in Lakshadweep Symp. Scomb. fishes.. Mar. Biol. Ass. waters. Mahasagar, 10 (3-4) : 179-180. India, Mandapam Camp, 2: 719-724. Also Abstracts: 28 (1962). SIVADAS, P. 1987. Possible threats to the marine environment and ecology of TOMEY, W. A. 1985. Survey in the Union Lakshadweep (Laccadive Islands). Territory of Lakshadweep, the Bombay Environmental Conservation, 14 (4): and Madras areas: Promotion of export 361-363. trade Indian ornamental fishes from marine as well as freshwater origin and SMITH, E. A. 1906. Marine mollusca. In : J. S. ornamental plants. Report to CBI, the Gardiner (Ed,), The Fauna and Geogra­ Netherlands and the Marine Products phy of the Maldive and Laccadive Export Development Authority, Cochin. Archipelagoes, 2: 589-630, Cambridge Univ. Press, Cambridge. TOMEY, W. A. 1986. Promotion of Export trade ' Indian ornamental fishes from marine SUNDARARAJ, B. 1930. Report on systematic as well as freshwater origin and aquatic survey of deep sea fishing grounds by plants for the aquarium industry. The S. T. 'Lady Goschen', 1928-29. Pilot Project: Conclusions and reco­ mmendations. Report on the project THOMAS, P. A. 1973. The new records of results to CBI/MPEDA. of Demospongiae from the Indian Ocean. J. mar. biol. Ass. India, 15 (1): TRANTER, D. J. AND JACOB GEORGE. 1972. 443-445. . Zooplankton abundance at Kavaratti and Kalpeni Atoljs in the Laccadive THOMAS, P. A. 1979. Demospongiae of Mini- Sea. In: Proc. Symp. Corals and coral coy Island (Indian Ocean) Part I. reefs: 239-256. Mar. Biol. Ass. India. Orders Keratosida and Haploscleride. ibid. 21 (1 &2; : 10-16. UNTAWALE, A. G. AND T. G. JAGTAF. 1984. Marine microphytes of Minicoy (Lak­ THOMAS, P. T. 1964a . Food of Katsnwonus shadweep) coral Atoll of the Arabian pelamis {Linnaeus), Neothunnus ma- Sea. Aquatic Botany, 19: 97-103. cropterus lemm'mck and Schlegel) from VARGHESE, G. 1986. Approach to future de­ Minicoy waters during the season velopment of Lakshadweep. Paper 1960-61. Proc. Symp. Scornb. Fishes, presented at the futurology workshop Pt. 2:626-630. Mar. Biol. Ass. India. for identifying science and technology

24 CMFRI inputs to develop a long range per­ VARGHESE, T. J. 1971. Comparative merits of spective plan for the socio-economic the mechanised over non-mechanised development of Lakshadweep for the boats on oceanic skipjack tuna live-bait period 1985 to 2005. fl. /? /.., Trivan- fishery. Seafood Export Journal. 3: drum 21-23 July, 1986, 8 pp. (1): 115-121. VARGHESE, G. 1987 a. Department of Fisheries Lakshadweep. In: 40 years of R & D VARGHESE, T. J. 1974. Shark resources of the in Marine Fisheries in India, CMFRI Laccadive waters. Seafood Export Souvenior, 1987 : 50-56. Journal, 6 (1): 65-68. VARGHESE, G. 1987 b. Status and programme marine fisheries development and WALKER, A. 0. 1906. Marine crustaceans. XIV. management of Lakshadweep. CMFRI Special Publication, 40, Abstract 100. Amphipoda. In: J. S. Gardiner (Ed.). pp. 84-85. The Fauna and Geography of the Ma- Idive and Laccadive A rchipelagoes, 2 : VARGHESE, G. AND P. SHANMUGHAIVi 1987. 923-932. The status of tuna fishery in in Lakshadweep. J. mar. biol. WOLFENDEN, R. N- 1906. Notes on the co­ Ass. India. 25 : (1 & 2) : 190-201. llection of copepoda. Ibid: 989-1040. SOME OBSERVATIONS ON THE FISHERIES OF LAKSHADWEEP

P. S. B. R. James, P.Parameswaran Pillai and A. A. Jayaprakesh Centra\ Marine Fisheries Research lnstitute,Cochin

INTRODUCTION In recent years, Lakshadweep has assumed importance in view of the special consideration Lakshadweep group of islands is constituted shown by the Government of India towards its by 36 small islands, islets and submerged banl

FISH AND FISHERIES Agatti 51 6 — Jones and Kumaran (1980) recorded 603 Amini 2 2 19 fish species from the Laccadive Archipelago. Androth — — 34 Planned programme for the development of Bitra 10 — — fisheries in Lakshadweep commenced with Chetlat — 4 12 the establishment of a Fisheries Section Kadmat — 3 5 in 1959, with the objective of enhancing fish Kalpeni — — 5 production by motivating local people by taking Kavaratti 16 — 15 up modern methods of fishing, extension, Kiltan — — 16 education, training and providing subsidies. Minicoy 35 — — Prior to this, the fishing methods were primitive although a regular pole and line fishery was in There are about 235 mechanised and 488 existence in Minicoy using Mas-odis. Introduc­ non mechanised plank built boats engaged in tion of mechanisation and training of fishermen the fishery in the Lakshadweep group of islands in modern methods of fishing, handling of (Alagaraja, 1987). Mechanised boats used for mechanised boats and transfer of technology in pole and line fishery number 114 (49%), follo­ fishing, processing, issue of mechanised boats wed by those for troll lines fishery (45% and to the islanders, establishment of boat building longline fishery 15 (6%). yards, workshop and processing units and providing infrastructural facilities such as jetties A variety of gears and implements such as were the major achievements of the Fisheries pole and line, troll line, cast nets, shore seines, Department in this field. Details of implemen­ gillnets, harpoons, hand lines and long-lines are tation of the schemes and impact of fisheries employed in the fishery from the lagoon and departmental activities on the socio-ecomic life outside. Recently, Alagaraja (1987) summarised of the islanders were dealt with earlier (Varghe­ the fishing units in the fishery in the Laksha­ se, 1987b). However, according to Alagaraja dweep, and according to him there are 115 units (1987) there are about 3750 fishermen engaged of pole and lines, about 600 gill nets, 210 boat in the actual fishing among whom 2100 persons seines (drag nets), 305 shore seines and 1360 are engaged in full time fishing, 200 in part time cast nets. • He also provided the gear-wise fishing and the rest 1450 in occasional fishing. contribution during the five-year period 1980-84 (Table-1) and opined that the major contribution CRAFT AND GEAR came from pole and line fishing, which account­ ed for about 56% of the total landing by all Details of mechanised and non-mechanised Bears. Troll and line contributed to about 22% vessels engaged in different types of fishery in followed by shore seines (11%), gillnets (3%), the Lakshadweep from early period were des­ harpooning {2%), cast nets (1%) and the rest by cribed by Jones (1958), Ben-Yami (1980) and hand lines. However, no clear-cut trend in the Silas and Piilai (1982). Comparative merits of landings of these gears is evident as in the case mechanised boats over non-mechanised boats of pole and line. in the skipjack tuna fishery was evaluated by Varghese (1971). Detailed description of PRODUCTION mechanised crafts engaged in the pole and line fishery at Minicoy and Agatti islands has been Year-wise production of the marine fishes provided recently by Madan Mohan et al.. in the Lakhshadweep during the 10 year period (1986) and Varghese and Shanmugham (1987) 1977-1986 is presented in Fig. 1 Ch. 4. The

26 CMFRI average annual marine fish landings during the decade was estimated as 3903 tonnes. Though I AVERAGE MARINE FISH PPODUCTION there were fluctuations in the annual landings (1981-85) during 1977-80 with the minimum of 2215 tonnes in 1977 and maximum of 3846 tonnes in 8 •*• t- — I- >>• 1979, a steady increase with minor oscillations from 2909 tonnes in 1980 to 5537 tonnes in 1986 has been noted during the rest of the period.

AGATTI ANDROTH BITRA

Fig. 2. Avereae (1981-85) marine fish production in 1 the different Islands of Lakshadweep. Ei rt «• lO lull W fO 2 "rt 111w ro * tfj! {1977-1986) o m oo <0 CD oj 00 eg w Ci at 0 oi Oi a O (T> CO © ~ Average annual Perce- KADMAT •• KALPENI KAVARATTI • Group production (tonnes) ntage

Jill Ulll Mi11 1 illU Tunas 2873 73.9 Pelagic sharks 186 4.8 KIUTAN MINtCOY SUHEU Perches 162 4.2 MARINE FISH Garfishes 85 2.2 PRODUCTION IN Rainbow runner 76 2.0 LAKHSHADWEEP Rays 70 1.8 66 1.7 (TONNrs) Carangids Seerfishes 50 1.3 Sailfishes 33 0.8 JV^JIKJi^L^^BJi^u 1 Goatfishes 29 0,7 Coral fishes 26 0.7 Fig- 1* Marine fish production in the different islands Flying fishes 21 0.5 during 1981-85 Octopi 16 0.4 Barracudas 13 0.3 The island-wise total marine fish production Triggerfishes 8 0.2 during 1981-85 is presented in Fig 1. The Miscellaneous items not 174 4.5 average annual prod.uction is indicated in Fig. 2. classified The major contribution to the total marine fish production came from Agatti, Suheli Par, Mini- Major share of total marine landings has coy and Androth. There is year to year fluctu­ been accounted for by tunas which formed ations. Compared to these islands, the landings about 74% in the average, and the trend of production of tunas follow the trend of total in islands such as Amini, Bitra, Chetlat, Kadmat, marine fish production. Further, the contribution Kalpeni, Kavaratti and Kiitan are low. of tunas increased from 71% in 1982 to 87% in Average annual production of different 1986. • These indicate the dependence of marine marine groups for the period 1977-86 are pre­ fisheries in the Lakshadweep on this group of sented below in their order of abundance: scombroids. Other groups which contributed eui.UTiN43 27 to in a major scale were pelagic sharks, perches, The significant increase in the landing by gar fishes, rainbow runner, rays, carangids and pole and line (live-bait) fishery at Agatti, seer fishes. Suheli, Minicoy and Bitra contributed much to the total production of tunas in the Laksha­ Total production of tunas in the Laksha- dweep. dweep during the period 1977-86 is presented in Fig. 1(Ch. 4). The minimum landing of 1165 Vargheseand Shanmugham (1987) indicated tonnes was in 1977 and maximum of 4807 that based on average for the years 1976-85, the tonnes was recorded in 1986. Skipjack tuna tuna catch at Agatti, Minicoy and Bitra accoun­ and young ones of yellowfin tuna contributed ted for about 63%, 27% and 9% respectively to 90% of the surface catch in the Lakshadweep. of the total tuna catch. At Agatti, a bimonthly However, on an average,annually about 2873 peak in abundance in tuna catch was recorded tunas were landed in Lakshadweep during this by him viz., during March-April and November- period. December periods in most of the years under consideration. Similar trend in the peak periods The status of total tuna landings in India of tunas were observed at Minicoy by Pillai and and contribution of Lakshadweep in recent Gopakumar (1987) during 1984-87. years are as follows: A comparative account on the annual Total all India Tuna landings in average catch composition (%) of different tuna landings Lakshadweep groups of fishes in the fishery at Agatti (1976- (tonnes)* (Tonnes)** 85) and Minicoy (1984-87) islands is presented below:- 1983 17871 3037 1984 21618 4313 Groups Agatti Is Minicoy Is 1985 32363 3774 1986 35607 4807 Tunas 87.30 84.10 Billfishes 0.75 0.40 •Estimate by CMFRI **Estimate by the Carangids 0.76 1.60 Fisheries Depart­ Garfishes 1.05 No data ment, Laksha­ Perches 0.67 2.00 dweep Pelagic sharks 4.30 3.20 Rainbow runner 0.20 3.33 From the above data it is evident that, the Octopi 0,17 No data average contribution by Lakshadweep to the Coryphaena No data 0,50 total tuna production in the country was about Barracudas No data 0.60 18%. Seerfishes No data 4.30 Average annual island-wise landing of tunas Miscellaneous 4.80 — during the period 1977-86 is presented below: The differential composition in the catch may be due to the employment of different gears Island Tuna landing (tonnes) Percentage during monsoon and non-monsoon months in these islands. Agatti 1114 51.1 Amini 78 3.6 DISCUSSION Androth 218 10,0 The Central Marine Fisheries Research Bitra 185 8.5 Institute has already developed a data base on Chetlat 99 4.5 various marine resources of the Lakshadweep Kadmat 55 2,5 islands and related conservation problems. Of Kalpeni 62 2.8 recent, the concentration of efforts by the Kavaratti 184 8.4 Institute was on coral reefs, tunas, tuna live- Kiltan 73 3.4 Suheli 626 28.8 baits, ornamental fishes and other ancillary Minicoy 483 22.2 resources. The Institute has recently conducted an aimed survey on tuna live-baits around and

28 CMFRI inside tha lagoons of all inhabited islands The impact of Fish Aggregating Deyices (Nov. 86-March, 87) and an overall survey of (FAD) as observed by Silas and Pillai (1982) the fishery potential of the Lakshadweep (Jan- and James ef a/. (1986 b) will be on the small March, 87). The former aimed at indepth scale fishery sector such as pole and line tuna investigations on the habitat patterns and fishery. Tuna fishing around these structures quantitative distribution and availability of the will result in increased catches, reduction in tuna live-bait resources, and the laiter concent­ scouting and voyage time, conservation of fuel rated on an overall assessment of various types energy and also it will be a safety factor. This of fishery resources, their potential, impact of method with modifications can be employed in environmental damage to the coral reef eco­ the whole island realm for increasing tuna catch systems, evaluation of ancillary marine resources in the small scale sector. such as sponges, echinoderms and ornamental fishes and for identifying areas for mariculture, Live-baits form an important component in and measures that would help in perspective the tuna fishery. In recent years the demand planning and development of fisheries and other for live-baits has increased considerably, and marine living resources. shortage for the same has been faced. As described elsewhere by Pillai et. al. ^986), Skipjack tuna, Katsuwonus pel amis and James et al (1987a) and Kumaran et al. (in this young ones of yellowfin tuna, Thunnus alba- volume), the non-availability of live-baits in cares constitute the major tuna resources of required quantities can be attributed to (1) these Islands taken by the pole end line fishery. tampering of the lagoon ecosystem, (2) seaso­ nality in the recruitment pattern of migrant At Minicoy, the pole and line fishery using live- species, and (3) exploitation pressure. In Mini- baits has been in vogue for over a centuary. coy, fhe CMFRI is making attempts for rearing Introduction of mechanisation in the early 60's and culture of important live-baits such as and the spread of pole and line fishing practice Chromis caeruleus and Sprate/loides delicatulus. to some of the northern islands such as Agatti, In the northern islands, rational exploitation of Suheli, Bitra, Perumul Par etc are the two S. delicatulus which is the only species utilised developments in this sector. The trend of tuna for tuna pole and line fishing, should be advised fishery in the Lakshadweep has been reviewed and management measures for the maintenance by Silas et. ai. (1986 b) based on the informat­ of the stocks implemented. Fishermen should ion gathered at IViinicoy. The present trends, be encouraged to exploit alternate species constraints and strategies for future development belonging to Pomacentridae, Apogonidae and of small scale pole and line fishery at Laksha­ Caesionidae which are associated with coral dweep has been critically reviewed by James colonies in the deeper regions of the lagoon. etal. (1987b). Strenc^thening and expans­ The Department of fisheries may also provide ion of the pole and line fishery by the introduc­ necessary infrastructure and facilities to collect tion of larger pole and line boats with adequate from open sea areas and outside the lagoons, chilling and storing facilities needs attention. transport and impound live-baits in the lagoon Introduction of n-edium sized purse seiners, areas for future use. especially in the notthern islands, provided processing, marketing and handling are taken Even without*much organised effort, nearl/ care of, is another proposal for better returns. 20% of the landings in Lakshadweep is accoun­ Other operations like giiinetting, surface trolling ted for by other fishes such as pelagic sharks, and longlining suitable for local conditions perches, carangids, seerfishes, rainbow runner could be tried and popularised for tuna fishing etc. Diversified fishing efforts such as long- which would assist in reducing live-bait lining for sharks, drift giiinetting for other requirement. Further, for commercial explo­ groups coupled with improvements in crafts to itation, it is proposed to operate large fish in distant waters would help in a long way purse seiners and pole and line vessels on in tapping these resources. Collaborative terms with other countries, and to operate a mother vessel to enhance the range of Several coral reef fishes are considered as operation of smaller vessels (Varghese, 1987a). excellent ornamental fishes for aquarium in

0ULIETIN43 29 many parts of the world. Cheap to very expen­ ANON, 1986. Report on the training mission sive ornamental fishes offer scope for export on on ornamental fish export to the Ne­ a limited scale (Anon, 1985; Tomey, 1985,1986; therlands. Marine Products Export George e^ a/. 1986; James efs/. 1987b). More Development Authority, Cochin. 24 pp- than 100 species of ornamental fishes belonging BALAN, V. 1958. Notes on a visit to certain to 28 families could be exploited and marketed. islands of the Laccadive Archipelago, Recent survey of the fishery potential of Laksha- with special reference to fisheries. J. dweep carried out by the CMFRI has also proved Bombay net Hist. Soc: 55 (2): 297- the existence of exploitable quantities of orna­ 306. mental fishes. Collection methods without BEN-YAMI, M. 1980. Tuna fishing with pole tampering the reefs, packaging and transportat­ and line. FAO Fishing Mannual, 150 ion facilities needs to be developed so as to tap pp. Fishing News Books Ltd. England. these resources for export trade. Resource surveys for the holothurians {Beche-de-nur GEORGE, K. C, P.A.THOMAS, K. K. APPU- industry) and sea weeds (Agar Agar Industry) KUTTAN AND G. GOPAKUMAR 1986. were conducted by the Department of Fisheries, Ancillary marine resources of Laksha­ Lakshadweep and CMFRI. But the occurrence, dweep. l\/!ar. Fish. Infor. Serv T & E abundance and replenishment of these resources SeA, 68 :46-50. for taking up commercial ventures are yet to be KUMARAN, M. AND G. GOPAKUMAR 1986. ascertained. Potential resources of fishes other than tuna in Lakshadweep. ibid: 41-45. Tuna fishing is the mainstay of the Laksha­ dweep islands. The strategies for future deve­ JAMES, P. S. B. R. 1987. Recent observations lopment of the tuna fishery at Lakshadweep as on marine fisheries resources of Lak­ suggested by Silas and Pillai (1986), James and shadweep. The First Indian Fisheries Pillai (1987) and James ef a/. (1987), coupled Forum. College of Fisheries, Mangalore. Abstract No. 159. #with the future programme of development of fishing industry suggested by Varghese (1987a, JAMES, P.S. B.R. AND P.P. PILLAI 1987. 1987b) will go a long may in making the Strategies for tuna fisheries Develop­ industry more lucrative, economical and bene­ ment and management in the Indian ficial for the people. Exclusive Economic Zone. CMFRI special Publication; 40 : Abstract No. TABLE 1. Annual gearwise catches (in tonnes) 113. p. 95. in Lakshadweep during 1980 84. JAMES, P. S. B. R., C. S. GOPINATHA PlLLAl, P. P. PILLAI, P. LIVINGSTON AND Gear 1980 1981 1982 1983 1984 MADAN MOHAN. 1986 a. Marine Pole and line 1160 1636 2366 2573 3713 fisheries research in Lakshadeep— Troll line 854 878 966 921 828 A historical resume, /War. Fish. Infor. Castnet 56 25 27 35 24 Serv. T a E Ser., 68 : 7-9. Shorefeine 410 401 462 508 382 JAMES, P. S. B. R , T. JACOB, C. S. GOPINA­ Gillnet 128 128 112 137 77 THA PILLAI AND P. P. PILLAI 1986 b. Harpooning 72 36 41 89 102 Prospects of development of marine Handline 4 7 7 11 7 fisheries resources in Lakshadweep. Longline 225 189 220 268 198 Mar. Fish Infor Serv. T & E Ser., 68: Total 2909 3300 4201 4542 5331 51-54.

JAMES, P. S. B. R., G, GOPAKUMAR AND P.P. r . REFERENCES PILLAI 1987 a. Small-scale pole and ALAGARAJA, K. 1987. An appraisal of the line tuna fishery at Lakshadweep- pre- marine fisheries of Lakshadweep and send, trend, constraints and strategies Andaman and Nicobar Islands. CMFRI for future development. Mar. Fish. Special Publication. 39 : 18 pp. Infor. Serv. T & f SSA , 77 : 1 -10.

30 CMFRI JAMES, P. S. B. R., P. P. PILLAI AND A. A. Seminar World Cr nservatiqn Di '/elop­ JAYAPRAKASH 1987 b. Impressions ing Countries, Bombay nat. Hist. Soc. of a recent visit to Lakshadweep from (in press). the fisheries and marine biological PILLAI, C. S. GOPINADHA 1985. Ecological- perspectives. Mar. Fish. Infor. Sen 72: crisis in coastal and marine habitats In: 1-11. Indies' Environment - Crisis and Res­ JONES, S. 1958. Tuna live-bait fishery of Mi- ponses. Natara] Publications, Dehradun. nicoy Island. Indian J. Fish; s (2) : 120-130. 300-37. PILLAI, C. S. GOPINADHA 1986. Status of JONES, S. 1986. Lakshadweep—General features coral reefs in Lakshadweep. Mar. Fish. and some considerations l\/lar. Fish. Infor Serv. T & £. ea : 38-41. Infor. Serv. T & E Ser; 68 : 3-6. PILLAI, C. S. GOPINADHA AND MADAN JONES, S. AND M. KUMARAN 1980. Fishes MOHAN 1986. Ecological stress in of the Laccadive Archiptlago. Nature Minicoy lagoon and its impact on tuna Conservation and Aquatic Sciences live-baits. Ibid : 33-37. Service, Trivandrum : 760 pp^ PILLAI, P. P. AND G. GOPAKUMAR 1987 (MS) KUMARAN, M. AND G. GOPAKUMAR 1986. Stock assessment of migratory fish Potential resources of fishes other than species based on localised data— tuna in Lakshadweep. t\/lar. Fish. Infor. oceanic skipjack tuna pol eand line Serv. T & E Ser., 68 : 41-45. (live-bait) fishery at Minicoy as a case study. FAO Report. LIVINGSTON, P. 1987 a. Detection of tuna shoals from observations on sea birds PILLAI, P. P., M. KUMARAN, C.S. GOPINADHA in the skipjack pole and line fishing of PILLAI. MADAN MOHAN, G. GOPA­ Lakshadweep. CI^FRI Special Publi­ KUMAR, P. LIVINGSTON AND M. cation. 40 : Abstract 32, 30-31. SRINATH. 1986. Exploited and poten­ tial resources of live-bait fishes of LIVINGSTON, P. 1987 b. Schooling behaviour Lakshadweep. Mar. Fish. Infor. Serv. of tuna in Lakshadweep waters. Ihid, T & E Ser;6a : 25-32. Abstract 33, 31-32. SILAS, E. G. AND P. P. PILLAI 1982. LIVINGSTON, P. 1987 c. Mechanisation of the Resources of tunas and related species skipjack tuna pole and line (live-bait; and their fisheries in the Indian Ocean. fishery in Lakshadweep. Idid. Abstract Bull. Cent Mar. Fish. Res. Inst., 32 : 79, 68-69. 1-174.

LIVINGSTON, P. 1987 d. Pole and line tuna SILAS, E. G. AND P. P. PILLAI .986. Indian fishing techniques - a comparative tuna fishery development - perspectives study with reference to Lakshadweep and a management plan. Ibid; 36 :193- Fisheries. Ibid, Abstract 80, 69-70. 198. ^

LIVINGSTON, P. 1987 e. Pole and line fishing SILAS, E. G., P. P. PILLAI, M. SRINATH, A, A. gear making industry of Lakshadweep. JAYAPRAKASH, C. MUTHIAH, V. Ibid. Abstract 81, p. 70. BALAN, r. M. YOHANNAN PON MADAN MOHAN, P. LIVINGSTON AND K. K. SIRAIMEETAN, MADAN MOHAN, P. KUNHIKOYA 1986. Fishery and bio­ LIVINGSTON, K. K. KUNHIKOYA, M. nomics of tunas at Minicoy Island, A. PILLAI AND P. SADASIVA SHARMA flu// Cent. Mar. Fiih. Res. Inst: 36 : 1986 a. Population dynamics of tunas: 122-137. Stock assessment. Ibid; 20-27.

PILLAI, C. S. GOPINADHA 1983. The endan­ SILAS, E. G., K. V. N. RAO, P. P. PILLAI, MA­ gered marine and terrestrial habitats of DAN MOHAN, G. GOPAKUMAR, P. Minicoy Atoll in Lakshadweep. Proc. LIVINGSTON AND M. SRINATH 986

BULLETIN 43 at b. Exploited and potenial resources of development of Lakshadweep for the tunas of Lakshadweep, Mar. Fish. Infor. period 1985 to 2005. R. R. L., Trivan- Serv. T&ESer;6i: 15-25. drum 2'-23 July, 1986; 8 pp.

TOMEY, W. A. 1985. Survey in the Union VARGHESE, G. 1987 a. Department of Fisheries, Territory of Lalcshadweep, the Bombay Lakshadweep. In: 40 years of R & D in and Madras areas : Promotion of export Marine Fisheries in India, CMFRI trade Indian ornamental fishes from Souvenir. 1987:50-56. marine as well as freshwater origin and ornamental plants. Report to CBI; VARGHESE, G. 1987 b. Status and programmes the Netherlands and the Marine Pro­ of marine fisheries development and ducts Export Development Authority, management of Lakshadweep. CMFRl Cochin. special publication. 40: Abstract 100, pp 84-85. TOMEY, W. A. 1986. Promotion of Export trade Indian ornamental fishes from VARGHESE, G. AND P. SHANMUGHAM 1987. marine as well as freshwater origin and The status of tuna fishery in Agatti aquatic plants for the aquarium industry: Island in Lakshadweep. J. Mar. Biol The Piolet Project: Conclusions and Ass. India 25 (1 & 2) : 190-201. recommendations. Report on the project results to CBI/MPEDA. VARGHESE, T. J. 1971. Comparative merits of the mechanised over the non-mecha­ VARGHESE, G. 1986. Approach to future nised boats on oceanic skipjack tuna development of Lakshadweep. Paper live-bait fishery. Seafood Export Jour­ presented at the Futurology workshop nal. 3 (1) : 115-121. for identifying science and technology iuputs to develop a long range per­ VARGHESE, T. J. 1974. Shark resources of the spective plan for the socio-economic Laccadive waters. Ibid; 6 (1) : 65-68.

32 CMFRI 4. TUNA RESOURCES AND PLAN FOR DEVELOPMENT

P. S. B. R. James, P. Parameswaran Pillai and K. P. Said Koya Central Marine Fishries Research Institute, Cochin 682 031

INTRODUCTION fluctuations and reached an alt time peak of 4807 tonnes in 1986. In recent years attention has been focused towards the development of Fisheries in the Based on the data from Minicoy (1976- Lakshadweep by the Government to improve the 1987) and Agatti (1976-1987) and Agatti life style and economy of the islanders. Introd­ (1977-1985). if the average annual catch of uction of mechanisation in the early sixties has tunas which amounts to about 2900 tonnes resulted in the increase of tuna production at Minicoy, where a traditional fishery employing 'Masodis' was in existance. Coupled with this, eooor the spread of pole and line fishing practise towards the northern islands such as Agatti, 9000 Bangaram, Perumul Par, Suheli and Bitra has resulted in the production of tuna from a few hundred tonnes in the 60's to about 4807 (0 4000 tonnes in 1986. 3000 Oceanic tunas such as skipjack (Katsu wonus O pelames) and young ones of yellowfin tuna (Jhunnus albacaresj constitute the major reso­ 2000 urces of this area taken by the pole and line live-bait fishery during September to May period 1000 - every year. Surface trolling also land yellowfin' LANDINGS skipjack and billfishes In the order of their abundance, especially during the monsoon J UJI I 1 I I ' ' ' 1977 '79 '81 '83 '89 period. Fig. 1. Total marine fish and tuna landings in CRAFTS AND GEARS Lakhshadweap during 1977 1986

The crafts and gears engaged in the tuna (1977-86) at Lakshadweep is aportioned group- fishery has been dealt with recently by Silas and wise, the skipjack tuna may constitute on an Pillai (1982), Madan Mohan et al (1986), average 2156 tonnes, yellowfin tuna 560 tonnes George Varghese (1987) and Livingston (1987 and other tunas and billfishes 84 tonnes during a, 1987 b, 1987 c). The statistics of crafts and this period. gears presently engaged in the tuna fishery are summarised by James et al (1988: in the same Island-wise production of tunas during the volume). period 1977-86 is indicated in Figs 2-12. It is evident from the data that Agatti Island ranks PRODUCTION first with an annual average catch of 1114 ton­ nes, followed by Suheli (626 tonnes), Minicoy The total tuna catch in the Lakshadweep (483 tonnes) and Bitra (185 tonnes). According Island during the period 1977-86 is presented to Varghese (1987), the annual average CPUE in Fig. 1. It is evident that the total catch at Agatti, Minicoy and Bitra are 419 tonnes, 180 increased from about 1165 tonnes in 1977 to tonnes and 252 tonnes respectively during the 2794 tonnes in 1979, after which the catch period 1977-86. declined to 1759 tonnes in 1980. In 1981 about 2236 tonnes of tunas were taken. Subsequently, At present the information available on the the tuna catch increased steadily with minor catch, effort, CPUE and biology of tunas are

»ULLETIN43 33 T. alba ceres 2000 La 145 cm K (annual) 0.3200 to -0.3400 Z 3.488 Ep 0.85 In both the studies, it was indicated that the present level of exploitation of the skipjack tuna does not affect the species stock and the capture of this species has not reached the MSY level. Studies conducted on the yellowfin tuna Fig, 2. Year-wise tuna landings In Agatti (young ones) by Silas et al. (1986) revealed that expansion of the fishing operations to areas from Agatti (1971-85) and from Minicoy (1979- beyond the present zone of exploitation would 87). The trend of these factors at Minicoy has widen the scope for realising higher yields. been described by Madan Mohan era/(1986/ and at Agatti by Varghese and Shanmugham Androth (1987). In both the islands, relatively high catch rates were observed during March - April and November - December periods.

Amini

Fig. 4. Year-wise tuna landings in Androth

Expansion of pole and line fishery is limited 1972 ' 74 by the availability of suitable live-bait resources in quantity, their maintenance and transporta­ Fig. 3. Vear-wige tuna landings in Amini tion, availability of tuna shoals in the fishing Biological information on the growth ground, response to chumming, expertise of parameters of skipjack tuna and spawning bio­ fishermen etc (James and Piilai, 1987). Recent logy of skipjack tuna are also available (Silas aimed resource survey on baitfishes conducted et a/., 1986; Madan Mohan and Kunhikoya, by CMFRI in the Lakshadweep have proved 1986). Information on sex ratio, spawning beyond doubt the vast resources of potential season and food and feeding habits of skipjack tuna live-bait species belonging to the families tuna at Agatti has been presented by Varghese 600 Bitra and Shanmughom (1987) for the period 1977-79. Av. catch' 185f j M to 400 - UJ Basic data on the stock structure and growth z - z parameters of these two species have been O200 1- described by Silas ef a/. (1986), and the results obtained were as follows:- • r 1- 1 1 • 1 1 ] 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 \%71 '74 '76 '78 '80 '82 '84 '86 S/Jas et al (1986) James et al (1986) Fig. 5- Year-wise tuna landings in'Bitra K. pelamis Dussumieridae, Apogonidae, Caesionidae, Poma- La 90.0 cm 90.0 cm centridae and Atherinidae (other than the tradi­ K (annual) 0.4898 0.4898 tionally, used «prat Spratelloidas dalicatulas) to -0.0600 -0.0600 around Agatti, Bangaram, Perumul Par, Suheli Z 2.56 1.89 Par, Kadmat, Kalpeni and Bitra. S. delicatulus ED 0.71 — with positive chumming quality and easily fished

34 CMFRI by surrounding nets is the only species currently exploited for the tuna po]e and line fishery in all Kovaratt the northern islands other than Minicoy. Major 400 constraints in the utilisation of this species are

1972 '74 "76 '78 '80 '82 '04 '86

Fig. 6, Year-wise tuna landings in Chetlat 1872 ^74 "78 ^78 ^eO ia '84 '8C should be encouraged in all the islands which would lead to the augmentation of live-bait Fig. 10. Year-wise tuna^landings in Kiltan production and dispel the threat of overfishing and consequent depletion of the exploitable 1000 stocks of S. delicatulus. Minicoy 800 In this context, it is worthwhile to mention

Kadmat 200 120 Av.catch' 55t J—I—I—I—I I I I -L-a. 1972 '74 '76 '78 '80 '82 '84 %% UzJ 80 z o Fig. 11. Yeir-wisertona'landlngs in'Minicoy"! t- 40

1 r 1 1 1 1 J 1 r 1 1 1 laoo °.<»7 2 '74 '7« •78 '80 '82 '84 '88 Suheli par Fig. 7 '^Year-wisejtuna (andinfls in Kadmat noo -Ji-j-i - —» -.' » I iwiir- Av. catch 'ezet

«oo-

4«0

200 NO DATA

0 11 I.I 1 I >-T-l I.I ' , • J U l»7t '74 '76 '78 '80 '82 '84 '88 1872 '74 'Te '78. "eo '82 'M 'le Fig. 8. Year-wise^tuna landingsjn Kalpenij Fig. 12, Year-wise tuna landings in Suheil Par PUILETIN43 35 such as Chromis caeruleus in the field and senescence. Indiscriminate dredging and blast­ lagoon to evaluate their sturdyness, behaviour ing of the lagoon habitat may cause altered and production under captivity. current patterns, which may result in the siltation in the areas of coral growth, thereby causing the As opined by Silas and Pillai (1986) and death of coral colonies and the resident live-bait James and Pillai (1987), at the modest estimat­ ion of production 60-100 tonnes of tunas per species. Environmental damage should be kept season per boat of OAL 15-20 m OAL and minimum while implementing development estimating average as 120 kg/production of programmes for navigation. Installation of tunas/per kg of baitfish, the requirement of each artificial reefs and habitat studies should be boat per season will be about 0.6-08 tonnes. given priority to attract coral associated bait Introduction of about 100 boats of the above fishes to these habitats. Further, rejuvenation size would enhance the production of skipjack and trials to regrow corals by transplanting live and yellowfin tuna (young ones) to about corals into regions where they thrived earlier 10,000 tonnes by 2000 AD. need consideration, 4. Bait fisfies FUTURE DEVELOPMENT AND MANAGEMENT OF TUNA FISHERY IN THE LAKSHADWEEP Aimed exploratory tuna bait resources surveys conducted in the Lakshadweep by Development of the infrastructure, techno­ scientists attached to the CMFRl establisments logy and human resources in addition to harvest­ at Minicoy and Agatti (Nov. 86 to March, 87) ing, processing, marketing, servicing and material have proved that vast resourcss of potential bait supply to enable the country to hemes the fishery fish species, both migrants and resident resources are important in the fishery develop­ forms are available around Agatti, Bangaram ment plans. In the development of small-scale Perumul par, Suheli Par, Kadmat and Bitra. pole and line tuna fishery in the Lakshadweep, Results of these surveys, coupled with the the following strategies appear to be pertinent: encouragement to use economically viable 1. Information Base confinement and transportation methods for hardy live-baits would coQtribute much in Statistics on all aspects of fisheries are planning the utilisation of bait species of these needed for planning, implementation and sub­ areas, without exhausting their resources. sequent monitoring of fishery management and development, Departmental capability to collect The sprats being shallow water species can data and information at sub-regional level in the easily be fished in desired numbers using en­ Lakshadweep need strengthening. circling type of nets. The major constraint in the utilisation of this species is the large scale 2. Man power mortality at the time of capture, storing in live- According to Varghese (1986), the major bait tanks and transportation, due mainly to problem faced by the fishery sector is the shor­ osmoregulatory stress. Since the fishery is tage of manpower, and blocking of manpower dependent on the availability of this single in the nonproductive sector. A feasible proposal species, scarcity of the same often causes abrupt for providing employment and income generation suspension of fishing activities even during peak for the local population would seem to be to fishing months, and also the threat of over make fishing in the small-scale sector more exploitation of stock can be anticipated. Steps lucrative by introduction of enhanced per capita should, therefore, be taken and fishermen en­ income plans by IRDP/NREP agencies. couraged for exploiting the baitfishes belonging to pomacentridae, apogonidae and caesionidae 3' Conservation of coral ecosystem which are associated with coral colonies in the Development and management plans should deeper parts of the lagoon by means of lift nets. take into account the need to protect marine Species belonging to the above groups also habitat around the island ecosystem from any exhibit good chumming qualities. In view of form of degradation. The coral colonies which the vast resources of bait fishes in the lagoons harbour the live-bait fishes are prone to natural and outside around most islands it is suggested

36 CMFRl that they could be harvested by small purse operational range of smaller boats (Varghese, seines and other suitable gear and transported 1987). to adjacent areas where they could be impounded The high catch rate of fishing from schools in the lagoons for further use on demand. associated with flotsam at Minicoy, indicate Necessary infrastructure for such operations that installation of fish Aggregating Devices should be provided by the Department of Fishe­ (FADs) may be successful in augmenting tuna ries. production. The major impact of FADs, as Future programmes of CMFRI include large observed by Silas and Pillai (1982) and James scale rearing, attempts on culture and estimation etal. 1987) will be in the small-scale sector of the natural stocks of live baits in Laksha- such as pole and line fishery as tuna fishery dweep. Night fishing through lights will also around these structures result in increased be experimented upon. Research on transport­ catches, reduction in scouting and voyage time ation of live-bait, holding them in large impo­ end as well save fuel. The method with modifi­ undments, compatibility and density of species cations if needed can be extended to the whole region for increasing tuna catches. in such impoundments etc. would also be undertaken, 6. Product development marketing and post- harvest technology 5. Tuna fishery At Lakshadweep the main catch disposal An average of about 2900 t o tunas were method is by converting it to masmin. At annually exploited by the small scale pole and Agatti, Suheli Par and Bitra, the catch after line fishery during 1977-86, and in recent years removing a fraction for domestic consumption the approximate contribution by Agatti, Minicoy, is converted to masmin. Approximately about Suheli Parand Bitra are 51%, 22%, 29% and 500 tonnes of masmin is produced annually 9% respectively. Of these, at Minicoy its isolated from Lakshadweep in recent years. The price geographical location and the consequent of masmin varied from Rs. 30 to Rs. 40 per kg. immobility of small pole and line boats for The development of an organised marketing expanding the area of fishing without navi­ system will be beneficial to the tuna fishermen gational aids, and the live-bait scarcity often since it can solve to some extent the present experienced by the fishermen are the main problems of gettirig proper market and sudden constraints for the further expansion of the price fall of the product. At Minicoy, a portion fishery. On the contrary, Agatti, Suheli Par and of the catch (average 70 tonnes annually) is Bitra, due to their proximity to other islands and canned by the Govt. Canning Factory, and a reefs and also due to the added advantage of scheme for establishing canning factory at getting enough live-baits, offar further scope Agatti has recently been proposed. However, for the present small-scale pole and line fishery. in view of the economical returns, steady markets for masmin inside the country and The introduction of a new generation of export should be explored and developed. larger pole and line vessels (15.20m OAL) with Utilisation of waste adequate navigational, chilling and storing facilities for 4-5 days of fishing as recommended Disposal of waste is another aspect deserv­ by Silas and Pillai (1982) is particularly signifi­ ing immediate attention. At present, the head, cant to Minicoy Island due to its isolated geo­ bones, fins etc of the fish are discarded on the graphical location. In this connection, it is beach of the islands, which get decayed and act worth mentioning that a radio beacon station as breeding sites of house flies, causing health and a radar transponder beacon (RACON), (9300 hazards during the fishing season. A small-scale to 9500 MHZ) can be made use of by the fisher­ waste utilisation method by converting them to men with the help of a simple direction finder/ fish meal may be advisable since the product radar equipment. For commercial exploitation can be used as an excellent manure for coconut of tuna it was proposed to operate large purse plantations in the islands or the possibility of seiners in collaboration with other countries, converting the waste from tunas as ensilage and to operate a mother vessel to enhance the should be explored.

9UUETIN43 37 REFERENCES Katsuwonus pelamis (Linr].) from Mini- coy waters. Bull. Cent. Mar. Fish. JAMES, P. S. B. R. AND P. P. PILLAI 1987. Res. Inst., 36 : 149-154. Strategies for tuna fisheries Develop­ ment and management in the Indian MADAN MOHAN, P. LIVINGSTON AND K. K. Exclusive Economic Zone. CMFRI KUNHIKOYA. 1986. Fishery and Special Pub/., 40 : Abstract No. 113. Bionomics of tunas at Minicoy Island. p. 95. //>/y; 122-137.

JAMES, P. S, B. R., G. GOPAKUMAR AND P.P. SILAS, E. G. AND P. P. PILLAI 1982. Resources PILLAI 1987. Small-scale pole and line of tunas and related species and their tuna fishery in Lakshadweep present fisheries in the Indian Ocean. Bull. trend, constraints and strategies for Cent. Mar. Fish. Res. Inst 3 2,174 pp. future developments. Mar. Fish. Infor. Serv, T &E Ser; No. 77:1 -10. SILAS, E. G. AND P P. PILLAI 1986. Indian tuna fishery development perspectives JAMES, P. S. B. R., M. SRINATH AND A. A. and a management plan. Ibid., 36: 193- JAYAPRAKASH 1986. Stock Assess­ 198. ment of tunas in the soas around India. In : Collective Volume of Working SILAS, E. G., P. P. PILLAI, M. SRINATH, A. A. Documents, TWS/86/30. Indo-Pacific JAYAPRAKASH, C. MUTHIAH, V. BA- Tuna Development and Management LAN, T. M. YOHANNAN, PON SIRAI- Programme Expert Consultation on MEETAN, MADAN MOHAN, P. LIVING­ Stock Assessment of Tunas, 1986, 353- STON, K. K. KUNHIKOYA, M.A. PILLAI 366. AND P. SADASiVA SHARMA 1986. Population dynamics of tunas: Stock JAMES, P. S. B. R., P. P. PILLAI AND A. A. Assessment. Ibid., 20.27. JAYAPRAKASH 1988. Some obser­ vations on the fisheries of Lakshadweep. VARGHESE, GEORGE 1986. Approach to future Bull. Cent. Mar. Fish. Res. Inst. (Laks­ development of Lakshadweep Paper hadweep). presented at the Futurology workshop for identifying science and technology LIVINGSTON, P. 1987 a. Mechanisation of the inputs to develop a long range per­ skipjack tuna pole and line (live-bait) spective plan for the socio-economic fishery in Lakshadweep. CMFRI Special development of Lakshadweep for the Publication, 40 : Abstract 79, 68-69. period 1985 to 2005. R. R. /.., Trivan- drum 21-23 July, 1986; 8 pp. LIVINGSTON, P. 1987 b. Pole and line tuna fishing techniques- a comparative study VARGHESE GEORGE 1987. Status and progra­ with reference to Lakshadweep Fishe­ mmes of marine fisheries development ries. Ibid; Abstract 80, 69-70. and management in Lakshadweep. CMFRI Special Publication. 40: Abstract LIVINGSTON, P. 1987 c. Pole and line fishing No. 100, pp. 84-85. gear making industry of Lakshadweep, Ibid) Abstract, 81 : p. 70. VARGHESE, GEORGE AND P. SHANMUGHAM 1987. The status of tuna fishery in MADAN MOHAN AND K.K. KUNHIKOYA 1986. Agatti Island in Lakshadweep. J. Mar. Spawning biology of skipjack tuna. Biol. Ass. India, 25 (1 & 2) : 190-201.

38 CMFRI 5. LlVE-BAiT RESOURCES AND DEVELOPMENT

M. Kumaran, P. P. Pillai, R. S. Lai Mohan, V. Sriramachandra Murty and G. Gopakumar

INTRODUCTION collected by operating bait fishing nets used in pole and line fishing by professional fishermen, The success of the pole and line fishery of supplemented by visual observations and by Lakshadweep depends, among other factors, operating drag nets and velon screen. directly on the availability in sufficient quantities of suitable live-bait fishes around the islands. CRAFTS AND GEARS Information on the live-bait resources of Laksha­ Mechanised boats of 7.62 and 9,14 m dweep is limited to a few reports from Minicoy- OAL were used for tuna live-bait survey in Jones (1958, 1964) described the fishing different islands. Bait tank measuring 1.6 x O.Bx method, storage and utilisation of bait fish and 0.8m fitted in front of the engine room is divided I isted the various species of live-bait fishes of into two compartments by a movable partition Lakshadweep. Jones (1961 a, 1961 b) has in the middle of the tank. Sea water circulation predicted the potentialities of Spratelloides in the bait tank is maintained by specially delicatulus and S. japonicus as live-bait for pole devised water circulation system, the intake and line fishery for skipjack much earlier than position of which is near the hull along the mechanised fishing was introduced in the nor­ bottom. The quarter deck which is about 1m thern islands of Lakshadweep. Thomas (1964) broad is constructed on the top of the quadrant made some observations on the fluctuations in which serves as the pole and line fishing plat­ the live-bait fishes at Minicoy. Fluctuations in form. The space between the engine room and the seasonal availability of live-baits at Minicoy the fishing platform is used as the fish hold. during the years 1981-85 has been presented by Pillai et al. (1986). However, details of exploited Two types of bait fish nets operated tradi­ bait fish resources and seasonal abundance of tionally for bait fishing in the islands and drag different bait species around the various islands nets measuring 12 m x 1.5 m were employed for is still lacking. the survey. In Minicoy, "Engala dhau", a Exploratory surveys for live-baits covering rectangular net measuring 5.8 x 5.3m made of all the lagoons and adjacent shallow reef areas nylon webbing having mesh size of 6 mm is of the islands have not been attempted till now used for collection of bait fishes like sprats, The important findings of the survey of tuna apogonids, caesiodids, pomacentrids etc. from live-bait resources to assess the availability and the deeper parts of the lagoon and from the abundance forming part of the survey of the nearshore waters on the leeward side. After fisheries potential of Lakshadweep carried out locating bait fish concentrations, the net is from January to March 1987 is presented in this lowered and spread near the bottom with the paper. The results of exploratory tuna live-bait help of four poles tied to its corners. Bait fishes resources survey by the staff of the Research are lured by fish meat paste and the net is Centre at Minicoy around some of the islands quickly hauled up when sufficient quantity of arid reef areas from October 1986 to March 1987 bait fishes are gathered over the net, and the have also been incorporated in this report to baits transferred to the bait tank of the boat. make the same more comprehensive, This traditional method of bait fish capture is not practised in any of the other islands. METHOD OF SURVEY For collection of bait fishes, "Hondeli Observations and collections were made in dhau" made of nylon webbing 30x 1.5 m having the intertidal regions, lagoons, reef flats and mesh size of 6 mm with wooden floats and lead windward and leeward slopes of the islands. sinkers is used in all the islands where pole and The data on the occurrence and relative abun­ line fishing is carried out. This net is used as dance, of potentially important species were an encircling net (Fig. 1 A) to collect baits

BULLETIN43 39 especially sprats atherinids and apogonids from SPECIES COMPOSITION OF LIVE-BAITS shallow areas of the lagoon. The shoal is encircled by a scare line with coconut leaves by The data collected during the surveys indi­ about 6 persons who drive the bait fishes to the cate that the species belonging to the families nylon net operated by two persons. A small Dussumieriidae, Apogonidae, Caesiodidae, netting made of organdie or mosquito curtain Pomacentridae, Emmelichthyidae and AtherinidaeJ cloth is used for collection and transfer to the are present in varying proportions in the colle­ bait tank. ctions made by encircling nets, lift bait fishingH

Flo. 1. A. Collection of live bait by encircling net at Chetlat. B. Gymnocaesio araenteus c SoratellnidePerumal Par, Bitra, Suheli, islands varied from 9.40% to 76.35%, sprats Minicoy and Kalpeni. The length range observed from 11.93% to 51.0*4 and apogonids from in the collections during the survey is 20-55mm- 1.02% to 63.22%. Sprats are more abundant at Spratelloides japonicus (Fig. 1 C) is abundant Chetlat (51.0%), Perumal Par (45.0%), Bitra at Perumal Par, Bangaram and Minicoy. The (37.50%), Suheli (34.60%), Minicoy (33.43%) length ranged from 22-65 mm in the collections. and Kalpeni (30.65%). The percentage compo­ Apogonids are abundant at Kavaratti, Minicoy, sition of sprats around the islands Kadmat and Kadmat and Agatti and the catches are low at Kavaratti is low. Pomacentrids are abundant at Amini, Androth, Chetlat and Kiltan. Atherinids Bangaram (76.35%), Suheli (45.47%), Perumal are" abundant at Amini, Bitra and Kadmat. The Par (41.0%), Chetlat (40.23%), Kalpeni (35.

TABLE 1. Distribution and abundance of live-baits collected during October 1986 to tvlarch 1987

w » >. a. 9 to J^ • a c o E o IB o o m « 6 c a 1 •5 ^ 1 •D — >. a 5 "5 V < c C,E' i2 a. < Q. ,5'- ^ -^ ^ i

m 1. Spratelloides delicatulus XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XXX XX XX XXX XXX 2. Spratelloides japorricus XX XX XX XXX XX XXX XX 3. Stenattierina temmincki XX XXX XX XX 4. Allanetta barnesi XXX XX XXX XX 5. Pranesus pinguis XX XX XXX XX XX XX 6. Rhabdamia cypselurus XXX XX XX XX 1. Rhabdamia gracilis XX XX XXX XX XX XX Q. Archamia fucata XX XXX XX XXX XXX XXX 9 Apogon leptacanthus XXX XX XX XXX XXX XX XX XX 10 Apogon sangiensis XX XX XX XXX XX XXX XX XXX XX 11. Oslorhynchus novemfasciatus XX XX XXX XX XX XX XX XX 12. Ostcrhyncfius apogonides XX XX >x XX XX XX XX 13 Dipterygonotus leucogrammicus XX XX XX XXX 14. Gymnocaesio argenteus XX XX XX XX XXX 15 Caesio chrysozona XXX XX XXX XX XX XX XX XX XX 16 Caesio pisang XX XX XX XX XX 17. Caesio coerulaureus XX XX XX XX XX XXX 18. Lepidozygus tapeinosoma XX XX XXX 19. Chrom/s caeu/eus XXX XX XXX XXX XXX XXX XX XXX XX XXX XX xXX 20. Chromis nigrurus XX XXX XX XX XXX XX XX XX 21. Pomacentrus pavo XX XX XX XX XX XX

XXX Abundant XX Common

BULLETIN 43 41 TABLE 2. Percentaga composition ofliva-bait collected during the live-bait resources survey (October 1986 to March 1987)

Island Sprats Apogonids Caesiodids Pomacentrids Atherinids

Agatti 12.24 38.33 15.38 34.05 Bangaram, Tinnakara,, Pari! 22.63 1.02 — 76.35 — Bitra 37.50 16.35 0.96 32.69 12.50 Chetlat 51.0 — — 40.23 8.77 Kadmat 11.93 38.53 10.09 29.05 10.4 Kalpeni, Cheriyam, Thilakkam 30.65 22.21 9.89 35.21 2.04 Kavaratti 12.36 63.22 1.44 22.98 — Minicoy 33.43 40.19 14.98 9.40 2.00 Perumal Par 45.00 6.50 7.50 41.00 Suheli Par 34.60 9.81 3.63 45.47 6.50

21%), Agatti (34.05%) and Bitra (32.69%) and is estimated as 3994 kg. The trend of production scarce at Minicoy. Apogonids are abundant at of live-baits at Minicoy indicates that the total Kavaratti (63.22%), Minicoy (40.19%), Kadmat catch was relatively less during November- (38.53%) and Agatti (38.33%) whereas the December and the highest in March (i254 Kg). percentage was low at Suheli Par, Perumal Par Catch per unit effort of bait fishes at Minicoy and Bangaram and absent at Chetlat. Caesiodids varied during the above period from 1.47 to are common at Agatti (15.38%), Minicoy (14. 3.10 kg with low values during November- 98%), and Kadmat (10.09) and scarce or absent December and the highest C/E was in March, at other islands. Atherinids are common at Bitra being 3.10 Kg. The cumulative values of C/E (12.5%) and Kadmat (10.4%) and the percentage for the period of survey was 2.23 kg. In other was very low in other islands during the period islands, the C/E varied considerably and the of survey. observed values in order of abundance are given in Table 4. It could be inferred from the catch ISLANDWISE PRODUCTION OF LIVE-BAITS per unit effort of fishing conducted during the survey that fairly good concentrations of bait Reliable data are not available on the ex­ fishes were available at Minicoy, Kadmat, Bitra. ploitation and seasonal abundance of bait fishes Agatti and Suheli Par whereas the availability from different islands in the Lakshadweep except of bait fishes was low at Kavaratti and Chetlat. at Minicoy. The seasonal pattern of exploitation of live-baits from October 1986 to March 1987 TABLE 4. Catch/unit effort of bait fishes at Minicoy is given in Table 3. The total live- in different islands. baits caught at Minicoy during the above period

TABLE 3. Tuna live -bait production at Island C,E (kg) Minicoy during October 1936 to March 1987 Kadmat 1.30 Month Total live-bait Bitra 0.87 (kg) Agatti 0.82 October 629.5 Suheli Par 0.79 November 387.5 Bangaram 0.69 December 561.0 Kalpeni 0.61 January 691.5 Perumal Par 0.40 February 410.5 Kavaratti 0.35 March 1254.0 Chetlat 0.28

42 CMFR/ The highly fluctuating nature of bait fish SPAWNING OF LIVE-BAITS catch at Minicoy has already been dealt with Information on the spawning of tuna live- by Piliai et al. (1986). The abundance of baits is restricted to only three or four species different species vary highly in different years (Madan Mohan and Kunhikoya, 1986; Madan and seasons. According to the above authors, Mohan etal., 1986 and Piliai at. al., 1986). The during 1981-82 season, Spratelloides delica- blue sprat, Spratelloides delicatulus is found in tulus formed 64.16% followed by Archamia scattered shoals in clear water in the shallow fucata, 22.23% whereas during 1983-84 season, regions of the lagoon. Specimens in all stages these constituted 32.68% and 30.56% respecti­ of maturity were recorded at Minicoy and ripe vely and in 1984-85 season, S. delicatulus group of ova ranged in diameter from 0.44 mm consisted of 36.1 %, the second position being to 0.76 mm with a discernible mode at 0.61mm. taken by Caesio coeru/aureus, 18.5%. During Based on the information on the avilability of the present survey at Minicoy, apogonids, fishes in different maturity stages in different sprats and caesiodids constituted 40.19%, months, it is presumed that the species spawns 33.43% and 14.98% respectively. When the in Minicoy lagoon more than once in a spawn­ total catches from all the islands and reefs ing season which is during March-April to surveyed is considered as a whole, Spratalloides December. delicatulus constituted 27.0%, apogonids 26.0%, The silver sprat, S. gracilis occurs in Mini­ pomacentrids, chiefly Chromis caeruleus 32.4%, coy waters during post- and pre-monsoon caesiodids 8.0% and atherinids 6.6%. Lepidozy- months. Specimens in all stages of maturity gus tapeinoscma, Gymnocaesio argenteus and were recorded and in mature ovaries ova ranged Dipterygonotus leucogrammicus which used to in diameter from 0.38 mm to 0.61 mm with a be important constituents of bait fish catches at mode at 0.51 mm. The species spawns more Minicoy in the past has either declined con­ than once in a spawning season which is from siderably or absent in the catches in recent September to April, years. Piliai ef a/. (1986) stated that during 1981-82 fishing season there was a gradual Madan Mohan etal. (1986) observed that decline in the live-bait catches at Minicoy from mature specimens and juveniles of the blue November to March 1982, whereas during puller, Chromis caeruleus almost throughout 1982-83 season live-bait catches increased the year and indicated that breeding in this from November to January and declined in species is continuous from August to April. February and March. However, during 1984-85 Spent fishes were not observed during January to April and based on the occurrence of "high season, the highest catch was recorded during percentage of matured and ripe spawning fishes March and this agrees with the langings in along with recovering stages" it was also 1987. In general, the premonsoon period of presumed that spawning takes place during the January-April is more productive with regard to above period. live-bait fishery when compared to the post- monsoon months. HABIT AND HABITAT OF TUNA LIVE-BAITS

In all the islands, live baits are mostly in Minicoy, a wide variety of bait fishes caught from the lagoon. Only occasionally, collected from the vicinity of the reefs and from tuna boats have been found to catch live-baits the lagoon are used for pole and line fishery, outside the reef on the north eastern side of whereas in other islands of the Lakshadweep Minicoy island. Some species like Caesio mostly Spratalloides spp. are in common use coerulaureus, Dipterygonotus leucogrammicus, and apogonids and atherinids are used only Gymnocaesio argenteus and Lepidozygus when the former is not available in good tapeinoscma and Dipterygonotus leucogrammi­ quantities. The present exploitation of tuna cus which formed the major constituents of live live-bait and consequently that of skipjack by baits at Minicoy some years ago failed to appear pole and line fishing at Amini, Chetlat, Kalpeni in good quantities from 1981-82 fishing season and Kiltan is low when compared to that of onwards. These are found in the deeper parts Suheli Par, Agatti, Minicoy and Kavaratti. of the lagoon and also on the north-eastern

BULLETIN 43 43 side of Minicoy. Caesio spp. are found in of live-baits like desertion of live-bait popu­ deeper areas of the northern part of Minicoy lations resulting from damage caused to coral lagoon and in the reef area. They are generally reef, lack of recruitment of young ones to the fished towards the close of the fishing season population and increased demand for live-baits. from the outer part of the lagoon and northern Coral colonies which are ideal for the sur­ side of Ragandi point. These migrant species vival of live-bait fishes are prone to natural cause high fluctuations in the live-bait fishery senescence. Blasting the reefs and dredging and their disappearance from the lagoon during for deepening the boat channels in the islands some fishing seasons is probably due to adverse results in siltation in the areas of coral growth, changes in environmental conditions. thereby causing the death of coral colonies and Some live-bait species inhabit the lagoon the associated live-bait species. However, the throughout their life. Spratelloides delicatulus present survey indicates that resources of live- generally occurs in scattered shoals near the baits, both migrant and resident forms available inner reef area in the lagoons of the islands. around Kadmat, Bitra, Agatti, Suheli Par, Ban- Young fish found on shoal sand and coral flats garam, Minicoy and Perumal Par are not fully in clear water are easily caught by encircling exploited. net. Mature specimens have been observed to The requirement of live-bait for pole and occur occasionally in the coastal area of the line fisheries has increased considerably in lagoon. The species begins to appear in the recent years owing to the increased use of lagoon of the islands just after the south-west mechanised boats in pole and line fishing monsoon. S. japonicus found in the lagoon operations in most of the islands. Tuna fishing near coral colonies have been found to move to by pole and line using live-baits in an organised deeper waters during low tide. Apogonidg manner was in vogue only in Minicoy island which show wide annual fluctuations in the till 1963. The pole and line fleet which con­ live-bait catches often live in the vicinity of sisted of 9 boats in 1963 (exclusively in Mini­ coral colonies in the lagoon of most of the coy) has now increased to about 130 boats and islands. Atherinids, especially Paranesus the tuna landing has reached 4807 tonnes in pinguis, Stenatherina temminicki and Allanetta barnesi are found mostly closer to the shore in 1986. There is a greater demand for live-baits the lagoon of the islands. These are sometimes than in the past and the fishermen exploit the caught in good quantities during the peak tuna easily accessible stocks of resident species to fishing season and towards the close of the the possible extent. This is evident from the fishing season. Sometimes Allanetta barnesi exploitation pressure on Chromis caeruleus at and Spratelloides delicatulus have been obser­ Minicoy and Spratelloides delicatulus in the ved in mixed schools. Many species found in northern islands, especially at Agathi, Bangaram, the reef areas are used as live-bait in Minicoy. Suheli Par and Bitra. The production of live- Whichever species is available in the bait baits at Minicoy has recorded an increase of collections at Minicoy are used as bait fish even about 133% from the level of 2799 kg in 1981- though only a few of them are considered good 82 to 6457 kg in 1986-87 which shows that for pole and line fisheries. there is no scarcity in availability. There is only a marginal increase of five tuna fishing boats EXPLOITATION PRESSURE AND at Minicoy from those present in 1981-82 (31) ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE and hence it is clear that the catch per boat in 1986-87 is much higher than in 1981-82. Due In the absence of live-bait landing data from to the fluctuations in abundance of ,different different islands over a long span of years, it is live-bait species during different seasons, it is difficult to find out whether there is a decline possible that the major species generally pre­ in the live-bait catch or not. Silas »t al. ferred are not available easily to the 'fishermen (1986) were of the view that scarcity of live- and this gives an impression that ther is shortage baits is a limiting factor for the expansion of of live-baits for the existing tuna fishing boats. tuna fishery and James et al. (1986) have It is probable that seasonal viriation in the adduced several reasons for the acute shortage recruitment of migrant species such as Caesio

44 CMFRI spp., Dipterygonotus leucogrammicus and GEORGE, P.C, B. T. ANTONY RAJA AND K. Lepidozygus tape/nosoma into the lagoonal C.GEORGE 1977. Fishery resources environment is due to the altered habitat which of the Indian Economic Zone. Silver is not conducive for their survival Conseque­ Jubilee Souvenir, IFP: 79-116. ntly there will be increased fishing pressure on JAMES, P. S. B. R., T. JACOB, C. S. GOPINA- the available stocks of resident forms in the THAPILLAI AND P. P. PILLAI 1986. lagoon. Prospects of development of marine CONCLUSION fisheries resource in Lakshadweep. Mar. Fish. In for. Serv. T & E Ser., 68: Generally, live-baits remaining after the 51-54. day's fishing are stored in the storage tank JONES, S. 1958. Tuna live bait fishery of floated in the lagoon. Mortality of live-baits Minicoy Island. Indian J. Fish., s (2); stored in the bait tank of the boat and also in 300-307. the storage tank floated in the lagon is very high due to overstocking. Measures have to be JONES, S. 1961 a. Spratelloides delicatulus taken to find out the optimum requirement of (Bennett) as a potential live bait for tuna live bait for a day's tuna fishing as well as tuna in the Laccadives. J. mar. biol. the maximum storage capacity of fhe storage Ass. India. 2 (2):(1): 103-104. tanks in order to avoid wastage. JONES, S.1S61 b. Further notes on Sprate­ lloides delicatulus (Bennett) as a tuna From the extensive coral boulders and coral live bait with a record of S. japonicus debris found along the reefs and also close to (Houttuyn) from the Laccadive Sea. some of the islands, it appears that the damage Ibid., 2 (2) : 267-268. to the coral colonies and thereby to the live-bait populations by cyclonic storms and siltation JONES, S-1964. A preliminary survey of the caused by the fury of nature is much more common tuna bait fishes of Minicoy deleterious than the damage to corals by dred­ and their distribution in the Laccadive ging the boat channel. in the Laccadive Archipelago. Proc. Symp. Scomb. Fishes. Mar. Biol. Ass. For obtaining maximum sustainable yield of India, Mandapam Camp, 2 ; 643-680. tuna from Lakshadweep waters which is repor­ tedly as high as 50,000 tonnes (George et at. MADAN MOHAN AND K. K. KUNHIKOYA 1977^ knowlege of exploited and potential 1986. Biology of the bait fishes resources of live-baits is required. The total Spratelloides delicatulus (Bennettj area of the lagoons in the Lakshadweep is not and S. japonicus (Houttuyn) from very extensive (420 km) to support live-baits Minicoy waters. Bull. Cent. Mar. Fish. sufficient enough to capture the skipjack re­ Res. Inst., 36:196-200. sources available in the Laccadive sea. It MADAN MOHAN, C. S. GOPINATHA PILLAI would appear that suitable live-bait resources AND K. K. KUNHIKOYA 1986. The are also available in the islands of Lakshadweep Biology of the blue-puller Chromis in regions not exploited at present as is evident caeruleus (Cuvier) from Minicoy Atoll. from the fact that mostly Spratelloides spp. and Indian J. Fish., 33 (4) : 457-470. atherinids are only collected by pole and line fishermen from islands other than Minicoy. The PILLAI, P. P., M. KUMARAN, C. S. G. PILLAI, leeward side of the islands which is generally MADAN MOHAN, G. GOPAKUMAR, more protected from strong winds and currents P. LIVINGSTON AND M. SRINATH are likely to harbour some migrant species and 1986. Exploited and potential resources the possibility of exploiting the same by lift of live-bait fishes of Lakshadweep. nets as used in Minicoy when other bait fishes Mar. Fish . Inf. Serv. T & E Ser., 68. are scarce in the lagoons have to be explored. 1815, 15-25 THOMAS, P. T. 1964. A study on the fluctu­ REFERENCES ations of the major tuna live-bait fishes CMFRI 1986. Live-bait resources of Laksha­ of Minicoy. Proc. Symp. Scomb. dweep. In: CMFRI Newsletter. 34: Fishes Mar. Biol. Ass. India' Mandapam 5 pp. Camp, 2:626-630.

BULLETIN 43 45 6. RESOURCES OF ORNAMENTAL FISHES

V. Sriramachandra Murthy, JVl. Kumaran and R. S. Lalmohan

INTRODUCTION Ill team: Androth, Kavaratti, Suheli, Kalpeni and Minicoy during 6.3.1987-1.4. Among the fishes of Lakshadweep islands, 1987. those of ornamental value (aquarium fishes) are very abundant: of the 601 species of marine In all the islands the fishes were collected fishes belonging to 126 families reported from using drag net, encircling net and cast net. In these Islands (Jones and Kumaran, 1980), at the lagoons, the collections were made by en­ least 300 species belonging to over 40 families circling nets Fig. 15 A-D and those in the reef are ornamental fishes. In addition to the taxo- flats with drag nets Fig. 15. E: the drag net nomic account of fishes of Lakshadweep islands was laid in a semicircular fashion on the flats by Jones and Kumaran (1980), information on in suitable areas and stones were placed in the ornamental fishes of these islands is restricted net to provide hiding space for fishes; the fishes to the works of Pillai er a/. (1983), Madan were driven into the net from the open end and Mohan efa/ (1986). and Kumaran and Gopa- then the net was hauled. Every effort was made kumar (1986). There is, however, no infor­ to collect all the species available in the area. mation on the relative abundance or areas of Cast net was also operated on the reef flats abundance of different species of ornamental during low tide periods ; the net was laid over a fishes from different islands. There is con­ big stone and then the stone was moved several siderable demand for live ornamental fishes in times or lifted up, the fishes underneath the several countries (Tomey 1985, 1986) and the stone get entangled in the net and thus caught. present export market price of each fish, Observations on the distribution and abundance depending on the species, ranges from Rs. 16.10 of ornamental fishes were also made visually to Rs. 272.25 with an average of Rs. 90.60 in and through underwater surveys in deeper areas Netherlands and from Rs. 4.96 to Rs. 148 with of the lagoons. an average of Rs. 34.85 in South East Asian Countries. In West Germany, each specimen of Collections were made from the lagoons some of the species of ornamental fishes from and reef flats by dividing them into arbitrary India can fetch from Rs. 99 to Rs. 810 (Anon zones so that representative samples of the 1986). In view of the demand for the ornamental species inhabiting the "zones" could be colle­ fishes and the possible earning of foreign cted. Each zone was intensively studied: speci­ exchange through export of live ornamental mens were collected from different areas in each fishes and also in view of the lack of adequate "zone" to get a general picture of distribution information on distribution and abundance of and abundance of different groups of fishes in different species in different islands, a survey the lagoons and reef flats. After collection, the was conducted during January-March 1987 fishes were taken to the shore, identified in and the results with reference to ornamental fresh condition, photographs taken and then fishes are presented here. preserved in 5% formalin. All the collections were brought to the main land. MATERIAL AND METHODS ORNAMENTAL FISHES OF LAKSHADWEEP The survey was conducted by three teams ISLANDS as follows: Jones and Kumaran (1980) recorded about I team; Chetlat, Kiltan, Kadmat and Amini 300 species of ornamental fishes belonging to islands during 5.1.1987-6.2.1987. over 40 families (Fig. 1). The most dominant II team: Bitra, Thinnakara, Bangaram and group is Labridae with 45 species, followed by Agatti islands during 9.2.1987-25.2. Pomacentridae (35), Apogonidae (22), Muraeni- 1987. dae (22) Serranidae (21), Blenniidae (20)'

46 CMFRl FAMILIES Fig. 1. Number of species of ornamental fishes in each familyireported from the^Lakshadweep islands.

21

UJ U La.U to i

O or LU CD

Z

FAMILIES Fig. 2- Number of species of ornamental fishes in each family collected from the Lakshadweep islands during January-March 1987.

BULLETIN 43 47 apogonids and holocentrids. Pomacentrida* are abundant both in the lagoon and reef flat, acanthurids in the reef flat and Holo- centridae and Apogonidae are abundant in the lagoon. y///////////////////y////////////^^^^ MftAnBWWAA^pjK^- 2. Kiltan: At this island Pomacentridae, Labridae, Holocentridae and Acanthuridae are abundant. Of these pomacentrids are A ND ROT H more abundant in the lagoon whereas Labrids in the reef flat.

1 Common i Abundant

rSMO E 41 Fifl. 10. Map of Androth island thowing th» distribution of ornamental fishts.

lagoons of different islands are shown^Jn table 1 and in Figures 3-14 (the areas of abundance of ornamental fishes are shown by shaded areas).

1. Chetlat: At this island, pomacentrids are

most dominant followed by acanthurids, 1 101

59' r-"--"-^. I Common N Abundant 58' 9. 34' 72''I2'E 13' 14' 15' 16' 17'. 18' Fig. 12. Map of Suhalipar showing tha distribution of ornamantal fishes. 3. Kadmat: At this island also, pomacentrids are more abundant followed by labrids^ holocentrids, and blenniids, the former two 33' groups being more abundant in the reef flat. 4. Amini: Only two families, Pomacentridae and Labridae are abundant in this island, both in the reef flat. of the family Muraenidae are common in the reef flats of ""SAi-J-' 32' this island. 10' Common Abundont 5. Bitra: Labridae, and Scorpaenidae are most abundant in the reef flat. Only one species each of the first two families is abundant IZ^ZZ E 36' 37' in the lagoon whereas scorpaenids were not Fig. 11. Map of Kavaratti island showing the distribution of ornamental fishes. seen in the lagoon.

50 CMFRI 10. Kavaratti: Only Labridae and Acanthuridae are abundant, particularly on the reef flat of this island. 11. Suheli: Labrids and apogonids are abund­ ant in this island. 8' 12. Kalpeni: Labridae is the only abundant group here both in the lagoon and reef flat.

13. Minicoy: Pomacentridae, Labridae and 7' Acanthuridae are abundant both in the reef flat and lagoon of this island.

The above observations show the following:

a. In 9 of the 13 islands surveyed, there are more number of ornamental fish species in the reef flats than in the lagoons, though some species are abundant in the lagoon and some in the reef flat, in almost all the 5' islands reef flat is richer in ornamental fishes than the lagoon.

N b. Species of Pomacentridae and Labridae are 4' not only more in number but they are also to' Common abundant in almost all the islands. Abundant Rare 7y57'E 38' 39' 4.0'

Fig. 13. Map of Kilpeni i«l«nd showing tht distribution of omsmentil f lsh«i.

6. Thinnaktra: Pomacentridae, Mullidae Labridae and Acanthuridae are abundant in this island: three species of Pomacentridae, 2 each of IVIullidae and Acanthuridae are abundant in the lagoon whereas two species each of the above four families are abundant in the reef flat. 7. Bangatam: Pomacentridae, Labridae, Cha- etodontidae, Mullidae, and Balistidae are abundant in this island; except pomacent­ ridae, the fishes of all the above families are abundant in the reefs. 8. kgat'y. Pomacentrds are the most abundant group here followed by Labridae, Scorpa- enidae and others. In all these cases, reef ^ Common flat is richer in ornamental fishes than the ^ Abundant lagoon. 53 Rare 9. Androth: Only two species of pomacen­ 73°1 E 3' tridae and one species of Labridae are Fig. 14. Mip of Minicoy island showing th« distribution abundant in the reef flat. of ornamental f ishss. 51 BULLETIN 43 :m-'iJH'W'Jkf'^^'^^^A D ,^,u:v-.*' *;.riai^;ii^.t; f# ^#

> •*,• V^!^-. 'i^itjCi ¥ Sn^.:g *

I!!i t

,«^;>ft ^e*;".'

Fig. 15. A-D. Collection of fishes using encircling net in the lagoons. The drag net used in collection of fish in the reef flat.

52 CMFRl Hi, t. i'mt,pviuttx hifasviiiiu.s, f. (>>.•„,en,fmmn-

Ag-iti and Bitra haue very ncli r«K>oiiH;eft o( C tei^alerists. <: chtysuius, DdSt.yiius Ofii.'jrm;n!ai fislies ab levealetl by thu total aruadiis, Haih'Jwere;; si.,i/,t/faris, Sieiho tuimUer and dl>uii(laiice uf species ffdiowecl i'ulis axillaris, S. stnyiveiiler. S, allMn-ittaia by the (jroup of four islands Kinhmt, Chet- Jhala^soiiiii l>HfdiAi<:kii Lahrnidtsi dmh//- lat. Kiltfjii and Air.int Ayatti and Anclrofli alus. Acafilhtjtus (nostegux, A ihivafm, ri'Sfjoclively are tlio ficheat and poorest Ho/ovent/iis tliailenn'i. (Xstorhynchus no i'AlaiHk in rerjarcl fo the aDunclatico of vemfiisciaiU'j. 0. endekntarru'd, Afc^mttiM ornarnfefilal fish speci««, li ly also clear /uceta, Chaetodoo aurigsi, /st,)d( iiotui iital tlio we&tern and fiorlhefn gtoup of traetuy, Mnifohhchthyf, .'•.bfr.ufnsii, M I'slancls are rich in ornatneritai fi.^hes atiriflaintm. Ptemn uo^/iP^- DtmJjtMhkus /abra. fUt/haaaanfiius acakatus md H fhu abundant species ;(re ', Abudeiduf rectiifigiiius. All those JislfCi, ron.jo m f.DfcMus, A sexfasc/atm, A. cifiguium, A loriyfli Irons 2.5 cm io J'A 0 ciri Soin*; biiicefhtus. A ufimce/faiiis, A^ xamhrMom. t^peckir, of mmnnmUA h-Jio-i >;ol!t''(;t(;d from A. mnatus, A, glaucus, chmnil'; caeruhus, ciifforeMi u,i(in('lt (irt-hhowii in Fiys 1A ;?1, liULU llM4i b3 .•I, /'I'wt/i/j.Tw w!.v;/i'iMi.v, f(. Cluwuniun itmuld, C. ( xanthucepha'tus a. C. aufi^u. /;'. {.;, viirifieilm, f- llvmotlms uatminaiu);

S4 cmfu J'!g^ iK, J. DitM-flhis ariiamts, B. Chrotiiis cafriiieus, C Ahihii'fduf saxatilis i), A. surdhhis, E, A. dickii, F. /L xnntliozma

BUtii;iiN4;4 !>5 capiiluiis, I. li u,ih>i'.f' / II. ^ (huiiyn

gg CMFRI BUlL6tlN43 '.H'm:-> 5^r,

'•••f}"! jt'jliMDK'lUf) |l'|ii'l|;) jsllf? |l'll,jjir; J 'j: ,t||('|||-|l|ir'l •tlMCJ /.(! [.;.i'.-'iS('-ri '!",,!!' Ml {jilC ' .^i|.."!' Mjl l/ipljn I'MISj llji'Mi IdlHIIfi ' .'flMIUWlll! .•,|ijrjitfii-.l|f» » IH •.t-,')it; UI |i|i,!/M!ii|> 'If '•ttniiijj'tf;!'' .(it'ir. put; ,'j|fji |itV't;-fiC'".jilMf |r;C>f( jti.| f,v«tj',ij |i!iMiHllBUi!)ifl'.t,'l;!l(|!l!.' > '• fllH-Jf! Jl' O • |i!jUf)|)Ol.'ll'lj ) UKHJ /,||l;l,'liK;fi iUI! II10|H)<| /<|)ijtr; !(llAn •jMOOfii'l DID' %ii:/i>ff,f> '!/ |HM; •,7/if;;,'i.u'/\.v. 'I/ 'y/z/iwt's lurpinnii; .-ni? ' |i'Jo;! JWOIJM MiooBi'i !M|| m tiiep •1/ '.w/////>s' /»/j/,'/w/t'' ^'1 |.0|iii..;wil,.( '.piiiu.j i 'inijir .•JP spiJ.l«l '''"^"5 piiH 57iMi?/i/» s/»//4.?5-«j

0JI7 ".i.-i.) (I. •,-•.!•..')-!-•- I'.;H;I||>P ;ii|| -'.ijuqr') ('»'^'rl "i'lfpurHi!? /.,S-'A ,.,jft •,;I!JM| ,'«Oi|l HiiuiV ':tH,Mi';. ;HUO., 11, ,,.i'.. '.pMiMiiif.M.f M-iiiMw'.ojoii I"''!"'' '"">'•'"' '•"l^ thrni'v'H P'^i"m'"'ni'm \inui'W,^, -SI...,.1,1 ..-.!,.... !.. ,pu X,,f.,iniM!.l r.,,. M"«"|K si «, ;-^f. i-r; mi>i,« .O;,IH ii. ,!i.i.HfK|.; mu ';,r|) ,o.„ .•,.,., ...i..r...,s .,,s ,.. viOi,jod /pun, '•!» M>«l'"A|ir"» |,iii> ',pii<,|.| i.>.|, f«K,iC.t,r,„ n, „

'•""'•'"'*•"' •••'" ''"*•'" '""" •"*" '^'^ """"* "'•'' KdnrU-l') JNViUO.IWI If) iVIISiyil

<(,7W/!n.V.i/'/« ,<,?/•.f'/!I,'//''?'.» •'/ '•nin)]ii>.\ siiu .>•!'il '(f '(f c

TABLE 1: List of ornamental fishes with information on relative abundance of each of them in the reef flats 4^ and lagoons of different islands. u

SI. Family Species Chetlat Kiltan Kad- Amini Bitra Thin- Ban- Agatti And- Kava- Suheli KaIpe- Mini- No. mat nakara garam roth ratti ni coy

1 Muraenidae Echidna zebra X — — — — — — — — — — — — 2 E. nebuJosa — — — XX X — X XX — X X — — 3 E.polyzona — — — — X — — — — — — — 4 Uropterygius marmoratus — — — — — — — — — — X — — 5 pictus XXX — — X XXX X XX X X X — — 6 6. pseudothyrso idea __ — XX— — ______7 G. pictus — — — — — — — — — — — — — 8 G.fimbriatus _ _ _ — XXX XX X XXX _ X X — _ 9 G.petelli ___ — X— X___ — — — 10 Ophichthyidae Myrichthys colubrinus — — — — X — —^X — — — — — 11 M. maculosus — — — — — — — — — — — — 12 Callechelys melanotaenia — — — — — — — — — — ^ ~~ — 13 Leiuranus semicinctus — — — — — — "^ — — — ^^ XX ^— — 14 Fistulariidae Fistularia petimba — — XXX — X XX XXX XXX 15 Syngnathidae Choeroichthys sculptus — — — — XX XX XX — 16 C. intestiualis — — — — XX X XX — 17 Holacentridae Holocentrus sammara XX — — — XX — X XXX f- — — XX X 18 H.diadema XXX XXX XX X _ _ _ _ v^_ - _ _ X 19 H. lacteoguttatum — — — — — — — — XX— — __ 20 Myripristis adustus — XX — X 21 M.murdjan XX - XX - XX XX X XX - - ^ " I 22 Pseudogrammdae Pseudogramma polyacanthus _—- — — XX XX — —- — — 23 Plesiopidaa Plesiops caeruleolineatus XX — X — XX— X XX— — — — — 24 Apogonidae Pristiapogon fraenatus XX — 25 p. snyderi — 26 Ostorhynchus savayensis XX — — ~~ YYY 27 O. novemfasciatus XXX — XX 28 O. endakataenia — — — — XX— XXXX— — — — — o

SI. Family Species Chetlat Kiltan Kad- Amini Bitra Thinna- Ban- Agatti Androth Kava- Suheii Kal- Mini- No. mat kara garam ratti peni coy

29 O. moluccensis 30 Archamia fucata — — xxx — — XX 31 Apogon leptacanthus — — — — XX XX XX 32 Cheilodepterus lachneri .— — — — X 33 Paramia quinquelineata XX 34 Mullidae Upeneus tragula XX XXX xxx 35 U. vittatus XX XX X 36 U. arge XX X 37 Mulloidichthys samoensis xxx XX 38 M, auriflama XXX XXX xxx XX XX 39 Parupeneus barberinus XX XX XX XX XX X X — — XX X — 40 P. bifasciatus — XX X 41 P. trifasciatus — XXX X 42 P. macronemus — xxx X XX 43 Pempheridae Pempheris oualensis — XX 44 Kyphosidae Kyphosus c/nerascens — X 45 K. raigiensis — X X 46 Platacidae P/atax orbicularis — XXX XXX 47 P. tiera _ xxx XX 48 Monodactylidae Monodactylus argenteus — XX X 49 Chaetodentidae Chaatodon lunula — XX 50 C. citrinellus _ XX XX 51 C. xanthocephalus — XX 52 C. auriga — XX — X XX — XX XXX X X 53 C. melanotus X X 54 C, meyari — XX X 55 C. trifasciatus — XX 56 Henlochus acuminatus — XX 57 Pomacanthidae Pomacanthodes semicirculatus — XX 58 Pomacentridae Amphiprion nigrepes — X X 59 Lepidozygous tapeinosoma — XX XX 60 Dascylius aruanus xxx xxx XX — xxx XX X XXX — — XX XXX o s CD c fr- 5 Si. Family Species Chetlat Kiltan Kad- Amini Bitra Thinna- Ban- Agatti Androth Kava- Suheli Kal- Mini- £ No. mat kara garam rattif peni coy

61 D. trimacu/atus — — — — — xxxx — — — — x 62 D. reticulatus — -r- — — — — — — — — — — xx 63 Chromis chrysurus — xxx — — — — x xxx xx — — — — 64 C. caeru/eus xx xxx xxx — xxx xxx xxx xxx xx — — — — 65 C. ternatensis — — — — xxx x xxx xxx xxx — — — — 66 Pomacentrus nigricans x — xxx — — — — xx — — — 67 P. littoralis ___x x — — xx— — — __ 68 Abudefduf saxatilis — xxxxxx — — ______69 A. sexfasciatus xxx xxx ___ — _xx — — __ 70 A. sodidus xxx xx — — — — — — — 71 A. septemfasciatus xx — xx — — — — — — _xx 72 A. cingulum xxx — — — x — x — — — 73 A. dicliii __xx — — — — __ _ 74 A. biocellatus xxx — — — — — — x — 75 A. uniocellatus xxx xx xxx x — — — — — — xx 76 A. xanthozone xxx — — — — — — — x — 77 A. zonatus xxx — xxxxxxx — — x 78 A. glaucus xxx xxx xxx xx — — — — x —. 79 A. bengalensis — — — — — x 80 Labridal Gomphosus varius — xx — — — — xx x - 81 G- caeruleus — ___x — — x— — 82 Cheilio inermis — — — — __ — xx 83 Halichoeres scapu/aris xxx — — — — x xx — — — xxx 84 H. notopsis — xx — — — — _ — _ 85 H./cawarin __xxxxx xxx — — — ___ 86 H. centriquadrus ___ — __ — — _ xx — xx — 87 Stethojulis axillaris xxx xxx xx xxx' xx xx x xx — xx xx xx 88 S. strigivener — — xxx xxx— — — __ _ _ _ 89 S. trilineata _xx — — — _ — _— — _ — _ 90 S. albovittata xxx xxxx — — — — — — — _ xx SI. Family Species Chetlat Kiltan Kad- Amini Bitra Thin- Ban- Agatti And- Kava- Suheli KaIpe- Mini- No. mat nakara garam roth ratti ni coy

91 S. phaekadopleura — — — XX — X — 92 Thalassoma amblycephalus — — XX ______XX 93 7". hardwicki — — — XX XX XXX 94 T. quinquivittata — — XX 95 Labroides dimieiatus — — X X — XX XX XXX XX XXX XX 96 Macropharyngodon meligris — — XX XX — X 97 Cheilinus chlorurus — — XX — X — 98 C. trilobatus — — X — XX — X ~ XX 99 Cymolutes lecluse — — XX X 100 Novaculichthys taeniourus — — 101 Callyodontidae Cryptotomus spinidens — — XX — 102 Callyodon taeniurus — — XX XX XX — — X 103 C. harid — — XX 104 C. bataxiensis — XX XX 105 C. sexvittatus X — 106 C. ghobban — — X 107 Parapercidae Parapercis hexophthalma — — XX 108 Blennidae Aspidonotus tractus — — XXX — XX X 109 Patroscirtes pindae — — XX — 110 Istiblennius edentulus XX XX XX — X — — 111 Zanclidae Zanclus cornutus — — XX X 112 Acanthuiidae Ctenochaetus strigosus — XX 113 XXX XXX XXX XX XX XX X XXX X XX X X X 114 A. leucostemon X XX X X XX X X XX 115 A. lineatus XX XX XXX X 116 A. matoides XX 117 A. elongatus XX 118 Electridae Electro ides sexguttatus. — XX — XX 119 Gobiidae Acentrogobius ornatus — XX — 120 Scorpaenidae Pterois volitans — — xx XX — XXX — — o 09 c z 4>>

SI. Family Species Che- Kittan Kad- Amini Bitra Thinna- Banga- Agatti And- Kava- Suheli Kal- Mini- No. P. antennate Mat mat kara ram roth ratti peni Coy

121 Scorpaenodes guamensis — — — — xx — — x — — — — — 122 Dendrochirus zebra — — — — xxx x xx — — — — — 123 Sebastapistes strongia — — — — xx x x xxx — — — — — 124 Caracanthus unipinnus — — — x— — — — — — — — — 125 Caracanthidae C. maculatus — — — — — — — — — — — xx — 126 Rhineacanthus aculeatus — — — — — — — — — — — xx — 127 Balistidae /?. rectangulus x — — x — x xxx xx — xxx xxx xxx xx 128 Ba/isto/des viridescens xx — — — xx x xx xxx — — — — — 129 Melichthys niger — — — — — — — — — — — xx — 130 Ostracion tuberculatus — — — — — — — — — — xx — — 131 Ostracanthidae Lophodiodon calori — xx — — — — — — — — — — — 132 Diodontidae Canthigaster margaritotus x xx — xxxxx x xx — — — — 133 Canthigasteridae Sphoeroides hypse/ogeneion — x x — — — — — — — — — 134 Lagocephalidae Tetraodon nigropunctatus xxx — — — — — — — — — — — — 135 Tetrandontidae T. meleagris — — — xxx — — — — — — — — 136 T. hispidus — — — xxx x x — — •— — — — 137 Antennarius chironectes — — — — — — — — — — x — — 138 Antennaridae A. coecineus — — — — — •— — — — — xx — —

XXX : Abundant; XX : Common: K : Rare - not seen REMARKS REFERENCES The survey as mentioned above was con­ ducted during a short period of three months ANNON. 1986. Report on the training m'ssion and thirteen islands were covered during the on ornamental fish export to the Ne- survey. The results are very useful for an • therlands. Marine Products Export appraisal of the availability of different species Development Authority, Cochin. 24 pp. of ornamental fishes in different islands and for planing a comprehensive future research on JONES, S and M. KUMARAN. 1980. Fishes of the resources of ornamental fishes of different the Laccadive Archipelago. The Nature islands. The data collected, however, are not Conservation and Aquatic Sciences sufficient for estimation of resource potential Service, Trivandrum. 760 pp. of these fishes. In this connection the following points need consideration: KUMARAN, M and G. GOPAKUMAR. 1986. Potential resources of fishes other than i. The Information on population characteris­ tuna in Lakshadweep. Mar Fish. Infor. tics is restricted to one or two species Serv. T&E. Ser., 68 : 41 -45. that too from Minicoy only. There is also no information on seasonal variations of important species. There is therefore need to MADAN MOHAN, C. S. GOPINADHA PILLAI study various aspects of biology of dominant and K. K. KUNHIKOYA. 1986. Biology species of ornamental fishes from different of the blue puller, Chromis caeruieus islands to enable a detailed study of stock (Cuvier), from the Minocoy atoll, ind/an assessment of these fishes. Initially, the J. Fish.. 33 (4) : 457-470. study should be undertaken for at least two years to enable advice on the exploitation PILLAI, C. S. GOPINADHA, MADAN MOHAN pattern. AND K. K. KUNHI KOYA. 1983. On an unusual massive recruitment of the ii. Presently the exploitation of ornamental reef fish Ctenochaetus strigosus (Be- fishes is only on a sustenance basis and nnet) Perciformes : Acanthuridae) to there is no organised exploitation for co­ the Minicoy atoll and its significance. mmercial purpose. Since the ornamental indianJ. Fish.. 30 (2) 261-268. fishes are associated with corals and asso­ ciated fauna and flora in the islands, any exploitation on a commercial scale can TOMEY, W. A. 1985. Survey in the Union result in destruction of the environment Territory of Lakshadweep, the Bombay which in turn can also eventually affect the and Madras area: Promotion of export fish populations inhabiting these areas. trade Indian ornamental fishes from Further, since the areas are easily accessible, marine as well as freshwater origin and the exploitation of reef fishes is likely to ornamental plants. Report to CBl., the quickly lead to depletion of stocks and Netherlands and the Marine Products therefore utmost caution has to be exercised Export Development Authority, Cochin. before planning exploitation and export trade of ornamental fishes. Fishing with traps is suitable for ornamental fishes; this TOMEY, W. A. 1986. Promotion of Export trade is not likely to lead to destruction of habitat Indian ornamental fishes from Marine and therefore can be encouraged. However as well as freshwater origin and aquatic exploitation of ornamental fish species from plants for the aquarium industry: The the lagoons and reef flats can be undertaken pilot project : Conclusions and reco- on a smaller scale, and the same should be mendations. Report on the project closely monitored. results to CBI/MPEDA.

64 CMFRI 7. OTHER FIN-FISH RESOURCES

M. Kumaran, R. S. Lai Mohan and V. Sreeramachandra Murty

INTRODUCTION of three months from January to the first week of April 1987. Fish collections were made from Fishing is a profitable source of livelihood the lagoons, reef flats and also around the for the people of Lakshadweep where traditional islands for the purpose. Fishes were collected methods of capture are still in vogue to a great by drag net, cast net, pole and line, hook and line extent. The traditional fishing methods and and other indigenous methods during the course fishery of Lakshadweep consisting of 27 small of the survey. Fish landings of commercial islands of which only ten are inhabited have fishermen were also considered to have an idea been briefly described by Hornell (1910), of the magnitude of abundance. Ayyangar (1922), Ellis (1924), IVlathew and Ramachandran (1956), Jones and Kumaran CRAFT AND GEAR IN OPERATION (1959), Verghese (1974), and Koya et. a/. (1956). The exploited resources have been The traditional fishing methods of the islands dealt with by Silas et.al. (1986) and Kumaran have been described by earlier workers Ayyangar, and Gopakumar (1986). Even though 603 (1922); Ellis, (1924); Mathewand Ramachandran, species of fishes are known from the Laksha­ (1956); Jones and Kumaran, (1959) and Koya dweep (Jones and Kumaran, 1980), only about et a/. (1986). All the fish landings in the thirty species contribute to the commercial islands before mechanisation were by primitive fishery. Fish landings in some of the islands indigenous crafts and gears. The details of the were not even sufficient for local consumption number of crafts and gears available at the time before 1958. The,efforts made during the past two of the survey in different islands are given in and half decades to exploit the tuna resources by using pole and line has started paying good Table 1. There are in all 251 mechanised boats dividends. The remarkable increase in the in operation in all the islands. However, all of landings of tunas especially skipjack is respon­ them are not used for fishing even during the sible for the present prosperity of some of the peak fishing season as some are required for islands like Minicoy, Agatti, Kavaratti and Bitra. transport purposes especially for transporting Though the islands have only an area of about passengers and luggage from the ship. IVIecha- 32 sq. km. the lagoons, reefs and submerged nised boats are being increasingly used for pole banks extending over an area of 42,000 sq. km. and line fishing, but many are used for the capture is endowed with several commercially important of other fishes also. Trolling and drift long fishes. With the limited land area and a high lining are mostly done by mechanised boats density of population, the possiblities for of 7.6 m OAL which are more popular with the developing other industries is limited, but the fishermen. The number of boats in Agatti, sea offers good scope for the progress of the Kavaratti and Minicoy exceeds the total number islands. The vast difference in the estimates of boats in all other islands and the lowest of fisheries potential of the Laccadive Sea which number is in Kalpeni. The plank built country is reportedly of the order of 90,000 tonnes crafts vary from 5 to 7 m in length. There are (Jones and Banerji, 1973) and the present altogether 691 country crafts of which 118 are annual landings (5,524 tonnes in 1986) indicates that further intensive exploitation is called for in Agatti, 110 in Kavaratti and 108 in Kalpeni. in the region. Bitra and Kadmat have only a few country crafts, 27 and 28 respectively. In all 154 country crafts are provided with outboard engines. The present account on the resources of Kalpeni and Minicoy leads in the mechanisation fishes other than tunas is the result of a survey of country crafts. of the fisheries resources conducted for a period

BUiLEriN43 65 TABLE 1. Datails of craft and gear available In different Islands*

Crafts Gears Island Mechanised Country craft Country Shore Gill Drift Remarks boat with outboard craft seine/ net long motor drag net line

** Occasionally some mech­ anised boats go to Suheli Agatti** 49 19 99 48 38 31 and Bitra for a few days Ameni@ 19 — 38 6 — 16 when there is good fishing in Androth 23 18 64 30 40 70 these areas Bitra*** 17 14 13 4 — 6 @ Some of the boats are Chetlat@ 19 20 30 5 — 47 often engaged for transport Kadmat@ 14 16 12 20 4 16 purpose. Kalpeni 9 28 80 20 100 60 *** The number of mechanised Kavaratti 45 5 105 6 80 90 boats at Bitra varies greatly Kiltan® 24 10 52 8 — 62 as boats from Chetlat and Minicoy 32 24 44 10 30 Agatti come here for short periods during peak fishing season.

Total 251 154 537 157 292 398 •Number of troll lines and pole and line not Included.

Drag nets, gill nets, drift long lines and operated depending on the abundance of troll lines are the most important gears for the suitable species and favourable seasons. It capture of other fin-fishes. Drag nets operated would only be appropriate to point out that the mostly in the lagoons for the capture of fishes use of indigenous gears is decreasing year after like goat-fishes, lutianids, lethrinids, balistids, year due to the popularity of pole and line fishing mullets etc. There are 157 shore seines/drag for tuna and this is becoming evident by the nets of varying dimensions in the islands. The decline in the landings of other fishes. highest number is found in Agatti viz., 48 followed by Androth 30. Only very few drag STATUS OF OTHER FIN-FISH RESOURCES nets are found in Bitra and Chetlat. Lutianids, The general abundance and distribution of lethrinids, carangids, rainbow runner, serranids different species other than tunas collected etc. are caught by drift nets operated mostly in during the survey and contributing to the the lagoon. There are 292 gill nets in all the commercial fishery are given in Table 2. All islands. Drift long lines locally known as the species listed in the table are present 'Bayp' for the capture of sharks and other large around all the islands, but their abundance fishes are found in all the islands except may vary Species belonging to seventeen Minicoy. The totol number of drift long line families form the major share of other is about 400 and the highest number of 90 is in fin-fish landings. The important groups con­ Kavaratti. Harpoons are used for the capture stituting the commercial fishery and widely of devil rays (Manta birostris), Aetobatus distributed are sharks, rays, belonids, half-beaks, narinerl, Dasyat/s spp,, sharks etc. from the serranids, lutianids, lethrinids, wahoo, dolphin open sea around all the islands. Large carangids, fish and rainbow runner. From the groups-wise bill fishes, wahoo, rainbow runner etc. are fish landings at Lakshadweep for the years caught by surface trolling. Apart from the gears, 1973-'86 given in Table 3, it is seen that the varying number of cast nets, hand lines, iron annual average landings of fishes including spikes, 'Chilla' with spikes and fish traps a'e tunas is 3,707.2 tonnes of which only 1022.4

66 CMFRI TABLE 2. Abundance of other fishes (other than tunas) In different islands

E >• w m m • c o o 'c g c o o a e is E o a e a E T3 a m £ •o jQ. > 'c a. < c c !2 (0 • it, < CO

1. Eulamla melanoptera XX XX XX XX XXX 2 Strongylura strongylura XXX XX XX XXX XXX XXX XX XX XX 3. Balone platyura XXX XX XX XX XX XX 4. Hemirhamphus dussumieri XXX XX XXX XX XXX XX XX 6. Hemirhamphus marginaius XX XX XXX 6. FistularJa petimba XXX XXX XXX XXX 7. Eleotheronema teiradaciylum XXX XX XXX XX XX XX XX 8. Epinepholus merra XX XXX XX XX XXX XXX XXX XXX XX 9 Epinepholus merra XX XX XXX XXX XX XK XXX 10. Cephalopholls argus XX XX XXX XXX XX 11. Cephalopholls rogaa XXX XX XX XX XXX XX XX 12. Caranx sexfasciatus XX XX XX XX XX XXX XX 13. Caranx stellatus XX XX XX XX XXX 14. Caranx lugubrls XX XX XX XX XX xxx 15. Trachinotus bailloni XX XX XXX XX XXX 16. Trachinotus blochli XX XX XXX XX XX 17. Lutianus gibbus XX XXX XX XX XX XX XX XX 18. Lutianus kasmira XX XX XX XX XX XX 19. Lutianus russelll XXX XX XX XX XX XX XX ^0. Lutianus bohar XX XX XX XX 21, Mulloldlchthys auriflamma XXX XX XXX XXX XXX XXX XxX XXX XX XXX 22. Mulloldlchthys samoensis XX XX XX XXX XXX XX XX XX XX 23. Parupeneus barberinus XX XXX XX XX XXX XX XX XX XX 24. Parupeneus macronemus XX XX XXX XXX XXX 25. Lethrlnella xanthocheilus XX XX XX XX XXX XX XX XX XXX 26. Acanthurus triostegus triostegus XXX XXX XXX XX XXX XXX XX XX XXX 27. Elagatls bipinnuatus XXX XX XXX XX XX XX XXX XXX XX XXX 28. Coryphaena hlppuus XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX

29. Acanthocybium solandrl XX XXX XX XXX XXX XXX 30. Gerres oblongus XXX XX XX XX XX XX 31. Gerres lucldus XX XXX xxs XX XX 32. Ctllyodan ghobbar. XX XX XX XXX XX XX XX 33. Aphareus furcatus XX XX XXX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX

XXX /Abundant XX Common

tonnes (27.58%) consist of other fishes- The belonids and half beaks (7.42%), wahoo (5.22%) total landings in 1986 has reached 5,524 tonnes, and goat fishes (3.13%). but the landings of other fishes was only 717 The island-wise production of other fishes tonnes (15.52%) which is the lowest during the for the period 1981-85 are given in Table 4. 12-year period. The landings of other fishes has The average annual landings of other fishes for been gradually decreasing from 1983, whereas the period 1981-85 was 1049.4 tonnes which the tuna catch as well as the total catch formed 24.02% of the total landings. The generally showed an increasing trend for the landings of other fishes was highest at Androth past few years. Fishes other than tuna in the (25.77%). followed by Agatti (13.51%), Kadmat commercial landings in the order of abundance (10.50%), Ameni (10.02%) and Kavaratti for the 12-year period are: sharks and rays (9.59%), and very low at Chetlat (4.73%) and (26.52%), perches (20.50%), carangids (8.39%), Minicoy (4.10%). A declining trend in the

BULLETIN 4:^ 67 GO

TABLE 3 l\/larine fish Landings in La/(shadweep during 1913-'86 {in tonnes)

Group 1975 1976 1977 1978 1979 1980 1981 1982 1983 1984 1985 1986 Average Percentage* 73-'86

Elasmobranchs 325 354 296 198 364 284 211 240 332 287 228 134 271.1 26.52 Belonids & Half beaks 29 33 58 144 101 99 113 87 103 62 39 43 75.9 7.42 Flying fish 30 41 30 33 16 29 16 25 25 15 6 13 23.3 2.28 Perches 186 193 211 163 203 376 315 230 252 205 109 72 209.6 20.50 Goat fishes 34 58 29 27 27 27 25 27 32 24 28 46 32.0 3.13 Carangids 61 94 65 60 58 80 105 21 147 45 50 51 85.8 8.39 Wahoo 66 87 41 41 24 21 50 99 59 59 58 36 53.4 5.22 Barracuda 17 20 15 18 11 15 12 10 19 14 8 8 13.8 1.35 Miscellaneous 232 361 281 201 233 206 203 239 237 265 318 314 257.5 25.19 Total (excluding tuna) 980 1241 1026 885 1037 1136 1050 1171 1206 976 844 717 1022.4 (27.58)

Tuna 1932 1291 1166 1875 2794 1760; 2236 2966 3303 4313 3775 4807 2684.8 (72.42) Grand total 2912 2532 1192 2760 3831 2896 3286 4137 4509 5289 4619 5524 3707.2 •Percentage to the total (excluding tuna) Percentage indicated in brackets is percentage to the grand total.

o TABLE 4. Island-wise fish landings (excluding tuna) in Lakshadweep during 1981-85 (in tonnes)

Island 1981 1982 1983 1984 1985 Average Percentage Agatti 137 180 186 123 83 141.8 13.51 Ameni 157 100 1^8 81 60 105.2 10.02 Androth 303 385 335 192 137 270.4 25.77 Bitra 56 47 66 58 28 51.0 4.86 ChetJat 50 51 56 61 30 49.6 4.73 Kadmat 100 116 80 76 179 110.2 10.50 Kalpeni 53 58 92 96 116 83.0 7.91 Kavaratti 111 110 105 112 65 100.6 9.59 Kiltan 38 79 94 150 112 94.6 9.01 Minicoy 45 45 64 27 34 43.0 4.10 Total (excluding tuna) 1050 1175" 1206 976 844 1049.4 100

% of total catch 31.95 28,31 26.75 18.45 18.27 24.02

other fish landings from 31.95% in 1981 to The main fishing seson in the islands extend 15.52% in 1985 has been observed. This from November to May, the peak period being obviously is due to the deployment of more units February-March. The month of March accounted for pole and line fishing which is more econo­ for about 16% of the landings. Fishing is poor mical to the fishermen who neglect the exploit­ during June to September. The season for ation of other fin-fish resources when tuna goat-fish, serranids, lutianids, lethrinids and fishery is good. As tuna fishing by pole and sharks is generally from May to November. line for skipjack is practised in Minicoy From The season for Acanthocybium solandri and very early times, the landings of other fish Elagatis bipinnulatus is November to April. resources there has been low all along. Coral fishes which form about 19% of the catches According to Kumaran and Gopakumar (1986) at Kalpeni is caught almost in all the months. the landings of other fishes is usually higher About 38% of the catches at Kalpeni is landed when the tuna catch is poor in a particular during November and December. In Androth season. fishing is good during October to February with the peak during November. In Minicoy the Even though only ten islands are inhabited, highest catch is in March with about 18.5% of fishermen from some islands go to the neighbour­ the annual catch and the fishing was poor ing uninhabited islands and reefs for fishing and during June to October. In Kavaratti fishing return after fishing for a few days. The boats was good during November and May with a from Kavaratti visit Suheli par during peak peak landing during April-May. The fishery fishing season there and other fish catches are was poor during June to September. Fishing salted and dried there itself. The fishermen at Suheli par generally starts in November from Agatti and Chetlat go to Bitra during good and comes to a close by April and the fishing is weather for catching tuna and other fishes. very good from December to March. There is Occasionally boats from the northern islands go no fishing at Suheli par from May to October to Perumal par for catching large fishes, sharks as the fishermen have to come from Kavaratti and rays. Cheriya Kalpeni; a small coral bank for fishing after the south-west monsoon. near Androth is a good fishing ground for Acanthocybium solandri, Elagatis bipinnulatus, PROSPECTS FOR DEVELOPMENT Coryphaena hippurus and flying fish. There is good potential for sharks, groupers and The widespread adoption of pole and line carangids around the islands, but these are fishing for tunas has resulted in considerable exploited only on a very limited scale. increase in the tuna catch in the Lakshadweep

BULLETIN 43 69 I Hi tl'il 'II I ,' \.•••,>• I , ,(>> . ! i'))- /•/ ; ! ii'l il ! i/lhlii.'l ''..h,)) :. ,,,,. Mi: . hi'iri I'll /(It ';t/;/4 il (!' '-.h: >i"

I h'» ' '« f f >, i. ..ii.'r ' ..III'. ^ .1 .

i ••((IS' 'il (i >l -n '•Mil;, h !-:ii with a per capita availability of more than 120kg manpower in the islands itself for the expansion of fish per year which Is the highest when of fishing activities as there are many unemployed compared to other States and Union Territories, youths who are now reluctant to take up fishing At the same time the exploitation of other fish as a profession. Increasing the development resources is rather neglected as evidenced by activities in the fisheries sector will solve the the decline in their landings during the past few problem of unemployment and lead the islands years. The landings of traditional gears like to prosperity. The chances of getting Govern­ drag nets, cast nets, trolling and harpooning etc. ment employment for all the educated youth of amounts to less than one fourth of the total fish the Territory in the islands itself is meagre. The landings. Nair et a/. (1986) has opined that establishment of a Fisheries Development the presence of divergence and convergence Corporation or Fisheries cooperatives with public zones in the open sea, the presence of upwelling. participaion for the exploitaion of oceanic fishes eddy systems and relatively low saline waters will accelerate the progress of fisheries develop­ in the surface layers during November-December ment and increase the percapita income which period contribute to the high productivity around is at present probably the highest in India. Lakshadweep. Concentrations of oceanic zoo- REFERENCES plankton and micronecton have been observed by Silas (1972) in the Laccadive sea. These AYYANGAR, S. R. 1922. Notes on the fauna feature should be conducive for the concentrat­ and fishing industries of the Laccadives. ions of larger fishes like tunas, bill fishes, Madras Fish. Bull., 15: 45-69. Acanthocybium solandri, Elagatls btpinnu/atus, BALAN, v. 1958. Notes on a visit to certain Coryphaena hippurus etc. in the open sea during islands of the Laccadive Archipelago first quarter of the year. The lagoons of the with special reference to fisheries. islands are ideal for a variety of fishes of J. Bombay nat. Hist. Soc. 55 (2) : 297- commercial importance which could be easily 306. exploited by hook and line and nets. Larger ELLIS, R. H. 1924. A short account of the fishes in the deeper waters around the islands Laccadive Islands and Minicoy. Govt. could be exploited by trolling, long lining and Press, Madras; iv-f-122 pp. gill netting. Suheli par has been a good fishing centre for the past several years for the islanders, HORNELL, J. 1910. Report on the results of especially those of Kavaratti. Androth has no the fishery cruise along the Malabar lagoon, but the resources of other fishes around coast and the Laccadive Islands in the island is important when compared to that 1908. Madras Fish Bull., 4: 71-126. of other islands as the landings of other fin- JONES, S. AND S. K. BANERJl. 1973. A review fishes there is higher than in any other island of the living resources of the Central Bitra which is only less than 2 hectares in extent Indian Ocean. Proc. Symp. Living has the largest lagoon with various kinds of resources of the seas around India, fishes. There is good possibility for the capture Cent. Mar. Fish. Res. Inst., Cochin: 1-17. of sharks and billfishes by long lining and rays JONES, S. AND M. KUMARAN. 1959. The by harpooning in the Lakshadweep sea. fishing industry of Minicoy island with Diversification of fishing effort with improve­ special reference to the tuna fishing. ment in gears to suit local condi ions aimed Indian J. Fish.. 6(1): 30-54. at generating employment opportunities will JONES, S. AND M. KUMARAN. 1980. Fishes naturally pave the way for increasing the of the Laccadive Archipelago. Nature production of other fishes. The area of fishing Conservation and Aquatic Sciences operations need to be simultaneously increased Service, Trivandrum : 760 pp. by adopting modern technology. Resource KOYA, P. P.,^K. P. SAID KOYA, V. RAVINDRA- surveys by long lining and gill netting have to NATHAN AND Y. SREEKRISHNA. 1986. be carried out to locate productive areas for Traditional fishing methods of Laksha­ other fish resources and to evaluate the suit­ dweep, J Indian Fish Ass., 14 & 15 : ability of different gears. There is sufficient 17-25. -

BULLETIN 43 71 KUiVIARAN, M. AND G. GOPAKUMAR. 1986. SILAS, E. G. 1972. Investigations on the deep Potential resources of fishes other than scattering layers in the Laccadive Sea. tuna in Lakshadweep. Mar. Fish Infor. In : Pioc. Symp Corals and Co/al Serv. TaESer.ea: 41-45. reefs.. 1969. Mar. Biol. Ass India: 257-274. MATHEW, M. J. AND T. B. RAMACHANDRAN. 1956. Notes on a survey of the fishing SILAS, E.G., K.V.N. RAO, P. P. PILLAI, Industry of Laccadive and Amindivi MADAN MOHAN, G. GOPAKUMAR, Islands. Fisheries Station Reports and P. LIVINGSTON AND M. SRINATH. year Book 1954-55. Govt.Press. Madras: 1986. Exploited and potential resources 121-137. of tunas of Lakshadweep. Mar. Fish, NAIR, P. V. R., A. V. S. MURTY, C P. RAMA- infer. Serv. T BE Ser.. 68 : 15-25. MIRTHAM, D.S. RAO AND V.K.PILLAI. 1986. Environmental features in the VARGHESE, T. J. 1974, Shark resources of the sea around Lakshadweep. Mar. Fish, Laccadive waters. Seafood Export infor. Serv. T & E. Sar, 68 : 10-13. Journal, 6 (1) : 65-68. 8. RESOURCES OF THE LAKSHADWEEP ISLANDS

G. Sudhakara Rao, C. Suseelan and M. Kathirvel

INTRODUCTION 72'10'E to '73'41'E during January to March 1987. During the present investigation attempts Information on the crustacean resources were made to collect data on the availability, of Lakshadweep is limited to only a few fishing season, fishing gear employed, abunda­ faunistic reports on crabs, prawns, lobsters and nce, habitat and utilisation of commercially stomatopods (Alcock, 1895, 1896, 1998, 1899, important groups of crustaceans from all the 15 1900; Borradaile, 19C3a, 1903b, 1903c, 1903d, islands. 19o6a, 1906b; Sankarankutty, 196); Thomas 1970a, 1970b, Meiyappan and Kathirvel, 1978; METHOD OF SURVEY Piilai era/, 1984 and Shanbhogue, 1986) A total of 132 species of brachyuran crabs mostly For qualitative and quantitative studies of belonging to Calappidae, IVlajidae, Partheno- the various crustacean groups, sampling was pidae, Portunidae, Xanthidae, Ocypodidae and made at stations in different ecological zones of Grapsidae, 4 species of palinurid lobsters, 2 the islands. In each zone transects of 10x10 m species of scyllarid lobsters, 6 species of were surveyed in detail for the abundance of penaeid prawns and 7 species of stomatopods different groups of crustaceans. The number of have been recorded so far from these islands. transects sampled varied depending on the extent of different zones. A minimum of 4 The present account deals with the crusta­ transects were sampled in each zone. Data cean fishery potential of Lakshadweep based were collected by operating velon screen drag on the survey conducted in 15 islands, namely, net, scoop net, cast net, shore seine, grab and Minicoy, Kalpeni, Suheli Par, Pitti, Kavaratti. dredge wherever possible. Hand picking was Androth, Bangaram, Agatti, Parali, Amini, found to be more effective than many of these Kadmat, Kiltan, Bitra and Chetlat extending from methods. Visual counting was also adopted latitude 8'17'N to '1141' N and longitude for estimating the number of animals present in

72 CMFRI the exposed intertidal zones. The availability form the chief constituents of the crustacean and population density of different groups in the fauna associated with these islands. As one could lagoons was studied by diving and observing expect on account of the great dissimilarities in the population in their natural habitats since habitat, the crustaceans that have colonised other methods were not found to be effective in these islands evince considerable differences these areas. in quality as well as quantity as compared to the crustaceans inhabiting the coastal areas of the OBSERVATIONS mainland. Table 1 gives a list of penaeid Penaeid prawns, sergestids, caridean prawns, prawns, sergestids, Idbsters, brachyuran crabs crabs, lobsters, hermit crabs and stomatopods and stomatopods recorded during this survey.

TABLE 1: List of penaeid prawns, sergestids. lobsters, brachyuran crabs and stomatopods collected from the Lakshadweep Islands

PENAEID PRAWNS FAMILY ; PARTHENOPIDAE

Metapenaeopsis borradailei (De Man) Actaeomorpha erosa Miers Penaeus latisulcatus Kishinouye Trachypenaeopsis minicoyensis Thomas FAMILY: PORTUNIDAE

SERGISTIDS Charybdis erythrodactyla (Lamarck) Charybdis obtusifrons Leene Sergestes armatus Kroyer Portunus emarginatus Stephenson & Acates sp. Cambell LOBSTERS Portunus granulatus (H. Milne- Edwards) Panulirus homarus (Linnaeus) Portunus orbicularis Crosnier Panulirus penicillatus (Olivier) Portunus orbitosinus Rathbium Panulirus versicolor (Latreille) Portunus petreus (Alcock) Tualamita admete (Herbst) CRABS Thalamita picta Stimpson FAMILY DYNOMENIDAE Thalamita pilumnoides Borradaile Dynomene pilumnoides Alcock Thalamita poissoni (Audouin & Savigny) FAMILY DORIPPIDAE Ethusa indica Alcock FAMILY: XANTHIDAE

FAMILY CALAPPIDAE Actaea cavipes (Dana) Calppa calappa (Linnaeus) Actaeodes hiisutissimus (Rupell) Calappa hepatica (Linnaeus) Atergatis subdentats De Haan Matuta banks! Leach Atergatopsis singnatus (Adams & FAMILY MAJIDAE White Huenia brevifrons Ward Carpilius convexus (Forskal) Huenia proteus De Haan Carpilius maculatus (Linnaeus) Hyasfenus diacanthus (De Haan) Chlorodella cytherea (Dana) Hyastenus elongatus Ortmann Cymo andreossyi (Audouin) Mecippa philyra (Herbst) Cymome lanodactylus De Haan Menaethius araneus De Haan Daira perlata (Herbst) Schizophrys aspera (H. Milne-Edwards) Demania intermedia (Guinot) Tylocarcinus sty ax (Herbst) Domecia glabra Alock FAMILY : LEUCOSIIDAE Eriphia sebana sebana ^Shaw & Nucia speciosa Dana Nodder)

BULLETIN 43 73 Etisus laevimaus Randall Platypodia anaglypta (Heller) Euxanthus exsculptus (Herbst) Pseudozws caystfus (Admas & White) Glabropilumnus dispar ^Dana) Quadrellia boopsis Alcock Globopilumnus globosus (Dana) Tetralia glaberrima (Herbst) Hetropilumms Integra Miers Trapezia cymodoce (Herbst) Lachnopodus subacutus (Stimpson) Trapezia ferruginea Latreille Leptodius sanguineus (H. Milne- Trapezia guttata Ruppell Edwards) Xanthias lamarcki (H. Milne- Liomera bella f Dana) Edwards) Liometa caeleta (Odhner) Liomera cinctimana (White) Zozymodes cavipes (Dena) Liomera margarita A. Milne-Edwards) Zozymus aeneus ^Linnaeus) Liomera mentcuiosa H. (Milne. FAMILY : OCYPODIDAE Edwards) Liomera rugate H. (Milne-Edwards) Ocypoee ceratophthalmus (Pallas) Liomera stimpsoni (A. Milne- Ocypoda cordimana Desmarest Edwards) tt/laldivia triunguiculata (Borradaiie) FAMILY: GRAPSIDAE Ozius tuberculosus (H. Milne- Edwards) Geograpsus crinipes (Dana) Paracaea rufopunctata (H. Milne- Geograpsus gray! (Dana) Edwards) Grapsus tenulcrustatus (Herbst) Phymodius unguiatus (H. Miline- Edawards) STOMATOPODS Pilodius pilumnoides White Gonodactylus cfiiragara (Fabricius) Pilodius pugii Dana Gonodactylus falcatus (Forskal) Pilumnus longicornis Hilgendrof Gonodactylus piatysoma Wood- Piiumnus orbitosyinis Rathbun Mason Pilumnus vespertilio (Fabricius) Gonodactylus smithi Poccok

Penaeid prawns and sergestids Earlier records of penaeid prawns include numerous specimens of P. latisulcatus P. cana- During the present survey, no penaeid liculatus, Trachypenaeus curvirostris, Trachy­ prawn could be collected on the leeward reefs penaeopsis, minicoyensis and M. borradailei and windward reefs of the islands. They were from minicoy. The present study shows that observed only in the lagoons and could be P. latisulcatus, T. minicoyensis and M. borradailei collected by cast nets, shore seines and dredge. are widely distributed in the Lakshadweep Sea. Five species of prawns were recorded. Penaeus At present there is no commercial exploita­ latisulcatus was represented by five specimens tion of prawns around these islands. However, collected from Chetlat, Kiltan and Suhelipar. it is learnt from the migrant fishermen that The size range of this species was 45-110 mm P. latisulcatus is caught in small numbers in ihe in total length. A total of 8 specimens of drag net operations from the lagoon of Suheli Metapenaeopsis borradailei was collected from Par during monsoon months. It is evident from Kavaratti, Suheli par, Agatti and Chetlat. the meagre representation of penaeids in the Trachypenaeopsis minicoyensis was encountered present collections and the other available only at Agatti and that too only two specimens. information that there is no scope of developing The sergestid shrimp, Sergestes armatvs, was a fishery based on penaeid prawns in these recorded from Agatti and Bitra. This is the first islands. record of the species from the Indo-pacific Caridean prawns region. Two specimens of Acetes sp were also The coral reefs of the islands are very rich collected from Chetlat. in caridean prawn fauna. The species belong-

74 CMFRI ing to Atyidae, Alpheidae, Palaemonldae, in the heart of the islands. The different Hippolytidae and Processidae abound these species display a variety of colours making them islands in association with dead and living a good choice for aquarium purposes. Since corals. At some stations each Kilogram of coral their maintenance in aquaria poses very few rock contained as many as 20-30caridean prawns. problems when compared to the other marine However, all these species are very small and animals, they could be popularised as aquarium hence it is not possible to develop any fishery animals. based on these prawns. Lobsters Brachyuran crabs A Limited populaion of spiny lobsters A rich fauna of brachyuran crabs has been belonging to the family Palinuridae is found to observed in all the islands. Although most of exist around all the islands. They are not these species are small in size, a few of them commercially fished by the islanders at present. are sufficiently large to be used as food. However mainlanders inhabiting the islands fish Particular interest in this regard is the large them for food in Kiltan, Suheli Par and Minicoy sized xanthid crabs like Eriphia sebana, Ater/gat/'s in small numbers. Three species of lobsters, subdentatus and Liomera caelata. Crabs of namely, Panulirus versicolor. P. penicillatus, 30-60 mm in carapace width were observed and P. homarus were observed during the course in abundance in all the islands. Portunids of the survey. Of these P. versicolor is more were poorly represented in the reefs. All the abundant than the other species. portunids observed were from the lagoons. The commercial portunids such as Scylla serrate^ P. i/ffAs/co/or was collected from Kadmat, Kiltan, Portunus pe/agicus, P. sanguinolentus and Chetlat, Agatti, Kalpeni, Bitra and Kavaratti Charybdis cruciate were not encountered in while P. penicillatus was observed at Agatti, these islands. Although it is not possible to Kavaratti, Suheli Par Kalpeni and Androth. develop any commercial fishery, scope is there P. homarus was observed only at Minicoy. The to develop a sustenance fishery on these crabs. size of lobsters ranged from 50-325 mm in total length (20-140 carapace length). Among the shore crabs, the most abundant and widely distributed species is the ghost crab> Earlier records of lobsters from Lakshadweep Ocypod ceratophthalmus. This is found in al| were from Minicoy, Kavaratti and Kiltan the islands surveyed in varying degrees of (Meiyappan and Kathirvel, 1978 and Pilla' abundance. Nocturnal in habit, the ghost crab et al., 1984). The present study reveals that appears plentiful on the beaches during night. P. versicolor and P. penicillatus are widely In fact, the beaches are littered with these crabs distributed in these islands. althrough the night. Its maximum abundance In Kiltan one or two people collect is recorded at Bangaram, where the average P, versicolor during day time and use it as food number per square metre works out to about and also for ornamental purpose after stuffing. 6 on the lagoon shore, Though this crab is Species like P. penicillatus are said to be fished believed to have some food value among the occasionally from the ship wreckage in the coastal fishermen of Tamilnadu no commercial leeward reef of Cheriya Kare island (Suheli Par; importance is attached to it in any part of the and the scyllarid lobster Parribacus antarticus islands. from the coral crevices in the lagoon of Suheli Hermit crabs Par.

Hermit crabs are in good abundance in the Stomatopods sandy beaches and intertidal regions^of the reefs. Most of these hermit crabs scavenge on the Stomatopods are found to be of common beaches during night. They are rarely seen occurrence in the lagoons and coral reefs during day. They are a menace to the coconut of Amini, Kadmat, Kiltan and Chetlat. They are processors, since they invade the processing mainly represented by GonodactyJus Chiragara, yards along the beaches. In some of these G. platysoma, G. smithi and G. falcatus. The islands the crabs are seen crawling on the roads size ranged from 16 mm to 73 mm.

BULLETIN 43 7& Shanbhogue (1986) reported seven species BORRADAILE, L.A. 1903 b. Marine crustaceans. of stomatopods from Minicoy, The species are III. The Xanthidae and some other crabs. G. chiragara, G. fa/catus. G. p/atysoma, G. /6/c/: 237-271. smith/, Pieudosquilla ciliata, Hetreosquilla BORRADAILE, L. A. 1903 c. Marine crustaceans jonesi and Alima hyalina. Only four of these V, The crabs of the Catometope families. species are observed in the present collections Ibid: 429-433. made from Amini, Kadamat, Kiltan and Chetlat. The present study extends the distributional BORRADAILE, L.A. 1903 d. Marine crustaceans. range of the species of Gonodactylus to these VI. The sand crabs (Oxystomata). islands. Ibid : 2 : 434-439. CONCLUSIONS BORRADAILE, L. A. 1906 a. Marine crustaeans. IX. The sponge crabs (Dromiacea). It is seen from the present study that these Ibid : 2 : 574-578. islands do not possess any substantial resource of crustaceans which could be exploited in BORRADAILE, L. A. 1906 b. Marine crustaceans commercial scale. The small populations of X. The spider crabs (Oxyrhyncha). shrimps encountered in the lagoons of the Ibid: 681 -690. •stands are very small in size and therefore can MEIYAPPAN, M. M. AND M. KATHIRVEL 1978. not be economically useful.. Though a few On some new records of crabs and species of lobsters and penaeid prawns do occur lobsters from Minicoy, Lakshadweep in the region their numbers appear to be too (Laccadives). J. mar biol Ass India, 20 limited to support a commercial fishery. Among (1 &2): 116-119. crabs Oc^pode ceratophthalmus, Eriphia sabana, PILLAI, C. S. GOPINADHA, MADAN MOHAN Atergigatis subdentata and Liomera caelata might prove to be a potential resource to develop AND K. K. KUNHIKOYA 1984. Obser­ into sustenance fishery. Hermit crabs are of vations on the lobsters of Minicoy atoll interest as ornamental animals in the aquaria. Indian J. Fish .,30 (2) : 112-122. SANKARANKUTTY, C. 1961. On some crabs The hard bottom and other environmental (Decapoda-Brachyura) from the Lacca­ conditions prevailing in the lagoons do not dive Archipelago. J. mar. biol. Ass. appear to be congenial for the growth of prawns. India, 3 (1 &2) : 121-150. Therefore, there is no scope for propagating prawn culture also in these waters. SHANBOGUE, S. L. 1986. Studies on stomato- pod Crustacea from the seas around REFERENCES India. Recent Advances in Marine Biology (Editor: P. S. B. R. James): ALCOCK, A. 1985-1900. Material for a carcino- logical fauna of India. J. Asiat, Soc. 515-568. Beng . 64 (2) : 157-291; 65 (2): 134- THOMAS, M. M. 1970. Metapenaeopsis 296; 67 (1): 67-233; 68(2): 1-104 borradaili (de Man) a penaeid prawn 123-169; 69 (2): 279-486. (Decapoda, Penaeidae) new to the Indian Ocean. J. mat. biol. Ass. India, BORRADAILE, L. A. 1903 a. Marine crustaceans. 12 : 213-216. II Portunidae. in J. S. Gardiner, (Ed.), The Fauna and Geography of the THOMAS, M. M. 1970. Trachypenaeopsis Maldive and Laccadive Archipelagoes, minicoyensis sp. nov. (Penaeidae, 1 : 1969-208. Cambridge Univ. Press- Decapoda) from the Laccadive Sea Cambridge. Indian J. Fish., 17:116 21.

76 CMFBI 9. MOLLUSCAN RESOURCES

K. K. Appukuttan, A. Chellam, K. Ramdoss, A. C. C. Victor and iVI. M. Meiyappan

INTRODUCTION CEPHALOPOD

A critical review of literature on the fauna 1. Octopus of Lakshadweep reveals that there is only Three species of Octopuses viz. Octopus scanty reports on the occurrence of molluscs vulgaris, 0. membranaceus and 0. cyaneus from various islands (Smith, 1906; Appukuttan axe found to occur in various islands of Laksha­ 1973; Nair and Dharmaraj, 1983 and George dweep. The Octopus production from 1981-1985 ef a/., 19S6). A survey on the fisheries potential and the average of each quarter of the year are of Lakshadweep was undertaken by the scieniists given in Table I and Table 2 respectively- of Central Marine Fisheries Research Institute Though there is no information on species-wise to provide adequate informations on the mollus- catch composition, O. vulgaris seems to rank can fisheries potential of the islands for future first in abundance followed by O. cyaneus and 0 memoranaceus. Fishing for Octopus is planning and development. The present status of observed year round, the llnd and llird quarter fishery of potentially important molluscs, fishing shows lesser landings which coinsides with the methods, occurrence and abundance are dealt monsoon months. Active fishing for Octopus with in the present account. The island surveyed jn each month is also confined to the days with for molluscan resources are Minicoy, Suheh good low tide, providing opportunity to fisher­ pear, Kalpeni, Kavaratti, Androth, Agathi, men to locate the hideouts of the animals. Men, Bangaram, Amini, Kadamat, Kiltan, Bitra and women and children are involved in fishing and Chetlat. To understand the distribution pattern, there is no full time Octopus fishermen in any population density and habitat, transect method of the islands and hardly 6 to 10 expert Octopus of sampling was adopted uniformly in ail the fishermen are observed in each island. 'slands. The sampling areas were broadly classified intointertidal area, lagoon, reef cres^ Octopus are cought during low tide from in the lagoon side and leward side and reef the crevices/burrows in the coral boulders slopes of both sides. Quadrat method of in the reef flats on the lagoon side and also in the leward side Fig. I A. These crevices are sampling for few bivalves and gastropods were easily detected by expert fishermen noting the done for quantitative estimates. By diving and presence of loosely kept coral stones in front hand-picking, samples were collected from of the crevices and also by the presence of various stations and relative abundance were discarded freshly eaten crab shells in the noted by visual estimates. The maps of islands exposed reef flats during low tide. In deeper shows the distribution of commercially import- waters they use mask to detect the burrows tant molluscs. before capturing them. The gear for capturing PRESENT STATUS OF MOLLUSCAN FISHERY Octopus consist of 1 to 1.5 m long m. s. rods of 6 8 mm diameter having sharpend edges, some­ As such, large-scale exploitation and utiliz­ time curved at the tip Fig. I B. When the ation of molluscs from islands are remote. Three Octopus is located, it is pinned down with one species of octopuses two species of cowries and rod and retrieved with the other and an expert one species of bivalve are being exploited at fisherman can take out the with a single present in minor quantities. The details of rod locally known as 'appal kol'. As soon as fishery, exploitation method and Utilization of the animal is caught, the mantle is turned inward these molluscs were studied and the occurrence out, popularly known as - turning the cap - and and abundance of other commercially important remove the ink sac and alimentary canal. It is molluscs are describe d. understood from local fishermen that eels are

9UUETIN43 77 00

TABLE 1. List of Molluscs collected from Lakshdweep Islands Duriug January to March 1987

Family & Species Mini- Suheli Kalpeni Kava- Androth Agatti Ban- Amini Kad- Kilti Bitra Chetlat coy par ratti garam mat (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)

Gastropods Family Haliotidae Haliotis sp. Family Patellidae Cellana radiata X — Family Trochidae Trochus radiatus X X X X X XX X X X X X T. pyramis XX X X X X X X X X XX T. stellatus X — X Family Turbinidae Turbo petholatus Family Neritidae Nerita albicella X X X X X X X X N. chameleon X XX XX X — X XX X N. maura X X X — — X X N. plicata X X XX X XX XX X X X X XX N. polita X X X X XX XX — X X — X Family Littorinidae Littorina kraussi X X X XX XX XX XX X XX L. scabra X X X XX XX XX — — XX X XX L- undulata X X X X — — XX X Nodilittorina Pyramidalis X X X — — — XX Family Planaxidae Planaxis virgatus XX — — X (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) '1 Family & Species (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

Family Cerithidae Cerithium articulatum X Cerithium asper X C. hanieyi XX XX — XX XX XX C. noduiosum X X — — X C. obeliscus X — — X Cerithium sp. X Family Strombidae Lambis chiragra X X X X X X XX XX X XX XX X XX L. lambis X X X XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX L. truncate XX X X XX XX XX X X XX XX Strombus gibberulus XX XX XX XX X S. ler}tiginosus X X S. urceus XX KX Strombus sp. X X Family Cypraeidae Cypraaa annules X X X C. arabica X XX X XXX XX XX XXX C. caputserpentis X X XXX X C. coffee X X C. arose X X C. histrio X C. Isabella X X C. lynx X XX XX XXX C. moneta XX XXX XXX C nucleus X X C.pulchra C. SQurra X — — X C. tigris X — X

(O 00 o

Family & Species (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)

Family Naticidae Polyuices mammilla XX Family Cassididae Casmaria erinaceus X Cassis cornuata X X X X Cypraecassis rufa X X X X Family Cymatiidae Charonia tritonis X X — Cymatium lotorium X Cymatjum sp. X Family Tonnidae Malea pomum Family Muricidae Murex ramosus X X Drupa heptagonalis XX XX XX — X XX XX D. lobata X D. margariticola — X X — X D. morum X XX X X D. ricinus X D. tuberculata X XX Thais intermidia X T. rudolphi X — — X — T. rugosa — — X X Family Buccinidae Phos senticosus X Engina mendicaria X XXX XXX — — XX XXX XX E. pulchra X X — — X X E. zonalis XX XX — — ' \ Pisania ignea X C

2 Family & Species (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) ill) (12)

CO Family Pyrenidae Pyrene versicolor XX XX XX Family Nassaridae Nassarius arcularius XX XX XX N. fidus X X N. gemmulatus X Family Fasciolariidae Fasciolaria filamentosa Family Olividae Oliva erythrostoma X O. nobilis X Family Mitridae Vexillum exasperatum X Mitra mitra X X — X Family Visidae Vasum curamicum X X X X X X X X — X y. turbinellum X X X X X X X X — X Family Conidae Comus arenatus XX — C. capitaneus X XX XX XX XX C. chaldeus X C. cinareus X C. coronatus X C. distans X X C. ebraeus X X — — X — — C. eburneus X XX XX XX X XX C. flavidus C. geographus C. glans — X — 00

Family & Species (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)

C. gubernator X X — X — X C. imperial is X C. leopard us XX X X X X XX XX XX X X XX X

C. litteratus X X X X •— XX XX — — — — C. livid us X X X C. miles X C. monile — — X X X — — — X — V y^ C. mustelinus X A C. tessulatus — — — — — X — — — — C. textile X X X C. vexillum X X — X — C. vitulinus X C. zonatus — X — X X X — X XX X — XX Family Terebridae Terebra affinis X — X — — X X — — — — — T. areolata X X T. cerethina X X X — — X X — — — — — T. dimidiata — — — — — X X — — — — — T. maculata X — X — — X X — X X X X T. subulata X — X — — X — — — — — X T. crenulata Family Bulliade — X Bulla ampulla Bivalvia Family Arciadae Area complanata XX Family Mytilidae Brachiodontus modiolus XX X X — XX X Lithophaga nigra — X — X X X o m c Family & Species (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)

L. gracilis Modiolus metcalgei M. tulipa X — — — XX XX — — — — — — Family Pteriidae Pinctada sugillata — X XX X XX XX — XXX X Family Pectinidae Pecten sp. Family Spondylidae Spondylus layardi Family Ostreidae Saccostrea cucullata — — XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX XX X\ Family Lucinidae Lucina nassula Codakia orbicularis — X X — — — — — — — — Codakia punctata Divaricella dentata XXX — XX -— — — '— — — -— — Family Chamidae Chama sp. X - — — — X — — — XX Family Tridecnidae Tridacna maxima XXX XX XX XX — XX X XX XX XX X XX T. squamosa — — — — XX — X— X X Family Mactridae Mactra cuneata Femily Mesodsmalidae Mesodesma sp. XX XXX XXX XX — XXX XX X X X XX X Family Tellinidae Tellina radiata — X — — — — — — — T. idae — X X — — — — — — — — — Family Donacidae Donax faba

00 CO 00

Family & Species (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)

Family Venaridae Asaphis deflorata Venus reticulata X Tapes philippinarum X — Family Petricolidae Petricola divergens Family Gastrochaena Gastrochaena giqantea Family Pholadidae Martesia sp. X — Family Teredinidae Teredo sp. — X Cephalopoda Family Loiiginidae Sepioteuthis lessoniana Family Octopodidae Octopus cyaneus X X X X X X X 0. membranaceus XX XX XX X X X XX XX 0. vulgaris XX XX XX XX XX XX X XX XX

Nil, X = rare. XX — Common, XXX = Abundant.

n TABLE 2 Octopus production (kg) in Lakshadweep Islands

Island 1981 1982 1983 1984 1985 Average

Kadmat 5499 7917 3401 2680 1970 4294 Agatti 1325 5637 954 2421 2158 2499 Kalpeni 1365 1803 1412 2309 2662 1911 Kavaratti 1135 2830 850 938 1917 1547 Amini 3245 829 1469 1377 200 1424 Androth 894 970 2312 757 390 1065 Chetlat 480 1124 704 918 611 767 Kiltan 194 325 807 745 971 607 Bitra 108 555 200 999 216 416 Minicoy 25 30 12 165 — 46

Total 14,270 22,020 12,121 13,369 11,121 14,576 the predators of Octopus and often Octopus species were found to occur, of which 0. vulgaris caught were not having all their arms intact due ranks first in abundance. The areas where to attack. Octopus fishing is done are marked in the map. Octopus locally known as 'appal' are One specimen of 0. cyaneus measuring 75 mm considered as a delicacy in most of the islands in dorsal mantle length (DML) with 650 g and usually consumed fresh. The meat is also weight and O. membranaceus measuring 70 mm sundried (Fig I C) and is kept for longer periods in DML with 500 g were caught from the reef especially by the fishermen of Agathi. The fresh crest in the eastern side of Agathi. From Kalpeni meat is used as bait for the hooks and line and specimens of C. cyaneus of 50 mm to 55 mm trolling. Island-wise occurrence of Octopus DML were collected. From Kavaratti O. vulgaris has shown that Kadamat ranks first in abundance with 70-165 mm DML with weight ranging from and Octopus vulgaris and 0 cyaneus are usually 0.2 to 1.4 kg were collected during the survey. caught from this island. At Agatti, all the three From Suheli paar live materials CDuld not be

TABLE III Quarterwise Octopus Production (kg) In Lakshadweep Islands (Averages for 1981-1985) island 1 Q II Q III Q IV Q Total % contribution to total production

Kadmat 1442 1219 897 736 4294 29 Agatti 723 465 479 832 2499 17 Kalpeni 496 354 451 610 1911 13 Kavaratti 437 214 382 514 1547 11 Amini 354 417 248 405 1424 10 Androth 205 233 172 287 1064 7 Chelat 230 143 223 172 768 5 Kiltan 189 65 111 242 607 4 Bitra 156 63 71 126 416 3 Minicoy — 1 37 8 46 1

Total 4232 3174 3238 3932 14576

9UUEriN43 85 collected but dried specimens of 0. vulgaris Amini. The average production for 5 years from were available with the islanders. At Androth 1981 to 1985 in each island is given in Table 2. 0. cyaneus was found abundant and is caught The total production ranged from 11 to 22 t/year in good numbers by the fishermen. At Minicoy with maximum during 1932. The average total there is no active fishing for Octopus, but production was 14.6 t and the maximum share 0. vulgaris and membranaceus were found to given by Chetiat (4.29 t). Quarter-wise analysis occur in the reef flat. In general. Octopus (Table 3) shows that January to March period weighing 0.5 i

Fig. 1. A. Octopus being caught from the reef crest; B. Octopus fishing gear -MS. rod with sharp bended and and octopus caught by this iron rod; C. Dried Octopus; D. Sepeoteuthis lessoniana caught from Bitra Ugoon; E. Cyprea caputserpentis Snal^ahead cowry- F. Tridacna maxima.

86 CMFRl 29%, Agatti17'/, Kalpeni ISjS, Kavaratti 11%, where the Cyprea moneta used to aggreata Amini 10% and all other islands together 20% and attach to leaves. In reef area fishermen of the total production. Good catches were collect C. caputserpentis and C. tigris by diving. obtained at Kadmat during the first two quarters The shells collected by the fishermen everyday and at Agatti, Kalpeni and Kavaratti first and is deposited in closed cement tanks or sand pits the last quarters of the year are good. for disintegration of body parts. After 10-15 days shells are cleaned and sold to the 2. Sepioteuthfs lessoniana {Palk Bay Squid) merchants.

This squid was found in small shoals inside Active fishing for cowries are noted at the lagoons of Kavaratti, Kalpeni and Bitra Agatti, Bangaram,Chetlat, Valiapanium, Thinna- (Fig. I D). From Kalpeni about 5) numbers of kara and Suheli Par At Agatti 30 40 persons squid with 90-180 mm DML were caught in are actively engaged in cowry picking during drag net during March 1987. At Bitra 150 peak season, apart from the part time collection numbers of specimens ranging from 90-150 mm by women and children. At Bangaram fishermen DML weighing 50-180 g were collected by drag from Agatti go usually and collect cowries during net from the western side of the island in the low tidfe. At Suheli Par there was once a lagoon area near the harbour jetty during flourishing fishery for C moneta. But during February, 1987. Though squids are not being the present survey, only few specimens were exploited from these islands, the very presence collected from this area. From enquiry it is of this species is quite interesting since they are understood that 3000-4000 numbers of reported early from Vizhinjam and Veraval only C. caputserpentis per month for atleast 4 months in the west coast. The occurrence of this every year and 24000-3SOO0 numbers per month species in Lakshadweep indicate the distribution of C moneta and 50-75 numbers per month of of the species to a wider area along the west C. tigris are collected from Agatti-Bengram area. coast of India. The estimated production of C moneta varies from 5-7 lakh/year and C. caputsarpantis 2-3 The cuttle bones of Sepia pharonis and lakhs/year. The price of the first species ranges S. acu/eata, ranging from 180-300 mm length from Rs. 25-30/kg and for the latter Rs. 30-35/ were found washed ashore along the sandy 100 numbers. C. tigris which is fairly big is shores of Androth, Agatti, Bengaram and Bitra sold for Rs. 2-3/shell. The cowries collected indicating the presence of cuttlefishes in the by the merchants are taken to Mangalore and nearby waters of Lakshadweep. sold at higher value. Enquiry with local merch­ ants reveal that bulk of the cowries taken to GASTROPODS Mangalore come from Agatti-Bengaram area 1. Cowries followed by Chetlat. Northeast side of Agatti and southwest side of Bangaram are potentially Cyprea caputserpentis (Fig. IE), C. moneta good areas for serpenthead cowry, C. caputser­ and C. tigris are the important species of cowries pentis and money cowry, C. moneta. exploited in a sustenance level for trade. Along with Octopus fishing, cowries are also collected by the island fishermen throughout the year with 2. Edible gastropods a peak from September to December and a lean season during southwest monsoon. Men, women During the present survey it was found that and children go for cowry picking during low meat of Strombus sp. and Nerita plicate are tide in the reef crest and usually go as a group in extracted for edible pupose at Kalpeni. These hired canoes and do the collection for 2-3 hours gastropods are found occurring in the reef crest, every day especially during days when there is intertidal area and lagoons of all the islands good low tide, mostly 6-8 days every month The surveyed. Strombus sp. was found to occur in shells are collected from underneath the coral 2-3/m2 in a area of 200x203 mat Kalpeni lagoon stones in the lagoon and reef crest. A Suheii Nerita plicat was found 5 numbers/m^ in the reef P^r the method of fishing involved, depositing crest, whereas at Agatti and Bitra reef crest the coconut leaves in the lagoon water for few days. concentration was 10-15 numbers/m'.

BUUETIN43 87 3. Ornamental gastropods edible is widely distributed in the islands surveyed. The density of population observed A variety of large shells especially Cone at Minicoy was 20 numbers/m', at Suheli Par 2 shells, cowries, spider conchs, scorpion shells, numbers/m2, at Kalpeni 100 numbers/m', at trumpet shells, Murex shells, top shells and Agatti 32-205 numbers/m^, at Bangaram5-15 helmet shells, are available in the reef crests numbers/m- and 10-35 numbers,m^ at Bitra. of the islands surveyed. 24 cone shells were The size of this bivalve collected ranged from found to occur in various islands and among 6 33.9 mm. Another bivalve found in good them Conus leopardus and C. Iltteratus are concentration was Telllna Idea in the lagoon of common in most of the islands. These Kalpeni Islands. The denisty was 40 numbers m^. shells reache 1c-14cm in size. Out of the 13 It is understoad that during lean period local species of cowries recorded, 2 forms sustenance fishermen consume the meat of this bivalve. fishery and 2 species of larger cowries viz. The size ranged from 44.3-67.2 mm. At Minicoy Cyprea tigris and Cyprea arabica are also and Kalpeni lagoon Luclna nassula was found at a collected for ornamental purposes. Three species density of 100-1000 numbers/m^ with a size of Spider conchs, Lambis lambis, L. truneata and range of 3.85-12.24 mm. Though this is not L. chiragra are recorded from the reef crests and being consumed, the concentration of this lagoons of various islands. L. truneata was species in the lagoon is quite interesting. found to aggregate in good numbers at Minicoy. Donax faba, a wedge clam known as an edible Larger shells of L. lambis and L. truneata are bivalve was found along with Masodesma sp at abundant in Minicoy, Agatti Bengaram, Bitra, Agati with a size range of 19-27.4 mm. The Kadmat, Kalpeni and Suheli Par. Cassis cornuata density was2 3 numbers'mj Saecostrea cucull- and Cyprea rufa are two rare and beautiful shells ata the common rock oyster was found to ccur found in the reefs of Minicoy, Agatti, Kalpeni in ail the islands in the concrete pilings and and Amini. Trumpet shell, Chaonia tritonis is other harbour structures in the intertidal areas. also very rare and found to occur in Agatti, Tridacna maxima Fig. 1F and T. squamosa Amini and Chetlat. This is used for blowing were found in good numbers in the reef crests of in mosques. Among top shells, Trociius pyramis ail the islands, the former species being reaches larger size and has got a thick nacreous abundant. The density veries from 1-10 numbers layer, which is similar to Troehus niloticus. 100 m2. Though all these species were found found in Andaman and Nicobar Islands. Murex to occur in various density, there was no possi­ shells and olive shells were also found rarely bility of large-scale exploitation of them from in few islands. Among all these shells, none any of the islands. of them was found to occur in a commercially exploitable quantity. 2. Pearl oysters

BIVALVES The occurrence of pearl oyster Pinetada suglllata spat in good numbers in 10 islands 1. Edible bivalves. surveyed indicate the possibilities of farming pearl oysters in Lakshadweep for commercial pearl Mytilid bivalve Modiolus tulipa found in the production. Already preliminary experiments reef flats of few islands are considered as edible are being done by the Fisheries Department in and known locally as 'Kallumaikai'. This is this line. The spat collected during the recorded from Minicoy, Androth and Agatti. present survey ranged from 6.2-28.6mm with a The density of population at Androth was 15 density ranging from 1-50 numbers/100m!. numbers/m2 and at Agathi 5 numbers/m'. From This was often found attached to dead coral enquiry with fishermen it was understood that colonies and over the Tridcana shells, which are in the lagoon side there were good settlement common in the lagoon and reef crest. of this species at Minicoy in certain years. During lean fishing season Modiolus is collected 3. Soaring bivalves: and then boiled meat is extracted and eaten by Teredo sp., Lithophaga spp, Gastrochaena the islanders. The size oi Modiolus collected sp., Petrieola sp and MartesI a sp. were the ranged from 16-40. 4 mm. Masodesma sp. a common wood and coral boring bivalves recor­ venerid bivalve, which is also considered as ded during the present survey. They cause

88 CMFRI considerable amount of destruction to the harbour timber structures and also to the corals ,S.UHELI PAR ^;.. • in the reefs, by boring deep into them and -8' creating burrows. r <| N r'/' *% '(P '4 DISTRIBUTION OF MOLLUSCS IN VARIOUS . ! ISLANDS v'-'^ /' IH Table I shows the abundance of gastropods, -6' / ^f."' \ bivalves and cephalopods in 12 islands fl-- fj J?•" surveyed. Out of the 141 molluscs collected at - \'. present from these islands, 108 numbers were y gastropods, 28 bivalvas and 4 cephalopods. 1^ .r"' 4' is~q'uite evident that gastropods rank first in the - 4' ,A € ik^' number of species and the analysis of occurrence fl^ fi% • indicate that gastropods are more abundant in '->'''" itt - .* • * /? all the islands. The distribution of molluscs is 0 • */ indicated by abundant (XXX), Common (XX), rare (X) and absent (—). The areas where the commercially important molluscs occur are 1^ / • marked in the maps (Figs. 2-13). The maximum M number of molluscs collected were from Agatti f .>=-'•' followed by Minicoy, Chetlat and Kiltan. The •'i'" maximum number of species was found in reef '.ut'!?'''''' crests of various islands. The dead and live 72* 12' 14' 16' 18' corala afford an excellent habitat for a variety 1 1 ' • 1 1 Fig. 3. Distribution pattern of commercially Important of gastropods viz., Trochidae, Neritidae, Littori- molluscs at Suheli Par. nidae, Cerithidae, Cypracidae Cassididae, Muricidae, Buccinidae, Pyremidae, Conidae, Arcidae, Mytilidae, Pteridae, Spondylidae, Tridacnidae, Petricolidaeand Octopodidae. From the lagoon area, species belonging to Cerithidae, MINICOY IS r.-.-'-'-'-^^i^, Strombidae, Cypracidae, Muricidae, Nassaridae, N ,^s=*^ • •'' .*>•••;>'• Olividae, Mitridae, Conidae, Teribridae, Pteridae, ' ,x" f Lucinidae, Tridacnidae and Tellinidae were collected. In the intertidal sandy area Mesodesma r- II sp was very common; in the rocky area members of Neritidae, Littorinidae and Ostracidae were present in good numbers. !• • / g* f / DISCUSSION l^ >" / •'1 o'*^ / / Present survey has revealed that except Octopus and cowry fishing, there is no attempt for exploitation of molluscan resources from Lakshadweep. The observation on the occurrence -8" 16' '•'•i'X,^^ / and abundance of molluscs also indicate that 73*01' q2' Cj3. c^4- op- large-scale exploitation of any of the commerci­ ally important species from this area is remote. '^- Mesodesma ^:, O-Cowriesj A-Ornamental molluscs, The presence of pearl oyster spat {Pinctada %-Tri- Modiolus tulipo; •-Tellino idae, ®-Octopuses; and the successful rearing of Pinctada fucata A-Peorl oyster, Pinctada sugillato; A-Lucinanossu/o •n the lagoon of Bangaram and Agatti brought from Tuticorin indicate possibilities of initiating Fig. 2. Distribution pattern of commercially important molluscs at Minicoy. pearl oyster farming at Lakshadweep for taking

6ULLEriN43 8d ® ® ® •A9' •CeSOe- "'°'^KALPENI ISLAND 1 *i*»« N 1 ! \ 15 s // -8' / /' <^ ANOROTH IS. •ICf48' ^«% 73'40f 41' 42' 1 —1 L. _ Fig. 6. Distribution pattern of commercially important molluscs at Androth. -7' / / I! -6 1f

If -e' Jh i

-A'

73'37' ^^ '«X'iS!S^ 39' 40' 1 —• 1 Fig. 4. Diatrlbution pattarn of commarcialiy Important molluaca at Kaipeni.

KAVARATTI IS- Fig- 'J^, piitiibution 'pattern oflfcommercially important molluscs at Agatti.

r'^ t BENGARAM etc ISLETS -57' >' V. / ® ^K^-JUt. / 9 • V H, TINNAKARA "^ ^ -56' BANGARAM «(]^ T'^tf

rg II •• '

-10* %h.o ® ® « e 9

72'1572«I5' 15' 1.7' 18' 19- 3,7' I ' ' ' 1 w Fig. 6. Distribution pattern at commarcialiy important Fig. 8. Distribution pattern of commercially Important molluaca at Kavarattl. molluaca at Bangaram. Tinnakara and Parali.

90 CMFRi (1906) recorded 87 molluscs from Minicoy, AMINI Appukuttan (1983) recorded 9 coral boring IS. and Nair and bivalves Dharmaraj (1983) 19 woop N boring bivalves from Lakshadweep. Many of the molluscs reported in the present paper are -8' 1 ,^-' for the first reported time trom Lakshadweep. As such there is not much variation in the molluscan •• /V fauna of various islands in Lakshadweep and the ff faunastic composition is almost similar to those seen in the southeast coast of India, especially t / k the islands in the Gulf of mannar (Satyamurti, '•J 1952). It is felt that more details on breeding # behaviour of commercially important molluscs ct 01i 4 1 of the islands are to be collected for rational .Il'7 y exploitation of molluscan resources. ^ L^M. KADAMATH IS. /- 72'43' 4 4' 1 1 1-15' • Fig. 9. Distribution pattern of commarclaiiy important N 1 molluscs at Amini. 1 up pearl culture. However, more serious efforts / /; to conduct experiments on farming and raising 1 /'• a a good stock of oysters is felt necessary to take 1 h If up pearl culture at Lakshadweep especially in ' 1U If islands with larger lagoons like Bitra, Bangaram / ^ A' Agatti, Kalpeni and Minicoy. As Modiolus ff/i tulipa an allied species of mussel belonging to Mytilid is found in few islands, attempts to replant the spat of green mussel can be taken up in an experimental basis for initiating mussel farming in Lakshadweep. Female of 13' Octopus vulgaris is known to produce 12,000 to 40,000 eggs. This species commands a good price in Japan market for fresh and dried meat. i( This is known to reach 1 kg in just 4 months and the maximum weight observed is 10 kg. 0. vulgaris and 0. cyaneus are found to occur ll in few islands of Lakshadweep and forms a sustenance fishery. As there is demand for & fresh, frozen and dried and salted octopus meat, an attempt for octopus culture can be taken up to increase production. Silas (1985) has indi­ '%• cated that the availability of spawners and eggs of cephalopods in inshore waters, the rapid •i. growth and short generation period and hardiness ell are some of the factors in favour of mariculture of cephalopods. Sea ranching programmes to 7f48*.^ increase the production of ornamental molluscs Fig. 10. Distribution pattern of commercially important can also be done in selected islands. Smith molluscs at Kadmat.

BULLETIN 43 91 CHETLAT IS. ^«"*^*^ e^'^ /< -42' N|

1 ^r^K. .K)^ ^ y *fo^. y 'J / V V; ®^ 7 ,.*^o''^ f i i t^^ / Co V® J

.ir4i'i K 4^J /^ J ^^°l y

7^°4K '^V^ 4^'

Fig. 13. Distribution pattern of commercially impoitant molluscs at Chetlat.

REFERENCES

APPUKUTTAN, K. K. 1973. Distribution of coral-boring bivalves along the Indian Fig, 11. Distribution pattern of commercially Important molluscs at Kiltan, coasts. J. Mar. Biol. Ass. /ndia; 15(1): 429 432. GEORGE, K. C, P. A. THOMAS, K. K. APPU­ KUTTAN AND G. GOPAKUMAR. 1986. BtTRA IS Ancilliary living marine resources of Lakshadweep. /War. Fish. Infor. ser. filK""^***^^ T &E. Ser; No. 68:46-50. NAIR, N. B. AND K. DHARMARAJ. 1983. Marine wood boring molluscs of Lakshadweep Archipelago. /ntZ/e/jJ. Mar. Sci. 12 (2) : 96-99. / SATYAMURTY, S. T. 1952. The molluscs of Krusadi Island (in the Gulf of Mannar). f I. Amphineura and Gastropoda. Bull. Madras Govt. Mus. Nat. Hist. Sect: 1 (2) pt. 6. 265 pp + pl. XXXIV \ SILAS, E. G. 1985. Cephalopod Resources. o A Prospective, priorities and target for X 2000 A. D. in Cephalopod. bionomics; fisheries and resources of the exclusive \ economic zone of India. (ED. EG. Silas. % CMFRl Bulletin, Z7 172-183 ^t*w*M>ii'iK;*i*W

92 CMFRl 10- POTENTIAL FOR DEVELOPMENT OF PEARL CULTURE

K. Alagarswami, A. A. Chellam and A. C. C. Victor

INTRODUCTION Androth has no lagoon and pearl oyster was Subsequent to the development of technology present on the northern and southern intertidal for pearl culture by the Central Marine Fisheries flats of the island. A total of 21 spat ranging Research Institute at Tuticorin in 1972 (Alagar­ 11-21.8 mm were collected. The density was swami, 1974), the Department of Fisheries of about 3/100m2. Lakshadweep evinced interest in exploring the In Suheli par pearl oyster was seen both in possibility of establishing pearl culture in the lagoon at a depth of 2m and in the shoreward islands. Pearl oysters were located in the area of the intertidal reef crests on the eastern islands, collected and reared from time to time. side par. A total of 17 spat in the size range The programme took a more definite shape of 9.4-21.6 mm was collected. The density after some of the Officers of the Department of was about 2/100 m'. Fisheries were trained in pearl culture at the CMFR Institute at Tuticorin in 1979 and again In the lagoons of Kalpeni' Bangaram, Bitra in 1983 and 1986. Experimental pearl culture and Chetlat only a few spat could be collected. was initiated in Agatti and Bangaram and some In Bangaram, 8 spat (8-23 mm), Bitra, 2 spat cultured pearls have been produced. By way of (5.8-12.0mm), Chetlat, 4 spat in Kalpeni. 5 fostering their effort further, the Institute spat (9.5-17.3 mm) were collected. The estima­ supplied 10,C00 spat of Pinctada fucata raised ted population density was 2/100m2 in in the pearl oyster hatchery ar Tuticorin for Bangaram, Bitra and Kalpeni and 1/100 m' in transplantation in Lakshadweep. During the Chetlat. indicative survey of the fisheries potential of The survey indicated that except Minicoy Lakshadweep carried out by the CMFR Institute and Amini. the other inhabited islands and during January-March, 1987, first-hand infor­ some of the uninhabited islands have some pearl mation was collected on the occurrence of oyster settlement. Surprisingly enough, all the pearl oyster in the islands and the status of pearl oysters collected were spat measuring less experimental pearl culture being carried out in than 30 mm which may be around 6-9 month Agatti and Bangaram. The information is old. Larger oysters, either live or dead could presented in this paper and potential for pearl not be seen anywhere in the islands. All the culture in Lakshaweep is discussed. spat collected are flat with poor shell cavity and may belong to two species, Pinctada OBSERVATIONS sugillata and P. albina,or P. albina sugillata (Reeve) vide Hynd, l955;.At the size examined, it Distribution of pearl oyster was difficult to determine the species identity. During the survey, pearl oysters were Experience of the Department of Fisheries collected from Androth, Kavarathi, Kalpeni, of Lakshadweep has shown that the growth rate Suheli, Agatti, Bangaram, Kadmat, Kiltan, of native peart oysters in the Islands was very Chetlat and Bitra. Their distribution was very poor and they reached a size of 38-42mm sparse in the intertidal flats and in the lagoons. (8.0-9.5 g) in a period of 2^ to 3 years. The In Agatti, pearl oyster was observed on the nacre quality of these oysters is relatively poor. eastern side from the middle of the island to the southern end. The density was about Experimental transplantation of pearl oyster 50/100m2. A total of 51spat ranging between from mainland 5.2 to 22.2 mm was collected. In Kavarati, the An attempt was made in 1986 to transplant^ density was still less at 1/100 m^. Total!/ 8 spat of Pinctada fucata produced in the hatchery spat in size range of 6.2-28.6mm were collected. at Tuticorin to Lakshadweep. The consignment In Kadmat and Kiltan. the population was very consisted of a total of 10000 spat of which 7500 thin and the size range was 8-12mm. were in the size range 9.2-18.0mm with average

BULLEriN43 93 -xn*"

' iiiiiriwiiiiW-r

'iE^

«~- ^ _^ iiiililML.." - _ «**. .<.*r jflH^I*„... * .^ fc ^'^ 'ft*

ij^ V rmfn wirfh

Fig. 1. Pearl oyster culture in the Agatti lagoon by Fig. 4. Raft culture of pearl oyster in the Bangaram long-line lagoon

pj?**»fc^a|i*»*

:'-''-^%M:v-i-^^'^'::'':'::':l'^-^^^^^ .:•.:..,..-.-:..;..;.•;:. '•._ --^.^^i^-; •••-.^

';^^;;^.:|;;#.:

Fig. 2. Pearl oyster spat are reared in plastic basket ^jg-. 5. Native pearl oystertspatroffthef intertidal reef flat of Agatti island

1 •";• J •

Fig. 3. A rearing basket with pearl oysters spat attached Fig. 6. Native pearl oysters after 2i^ -3 years of reari ng to the aides in the Agatti farm

94 CMFRI weight of 0.5 g and 2500 were about 3.7 mm area near the jetty is protected from winds and size and 0.025 g weight. waves and is not affected by the monsoon currents. Year-round pearl oyster culture is The spat were packed in leak-proof poly­ possible here. The Department of Fisheries set thene bags of about 10 I capacity with 3 I of up a pearl culture farm in Bangaram in 1982. filtered sea water at the rate of 750 per bag. Raft culture has been adopted to farm the pearl The bag was filled with oxygen and tied oysters. A good growth of algae was seen on tightly. It was placed in tin container of 18 I the plastic baskets containing oysters. The capacity. The consignment was taken by road fouling organisms on the oysters were calcareous from Tuticorin to Cochin with a journey time of tubes of polychaetes and simple and compound 12 h. On reaching Cochin, the spat [were ascidians. The predators were Cymatium, a released in sea water in plastic basins and gastropod, and crabs and they gain entry into aerated. The spat were taken in open plastic the oyster baskets in the larval stages. Destruct­ basins on board a passenger ship. During the ion of spat by these predators had been voyage of 27 h from Cochin to Agatti, sea water sometimes very extensive. was frequently changed. The spat reached the destination without suffering any mortality. During the present survey, observations They were transplanted in the farms at Agatti were made on the pearl oyster spat transplanted and Bangaram. from Tuticorin to Agatti and Bangaram. In 4 months, the oysters had reached an average Experimental pearl oyster culture in Lakshadweep length (dorso-ventral measurement) of 22.4mm and thickness of 6.6 mm in Agatti and length of The Department of Fisheries, Lakshadweep 28.3 mm and thickness of 8.1 mm in Bangaram. had initiated a pearl culture programme at Agatti The health of oyster and growth were found to and Bangaram. The pearl oyster spat are be better in Bangaram than in Agatti. collected from the intertidal reef flat on the eastern side of Agatti and are temporarily PROSPECTS FOR PEARL CULTURE farmed in the lagoon on the western side of the Commercial pearl culture has been a island. Long-line is used to suspend the common feature of some of the oceanic islands baskets with oysters. Glass and plastic floats in the south-western Pacific. The lagoons and of 12"-18" diameter numbering 12 are intercon­ reef flats ot these islands have natural population nected and anchored at both ends. The plastic of pearl oyster, particularly the black-lip basket is covered by a velon screen bag of Pinctada margaritifera, which are used in pro­ mesh size 1 mm. The lagoon bottom is sandy duction of black pearls. Lagoons of oceanic with luxurious growth of seagrass. The depth islands have many advantages for farming of is about 2.5 m at high tide. The bag and the pearl oysters and production of cultured pearls, basket had profuse growth of algae on the outer particularly from the environment view-point. side. The main fouling organisms on the pearl Generally these relate to protection from winds oysters at Agatti were seaweeds, simple and and waves, depth, nature of bottom, sea water compound ascidians and calcareous tube-dwel­ exchange between the ocean and the lagoon ling polychaetes. Barnacles were absent. productivity and relativey greater efficiency with Due to high winds and waves, the farm in which a culture system in a semi-enclosed area Agatti lagoon had to be dismantled during can be managed. Marutea lagoon in the south-west monsoon season. Tuamotu-Gambier Archipelago of French Polyne­ Bangaram island offered a suitable site for sia is the centre of intense pearl culture activity for production of expensive black pearls (Ward pearl culture in the Lakshadweep islands, 1985). Melanesia and Micronesia also have Bangaram, Tinnakara and Parii are sand banks some pearl culture activity in the Pacific. in the middle of the extensive lagoon. Bangaram is almast in the middle of the lagoon. The In the light of' the above, background of lagoon close to the estern shore of Bangaram is lagoon based pearl culture in oceanic islands' about 5-7m deep. The bottom is of calcareous some of the islands of Lakshadweep would sand. The northern shore extends eastwards as appear to have the potential for pearl oyster sand bank, giving additional protection. The culture. Experience has shown that Bangaram

PULLETIN 43 95 island has some of the ideal conditions. The used for nucleus implantation for production of lagoon is well protected and has a depth of 5-7m cultured pearls. Pearl production should be with a calcareous sandy bottam. Being a semi- evaluated using parameters such as rates of enclosed lagoon oceanic water exchange is survival, nucleus retention and gross production good The growth of pearl oyster is better in and quality of pearls. Bangaram than in Agatti, The shell colour and Besides P. fucata it is also proposed to growth margins of transplanted oysters in test lagoon's potential for transplantation of Bangaram appear natural indicating that the P. margaritifera when the species is bred environment is suitable for the health and successfully in the hatchery at Tuticorin and growth of the farmed oysters. Due to protection high survival rate is achieved in future. The and depth, raft culture is feasible throughout young spat of this species does not survive in the year. However, further observations are the inshore farm at Tuticorin. The black-lip necessary to see if the oyster attains its maxi­ mum growth potential in terms of size, weight pearl oyster is native to Andaman and Nicobar and shell cavity in normal time. Islands vAlagarswami, 1983) and would appear to prefer oceanic condition than the sub­ The native pearl oyster resource in the continent's coastal condition. Perhaps, it may islands has so far proved to be very scanty and survive better in the lagoons of Lakshadweep is not of the species required for commercial and this hypothesis is to be checked by experi­ pearl culture. The oysters are of the flat type, mentation. resembling some that have bean seen in the coastal areas and harbour basin of the mainland ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS fAlagarswami, 1977) which are not suitable for The authors are grateful to Shri George pearl production owing to smaller size, flatness Varghese, Director of Fisheries, Kavaratti and of shells and poor quality of nacre. The natural other officials of the Fisheries Department of population has been seen to grow only to 38-42 Lakshadweep for the data and the information mm (8-9.5 g) in 2J-3 years. It is not clear from on the experimental pearl culture in Agatti and this data whether the stock occurring in the Bangaram. islands has a very low growth potential in terms of size and weight. This can be clearly under­ REFERENCES stood only after parallel culture of native stock of the islands and that of P. fucata transplanted ALAGARSWAMI, K. 1974. Development of from the mainland is carried out for about 3 cultured pearls in India. Cun. Sci.. years. Based on the current knowledge, it 43 (7) : 205-207. would seem that no worthwhile pearl culture is ALAGARSWAMI, K. 1977. Larval transport and possible with the pearl oysters naturally occu­ settlement of pearl oysters (Genus rring in Lakshadweep. Pinctada) in the Gulf of Mannar. Proc- Symp. warm water Zoop/., Sp\. Pubin, Transplantation of P. fucata from mainland UNESCO/NIO, pp, 678-686 to the islands has been carried out very success­ fully in the first instance in 1986. Detained ALAGRSWAMI, K. 1983. The black-lip pearl observations on their survival, growth and oyster resources and pearl culture propagation on a continuous basis over a period potential. In : Mariculture potential of of time is necessary. If the species establishes Andaman and Nicobar Islands - An itself through spawning and spatfall, it will indicative survey. Bu/J. Cent. Mar. Fish_ prove ideal for pearl culture. Otherwise periodic Res. Inst., 34 : 72-78. transplantation would be required. In future it HYND, J. S. 1955. A revision of the Australian may also be necessary to develop a routine pearl shells. Genus Pinctada (Lamelli- quarantine procedure against possible trans- branchia). Aust. J. Mar. Freshw. Res , mittance of pathogenic organisms and predators 6 (1): 98-137. from the mainland to the islands. The present WARD, F. 1985. The pearl. National Geographic, stock of transplanted P. fucata may be partly 168(2): 193-222.

86 CMFftI 1 1. ECHINODERMS OF LAKSHADWEEP AND THEIR ZOOGEOGRAPHY

D. B. James

Dr. Stanley Gardiner carried out an Key to the orders of the c/ass extensive survey in the Maldives'and Minicoy Islands, the Southernmost of the Lakshadweep Conspicuous marginal plates in two rows group of Islands. Echinoderms other than the bordering the disc and arms; pedicellariae sessile or alveolar type; tubefeet in two rows, with Or holothurians were dealt by Bell (1902) who without suckers PHANEROZONIA reported four species of starfishes from Minicoy Island. Corrections for some of the species Conspicuous marginal plates forming a broad have been given by A. M. Clark and Davies verticle edge to the arm usually wanting; aboral (1966). Koehlerand Vaney (1908) reported skeleton reticulate or imbricate; tubefeet in two three species of holothurians from the Laksha­ rows with suckers; pedicellariae rarely present.... dweep. Holothurians of Gardiner's collection SPINULOSA was dealt in a cursory manner by Pearson (1913 1914). James (1969) recorded forty species ORDER : PHANEROZONIA of echinoderms from various Islands of the Lakshadweep. Naghabushanam and Rao (1972) This order includes five suborders v/z., reported 49 species of echinoderms from the Pustulosa, Cribellosa, Paxillosa, Notomyota and Minicoy Island, the identity of some need to be Valvata. Members belonging to the suborder checked. Miirty et al. (1979) reported the Pustulosa are completely extinct. Members notorious starfish the crown of thorns belonging to the suborders Paxillosa and Valvata Acanthaster planci from Minicoy Atoll. Recently are known from the Lakshadweep. Mukhopadhyay and Samanta (2983)' reported Key to the suborders of the Order twelve species of holothurians from the Islands of Androth, Kalpeni and Minicoy. Skeleton of dorsal surface with typical paxillae; tubefeet devoid of suckers PAXILLOSA Material collected by the three teams of CMFRI during January to march, 1987 form the Skeleton of dorsal surface paxilliform or other­ main basis for this paper. Collections made wise; tubefeet with suckers VALVATA by Mr. M. AM Manikfan from Minicoy and other Islands and also by Mr. K. C. S. Panicker from SUBORDER : PAXILLOSA Kavaratti and Agatti have also been included. Species belonging to the Families Luidiidae Throughout this account, references are kept to a and Astropectinidae are known from the Laksha­ minimum by citing only original references, dweep. references pertaining to Lakshadweep and one or two standard references. Key to Fami/ies of the Suborder

SYSTEMATIC ACCOUNT Long flexible arms with relatively small disc; arms 5-11 bordered with spiny fringe; supero- Echinoderms belonging to all the five marginals reduced and appear identical with classes have been collected. A single spcimen adjacent paxillae; infero-marginals much elong­ of crinoid which was collected at Kadmat was ated transversely and cover greater part of the broken to small bits rendering identification ventral side LUIDIIDAE impossible. Body stellate with couspicuous marginal, plates- Class ASTEROIDEA marginal plates covered with little spines that Species belonging to two orders are increase in size at the margin reported from the Lakshadweep. ASTROPECTINIDAE

BULLETIN 43 97 Family: LUIDIIDAE marginal plates with smooth surface although some species are warty; armament usually This family includes only one genus viz. granuliform, sometimes increasing in size or Luidis. modifed into tubercles; intermarginal plates Genus Luidia Forbes. 1839 if present occur only basally Only one species viz., Luidia maculata OPHIDIASTERIDAE Muller&Troschel is known from the LakshadweeP 2'. Dorsal surface is membraneous; marginal Family : ASTROPECTINIDAE plates are exposed and are more or less overlapping ASTEROPIDAE Spices belonging to the genus Astropecten are recorded from the Lakshadweep. FAMILY: OREASTERIDAE

Genus Astropecten Gray, 1840 Members belonging to this Family are Three species are known from the Lakshadweep. usually large with reticulate skeleton. Two genera are known under this Family. A third Key to tfi3 species of tfie genus genus viz., Halityle is recorded for the first time. 1. All the supero-marginal plates with long Key to the genera of the Family pointed spines; usually second plate small and spineless (sometimes plates 2-4 with­ 1. Arms well developed; only the primary out spines) A. Polyacanthus plates of the upper side with elevations; Muller &Troschel, 1842 pore areas well defined Pentaceraster 1'. All the supero-marginal plates with moderat­ Doderlein, 1916 ely developed spines 2 1'. Body pentagonal or almost circular in out­ 2. Distal supero-marginal plate with a spine line 2 on the outer part of plate; tipes of arms more or less blunt 2. Marginal plates clearly seen even in large A. indicus Doderlier 1889 specimens; tubercles absent on the dorsal 2'. Distal supero-marginai plates rarely with side; pore areas well defined and triangular any large spines; only diminitive spines in shape; granules of the actinal plates below the main infero-marginal plate markedly flattened and forming a smooth A. monacantlius Sladen, 1883 plastering following the countours of the plates Halityle Fisher, 1913 SUB-ORDER VALVATA 2'. Marginal plates concealed by thickned skin; Species belonging to two Families are some enlarged tubercles often present on known from the Lakshadweep. Species belong­ the dorsal side; pore areas irregular and ing to the Family Asteropidae is recorded for the sometimes indistict or more or less continu­ first time in this work. ous; actinal granules mostly coarse and individually distinct, often obscuring the Key to ttie Famiiies of ttte Sub-Order limits of the plates Culcita 1. Dorsal skeleton reticulate with secondary L. Agassiz, 1835 plates joining the primary ones and leaving Genus Pentaceraster Doderlein, 1916 conspicuous large poriferous areas in Under this genus only one species is between; marginal plates well developed collected. but not conspicuous (except in specimens of Pentaceraster regulus (Muller & (Culcita) and sometimes completely covered Torschel 1842) by thick skin OREAS TERIDAE Pentacerous regulus Muller & Troschel, 1842, 1'. Dorsal skeleton not reticulate; dorsal side p. 51: Bay of Bengal. either covered by granules or by membrane Pentaceraster austral is Ja,mes, 1969, p. 52: Gulf 2 of Mannar, Palk Bay Lakshadweep. Pentaceraster regulus AM. Clark & Rowe, 1971, 2. Members with small disc, long flexible cylin­ pp. 34,55: Bay of Bengal, East Indies, drical arms with reduced and inconspicuous North Australia, Philippines, China and

98 CMFRI Southern Japan, South Pacific Islands Key to the species of the genus (Distribution Table); James, 1986, p. 579: Lakshadweep & Maldives, Gulf of No spines or spinlets on the pore areas Manner and Palk Bay along the South Culcita schmideliana (Retzius, 1805) East cost of India (Distribution Table). Some spines or tubercles present within pore areas Culcita novaeguineaeX Muller & Material: Bitra, one specimen, depth one metre: Troschel, 1842 /?emsrAs This species was collected from Bitra in 1968 and during the present survey not a Culcita Schmideliana (Retzius 1805) single specimen was collected. It is very rare (Figs. 2 & 3) and was recorded for the first time from Laksha­ dweep by the author in 1969.

Genus Halityle Fisher, 1913 One.species is collected under this genus lor the first time from the Lakshadweep. Halityle regularis Fisher (Fig. 1)

Fig. 2 Culcita sciiemideliana (Adult)

Fig. 1 Halityle regularis Halityle regularis Fisher, 1913, p. 211: Philip­ pines; James, 1973, p. 557: Gulf of Mannar; A. M. Clark & Rowe, 1971, pp. 34, 53: Philippines (Distribution Table) Material: Kiltan, one specimen, washed ashore. Remar/(s : It is a rare species and is recorded Fig. 3 Culcita schemideliarta (Juvenile) here for the first time from Lakshadweep. Genus Culcita L. Agassiz, 1835 Asterias schmideliana Retzius, 1805; p. : Locality not known. This genus is common in Lakshadweep. Only one species is known earlier, now a second Culcita schmideliena A.M. Clark & Davies, 1986, species species is recorded for the fitst time p. 602: Maldives; A. M. Clark and Rowe, here 1971, pp. 34, 53: Islands of Western Indian

SUUETIN43 99 Ocean, Mauritius, East Africa and MadagaS' 2. Body entirely covered by thick smooth skin car, S. E. Arabia, Maldives (Distribution obscuring the limits of the plates Table); James, 1986, p. 579: Lakshadweep Leiaster Peters, 1852 & Maldives area. Gulf of Mannar and Palk 2'. Granules or tubercles present on all the Bay along the South East Coast of India, plates 3 Sri Lanka, Andaman and Nicobar Islands 3. Armament restricted to a clustre of coarse (Distribution Table) granules or tubercles in the centre of each plate, the remaining surface covered with /Wartr/a/: Kadamat, one specimen; Amini, two skin Dactylosaster Gray, 1840 specimens; Kavaratti, one specimen, all collected from the lagoon, less than one metre in depth. 3'. True granulation continuous all over the plates, skin not conspicuous, eight series of Remarks: This species is somewhat rare when pore-areas Ophidiaster L. Agassiz, 1835 compared to the other species Culcita novaegui- 4. Adambulacral armament superficially appear­ neae. ing granuliform; arms cylindrical, disc small Culcita novaeguineae Muller & Troschej Linckia Nardoa, 1834 4'. Adambulacral armament spiniform, arms Culcita novaeguinea Muller 8- Troschel, 1842, p. more or less flattened and wider basally....5 38: East Indies; H. L. Clark, 1921, p. 32: 5. Papular pores present or the oral side, pores Torres Strait: A M. Clark & Rowe, 1971, pp. single, form more or less flattened, R rarely 34, 54: Bay of Bengal, East Indies, North exceeding 40mm Fromia Gray, 1840 Australia, Philippines, China and Southern Japan, Pacific Islands, Hawaaian Islands 5'. No papular pores below the infero-marginals. James, 1983, p. 89; Andaman and Nicobar Uniform granulation on the actinal, abactinal and supero-marginal plates; aboral Islands; (Distribution Table) reticulate skeleton not so well defined, Material: Chetlat, one specimen ; Kiltan, two marginal plates well defined Paraferdina specimens; Agatti, two specimens; Kavaratti, James, 1973 two specimens; Minicoy, one specimen, all collected from the lagoon, less than one metre Genus Leiaster Peters, 1852 in depth. Only two species are known from the Indian Seas. Remarks: One small specimens of R 10 mm collected from Kiltan looks like a Goniasterid. Leiaster leachi (Gray) (Fig. 4) Family OPHJDIASTERIDAE

This is large family of star fishes occurring commonly in shallow waters and particularly associated with corals and rock slabs. The small disc and long, often cylindrical, sub- cylindrical arms are characterstic of the Family. The colours in life are often bright, red, blue, purple and variegated forms are common. Six Genera are known from the Lakshadeep. Of these five are collected during the survey.

Key to the Genera of the Family

1. Abactinal plates more or less arranged in regular longitudinal series for the whole length of arm 2 1'. Abactinal plates irregular in arrangement, though proximally there may be a tendency for regular arrangement 4 Fig. 4 Leiaster leachi

100 CMPRI Ophidiaster leachi Gray, 1849, p. 284 ; Mauritus Leiaster ieachi H. L. Clark, 1921, pp. 73-74: Torres Strait: A.M. Clark & Davies 1966 p. 598: Maldives: James, 1969, 53 Bitra Minicoy (Laksha- dweep). Africa, Maldives, East Indies, North Austrlia (Distribution Table) Nagabhu- shanam and Rao, 1972, p. 289: Minicoy Atoll, James, 1986, p. 579; Lakshadweep &. Maldives, Sri Lanka (Distribution Table). fiAaterial: Minicoy, one specimen R 172 mm; Bitra, one specimen, R 30 mm Leiaster speciosus v. Martens, 1866, p. 70: East Indies; H. L. Clark, 1921, p. 74: Fig. 5 Dactylosaster cylindricus Torres Strait; A.M. Clark & Rowe, Arabia, Maldives, Sri Lanka, East Indies. 1971, pp. 36, 58: East Indies, South Pacific Islands, Hawaiian Islands North Australia, Philippines (Distribution Table), Nagabhushanam and (Distribution Table). Rao, 1972, p. 289: Minicoy Atoll; James, 1986 p. 579: Maldives & Lakshadweep, Sri fiamarks: Leiaster ieacfii and L. spaciosus are Lanka (Distribution Table) separated from each other by the presence of pedicellariae in case of L. laactii but this Material: Chetlat, several specimens; Kiltan, character is found to be highly variable. Also several specimens; Kadamat, two specimens; the colour of L. leachi is given as variegated, Amini, three specimens; Kavaratti, five speci­ orange yellow and red whereas in L. specious mens; Minicoy, several specimens, all collected it is given as uniformly crimson by H L. Clark from underside of coral stones. (1946). These two characters are not of specific value and therefore the two species are Remarks : This is one of the common asteroids considered here as synonymous. Earlier workers of Lakshadeep. One specimen collected from like H. L. Clark (1921), Hayashi (1938), A.m. Kavaratti has seven arms. The arms are of Clark (1967) and A. M. Clark and Rowe (1971) dissimilar size in some specimens. have also expressed doubt about the validity of Genus Linckia Nardoa, 1834 L. spaciosus. James (1969). This species recorded for the first time from the Lakshadweep. Three species are recorded from the Indian seas. All the three species are collected during Genus Dactylosaster Gray, 1840 the Survey.

Only one species is known under this genus Key to the species of the Genus from the Indian Seas. 1. Subambulacral spines in two series; furrow Dactylosaster cylindricus (Lamarck) spines not separated by granules (Fifl- 5) L. guildingi Qxsi. y^Q Astarias cylindrica Lamarck, 1816, p. 567. Y. Subambulacral spines in single series; furrow Ophidiaster cylindrica BeW, ^902. p. 227: Mini­ spines separated by verticle series of coy (Lakshadweep). granules 2 Dactylosaster cylindricus H. L. Clark, 1921, p. 2. Arms normally five in number with single 85: Hawaii; A. M. Clark and Davies, 1966, madreporite; arms fairly stout and blunt at p. 598: Maldives; James, 1969, p. 53; Port the tip L. laevigata {Unnaeus, 1758) Louis (Mauritius), Minicoy (Lakshadweep); 2'. Arms often irregular in length with two A. M. Clark and Rowe, 1971, pp , 34, 59: madreporites; arms slender and more or less Islands of Western Indian Ocean, Mascarere pointed at the tip L. multifora (Lamark, Islands, East Africa & Madagascar, S. E. 1816)

BULLETIN 43 101 Linckia guildingi Gray Linckia multlfora (Lamack) (Figs. 6-9) Linckia guildingi Gray, 1840, p. 285: St. Vincents; H. L. Clark, 1921: Bermuda, Bahamas, Florida, Cuba, St. Kitts, Tobago, Brazil, Lower Guinea, Zazibar, Queensland Society Islands, Tahiti; Ely, 1942, p. 18: Hawdii; A. M. Clark & Davies, 1966, p. 598: Maldives; A.M. Clark & Rowe, 1971, pp. 36,61: Islands of Western Indian Ocean, Raserere Islands East Africa & Madagascar, 5 E Arabia, Persian Gulf, Maldiverea, Sri Lanka area Bay of Bengal, East Indies, North Australia. Philippines, China & South Japan, South Pacific Island, Hawaiian Islands (Distribution Table); James 1986, p. b79; Lakshadweep & Maldives, Sri Lanka, ~a—u—fa. .«—la—ti_».» _«i u si a_. n .,„m,. .*_ Andaman & Nicobar Islands (Distribution Fig. 6 Linckia multifora (Normal speciman) Table).

Material: Chetlat, one specimen R 210 mm; Amini, one specimen, R 120 mm; collected from lagoon, depth less than a metre. Remarks: This is a very rare species in Laksha­ dweep. It probably lives among live corals.

Linckia laevigata (Linnaeus)

Asterias laevigata Linnaeus, 1758, p. 662.

Linckia laevigata Bell, 1902, p. 226: Laksha­ dweep: A. M. Clark & Rowe 1971, pp. 36, 62; Islands of Western Indian Ocean. Mascarare Islands East Africa & Madagascar, Lakshadweep, Sri Lanka area Bay of Bengal, East Indies, North Australia, Philippines, China & Southern Japan, South Pacific , >! fi, »i . s' « vi__ 21 }t m_ »^ Islands (Distribution Table); Nagabhushanam Fig. 7 Linclda muitifora (with a bud) 6 Rao, 1972, p. 289: Minicoy Atoll; James- 1986, p. 579: Lakshadweep & Maldives, Gulf of Mannar and Palk Bay on the South East Coast of India; Sri Lanka, Andaman and Nicobar Islands (Distribution Table)

Material: Bitra, one specimen; Amini, one speci­ men, Agatti, one specimen; Kavaratti, three specimens; Minicoy, several specimens, all from collected the lagoon, less than one metre in depth.

Remarks: Both the blue and brown forms are collected. The arms are longer and slender in brown forms. Fig. 8 Linclda multifora (With four arms)

102 CMFRI present series has R 110 mm. Some commet orms have been collected. One form looks exactly like a cross. One specimen is of particular interest. The five arms are disimilar in size. On the smallest arm a bud has developed (Fig. 7) which has four arms. One of the arms is swollen due to the presence of a parasitic grastropod Stilifer sp.

Genus Fromia Gray, 1840

Only one species is known from the Laksha dweep. Now a second species is collected for the first time. Small forms living under coral stones with R rarely exceeding 40 mm.

Key to the species of the Genus 1. Abactinal plates markedly unequal; actinal plates with short blunt spinelets or enlarged granules F. indicus (Perrier, 1869) 1'. Abactinal plates though irregular, similar in size; abactinal granulation even; aboral side flat; carinal series of plates not distinct Fig. 9 Linckia multifora (With six arms) F. milleporella (Lamarck, 1816) Astarias multifora Lamarck, 1816, p. 565. Locality not known. Formia indica (Perrier) Linckia multiforis Bell, 1902, p. 223: Laksh-a Scytaster indicus Perrier, 1869, p. 235: Locality dweep & Maldives. not known. Linclda multifora Ely, 1942, p. 19: Hawaii; A. M. Fromia indica Perrir, 1875, pp. 177-178; Koehler; Clark & Davies, 1966, p 598: Maldives; 1910, p. 140; Hayashi, 1938, p. 59: Japan, James, 1969, p. 53: Gulf of Mannar, Red James, 1969, p. 53: Andamans; A. M. Clark sea, Lakshadweep, Borneo; A.M. Clark & & Roaw, 1971, pp. 34, 62: Maldivearea Rowe, 1971, pp. 36, 62: Islands of the Sri Lanka, Bay of Bengal, East Indies, Western Indian Ocean, Mascarere Islands' Philippines, China and Southern Japan; East Africa & Madagascar, Red Sea, S. E. South Pacific Islands (Distribution Table), Arabia, Persian Gulf, West India & Pakistan A. M. Clark & Davies, 1966, p. 602: Maldive area, Sri Lanka, East Indies, Maldives; James, 1986, to 579; Laksha­ Philippines, China & S. Japan, South Pacific dweep &- Maldive area, Sri Lanka, Andaman Islands, Hawaiian Islands (Distribution and Nicobar area (Distribution Table). Table); Nagabhushanam & Rao, 1972, p. Material: Kavaratti, one specimen, under coral 289: Minicoy Atoll; James, 1986, p. 579: stones. Lakshadweep & Maldives, Gulf of Mannar and Palk Bay along the South East coast of Remarks: This is very rare species in the Laksha­ India, Sri Lanka (Distribution Table) dweep. Colour in the living condition is red. Formia milleporella (Lamarck) Material: Chetlat, two specimens: Bitra, one specimen; Kiltan, two specimens, Kadamat, Astarias milleporella Lamarck, 1816, p. 564: several specimens; Amini, two specimens; Mini- Locality not known. coy, several specimens, all specimens collected Formia milleporella H. L. Clark, l921, p. 40 under coral stones. Torres Strait; A. M. Clark and Davies, 1966' Remarks: This is the most common starfish in p. 602: Maldives; A. M. Clark & Rowe,' the Lakshadweep. H. L. Clark (ig^^l) has stated 1971, pp. 34, 63: Mascaerne Islands, East that the largest specimen known in the species Africa & Madagascar, Maldive area, Sr' has; R 95 mm. The largest specimen in the Lanka, Bay of Bengal, East Indies, North

BUUETIN43 103 Australia, Philipin^s, China and So'Jthsrn Japan, South Pacific Islands (Distribution Table); James, 1986, p. 579: Lakshadweep and Maldive area, Sri Lanka (Distribution Table).

Material: Bitra, one specimen, collected from underside of coral stones.

Genus Paraferdina James, 1973

This new genus is reported from Minicoy in 1973. Since that time it has not been collected again.

Paraferdina /accaaivensis James Parafirdina laccadivensis James, 1973, pp. 556- 559: Minicoy (Lakshadweep) James, 1986, 580: Lakshadweep & Maldive area (Distri­ bution Table). Material: Minicoy, one specimen, collected from the lagoon, depth less than one metre. Fig. 10 Asteropsis cartnifera Remarks: James (1973) gave a detailed des­ Remarks: R of the specimens collected varied cription of the species. It has not been collected from 58-110 mm. Though this species is again since its first discovery. common at Chetlat and Kiltan it is surprising that this species is not recorded from the Laksha­ FAMILY: ASTEROPIDAE dweep and even from Maldives so far. It is This is a small Family with a few genera. recorded here for the first time from the Laksha­ In the Lakshadweep one genus is collected dweep. during the present survey. Genus Asteropsis Mulier & Troschel, 1840 ORDER : SPINULOSA This well marked genus is widely distributed Members belonging to two Families are in the Indo-Pacific region. known from the Lakshadweep. Species belong­ Asteropsis carlnlfera ^ Lamarck) ing to a third Family are collected for the first (Fig. 10) time during the survey. Key to the Families of the Order Asterias carinl/era Lamarck, 1816, p. 556: Locality not known. 1. Arms 10-20 with numerous madreporites, Asterope carlnlfera H. L. Clark, 1921, p. 33: aboral armament with numerous large, Torres Strait, pointed spines mounted singly on stalk­ like pedicles; size large Asteropsis carlnlfera James, 1969, p. 54: ACANTHASTERIADE Solomon Islands of Western Indian Ocean, East Africa & Madagascar, Red 1'. Arms usually five or six, madreporite usually Sea, S. E. Arabia, Sri Lanka area. East one though sometimes up to five present; Indies, North Australia, Philippines, size small to moderate 2 China & Southern Japan, South Pacific 2. Arms short, body stellate or even sometimes Islands, Hawaiian Islands; (Distribution pentagonal; aboral armament scale like Table); James, 1986, p. 580: Sri Lanka imbricating plates armed usually with fine (Distribution Table;. spinelets or granules ASTERINIDAE 2'. Arms elongate, slender and cylindrical; Material: Chetlat, several specimens; Kiltan, aboral surface covered with thick skin; several specimens, all collected from the reef adambulacral spines few, usually three flat. ECHINASTERIDAE 104 CMFRI FAMILY : ACANTHASTERIDAE Remarks: Fortunately the concentrations of this species is negligible in Lakshadweep and This Family has only one genus Wz„ therefore they do not form a threat to the coral Acanthaster. reefs at present. Genus Acanthaster Gervasis, 1841 FAMILY : ASTERINIDAE Only one species is known from the Laksha- dweep. Members belonging to this family are small, secretive and are found clinging to the underside Acanthaster planci (Linnaeus) of rock fragments or concealed in crevices but (Fig. 11) some occur on sandy bottom. Many species are brightly coloured but in some the colouration is diversified and variable. Three genera are recorded for the first time from the Lakshadweep.

Key to the Genera of the Family 1. Arms carinate, relatively long R/r 2.0/1 to 4.0/1 Tegulaster Livi ngstone, 1933 1'. Arms not carinate, short and triangular R/r 1.2/1 to 2.0/1 2 2. Abactinal plates of papular areas all of one kind not cresentic or notched for papulae Astarina Nardoa, 1834 2'. Abactinal plates of papular areas of two kinds, the larger cresentic or notched for papulae Patirilla Verrill, 1913 Genus Tegulaster Livingstone, 1933 Fig. 11 Acanthaster planci Only one species is known under this genus Asterias plane/ Linnaeus, 1758, p. 832 from the Indian Seas. This genus is recorded for the first time from the Lakshadweep. Acanthaster p/anci Madsen, 1955, pp. 181-187: Mauritius, Haarlem Island, Kei Island: Tegulaster Ceylanicus (Doderlein) James, 1969, p. 54: Lakshadweep, (Fig. 12) Nicobar, Solomon Islands; A. M. Clark and Rowe, 1971, pp. 38, 71: Islands of Western Indian Ocean, Mascarene Islands, East Africa & Madagascar, Red Sea, S. E. Arabia, Western India & Pakistan, Maldive area, Sri Lanka area. Bay of Bengal, East Indies, North Australia, Philippines, China & Southern Japan, South Pacific Islands, Hawaiian Islands; (Distribution Table). James, 1986, p. 580; Lakshadweep & Maldives area, Sri Lanka, Andaman & Nicobar Islands. (Distribution Table).

Material: Kadamat, one specimen; Agatti, two specimens; Kavaratti. two specimens; Kalpeni, one specimen; Minicoy, three specimens, all specimens collected from live corals from a depth of 1-2 metres. Tegulaster oeylamcus

BULLETIN 43 106 Disasterina cey/anica Doderlein, 1889, p. 825: Patlriella exigua Fisher, 1919, p. 416: Philip­ Sri Lanka. pines, East Indies: A. M. Clark & Rowe, 1971, pp. 38,67: East Africa & Madaga- Tegulaster ceylanicus A.M. Clark of Rowe, 1971, car. Bay of Bengal, East Indies, North p 67: Sri Lanka area (Distribution Australia, Philippines, China & Southern Table); James, 1986, P. 580: Laksha- Japan, South Pacific Islands (Distribu­ dweep & Maldive area, Sri Lanka tion Table) Andaman & Nicobar area (Distribution Table). Patlriella pseudotxigua Dartnall, 1971, p. 43: Bay; James, 1986,p. 580: Sri Lanka, Material: Agatti, one specimen; Kavaratti, one Andaman & Nicobar Islands (Distribu­ specimen, both collected under coral stones. tion Table). /?e/n0rks : This is a little known species. Colour Material: Agatti, two specimens, collected under in the living condition is rose-red. It is a first coral stones. record to the Lakshadweep. Remari(s: This small species easily escapes Genus Asteri'na Nardo, 1834 observation. It is a new record to the Laksha­ Only one species is recorded for the first dweep. time from the Lakshadweep. Family ECHINASTERIDAE Asterina burtoni Gray, 1840 Under this family the genus CIstina is Asterina burton/Gray, 1840, P. 289: Red Sea; collected for the first time from the Lakshadweep. A. M. Clark & Davies, 1966, p 603: Genus C/sf//7s Gray, 1840 Maldives; A.M. Clark & Rowe 1971, pp. 38,68: Islands of Western Indian Ocean, This is a little known genus with one Mauritius, East Africa & Madagascar, species. Red Sea, S. E. Arabia, Persian Gulf, Western India & Pakistan area, Maldive CIstina columbiaa Gray, 1840 area. Bay of Bengal, East Indies, North (Fig. 13&14) Australia, Philippines, China & Southern Japan, South Pacific Islands. (Distribu­ tion Table)

Asterina cepheus Bell, 1902, p. 227: Maldives.

M«r«/'/8/: Amini, one specimen collected under coral stones flemar/(s: This is one of the most widely distributed starfishes. Its small size and its habit to attach to underside of boats accounts for its wide distribution.

Genus Patlriella Verrill, 1913 This genus is recorded for the first time i1»*> from Lakshadweep. Only one species is TTJ collected. Fig. 13 Cistina columbiae Patlriella pseudoexigua Dartnall, 1971 CIstina columbiae Gray, 1840, p: Locality not Asterias exigua Lamarck, 1816, p. 554: Locality known; A. M. Clark & Rowe, 1971, pp. 40, 72: not known. Mascoure Islands, (Distribution Table).

Asterina exigua Koehler, 1910, p. 129: Andaman Material: CheWat, five specimens, under coral stonps. 8 Nicobar Islands; H. L. Clark, 1921, p. 97: Torres Strait, South pacific Islands. Rem§rks: The R of the specimens collected

106 CMFRI 2'. Apical papillae either multiple or single, rarely two 3

3. Teeth broad and square-tipped with only ^t^"^ a single papilla (or reduced tooth) if any,

„:£/,;<:er^#\,;^ - .:. one or two distal oral papillae, usually well spaced from the apex of jaw; one fairly large rounded tentacle scale OPHIACTIDAE 3'. Teeth rounded or conical with one or many superficial papillae, if oral papillae present they form a continuous series up the side lltlp|Ui)|itH|lW|i1 of the jaw; often more than one tentacle scale, or if only one then this may be Fifl. 14 Cistina columbiae (arms regensratingi elongated and pointed 4 varied from 20-28 mm. [The arms are dissimilar 4. No oral papillae, each jaw more or less in size and in one specimen (Fig. 14) it is in crowned with more or less compact cluster process of regerneration. It can easily be of apical tooth papillae ..OPHIOTRICHIDAE mistaken for L. multifora in the field. On closer observation the spinelets are seen. The colou'' 4'. Oral papillae present on the sides of the in the living condition is rose-pink in patches jaws, apically either a cluster of tooth on the dorsal side. It is so far recorded only papillae or one or a few larger oral papillae from the Mauritius. According to Miss. A.M. 5 Clark (personal communication) MS records are 5. Both tooth papillae and oral papillae available from Peros Banhos in the Chagos present, the former usually numerous Archipelago, Guam and Solomon Islands and OPHIOCOMIDAE Jangoux has recently recorded it from New 5'. Only oral papillae present, usually only one Caledonia. It is recorded here for the first time apical papilla below the teeth, atmost two from the Lakshadweep. three; disc scales naked OPHIURIDAE CLASS: OPHiUROIDEA Family OPHIOMYXIDAE The brittle stars are the smallest of the This is a small family with only one genus echinoderms and most active of the group. known from the Indian Seas. This genus is Majority of them live among coral reefsand recorded for the first time from the Lakshadweep. under coral stones. Fourteen species are coMected of which six are new records. Genus Ophiomyxa Muller & Troschel. 1842

Species belonging to six families are Though twenty species are known under collected. Species belonging to three families this genus only one species is known from the recorded for the first time. the Indian Seas. This is recorded for the first time from the Lakshadweep. Key to the Families of the Class Ophiomyxa australis Lutken, 1869 1. Dorsal arm plates rudimentary and often fragmented; disc liable to considerable Ophiomyxa aurra//s Lutken, 1869, p. 99: Locality distortion when preserved not known: James, 1969, p. 54: Laksha­ OPHIOMYXIDAE dweep; A. M. Clark & Rowe, 1971, pp. 78, 92: Islands of Western Indian 1'. Dorsal arm plates clearly visible, not Ocean, Mascre Islands, East Africa & rudimentary and not fragmented 2 Madagascar, Sri Lanka area. Bay of 2. A pair of regular infradental papillae at the ^engdl. East Indies, North Australia. apex of each jaw below the lowest tooth, Philippin98 China & Southern Japan^ which is usually wide and square.., ^ouMi Pacific Islands; (Distribution AMPHIURIDAE Table), James, 1086, p. 581; Laksha-

BULLETIN43 107 dweep & Maldive area. Gulf of Mannar Genus Ophiactis Lutken, 1856 and Palk Bay along the S. E. coast of India, Sri Lanka, Andaman and Nicobar Only two species are known from the Indian Islands, (Distribution Table). Seas. One species is collected from the Lakshadweep. Material: Minicoy, one specimen, collected under coral stones. Ophiactis savignyi (Muller & Troschel, 1842)

Remarks: This species is very rare in the Laksha- Ophioiapis savignyi Muller & Troschel, 1842, p. 95: Egypt. dweep. The colour in the living condition is brick red on the dorsal side and pink on the Ophiactis savigrtyi A. M. Clark & Davies, 1966, ventral side. It was recorded for the first time p. 599: Maldives; James, 1069, 55 from the Lakshadweep by the author in 1969. Gulf of Mannar, Palk Bay, Lakshadweep; A. M. Clark & Rowe, 1971, pp. 82, 103 Family AMPHIURIDAE Islands of Western Indian Ocean, This is large cosmpolitan family. Nearly al| Mascarene Islands, East Africa & Mada­ members of the family are secretive and inactive, gascar, Red Sea, S. E. Arabia, Persian living buried in mud and sand or in the Gulf, Western India Pakistan, Maldive crannies of dead coral, shells or irregular area, Sri Lanka area, Bay of Bengal, rock fragments. Only one genus is collected East Indies, North Australia, Philippines. from the Lakshadweep. China & Southern Japan, South Pacific Islands, Hawaiian Islands; (Distribution Genus Amphipholis Ljungman, 1866 Table). Nagabhushanam & Rao, 1972, Only one species is known from the Indian p. 289: Minicoy Atoll; James, 1986, p. Seas. 581: Lakshadweep & Maldive area. Gulf of Mannar & Palk Bay along the Amphipholis squamata (Delle Chiaje, 1829) S.E. Coast of India; Sri Lanka, Andaman Asterias squamata Delle Chiaje, 1829, p. 74: & Nicobar Area (Distribution Table). Locality not known. Amphipholis squamata H. L. Clark, 1921, p. Material: Minicoy, two specimens, collected 106: Torres Strait; Ely, 1942, p. 36. from coral crevices. Hawaii, Thomas, 1962: Florida, James, Remarks : According to H. L Clark (1946) this 1969, p. 54: Gulf of Mannar, A.M. is the most common brittle star in the world. Clark, & Rowe, 1971, pp. 80, 99 It is tropicopolitan in distribution. Islands of Western Indian Ocean, East Africa & Madagascar, S. E. Arabia, Family OPHIOTRICHIDAE Western India &- Pakistan area. East Indies, Hawaiian Islands (Distribution This is a large family with several genera. Table); James, 1986, p. 581: Gulf of Most of the species are associated with corals Mannar & Palk Bay along the South and sponges. Species belonging to two genera East coast of India, Andaman & Nicobar are collected. Islands (Distribution Table). Key to the genera of the family Material: Chetlat, two specimens, under coral stones. Radial shields large; arms usually 9-20 times the disc diameter Macrophiothrix H.L. Clark, Remarks : It has very wide distribution occurring 1938 in most of the Indo-Pacific region. Also reported from the Atlantic, St. Helena, Tobago and Radial shields small; arms four or five times the Bermuda. It is reported here for the first time disc diameter Ophiothrix Muller &Troscel, from the Lakshadweep. 1840 Family OPHIACTIDAE Genus Macrophiothrix H.L. Clark, 1938 It is a small family with a few genera. Only one genus is collected from the Laksha­ Only one species is collected under this dweep. genus. This is a new record to the Lakshadweep.

108 CMFRI Macrophiothrix longipeda (Lamarck, 1816) Key to the genera of the Family

Ophiura longipeda Lamarck, 1816, p. 544: 1. Six armed fissiparous forms, size small; disc IVIauritius. diameter rearly more than 5 mm, tentacle Macrophiothrix longipeda H.L.Clark, 1938, p. scale one Ophiocomella k. H. Clark, 1939 288: Australia; A. M. Clark & Davies, 1966, p. 648: Maldives; A. M. Clark, 1'. Normally five arms, most specimens large, & Rowe, 1971, pp. 82. 114: Islands, of even upto 30 mm in disc diameter; usually the Western Indian Ocean, Mascarene two tentacle scales 2 Islands, East Africa 8- IVIadagascar, Maldive area, Sri Lanka area, East 2. Dorsal side of the disc with dense coat of Indies, North Australia, Philippines, rounded granules Ophiocoma Agassiz, China & Southern Japan, South Pacific 1836 Islands, (Distribution Table) 2'. Disc armed with spines, sometimes in Material: Chetlat, two specimens; Kiltan, two combination with granules specimens; Kadmat, one specimen; Androth, one Ophiomastix Muller & Troschel 1842 specimen, all collected under coral stones buried Genus Ophiocomella A. H. C\aik, 1939 in sand. Only one species is known under this genus Remarks : The length of the arms were 11.5 to from the Indian Seas. This is recorded for 15 times the diameter of the disc. It is recorded the first time from the Lakshadweep. here for the first time from the Lakshadweep. Ophiocomella sexradia (Duncan, 1887) Ophiothrix (Keystonea) nereidina (Lamarck 1840) Ophiocnida sexradia Duncan, 1887, p. 92: Ophiura nereidina Lamarck, 1840, p. 224: Mergui Archipelago. Australian Seas. Ophiocomella sexradia James, 1969, p. 56: Palk Ophiothrix nereidina Bell, 1902, p. 229: Laksha­ Bay, Lakshadweep, Andaman, A. M. dweep, Maldives; Nagabhushanam & Clark & Rowe, 1971, pp. 86, 118; Rao, 1972, p. 289: Minicoy Atoll. Islands of Western Indian Ocean, East Africa & Madagascar, Red Sea, Maldive Ophiothrix {Keystonea) nereidina James, 1969, area, Philippines, China & Southern p. 55: Gulf of Mannar, Lakshadweep; Japan, South Pacific Islands, Hawaiian A. M. Clark & Rowe, 1971, pp. 86, 107; Islands (Distribution Table); James, Mascarene Islands, East Africa & Mada­ 1986, p. 582: Lakshadweep & Maldives, gascar, Sri Lanka area. Bay of Bengal, Gulf of Mannar & Palk Bay along the East Indies, North Australia, Philippines, S. E. Coast of India Sri Lanka Andaman China & Southern Japan, South Pacific Nicobar Area. Islands (Distribution Table); James, 1986, p. 582: Gulf of Mannar and Palk Material: Chetlat, two specimens, Bitra, one Bay along the S. E. Coast of India, Sr> specimen; Kiltan, two specimens. Lanka (Distribution Table). Remarks : This species easily escapes observat­ ion in the field because of its small size and Material: Bitra, one specimen, collected from cryptic habits, it is often found associated with from coral crevice. algae. It was recorded for the first time from Lakshadweep by the author in 1969. Family OPHIOCOMIDAE Genus Ophiocoma Agassiz, 1836 Members belonging to this Family are generally large with conspicuos colouration and This is a well marked and conspicuous active habits. Three genera are collected of genus with several species on the coral reefs of which one is collected for the first time from India. Five species are collected from the Lakshadweep. Lakshadweep of which one is a new record.

BULLETIN 43 109 Key to the species of the genus Ocean, Mascarere Islands, East Africa & Madagascar, Red Sea, S. E. Arabia, 1. Interbrachial areas on the ventral side with Maldive area, Sri Lanka area. East a number of conspicuous circular scales Indies, North Australia, Philippines, 0. anaglyptica Ely, 1944 China & Southern Japan, South Pacific 1'. Interbrachial areas on the ventral side with Islands, Hawaiian Islands; (Distribution no enlarged circular scales 2 Table). James 1986, p. 58': Laksha­ dweep & Maldive Area, Sri Lanka 2. Disc marked with beautiful pattern of (Distribution Table). radiating golden lines on a dark background 0. pica Muller & Troschel, 1842 Material: Chetlat, one specimen; Kadamat, one specimen; Kavaratti, two specimens, all collected 2'. Disc either uniformly dark or variegated from live coral branches. or light green 3 Remarlis : This species appears to live beyond 3. Disc sparcely covered by granules 4 the low tide mark. It appears to live among live 3', Disc densely covered by granules 5 corals. One of the most beautiful brittle stars in the living condition. 4. Colour uniformly dark dorsally and ventrally 0. erinaceus IVluller & Troschel, 1842 Ophiocoma erinaceus Muller & Troschel, 1842 4'. Colour variegated, sometimes dark brown Ophiocoma eA//;scew5 Muller & Troschel, 1842; dorsally but always lighter ventrally p. 98: Red Sea; Bell, 1902, p. 228: 0. scolopendrina Lamarck, 1816 Lakshadweep & Maldives; James, 1969, p. 56: Andamans, Lakshadweep, Mascara 5. Disc pale in colour (brown or light yellow) Islands, Red Sea; A. M. Clark & Rowe, often with a shade of light green 1971, pp. 86, 119: Islands of Western O. brevipes Peters, 1851 Indian Ocean, Mauritius, East Africa & 5'. Colour of the disc either uniformly dark or Madagascar, Red Sea, S. E. Arabia, variegated with reticulated pattern or spots Maldive Area, Sri Lanka area. Bay of 0. dentata IVluller & Troschel, 1842 Bengal, East Indies, North Australia, Philippines, China & Southern Japan, Ophiocoma anaglyptica Ely, 1944 South Pacific Islands, Hawaiian Islands Ophiocoma anag/yptica Ely, 1944,373: Canton (Distribution Table); James, 1986, p. Island; James, 1969, p. 56: Laksha­ 582: Lakshadweep & Maldive Area, dweep; A. M. Clark & Rowe, 1971, pp. Gulf Mannar and Palk Bay along S. E. 86,118: South Pacific Islands (Distribu­ coast of India, Andaman and Nicobar tion Table), James, 1986, p. 582: Area. (Distribution Table); Nagabhusha- Lakshadweep and Maldive area (Distri­ nam&Rao, 1972, p. 289: Minicoy Atoll. bution Table). l\Aateri8i: Chetlat, two specimens, Kiltan, one l\Aateriai: Chetlat, eight specimens from reef flat. specimen; Kadamat, one specimen; Amini, two specimens; Androth, two specimens, all speci­ /?emaAA;5 : This species can easily be mistaken mens, collected under coral stones. for O. scoiopendrina in the field. It is mostly associated with live corals. It was listed from Remarl

110 CMFRI Ophiocoma scolopendrina Muller 8- Troschel, 1842, p. 101 : Locality not known Ophiocoma brevipes Peters, 1851, p. 465: Bell,1902, p. 228: Lakshadweep; James, Mozambique; Bell, 1902, p. 225; 1969, p. 56: Andamans, Lakshadweep, Maldives, Lakshadweep; James, 1969, Red Sea, Mauritius: A.M. Clark & Rowe, p. 56; Andamans, Lakshadweep A. M. Clark & Rowe, 1971, pp. 86, 119: 1971, pp. 86,119: Islands of the Western Islands of the Western Indian Ocean, Indian Ocean, Mascarene Islands, Mascarene Islands, East Africa & Mada- East Africa & Madagascar, Red Sea, gacar, Maldive area, Sri Lanka area. S. E. Arabia, Persian Gulf, Maldive Bay of Bengal, East Indies, North Area, Bay of Bengal, East Indies, North Australia, Philippines, China & Southern Australia, Philippines, China & Southern Japan, South Pacific Islands, Hawiian Japan, South Pacific Islands, Hawaiian Islands (Distribution Table); Nagabhus­ Islands; Nagabhushanam 8-Rao, 1972, hanam & Rao, 1972, p. 289: Minicoy p. 289: Minicoy Atoll; James, 1986, p. Atoll; James 1986, p. 582: Lakshadweep 582 : Lakshadweep & Maldive Area, e- Maldive area, Andaman Nicobar Gulf of Mannar & Palk Bay along the Islands. (Distribution Table). S.E. Coast of India, Sri Lanka, Andaman & Nicobar Islands (Distribution Table) Material: Chetlat, two specimens; Kadamat, one specimen; Minicoy, two specimens, all collected Material: Kiltan, several specimens; Kadamat, under coral stones. three specimens Amini, several specimens; Kalpeni, two specimens; Minicoy, several Remarks: It is much rarer species than others. specimens. It can draw all its arms and fold them closely over the disc and hide in a small crevice. The Remarks : This is the most common species lowermost spines of the proximal arm segments under the genus Ophiocoma: It occupies a very are flat and help in digging in sand. It can with­ extended zone in the intertidal region from the stand long hours of exposure for it is found near supra-littoral region to the low water mark. It the high water mark. There is not much autotorny is some what gregareous. in this species. Ophiocoma dentata Muller & Troschel, 1842 Ophiocoma brevipes Peters (Fig. 16) (Fig. 15)

IlllliilllililllllillillilllUlliilllilllliilllllitlllliiin^^ Fig. 16 Ophiocoma dentate

Ophiocoma dentate Muller & Troschel, |1842,!P' 99: Locality not known; A. M. Clark d Rowe, 1971, pp. 86, 119: Islands of the Western Indian Ocean, Mascarene Fig. IS Ophiocoma brevipes Islands, East Africa & Madagascar,

BULLETIN43 111 Maldive area. North Australia, Philip­ Atoll. A. M. Clark & Rowe, 1971, pp. pines, China 8- Southern Japan, South 86,120: Maldive area, Sri Lanka area. Pacific, Hawaiian Islands (Distribution Bay Bengal, East Indies, North Australia, Table); James, 1986, p. 582: Laksha- Philippines, China & Southern Japan, dweep 0- Maldive Area, Andaman and South Pacific Islands (Distribution Nicobar Area (Distribution Table). Table)

Ophiocoma insularia Nagabhushanam Et Rao, Materiai: Minicoy, one specimen, collected under coral stones. 1972, p. 289: Minicoy Atoll. Remari(s : This species appears to be very rare Ophiocoma brevipes var. variegate James, 1969, in Lakshadweep. p. 56: Andamans & Lakshadweep. Family OPHIURIDAE Material: Chetlat, two specimens; Kiltan, several specimens; Kadamat, three specimens; Amini This is a large Family with several genera. and Minicoy, several specimens, all specimens The disc is covered by scales or plates and the collected from underside of coral stones. arm spines are small and apressed which are characterstic of the family. From the Laksha­ Remarlcs : This species is very common in Amini dweep only two genera are recorded. and Minicoy. Two colour forms, one with reticulated pattern on the disc and the other Key to the genera of the Family with black spots have been collected. Due to The scales on the dorsal and ventral side of different colour patterns it was recorded under the disc and the dorsal arm plates are surrounded several names. by small scales Ophioelegans James, 1981

Genus Optilomastix Muller 8- Troschel, 1842 The scales on the dorsal and ventral side of the One species is known from the Lakshadweep. disc and the dorsal arm plates are not surrounded by small scales Ophiolep/s Muller & Optilomastix annulosa (Lamark, 1840) Troschel, 1842 (Fig. 17) Genus Ophioelegans James, 1981

This genus is described by James (1981). It has only one species.

Ophioelegans cincta (Muller & Troschel, 1842) Ophiolepis cincta Muller & Troschel, 1842, p. 90: Red Sea; A. M. Clark, & Davies, 1966, p. 603: Maldives; A.M.Clark* Rowe, 1971 pp. 90, 129: Islands of Western Indian Ocean, Mascarene Islands. East Africa & Madgascar, Red Sea, S. E. Arabia, Maldives, Sri Lanka area. Bay of Bengal, East Indies, North Australia, Philippines, China & Southern Japan, South Pacific Islands FiQ. 17 Ophiomastix annulosa Dried specimen) (Distribution Table). Optiiura annu/osa Lamarck, 1840, p. 222: Locality not known. Ophioelegans cincta James, 1981, p. 15: Port Blair (South Andamans) Ophiomastix annuiosa Muller & Troschel, 1842, Material: Kavaratti, one specimen, collected p. 107: Japan; Bell, 1902, p. 229: under coral stones. Lakshadweep; James, 1969, p. 56: Andamans, Lakshadweep; Nagabhusha­ Remar/cs : This species is very rare and only one nam & Rao, 1972, p. 289: Minicoy specimen could be collected. It is recorded

112 CMFRl here for the first time from the Lakshadweep. Key to the orders of the sub-class

Ophiolepis superba H. L. Clark, 1938 1. Primary spines large, widely separated, contransting markedly with numerous, small Ophiolepis annulosa Muller <& Troschel, 1842, secondary spines CIDAROIDEA p. 89: Locality not known. 1'. Primary and secondary spines not markedly Ophiolepis superba H. L. Clark, 1915, p. 89: contransting in size 2 Sri Lanka; A. M Clark & Rowe, 1971, 2 Epiphyses of the Aristotle's lantern fused pp. 90, 126: Islands of Western Indian across the top of each pyramid teeth keeled Ocean, Mascarene Islands. East Africa CAMARODONTA & Madagascar, Red Sea, S. E. Arabia, Maldives Sri Lanka Area, Bay of Bengal, 2'. Epiphyses of the Aristotle's lantern not East Indies, North Australia, Philippines, fused across the top of each pyramid. ...3 China & Southern Japan, South Pacific 3. Spines lack a cortex and are solid or islands. (Distribution Table); James, provided with a narrow lumen; 1986, p. 582: Lakshadweep & Maldives, AULODONTA Sri Lanka, Andaman & Nicobar Islands. (Distribution Table). 3'. Spines are solid with or without cortex teeth unkeeled STIRODONTA i\/laterial: Kavaratti, one specimen, collected ORDER CIDAROIDEA under coral stones. Only one Family is known under this Order Remarks : This inert brittle star is very beautiful in the living condition. It is recorded for the Family CIDARIDAE first time from the Lakshadweep. Two genera are collected under this Family CLASS ECHINOIDEA from the Lakshadweep.

Sea urchins are large and conspicuous Key to the genera of the family element of the coral reefs. They live in diverse Pores in adult specimens distinctly conjugate, habitats. Some of them bore into coral rocks collar of primary spines usually with red or while some live buried under sand. Some of purple spots or stripe them with long pointed spines and large Prionocidaris A. Agassiz, 1863 pedicellariae are dangerous to handle in the field. The roe of some species of sea urchins Pores not conjugate or atleast sub-conjugate; are considered as delicacy and have good collar of primary spines not spotted or stripped market in Japan. This class is divided into two with red or purple: primary spines slender or Sub-classes. coarse, usually not tapering; 'hairs' on the surface of the shaft anastomosing and forming Key to tfte Sub-C/ass of the Class a thick spongy coat Eucidaris Pomel; 1883

Test globular, or spherical; anus inside the apical Genus Priocidaris A. Agassiz, 1863 system of plates REGULARIA Only one species is collected under this Test heart-shaped or flattened; anus out side the genus. apical system of plates... IRREGULARIA Prionocidaris veiticillata (Lamarck, 1816) SUB-CLASS: REGULARIA (Fig. 18) Cidarites verticillata Lamarck; 1816, p. 56: Members of sea urchins belonging to this Locality not known. sub-class have a round profile with the peristome and periproct occupying central positions at oral Prionocidaris verticillata A. M. Clark & Rowe, and aboral poles respectively. Members belong­ 1971, pp. 140,151: Islands or Western ing to four Orders have been collected and Indian ocean, Mascarene Islands, East reported in this present work. Africa & Madagascar, Maldive area,

BUUEriN43 113 f^il3fiSL2,3tU,(SiMlnieoyiAtoH{!tJatnsferi 1986, p. 582: Lakshadweep & Maldive *]fltreafli'^ lLaN

Material: AndfoJd»!,j ©nevt^ae^inoQ.'. collected under coralstones.

o pF^IR^l^U^pO^T^^ ,

• p.nqler:tHfs',t)r(tef species'belong to one mily.have,, been cplFected:

\Fih)iiy)DtAlD£M^l@AE

oiti liMOrifiWfflPraiijLra, IWPWno &•««"» fttWJ Laksha- dweepL " • 'j=i^ fe PrionocidarisZverticellata ' teib"fe"g'^fi^rdof1he'Fdrt^W Bayi'of Ben^at 'Sfest sindiet/ncHbrtft; Primary ambulacral tuNf^iisnliatagotirl^^o regular - Australia, Philippinesj^hiwi 8 Sbuthem series; ^mbulacral spines not peculiar; no spines Japaijy. y^waji^i^i^ Jsjan^ds (Distribution d^liuccal pl^S!:^^ Mde^'mi' Table);' James, issdr p. "583 Lalive />iiiea,l Andaman & Priniary qmbulacral tubercles very small; aboral Nicobar Islands (pistribution Table)

Materia/: Chetlat, several specimens; Kiltan, SteiC !'?^:''!.'^?!..;^>!l^^/^^^^6s;^^&5§: thi-bg'''^siff S(>ijn9s,j T^js^p^'^ji^^^^ w"^s fpv|id to live in the midst of dead. coral branches^ W^p |h|j pcjrals^ br^^Rpjieis.,^^ broken the sea urchin is exposed. Large trjaentage'^' p^dfc^^Hyri^'^^hiosilf \A)ifli''

'deniikM/i^ar/i^PbiilBH'lISS' 1llinleff778^^ 0hly^b^e«;spe%!4e« iSiknovv^4>^Mar1hi&>genM9v fWfri thb UaKfehadvueep^!; Tridentate pediceliariae leaf or spo£ta>^%PSd3 ^fi/^f/^vnefu/fjT* (LarTi§^k^ji|l'i^ tapering slightly to a rounded distal end •u^-j «\i \o ^^\i^i^j,;^]Vli6HelW/^1845 C/£/ar/Y^j/7^fy/ar/^ ^UjPff^l^.,^^,^^^^^^^^ East Indies. ^t^^f^^ iJ«OS4y/W'i(fc4gkepl77aX Echinometra setosa Leske, 177lB,"^p' SlS: l^asf Cidaris metularia Bell, 1902, x2p. 230: Majjc^y,^, tHdiifene Eucidaris metularia A. M. Clark 8- Davies, 1966, ^" ^' p.itti^:''yaidi^^i'':X?^;^i(i#k%i^6We, D«

...1.^ . ,.„,.,(« ,,; Diadema savignyi Michelin, 1845 Echmothm dia49rm BeibiSaZ, l)cii230 JdVladtfw f>ladema savignyi Michelin, 1845, p. 15 : .^,>^^j J«m#feri)9§9kdi;v Sftnib^tesbteSweBW! Mauritius; A.M. Clark & Rowe, 1971, :;oA.,M,iCI^^ISo•&l!cPo««oc.ai97 ijirpp. nh\^& pp. 140, 153: Islands of Western Indian 153: Islands of the Western Indjaoiftewfti Ocean, Mascarene Islands, East Africa Mascarene Islands, East Africa & Mad- & Madagascar, S.E. Arabia, Sri Unka, aga9(;«i;j!B@ctjS6aAS E3je^iflvvaiian Nicobar Area (Distribution Table). Islands (Distribution Table); Nagabhu- eno^^atrt^^RicS?^^ 8^i^,^."^0?2 ^frfico/ M9tMat\Qi\Bt\a^, two specjehnenis^ oiiol lected I ) uiader corat stdnes..

5; This ?Recies is so far npt recorded specimen; Amini, twg^l^^fl^g^ J%>^gt^^^,Qtwc^ i^m the jyialdives ^though' tlhe British Museum has specimens from Maldives. ^'&\^Wi'M'&^^' °"® specimen. ilt iSirecorded hwefoji the fast tiftrai,frtifti\ Remarks: This s|nsJieknffiqMid»tan)AtmoHiahanS;: ths' Lakshadweep. n

G(k\\h'£bhlribthrtx Petefsi^lSBS ;

T'tmspecl^satftlr^m the J;aksh*fyi9#R; b9JoOh ^•cit«§ft8Bbemhaiif96\§if1dnl§t'fttnily Key to the i^^dtikWigBrUj^ '•" are known from the Lakshadft»»^^il2>l6J arlJ moil

Primary %eraMH^^f^|-^ ^i'n^s'"dl^tJtiiitl^ verti- ^^St©IVW«^BUSt^D^EVs)\ Qllffltef!,bWlifj '^"^Thim^i>nilflWson!^'*=yiMjs.2"fft?H'iP spine; larger spines commonly banded bP'^aillJtia'W^ftm"£aKshadwaeg"°"="^'"°^ , CGX i .^H^M:nuE.•^i^hffl^lm:>\Pme^^ 774) Genus 5(pmop/7ety5f0« L,,Agassiz, 184A , ,_ (Oi. .ij; I ^ -uaiqanooiii oris fiBma SBi'iBilaoiDgq auo'OTidolO Primary interambulacral spines distinctly striated, vvitifeft Whbr1s>> r#1iili^efy-st6Utl,-^irifii6r- ij^>^Hy ^ I ^o bray'iSifw^spicS^^SIifWyyhFn under this gerfti^ than half diameter; unicol6tfl*H' v.M'''£//a(/»/na St6ltl^^rmntesfvaiidiinis^>^!3msi^^P^^)

Echihotfirik ttlamarfi Pi 11 as'/ H 774) &^mm \^ftoi*'m >LimiP«Mpo si epts>.e47:sDdc\tifi9 Epf^ws^ialiffn^risPallas, 1774,jj. 3^j J^st Indies Stomopneustes i/awb^l'/ySkoehler, 1927, p. 103: imiythfJiccalarfiamAi 1V1. Glarlc £^ rtiiWe, 1971 {i/l^caj^r^ lsigflflfr,6§h{b^^ %uM«5t5 t>p, i'40;-153: Islertds of'tftP Western agascar, S.E. Atai^,^)fi/^U'S't^S & Paki­ IntKan^Ofeeart-," MascareWei Isfinds, East stan, Maldive, area; China Et Southern Wfrfctf&jiastSIndies, ^drth'Australia, -JaijW^?St/y\h^a{ai>f(F1^l»nd*^l;t«^l»ftli Philippines,- China & SbBlheSn Japan, t^ 4m^\ N%^alMi&hfi8mfS%(ao, 1972 :iS0Uth^P»:if ic .Istancis> •HaWfl'i^lan Islands pl.Hi29CK'^qefifi{^o/'^ftfll; '^J^s, 1986, ^Eistributton iTabla): Na^Uaicbhanam & fc^5S3.2Ltf(«««Kf*S^% WiMve Area, )Baoi^ 1i97aiip4t280&MiniGiof ^Atoll. :G^lfi(»6ri#hi^§rYa^di3Ptiai^>'B&V on the

llSbi;iTIN43 ^16 Indian side; Sri Lanka, Andaman 8-

Material: Chetlat, two specimens; Kiltan, two *! ^^^B|^?Sf^i'^^^ specimens collected undercoral stones. ^i. ^^^H^^^V-l"*^^ '^'^^^^^J^^^^TH lagoon where the water is always calm, they jlj ^^^^^^^^^^^^f^^^S like Visakhapatnam where there is heavy wave 'K*"'^^^^^^^-^^^^K^S^'^Ii "^S^^^^^l action this species burrows into rock for -j'- ^^mf^^^^^7^^^^^£T^''^'*^^^^^

Key to the familits of the order ^''^- '"^ T^rxopneusfes pileolus

\. Test sculptured by pits and depressions Philippines, China & Southern Japan, TEIVINOPLEURIDAE South Pacific Islands (Distribution Table); James, 1986, p. 583: Gulf of r. Test not sculptured by pits and depressions..2 Mannar & Palk Bay along the South 2. Gill cuts sharp and deep ^ast coast of India, Sri Lanka, Andaman TOXOPNEUSTIDAE ^ Nicobar Islands (Distribution Table).

2'. Gill cuts not sharp and deep Material: Kadamat, two specimens, on both ECHINOMETRIDAE occasions collected among live corals.

Family TOXOPNEUSTIDAE Remarks : In the living condition it has the habit of covering itself with bits of corals and Under this family two genera are collected pieces of algae. It is recorded here for the first from the Lakshadweep. time from the Lakshadweep. Key to the genera of the family Genus/"r/pneusfes L. Agassiz, 1841

Globiferous pedicellariae very large and Only one species is collected under this conspicuous Toxopneustes L. Agassiz, genus. 1841 Tripneustes gratilla (Linnaeus, 1758) Globiferous pedicellariae small and inconspicu- (Fig. 20) ous Tripneusters L. Agassiz, 1841 ,. .„ ,. .__„ „^. , ,., Echinus gratilla Linnaeus, 1758, p. 664: Locality Genus roxo/jneusrM L Agassiz, 1841 not known. Only one species is collected under this species. Tripneustes gratilla A. M. Clark & Davies, 1966, p. 399 : Maldives; James, 1969, p. 57: Toxopneustes pileolus (Lamarck) Qulf of Mannar, Nicobar, Mauritius, (Fig- 19) Red Sea; A.M. Clark & Rowe, 1971, Echinus pileolus Lamarck, 1816, p. 45: Mas- PP. 142,156: Islands of Western Indian carene Islands. Ocean, Mascarene Islands, East Africa & Madgascar, Red Sea, S. E. Arabia, Toxopneustes pileolus A. M. Clark & Rowe, Maldive area, Sri Lanka area. Bay of 1971, pp. 142, 156: Islands of Western Bengal, East Indies, North Australia, Indian Ocean, Mascarene Islands, East Philippines, China & Southern Japan, Africa & Madagascar, S. E. Arabia, Sri South Pacific Islands, (Distribution Lanka area. Bay of Bengal, East indies. Table); Nagabhusahnam & Rao, 1972,

^"•^ CMFRi Key to the Species of the Genus Primary spines violet in colour; in the living condition covers itself with bits of shells, coral pieces etc S. vitgulata L. Agassiz 1846

Primary spines banded with red and yellow colours; in the living condition does not cover with bits of shells and coral pieces S. bicolor L. Agassiz, 1846

Salmacis virgulata L. Agassiz & Desor 1846

Salmacis virgulata L. Agassiz & Desor, 1846, p. 359: Sri Lanka; A. M. Clark & Rowe, 1971, pp. 140, 156: Sri Lanka, Bay of Bengal, East Indies, Philippines (Distri­ bution Table); James, 1986, p. 583: Gulf of Mannar & Palk Bay on the Fig. 20 Tripneusies gratilla Indian side; Sri Lanka.

p. 290: Minicoy Atoll;-Jannes 1986, p. Material: Androth, one specimen, collected on 583. Lakshadweep & Maldives, Gulf of the reef flat. Mannar & Palk Bay along S. E. Coast of India, Sri Lanka, Andaman & Nicobar Remarks : This species appears to be very rare. Islands (Distribution Table). This is also not recorded from the Maldives. It is reported here for the first time from the Material: Chetlat, several specimens; Kiitan, Lakshadweep. several specimens; Kadamat, three specimens; Amini, several specimens; Kalpeni, two speci­ Genus Mespila Agassiz & Desor, 1846 mens, all specimens collected in the lagoons on Only one species is collected under this algal beds. genus,

Remarks : This species is common in the lagoon Mespila globulus (Linnaeus, 1758; at Amini. The ripe gonads of this species are of export value and are considered as a delicay in Echinus globulus Linnaeus, 1778, p. 664: Japan. Locality not known. Mespila globulus A. M. Clark & Rowe, 1971, pp. Family TEMNOPLEURIDAE 140,155: Bay of Bengal, East Indies, Only two genera are collected under this North Australia, Philippines, China & Southern Japan, South Pacific Islands Family from the Lakshadweep. (Distribution Table). Key to the Genera of the Family Material: Kavaratti, two specimens, collected under coral stones. Primary tubercles distinctly crenulated; coronal plates with small sutural pits or none Remarks : This species is also not known from Salmacis L. Agassiz, 1841 the Maldives. It is recorded here for the first time from the Lakshadweep. Primary tubercles not crenulated; interambulacrai plates low and numerous; pore pairs distinctly Family ECHINOMETRIDAE biserial Mespila Agassix & Desor, 1846 Under this Family three genera are collected from the Lakshadweep. Genus Salmacis L. Agasszi, 1841 Key to the Genera of the Family Two species are known from the Laksha­ dweep. Only one species is collected during \. Only three pore-pairs to the arcs the survey. Echinostrephus A. Agassiz, 1863

BULLETIN43 117 1'. Four to many pore-pairs to the arcs 2 Genus Heterocentrotus Brandt, ^ 835 2. Primary spines very strongly developed. This extraordinary genus comprises the long, thick and heavy so called 'slate pencil' urchins. One species is Heterocentrotus Braodt, 1835 known from the Lakshadweep. 2' Primary spines not very strongly developed, Heterocentrotus mammillatus (Linnaeus, 1758) not long, thick and heavy Echinometra Gray, 1825 Echinus marr^millaws Linnaeus, 1758, p. 667: Locality not known. Genus fc/?//70sfrep/?t/5 A. Agassiz, 1863 ,, , -,/, n i ,-i i .oni Heterocentrotus mammil/atus H. L. Clark, 1921, This little genus of curious rock-boring sea p. 151: Torres Strait; A. M. Clark & urchin is characterstic of the coral rock areas. Davies, 1966, p. 603: Maldives; James, Only one species is known. 1969, p. 58: Lakshadweep, Red Sea, Mascarne Islands, A. M. Clark & Rowe, Echinostrephus molaris (B\ainv\l\e) ^Q-J^ pp .,42 153; Mauritus, East (Fig- 21) Africa & Madagascar, Red Sea, S. E. Arabia, Maldive area, Sri Lanka Area,

S-%J #*», East Indies, North Australia, Philippines China & Southern Japan, South Pacific Islands, Hawaiian Islands (Distribution Table.

Materia/: Agatti, one specimen; Kavaratti, two specimens, collected from coral reef flat.

Remarks : It is one of the beautiful sea urchins •=f. 'n the living condition. The spines are used to write on slates-

SUBCLASS IRREGULARIA Fig. 21 Echinostrephus molaris Species belonging to this Subclass have the anal opening outside the apical system in Echinus molaris Blainville, 1825, p. 88: Locality posterior interambulacrum. Species belonging not known. to all the four orders have been collected.

Echinostrephus molaris A. M. Clark, & Davies, Key to the Orders of the Subclass 1966: Maldives: A.M. Clark & Rowe, 1. Ambulacra simple not forming petals 1971, pp. 142, 157: Mascarene Islands, aborally, test usually high East Africa & Madagascar, Red Sea, HOLECTYPOIDA S. E. Arabia, Western India & Pakistan, Maldive area; Sri Lanka area, Bay of 1'. Ambulacra petaloid; test often flattened and Bengal, East Indies, North Australia, broad 2 China & Southern Japan, South Pacific 2. Dental apparatus strongly developed and Islands; (Distribution Table): James' present in adults; phyilodes absent 1986, 1986, 583: Lakshadweep & CLYPEASTROIDA Maldives Area, Sri Lanka, Andaman & Nicobar Islands (Distribution Table). 2'. Dental apparatus present in young stages; phyilodes more or less developed 3

Material: Agatti, one specimen, collected from 3. Phyilodes and bourrelets well developed a coral stone. forming a floscelle CASSIDULOIDA

Remarks : This is a rock borer and is recorded 3'. Phyilodes usually little developed; bourrelets here for the first time from the Lakshadweep. absent SPATANGOIDA

118 CMFRI ORDER HOLECTYPOIDA Maldive area, Sri Lanka Area, Bay of Bengal, East Indies, North Australia, Forms regular with high test. Ambulacra Philippines, China & Southern Japan, simple. Apical system and peristone central. South Pacific Islands, Hawaiian Islands Periproct in close contact with the apical system. (Distribution Table); Nagahushanam & Spines simple and small. Pedicellariae of the Rao, 1972, p. 290: Minicoy Atoll; usual four types. James, 1986, p. 534: Lakshadweep & There are two Suborders under this order Maldives, Sri Lanka, Andaman & of which members belonging to one Suborder Nicobar islands (Distribution Table). have been recorded from the Indian Seas. Material: Chetlat, two tests; Kiltan, two tests. SUBORDER ECHINONEINA Remarlis: Only tests were collected, Live Test often elongate. Peristome oblique. specimens were not seen on the reefs. Gill slits and buccal plates absent. Primary ORDER CLYPEASTROIDA tubercles do not form distinct verticle series except in young forms. Masticatory apparatus Species belonging to one Family is known present in young stages only. from the Lakshadweep. This Suborder has aniy one Family viz,. Family CLYPEASTERIDAE Echinoneidae. Only one genus IS collected from the Family ECHINONEIDAE Lakshadweep.

Two genera are known under this Family of Genus CZ/peas^e/-Lamarck, 1801 which one is known from the Indian Seas. Under this genus two species are recorded. The record of Clypeaster humilis by Nagabhush- Genus Echinoneus Leske, 1778 anam & Rao (1972) from Minicoy Atoll needs Only one species is known from the Indian confirmation. Seas. Key to the species of the Genus Echinoneus cyciostomus Leske, 1778 Edge of the test markedly thickened; petaloid (Fig. 22) area somewhat thickened C. reticulatus{Unr\aeus, 1758) Central part of the test raised and margin flat; petals more or less distinctly closed C. humilis (Leske, 1778) Clypeaster reticulatus (Linnaeus, 1758)

Echinus reticulatus Linnaeus 1758, p. 665: Locality not known.

Rhaphidoclypus reticulatus Koehler, 1922, p. 68: Maldives.

Clypeaster reticulatus A. M. Clark, &• Rowe, 1971, pp. 144, 160: Islands of Western Fig. 22 Echinoneus cvclostomus Indian Ocean, Mascarene Islands, East Echinoneus cyciostomusl^Leske, 1778, p. 173: Africa and Madagascar, Red Sea S. E. Locality not known; Bell, 1902, p. 232: Arabia, Persian Gulf, Maldive area, Sri Lakshadweep; A. M. Clark & Davies, p. Lanka area. Bay of Bengal, East Indies, 599: Maldives; A. M. Clark & Rowe, North Australia, Philippines, China and 1971, pp. 144, 158: Islands of Western Southern Japan, South Pacific Islands, Indian Ocean, Mascarene Islands East Hawaiian Islands (Distribution Table); Africa & Madagascar, S. E. Arabia James, 1986, p. 584: Lakshadweep &

BULLETIN 43 119 Maldive area, Sri Lanka (Distribution Red Sea, Sri Lanka area. Bay of Bengal, Table). East Iddies, North Australia (Distribut­ ion Table); James, 1986, p. 584: Gulf Material: Chetlat, two tests; Kadamat, one test. of Mannar and Palk Bay on Indian side Remarks : No live specimens could be collected Sri Lanka. during the survey, in the Maldives it is recorded l\/laterial: Chetlat, one specimen; Kiltan, one from more than 20 metres depth. specimen; Amini, two specimens (one test); ORDER CASSIDULOIDA Androth, one test, all live specimens collected under corals stones. In this Order species belonging to one Family are recorded. Remarks : This species is collected for the first Family ECHINOLAPADIDAE time from Lakshadweep.

Species belonging to one genus only are Echinolampas alexandri de Loriol, 1876 collected from the Lakshadweep. Echinolampas alexandri de Loriol, 1876, p. 4-. Genus Echinolampas Gray, 1825 Mauritius; A. M. Clark and Rowe, 1971, pp 144, 163: Islands of the Western Two species are collected under this genus Indian Ocean, Mascarene Islands, S. E. from the Lakshadweep. Arabia; Sri Lanka area, Bay of Bengal, East Indies, South Pacific Islands Key to the species of tfie Genus (Distribution Table); James, 1986, p. Peristome pentagonal; interproiferous zone of 584: Gulf of Mannar and Palk Bay on petals with crowded tubercles, often about the Indian side; Sri Lanka (Distribution eight in a single transverse series Table). f. ovata (Leske, 1778) Material: Kiltan, two specimens. Collected Peristome oval; few tubercles between the pores under coral stones. f. a/exandri de Loriol, 1876 Remarks : This species is recorded here for the Ectilnolampas ovata (Leske, 1778) first time from the Lakshadweep. (Fig. 23) ORDER SPANTANGOIDA

Only one species belonging to the family Brissidae is collected during the survey. Naga- bhushanam and Rao (1972) listed species belonging to two other families under this order from Minicoy Atoll.

Key to Families of the Order

1. Peristome crescentic or D-shaped; labrum well developed no subanal fasciole LOVENIIDAE 1'. Subanal fasciole present; no inner fasciole 2

2. Peripetalous fasciole absent

Fig.^23 Echinolampasy^ovata SPATANGIDAE Ecfi/nantfius ovatus Leske, 1778, i'p.jtt1919: 2'. Peripetalous fasciole present. .BRISSIDAE Locality not known. Family LOVENIIDAE Echinolampas ovata A. M. Clark and Rowe, Under this Family two Genera are present. 1971, pp. 143,163: Mascarene Islands, One species belonging to the Genus Z.ov9/7/s

120 CMFRI has been reported by Nagabhushanam & Raw (1972) from Minicoy Atoll.

Key to the Genere of the Family

No Peripetalous fasciole; sternum almost naked ^ Lovenia Agassiz & Desor, 1847 ;^ Peripetalous fasciole present and also inner and ^ • subanal ones; sternum well tuberculated ^•""o. Breynia Agassiz & Desor, 1847 g" s j^ — Genus Lovenia Agassiz & Desor 1847 S. Under this genus only one species viz., = *^ L. elongata (Gray, 1845) has been listed from ^ _ Minicoy. = "

Family SPATANGIDAE VEr— -b Under this Family genus l\/laret/a has been recorded from Minicoy. Fig. 24 Brissus latecarinatus

Genus l\Aaretia Gray, 1855 Maidive area, Sri Lanka area. East Indies, North Austrlia, Philippines, Under this genus one species viz., M- China & Southern Japan, South Pacific planulata (Lamarcl<) has been listed from Mini­ Islands, Hawaiian Islands (Distribution coy Atoll by Nagabhusahnam & Rao (1972). Table); James, 1986. p. 585: Laksha­ Family BRISSIDAE dweep & Maidive area, Sri Lanka Under this Family two genera are collected from (Distribution Table). the Lakshadweep. l\Aaterial: Agatti, one specimen (test only). Key to the Genera of the Family Distinct anal fasciole on each side of periproct; Remarks : This species is recorded for the first aubanal plastron not projecting like snout time from Lakshadweep. beyond periproctai area Metalia Gray,1855 CLASS HOLOTHURIOIDEA No anal fasciole; subanal plastron not projecting like a snout Brissus Leske; 1778 The holothurians are the least known group of the echinoderms because of the difficulties in Genus /WeW//a Gray 1855 preserving them and also due to the notable Under this Genus only one species viz. M- unattractiveness of the preserved specimens. spatangus (Linnaeus, 1758) has been listed from In their habits they show less diversity than the Minicoy Atoll by Nagabhusahnam & Rao (1972). more active brittle stars and the sea urchins. The majority of them are sluggish. The longest Genus Brissus Leske, 1778 holothurian belonging to the order Apoda live Under this Genus only test of one species more or less exposed on the sea bottom, has been collected during the survey particularly in the open areas near the coral Brissus latecarinatus (Leske, 1778) reefs. Small forms live under rock fragments or (Fig. 24) among the dead corals often burying themselves deep in the sand and withdrawing out of sight 185: Spatangus latecarinatus Leske, 1778, p. when disturbed. The colours are mostly brown Locality not known. or grey of some shade. Some species are Brissus latecarinatus A. M. Clark 6- Rowe, handsomely coloured with shades of red, yellow 1971, pp. 146, 165: Islands of the and violet colours. The tenta lies are frequently Western Indian Ocean, Mascarene in contract with the body colour. Some of them Islans, East Africa & Madagascar; harbour commensals like crabs and Carapid fish.

SULLEriN43 121 The holothurians are the only group which Family LABIDODEMATIDAE have some economic value. An edible product This Family is described by James (1981) known as beche-de-mer or Trepang is prepared to accomodate the genus Labidodemas out of the body wall of certain holothurians. Seleka, 1867. So Far only one genus'is In this work 26 species are reported of known under this Family which four species are new records to the Genus Labidodemas Selenka, 1867 Lakshadweep. One species is known from the Lakshadweep. Species belonging to three Order have been collected. Labidodemas rugosum (Ludwig, 1875)

/fey to the Orders of the Class Holothuria rugose Ludmg, 1875, p. 110: South Pacific Islands; Pearson, 19'3, p. p. 82: 1. Tentacles tree-shaped, much branched; Maldives. anterior end with introvert Labidodemas rugosum Rowe, 1969. p. 133; A.M. DENDROCHIROTIDA Clark & Rowe, 1971, pp. 176, 197: 1'. Tentacles peltata or digitate; no true Maldive area. Bay of Bengal, East introvert 2 Indies, North Australia, Philippines, South Pacific Islands (Distribution 2. Tentacles peltate; body cylindrical with Table) Mukhopadhyay & Samanta, podia ASPIDOCHIROTIDA 1983, pp. 308, 312: Kavaratti (Laksha­ dweep); James, 1986, p. 585: Laksha­ 2'. Body vermiform with rough or warty dweep & Maldives area, Andaman and suface; tentacles pinnate; podia and respira­ Nicobar area (Distribution Table). tory trees absent .. APODA Material -. Chetlat, two specimens; Kadamat, ORDER: ASPIDOCHIROTIDA two specimens, collected under coral stones.

Species belonging to three Families have Remarks: At Andaman this species is found been collected from the Lakshadweep. complety buried inside sand under big stones. It is a rare species in Lakshadweep. Key to the Families of the Order Family HOLOTHURIIDAE 1. Body cylindrical or vermiform; pedicels and papillae long (95-10 mm.) confined more or Under this Family three Genera are collected less to five ambulacral bands; calcareous during the survey. ring ribbon-like with radials and interradials markedly dissimilar in size; body translucent Key to the Genera of the Family LABIDODEMATIDAE 1. Spicules: tables, buttons, rod resetts, per­ forated plates; if branched rods present only 1'. Body cylindrical or rectangular; pedicels in combination with others and never on and papillae short not confined to ambu­ their own Holothuria Linnaeus, 1764 lacral areas; calcareous ring not ribbon-like with radials and interradials of similar size; 1'. Spicules: very numerous branched rods body not translucent . 2 usually dichotomously lobed ,. . 2

2. Gonads in single tuft to the left side of the 2. Anus guarded by five enlarged clacified the mesentery; spicules in various forms; papillae or anal teeth ...Actinopyga Bronn, S-shaped and C-shaped rods absent. 1860 HOLOTHURIIDAE 2'. Arms not guarded by five enlarged calcified 2'. Gonads in two tufts, one on each side of papillae though five groups of similar the dorsal mesentery; S and C-shaped rods papillae may be present Bohadschia present STICHOPODIDAE Jaeger, 1833

122 CMFRI Genus Holothuria Linnaeus, 1764 without an apparent median longitudina ridge, outlines regular or irregular 5 Over one hundered species are known under this genus. Several attempts were made to 4'. Spicules: tables more or less well developed reduce the unwieldy mass of species included disc usually spinose; buttons irregular or under the genus into more manageble groups twisted, never flattened, lacking any appear­ by earlier workers like Pearson (1914), Panning ance of a median longitudinal ridge 6 (1929-35) and Deichmann (1958). For one reason or other the earlier studies remained 5. Spicules: tables well developed, disc inconclusive. Rowe (1969) revised the Family smooth and round usually with ten or more Holothuriidae and proposed a new classification peripheral holes, spines of moderate height ending in a several small spines; buttons which is followed in this paper. oval thin, flat, very rarely with a few knobs Under this genus 17 subgenera have been an apparent median longitudinal ridge recognised by Rowe (1969). Of these species present, three to six pairs of relatively small belonging to eight subgenera have been collec- holes, buttons regular or irregular in outline ed. The subgenus Cystfpvs is recorded for the H. (P/atyperona) Rowe, 1969 first time from the Lakshadweep. The following key is adopted from Rowe (1969). 5'. Spicules: tables fairly stout, disc smooth squarish in outline, usually with eight Key to the subgenera the Genus regular pheripheral holes spire of moderate height ending in a cluster of small spines; 1. Spicules; tables always present in combi­ buttons not thin or flat and lacking any nation with rods or rosettes, never with appearance of longitudinal ridge usually buttons 2 with three pairs of comparitively large holes 1'. Spicules: tables always present in combi­ and regular in outline ... nation with buttons, no rosettes or^rods. .3 H. (Jhymioscycia) Pearson, 1914

2. Spicules: tables usually with reduced disc 6. Spicules: tables not strongly developed, rim and moderately high or high spire ending of disc usually spinose, spire low, ending in a few spines forming maltase cross when usually in a ring of spines or cluster of viewd from above H. (Holodemia) spines, tables occasionally degenerate or Pearson, l914 incomplete; buttons irregular though not twisted, usually with three pairs of holes or 2'. Spicules: tables in combination with rods else incomplete forming small lobed rosette­ in the body wall, tables with reduced disc like bars H. (MertensiothurJa) and spire, either rounded at the tip or Deichmann, 1958 terminate in a few spines which form a single or double maltase cross when viewed 6'. Spicules; tables always well developed rim from above, no rosettes of disc spinose and turned up to give a' cup H. (Semperothuria) Deichmann, 1958 and saucer' aspect to the table in laterial view, spire low to moderate in height, 3. Spicules : table variously developed never usually terminating in a ring or cluster of modified into hollow fenestrated spheres; small sipnes; pseudobuttons abundant, buttons smooth, regularly or irregularly smooth, usually irregular and often reduced developed, often twisted 4 to a single row of three or four holes, 3'. Spicules: tables always strongly developed occasionally buttons quite regular with three sometimes modified into hollow fenestrated pairs of holes H. {Lessonothuria) spheres; buttons always knobbed or rugose Deichmann, 1958 or modified to form hollow fenestrated 7. Spicules: tables with disc usually knobbed ellipsoids 7 spire low, bearing many short spines which 4. Spicules: tables usually well developed the are sometimes so numerous and closely rim of the disc not spinose; buttons not crowded that they may almost either obscure twisted, sometimes flat and thin with or the disc or become connected to the knobs

BULLETIN 43 123 of the margin of the disc thus forming a Subgenus Semperothuria Deichmann, 1958 fenestrated sphere; buttons usually simple with large regularly or irregularly arranged Only one species is collected under this knobs, generally three to four or more pairs subgenus. of relatively small holes which may become somewhat obscured by the size of the large Holothuria (SemparothuriaJ c/nerascens knobs H. {Cyst/pus) Haacke, 1880 (Brandt, 1835) (Fig. 25) 7'. Spicules: tables stout, well developed spire moderate or high, never modified into hollow fenestrated ellipsoids; tables well developed with smooth disc, spire of moderate height or high terminating in several small spines; buttons hollow fenestrated ellipsoids though a few simple knobbed buttons may be present H. (Microthe/e) Brandt, 1835

Subgenus Halodeima Pearson, 1914 Fig. 25 Holothuria (Semperothuria) cinerascens

One species is known from the Laksha­ Stichopus (Gymnochirota) cinerascens Brandt, dweep. 1835, p. 51: China & Southern Japan.

Holothuria (Halodeima) atra Jaeger, 1833 Holothuria cinerascens Pearson, 1913, p. 64: Maldives, , Sri Lanka; James, Holothuria atra Jaeger, 1833, p. 22: East Indies. 1969, p. 61: Gulf of Mannar, Arabian Sea, Lakshadweep. Holothuria (Halodeima) atra Rowe, 1969, p. 137: Amboina; A. M. Clark & Rowe, Holothuria (Semperothuria) cineracens Rowe, 1971, pp. 176; Islands of Western 1969, p. 135: A. M. Clark & Rowe, Indian Ocean, Mascarene Islands, East 1971, p. 178: Islands of Western Indian Africa & Madagascar, Red Sea S. E. Ocean Mascarene Islands, East Africa 8- Arabia, Persian Gulf, Maidive area, Madagascar, Red Sea, S. E. Arabia/ Sri Lanka area. Bay of Bengal, East Maldives, Sri Lanka area. East Indies, Indies, North Australia, Philippines, North Australia, Philippines, China & China & Southern Japan South Pacific Southern Japan, South Pacific Islands, Islands Hawaiian Islands (Distribution Hawaiian Islands (Distribution Table): Table); Mukhopadhyay & Samanta, Mukhopadhyay 8- Samanta, 1983, pp. 1983, pp. 302, 311: Lakshadweep & 302,311: Lakshadweep; James, 1986, Maidive area. Gulf of Mannar & Palk p. 583: Lakshadweep & Maidive area, Bay on the Indian side, Sri Lanka, Sri Lanka (Distribution Table). Andaman 8t Nicobar Islands (Distribu­ tion Table), Material: Chetlat, two specimens; Bitra, two specimens; Kiltan, Several specimens; Kadamat' Material: Chetlat, several specimens, Kiltan, three specimens; Amini, several specimens several specimens; Kadamat, five specimens; Androth, one specimen; Kavaratti, three speci­ Amini, three specimens; Agatti, several speci- mens; Minicoy, several specimens, all specimens* mans, Kavaratti, two specimens, all specimens collected under coral stones. collected from the lagoon. Remarks: This is a common holothurian in Remarks: This is the most common holothurian Lakshadweep. They were found to attach to in Lakshadweep. This species is always fully the rock firmly. It is provided with profuse exposed on sandy bottoms and is never encoun­ cuvierian tubles which are discharged on distur­ tered under stones. bance to the animal.

124 CMFRI Subgenus Platyperona Rowe, 1969 2'. Spicules: tables not stout and with a few spines at the top skin smooth and soft; Only one species is known from the Laksha­ fugitive form H. (Thymioscyia) hilla dweep. This was reported for the first time Lesson, 1830 from the Lakshadweep by the author in 1969. Holothuria arenicola Semper, 1868, p. 81: Holothuria {Platyperona) difficilis (Semper) Philippines. Holothuria difficilis Semper, 1868, p. 92: Samoa. Holothuria (Thymioscyia) arenicola Rowe, 1969, Microtfiele difficilis A. IVI. Clark and Davies, p. 147: A.M. Clark & Rowe, 1971, p. 1966, p. 600: IVladives. James, 1969, 178: Islands of Western Indian Ocean, p. 61: Lakshadweep, Red Sea. Mascarene Islands, East Africa & Mada- gascar. Red Sea, Maldives, Bay of Holotf}uria (Piayperona) difficilis Rowe, 1969, Bengal, East Indies, North Australia, p. 145.; A. M. Clark a Rowe, 1971, p. Philippines, China & Southern Japan, Islands of Western Indian Ocean, South Pacific Islands, Hawaiian Islands Mascarene Islands, Red Sea, Maldive (Distribution Table); James, 1986, p. area, Sri Lanka area, Bay of Bengal, 585: Lakshadweep & Maldive area, East Indies, North Australia; Philippines, Andaman and Nicobar area (Distribution China & Southern Japan, South Pacific Table). Islands Hawaiian Islands (Distribution Table); Mukhopadhyay & Samanta,! 983, Material: Chetlat, four specimens; Kadamat, pp. 302, 311: Lakshadweep; James' two specimens; Amini, one specimen; Androth, 1986, p. 585: Lakshadweep 8 Maldive one specimen, all found buried in sand. area, Sri Lanka, Andaman & Nicobar Islands, (Distribution Table). Remarks: At Chetlat when the tide {recedes small holes were seen through which water was Material: Chetlat, several specimens; Kiltan, gushing out. These are caused by this species. several specimens; Amini, several specimens; It is almost impossible to take out the species. all collected under coral stones. The moment we dig they will go deeper into sand and below there are big stones which make Remarks: The colour in the living condition is digging difficult. It is recorded here for the first light brown with dark brown blotches. The time from Lakshadweep. posterior end is tapering. The ventral side is thickly distributed by pedicels which are Holothuria (Thymioscyia) impatiens (Forskal) yellowish-brown in colour. Fistularia impatiens Forskal, 1775, p. 121: Red Subgenus Thymiosycia Pearson, 1914 Sea.

Three species are collected from the Laksha­ Holothuria impatiens Selenka, 1867, p. 340: dweep during the survey. Suez; A. M. Clark & Davies, p. 599: Maldives; James, 1969, p. 61: Anda- Key to the species of ttie subgenus mans, Lakshadweep, Red Sea. Nagabhu- shanam & Rao, 1972, p. 290: Minicoy 1. Spicules: buttons with small holes burrow­ Atoll; ing form with often red spots Holothuria {Thymiosycia) impatiens Rowe; 1969, H. {Thymioscyia) arenicola Semper, 1868 p. 146; A. M. Clark & Rowe, 1971, p. r. Spicules: buttons with large holes 2 178: Islands of Western Indian Ocean, Mascarene Islands, East Africa & Mada­ 2. Spicules : tables stout with a cluster of gascar, Red Sea, S. E. Arabia Persian short spines at the top fugitive form skin Gulf, Maldives, Sri Lanka area. Bay of Sanday to touch Bengal, East Indies, North Australia, H. {Thymioscyia) impatiens Philippines, China & Southern Japan, (Forskal, 1775) South Pacific Islands, Hawaiian Islands iULLETIN43 125 (Distribution Table) Mukhopadhyay & Subgenus Mertensiothuria Deichmann, 1958 Samanta, 1983, pp. 307, 311: Laksha- dweep & Maldive area, Sri Lanka, Three species are known from the Indian Seas of which two have been collected from the Andaman and Nicobar area; Lakshadweep. Material: Chetlat, two specimens; Kiltan, two; Key to the species of the subgenus Kadamat, one specimen; Amini, two specimens; Agatti, one specimen; Kalpeni, two specimens; 1. Spicules in the inner layer resembling Kalpeni, two specimens; Minicoy, three speci­ narrow rosettes H. {Mertensiothuria) mens, all collected under coral stones. pervlcax Selenka, 1867

Remarks: It is very common holothurian in 1'. Buttons delicate, mostly with large holes, Lakshadweep. It is a fugitive form found under often narrow H (Mertensiothuria) stones. Two or three specimens are found under leucospilota (Brandt, 1835) the same rock. On disturbing thick Cuvierian Holothuria {Mertensiothuria) pervlcax (Selanka, tubles are released. It was reported for the first 1867) time from the Lakshadweep by the author in 1969. It Is distributed in the Atlantic also Holothuria pervlcax Selanka, 1867, p. 327: Zanzibar; A.M. Clark & Davies, 1966, Holothuria (Jhymloscscia) hilla Lesson p. 600: Maldives; James, 1969, p. 61: Lakshadweep. Holothuria hilla Lesson, 1820, p. 266: South Pacific Islands: A. M. Clark & Rowe, Holothuria {Mertensiothuria) pervlcax Rowe, 1967, pp. 126-128. 1969, p. 149; A M. Clark & Rowe, 1971, p. 176: Islands of Western Indian Holothuria monocaria Koehler & Vaney, 1908, p- Ocean, Mascarene Islands, East Africa 11: Lakshadweep; Mergui Archpelago, a- Madagascar, Red Sea, S. E. Arabia, Andamans, Persian Gulf; A. M. Clark 8- Maldives, Sri Lanka area. East Indies, Davies, 1966, p. 603: Maldives; Naga- North Australa, Philippines, South bhusahnam Pacific Islands Hawaiian Islands (Distribution Table); Mukhopadhyay & Holothuria {Thymlosycia) hilla Rowe, 147; A. M. Samanta, 1983, p. 311: Lakshadweep; Clark 8 Rowe, 1971, p. 178: Islands of James, 1986, p. 585: Lakshadweep & Western Indian Ocean, Mascarene Maldive area, Sri Lanka, Andaman & Islands, East Africa & Madagascas, Red Nicobar Islands (Distribution Table). Sea, S.E. Arabia, Persian Gulf; Maldives, Sri Lanka, Bay of Bengal, East Indies, Material: Chetlat, one specimen; Minicoy, two North Australia, Philippines, China & specimen; all collected under coral stones. Southern Japan, & Rao, 1972, p. 290: Minicoy Atoll: (Distribution Table) Remarks : This is a rare species in Lakshadweep. Mukhopadhay & Samata, 1983, pp. 307, It is a reported for the first time from Laksha­ 311: Lakshedweep; James, 1986, p. dweep by James (1969) James (1986) also 585: Lakshadweep & Maldives area, Sri reported for the first time from Andaman and Lanka, Andaman and Nicobar Islands, Nicobar area. In fact this is the first record to the whole of Bay of Bengal. (Distribution Table). Holothuria {Mertensiothuria) leucospilota Matlrial: Chetlat, several specimens; Bitra, two (Brandt, 1851) specimens; Kiltan, several specimens; Kadamat, three specimens; Amini, two specimens; Minicoy, Stlchopus {Gymnochirota leucospilota Brandt, two specimens, all collected under coral stones. 1835, p. 51: South Pacific Islands. Remarks: It is one of the most common Holothutia vagubunda Koehler & Faney, 1908, holothurians in Lakshadweep. It is a fugitive p. 17; Andaman Islands, Gulf of Persia, species found under coral stones. Great Cocas Island, Lakshadweep.

126 CMFRl Holottiuria laucospilola A M. Clark & Davies, Lanka area. Bay of Bengal, East Indies, 1966, p. 603: Maldives; James, 1969, North Australia, Philippines, China & p. 62; Gulf of Mannar, Arabian Sea, Southern Japan, South Pacific Islands, Andamans, Lakshadpeep, Red Sea. Hawaiian Islands; Mukhopadhyay & Samanta, 1983, p. 311: Lakshadweep Holottiuria (Mertensiothuria) leucospilota Rowe, 1969, p. 148; A. M. Clark & Rowe, Material: Chetlat three specimens; Bitra, two 1971, pp. 176: Islands of Western specimens; Kiltan, four specimen; Minicoy, two Indian Ocean, Mascarene Islands, Easf specimens, all collected under coral stones. Africa, & Madagascar, Red Sea, S. E. Remarks: It is one of the most common Arabia, Persian Gulf, Western India & holothurians of the Lakshadweep. It is not an Pakistan, Maldive area, Sri Lanka area. active holothurian but the tentacles are well Bay of Bengal, East Indies, North extended during movements. It is a burrowing Australia, Philippines, China & Southern form. Japan, South Pacific Islands, Hawaiian Islands (Distribution Table); James, Subgenus Cystipus Haacke, 1880 1986, p. 585: Lakshadweep & Maldives, Gulf of Mannar & Palk Bay along S. E. Only one species is collected under this coast of India, Sri Lanka, Andaman d- genus from the Lakshadweep. Nicobar Islands (Distribution Table). Holothuria (Cystipus) rigida (Selenka)

Material: Chetlat, several specimen; Kiltan, Stichopus rigidus Selenka (Partime) 1867, p. several specimens; Kadamat, four specimens; 317: Zanzibar, Hawaii. Amini, several specimens; Androth, two speci­ mens; Kavaratti, three specimens; Minicoy, five Holothuria rigida Semper, 1868, p. 79: Philip­ specimens, all collected in the lagoon. pines.

Remarks: This species has a peculiar habit of Holothuria (Cystipus) rigida Rowe, 1969, p. 155; tucking its posterior end under a big rock. The A. M. Clark & Rowe, 1971, p. 176; anterior end keeps on moving with ventrally Mascarene Islands, East Africa and directed tentacles. In some places as many as 5 Madagascar, Red Sea, Maldive area. or 6 were found to be distributed per square East Indies, North Australia, Philippines, metre. South Pacific Islands (Distribution Table); James, 1986, p. 585: Laksha­ Subgenus Lessonouthuria Deichmann, 1958 dweep & Maldive area, Andaman and Nicobar area. Only one species is known under this subgenus from the Lakshadweep. Material: Kiltan, two specimens, found buried under sand. Holothuria (Lessonothuria) pardalis Selenka, 1867 Remarks: This is a rare species in Lakshadweep. It is a fussorial form. In small specimens sand Holothuria pardalis Selenka, 1867, p. 336: sticks to the body as a coating. It is an inactive Sandwich islands, Zanzibar. A.M. Clark, holothurian showing very little movement. It is Davies, 1966, p. 600: Maldives; James, recorded here for the first time from the Laksha­ 1969, p. Gulf of Mannar, Andamans, dweep. Lakshadweep, Gulf of Kutch: Nagabhu- shanam & Rao 1972, p. 291: Minicoy Subgenus Microthele Brandt, 1835 Atoll. Only one species is collected under this Holothuria (Lessonothuria) pardalis Rowe, 1969, subgenus from the Lakshadweep. p. 150; A.M. Clarke Rowe, 1971, p. Holothuria {Microthele) nobilis (Selenka) 176: Islands of Western Indian Ocean, (Fig. 26) Mascarene Islands, East Africa 8- Mada­ gascar, Red Sea, S. E. Arabia; Western Mulleria nobilis Selenka, 1867, p. 313: Zanzibar, India & Pakistan, Maldive area, Sri Sandwich Islands.

BULLETIN 43 127 1'. Tentacles 20 or fewer; colour either brown or black .- 2

2. Large rods, often branched at the ends, sometimes with lateral branches; colour uniformly brown throuhout A. echnites (Jaeger, 1833)

2'. Large rods absent; rosettes small often incomplete; black or dark brown A. miliaris (Quoy 8- Gaimard, 1833) Actinopyga mauritiana (Quoy & Gaimard, 1833)

Hoiothuria mauritiana Quoy & Gaimard, 1833, p. 138: Mauritius. Fig. 26 Holoihuria (Microthele) nobilis Actinopyga mauritiana Koehler & Vaney, 1908, Microthele nobilis A. M. Clark & Davies, 1966, p. 22: Galle, Lakshdweep, Coco p. 600: Maldives: James; 1969, p. 61: Island, Andaman Island; A. M. Clark & Lakshadweep, Red Sea; Nagabhusahnam Davies, 1966, p. 603: Maldives; James, & Rao, 1972, p, 291 : Minicoy Atoll. 1969, 61: Andamans, Nicobar, Laksha­ dweep, Red Sea; A. M. Clark & Rowe, Holothuria (l\/Jicrothe/e) nobiiis Rowe, 1969, p. 1971, p. 176: Islands of Western Indian 162; A. M. Clark & Rowe, 1971, p. 178: Ocean, Mascarene Islands, East Africa Islands of Western Indian Ocean, and Madagascar, Red Sea, Western Mascarene Islands, East Africa & Mada­ India and Pakistan, Maldive area, Sri gascar, Red Sea, Maldive area, Sri Lanka area. Bay of Bengal, East Indies, Lanka area. East Indies, North Australia, North Australia, Philippines, China & Philippines China & Southern Japan, Southern Japan, South Pacific Islands^ South Pacific Islands, Hawaiian Islands (Distribution Table); Nagahushanam & (Distribution Table) Mukhopadhyay & Rao, 1972, p. 290: Minicoy Atoll; Samanta, 1983, p. 311: Lakshadweep; Mukhopadhyay & Samanta, 1983, pp. James, 1986, p. 585: Lakshadweep & 300, 311: Lakshadweep; James, p. Maldive area, Sri Lanka, Andaman and 585: Lakshadweep & Maldive area, Nicobar Islands (Distribution Table) Sri Lanka, Andaman Nicobar Islands tiAaterial: Chetlat, several specimens; Kiltan, (Distribution Table). several specimens; Kadamat, three specimens; IVIateriai: Chetlat, several specimens; Kiltan, Amini, several specimens; Kavaratti, two speci­ several specimens; Kadamat, four specimens; mens, all specimens collected from the lagoon, Amini, several specimens; Agatti, two specimens; depth less than a metre. Androth, two specimens; Kavaratti, three speci­ Remarks: This is the most valuable holothurian mens; Kalpeni, one specimen; Minicoy three for beche-de-mer. It was found common at specimens, all specimens collected on the reef Amini and Chetlat. There is very good scope to flat near the low water mark. exploit this species in Lakshadweep. Remar/(S : This is one of the most common holothurians in the Lakshadweep. This species Genus Actinopyga Bronn, 1861 can be used for beche-de-mer preparation. Often Three species are collected from the Laksha­ on lifting the specimen small pieces of corals, dweep. and such other objects are found attached to the ventral side. Key to the speqies of the Genus Actinopyga echinites {Jaegery, 1833) 1. Tentacles 25 or more; colour chocolate brown above and lighter below Mu/leria echinites Jaeger, 1833, p. 17: East A. mauritiana (Quoy &- Gainard, 1833) Indies.

128 CMFR' Actinopyga echinites Pearson, 1914, p. 183: white below Bohadschia marmorata Indian Ocean; Rowe, 1969, p. 131; (Jaeger, 1833) A. M. Clark & Rowe, 1971, p. 176: Islands of Western Indian Ocean, Colour brown or purplish brown with eye-1 ike Mascarene Islands, East Africa &- Mada­ spots alJ over the body Bohadschia argus gascar, S. E. Arabia, Sri Lanka area. Bay Jaeger, 1833 of Bengal, East Indies, North Australia, Bohadschia marmorata Jaeger, 1833 Philippines, China & Southern Japan; (Fig. 27) South Pacific Islands (Distribution Table); James, 1986, p. 585: Sri Lanka, Andaman & Nicobar Islands (Distribut­ ion Table).

Material; Amini, two specimens, under coral stones.

Remarks: This species grows to a large size and is used in the preparation of beche-de-mer. It is very rare and is recorded for the first time from the Lakshadweep. It is also not known from the Maldives.

Actinopyga miliarls (Quoy & Gaimard, 1833)

Holothuria miliar is Quoy and Gaimard, 1833, p. 137: East Indies. Fig. 27 Bohadschia marmorata Bohadschia marmorata Jaeger, 1833, p. 18: Actinopyga miliarls ^Qmes, 1969, p. 61: Laksha­ East Indies; A. M. Clark & Rowe, 1971. dweep; Rowe, 1969, p. 131; A. M. Clark p. 176: Mascarene Islands, East Africa & Rowe, 1971, p. 176: Islands of & Madagascar; Red Sea, Sri Lanka area. Western Indian Ocean, Mascarene Bay of Bengal, East Indies, North Islands, East Africa & Madagascar, Red Australia, Philippines, China 8- Southern Sea, Sri Lanka area. Bay of Bengal, Japan, South Pacific Islands (Distribut­ East Indies, North Australia, Philippines, ion Table); Nagabhushanam and Rao, China and Southern Japan, South 1983, p. 301: Lakshadweep. James; 1986 Pacific Islands (Distribution TabJe); p. 585: Lakshadweep and Maldive area. Nagabhusahnam & Rao, 1972, p. 290: Gulf of Mannar and Palk Bay on the Minicoy Atoll; Mukhopadhyay and Samanta, 1983, p. 311: Lakshadweep. Indian side, Sri Lanka, Andaman and Nicobar Islands (Distribution Table). Material: Minicoy, two specimens, collected under coral stones. Holothuria marmorata James, 1969, p. 62: Andamans, Lakshadweep; Nagabhu­ Remarks: This a rare holothurian in Laksha­ shanam & Rao, 1972, p. 290: Minicoy dweep. Good quality beche-de-mer can be Atoll. prepared from this species. It was recorded for the first time from Lakshadweep by James Material: Chetlat, several specimens; Bitra, two (1969). specimens; Kiltan, several specimes; Kalpeni, two specimens, all specimens collected from Genus Bohadschia Jaeger, 1833 lagoon, depth less than a metre.

Two species are collected under this genus Remarks: This species recorded for the first from the Lakshadweep during the survey. One time from the Lakshadweep by James (1969). of them is recorded here for the first time. Bohadschia argus Jaeger, 1833 Key to the species of the genus Bohadschia argus Jaeger, 1833, p. 19: East Colour in life pa|e or yellow brown above and Indies; Rowe. 1969, p. 130; A. M. Clark

BULLETIN 43 129

ORDER : APODA Material: Chetlat, several specimens; Kiltan, two specimens; Kadamat, two specimens; Amini- Three species belonging to one Family one specimen; Agatti, one specimen; Kalpeni' under this Order have been collected during the two specimens; Minicoy, several specimens.; all survey. collected from the reef flat.

Family SYNAPTIDAE Remarks: This species is common in Laksha­ Three genera are collected during the survey. dweep. It shovels sand into the mouth with its relatively large pinnate tentacles. The tentacles One of them is a new record to the Lakshaweep. are seen to be in active moment during feeding- Key to th» Genera of the Family It crawls along by holding on to solid objects by its anchors. 1. Size very large, anchor plates subrectangular with numerous holes Synapta Genus Ophiodesma Fisher, 1907 Eschscholtz, 1827 Urider this genus one species is recorded 1'. Size not very large, anchor plates oval with for the first time from the Lakshadweep. seven large holes 2 « Ophiodesma grisea (Sempsry, 1868) 2. Calcareous ring with conspicuous anterior projections; anchor plates abruptly contract­ Synapta grisea Semper, 1868, p. 11: Philippines. ed posteriorly Ophiodesma Ophiodesma grisea A.M. Clark & Rowe, 1971, p. Fisher, 1907 186 : East Africa, & Madagascar, Red Sea, S.E. Arabia, Sri Lanka area. Bay of Bengal^ 2'. Calcareous ring without noticeable anterior East Indies, North Australia, Philippines, projections; anchor plates not abruptly con­ Hawaiian Islands (Distribution Table); tracted at posterior end, but with large James, 1985, p. 586: Sri Lanka, Andaman & smooth hole on either side Nicobar Island (Distribution Table). Euapta Ostergren, 1898 Material: Kavaratti, one specimen, collected on Genus Synapta Eschschol tz, 1829 the reef flat.

Only one species is known under this genus Remarks : It is recorded here for the first time from the Indian Seas. This has been collected from the Lakshadweep. from the Lakshadweep. Genus Euapta Ostergren, 1898 Synapta maculate (Chamisso & Eysenhardt,1821) Holothuria maculata Chamisso & Esenhardt, Under this genus only one species is known 1821, p. 352: South Pacific Islands. from the Indian Seas. It was recorded for the first time from Lakshadweep by James (1969). Synapta maculate James. 1969, p. 62: Andamans, Lakshadweep; A.M. Clark & Davies 1966, p. Euapta godeffroyi (Semper, 1868) 603: Maldives; A M. Clark & Rowe, 1971, p. 186 : Islands of Western Indian Obean, Synapta godeffroyi Semper, 1868, p. 231 : Nevi- Mascarene Island, East Africa B Madagascar, gator Island. Red Sea, S. E. Arabia, Maldive, area, Sri Euapta godeffroyiKU. Clark &Davies, 1966, p. Lanka area, Bayofenal, East Indies, North 600 : Maldives; James, 1969, p. 62 : Laksh­ Australia, Philippines, China & Southern adweep; A.M. Clark & Rowe, 1971, p, 184 : > Japan, South Pacific Island (Distribution Moscarene Isludy, East Africa & Madagascar^ Table); Nagabhushanam & Rao, 1972, p. Red Sea, Maldives area. East Indies, North 291 : Minicoy Atoll; Mukhopadhyay & Australia, Philippines, South Pacific Islands, Samanta, 1983, pp. 310,312: Lakshadweep; Hawaiian Islands (Distribution Table); Muk­ James, 1986, p. 587: Lakshadweep & Mal­ hopadhyay Ef Samanta, 1983, p. 312 : Lak­ dives area, Sri Lanka, Andaman & Nicobar shadweep; James, 1986, p. 587: Laksha­ Isind (Distribution Table). dweep & Maldive area (Distribution Table).

132 CMFRI Material: Amini, one specimen; Kalpeni, one collected from the Lakshadweep 38 species are specimen; IVIinicoy, one specimen. collected only from the Lakshadweep. Some species like Mithrodia clavigera, Cistina colum- Remarks : This is a rare species in the Laksha- biae and Opfiiocoma anagl^ptica are cavernico- dweep. it was recorded for the first time from lous and are likely to be taken at other places in the Lakshadweep by James (1969). the Indian region when intensive collections are made. Linckia multifora, Dactylosastur cylind- All the echinoderms collected during the ricus, Ophiocoma dentata. Bohadschia argus, survey from the various Islands are listed in Holothuria Mertensiothuria) leucospilota and Table I. Stichopus chloronotus are very common in the Lakshadweep. It is surprising that the large star­ ZOOGEOGRAPHY fish Asteropsis carinifera which was common at Kiltan and Chetlat is so far not recorded from A study of the zoogeography of echinoderms the Lakshadweep and even from the Maldives. is interesting for the reasons that their move­ Linckia multifora and D. cylindricus which are ments are limited, their bathymetrical range is common at Lakshadweep are not distributed in narrow, their larval life is brief and that they are the Andaman and Nicobar Islands. Of the 255 entirely marine in habit. The composition and species only 49 species are common to the three origin of the Australian echinoderms has been regions showing that only 19.2% of the species dealt with at length by H.L. Clark (1921, 1946 . are distributed in the three widely separated A.M. Clark (1976, 1980, 1984) wrote on the regions of Lakshadweep-Maldive area, Sri Lanka zoogeography of echinoderms of the coral reefs and Andaman and Nicobar Islands. Sixty seven and echinoderms from Hong Kong and the species are collected from Sri Lanka alone. This Seychelles respectively. Although echinoderms maximum number partly reflects due to the are known to have a wide range of distribution intensive collections made at Sri Lanka since out of a total of 1029 shallow-water echinoderms 1882, and also due to the 'area effect' refered by considered by A.M. Clark and Rowe (1971) from Price (1982). Sri Lankan coast is far more the Indo-West Pacific region only 57 (5.5%) extensive that the coast line of small Islands in extend their range of distribution from the Islands the Lakshadweep and the Andaman and Nicobar of the Western Indian Ocean to the Hawaiian Islands. Therefore a corresponding increase in Islands. Only eight species are known through­ species diversity is apparent. As many as 15 out the tropic in Atlantic and Pacific Oceans. publications are available on the echinoderms Recently James (1986) wrote a paper on the of Sri Lanka. Twenty five species are reported zoogeography of shallow-water echinoderms of only from the Andaman and Nicobar Islands. the Indian Seas. He has clearly shown that the James (1986) listed 111 species of which 27 faunal composition of echinoderms of Sri Lanka species are new records to the Andaman and and India along the Gulf of Mannar and Paik Nicobar Islands. Comparison of the species Bay are somewhat different and he has given distributed in different regions show interesting reasons for this difference in distribution. He relationships. There seem to be greater affinity has also recorded fifty species for the first time between the echinoderms of Sri Lanka and from the South East Coast of lndia,Lakshadweep Lakshadweep since 39 (15.2%) species are and the Andaman and Nicobar Islands. common to both the regions whereas only 21 (8.2%) species are common between Sri Lanka In this paper a total of 255 species of echi­ and Andaman and Nicobar Islands and only 16 noderms known from the shallow-waters upto a (6.2%) species are common to the Lakshadweep depth of 20 metres from the Lakshadweep-Mal- to the Andaman and Nicobar Islands. James dive area (129 species), Sri Lanka (178 species) (1986) has stated that the echinoderms of and the Andaman and Nicobar Islands (ill Lakshadweep are oceanic and those of Andaman species) are considered for discussion here. and Nicobar Islands are continental. Since both Seventy eight species are collected from the the Lakshadweep and Sri Lanka are Oceanic various Islands of the Lakshadweep (Table 1.) Islands there is greater similarity of fauna Of these 30 species are recorded for the first between them. time from the Lakshadweep. Of the 78 species

PUL|.EnN43 133 Echinoderms common to the Lakshadweep their combinations are given in Table 5. and Sri Lanka, Sri Lanka and Andaman and Nicobar Islands and Lakshadweep and Andaman ACKNOWLEDGEMENT and Nicobar Islands are listed in Table 2. Echino­ derms reported from Sri Lanka alone and echino­ I thank Dr. P.B.S.R James, Director, C.M.F.R- derms common to Lakshadweep, Sri Lanka and Institute for giving me this opportunity to take Nicobar Islands are given in Table 3. Echino­ part in this survey and also for his kind interest derms reported from the Lakshadweep and and encouragment to write this paper. I also Andaman and Nicobar Islands alone are present­ thank Mr. M. AM Manikfan and Mr. K. C. S. ed in Table 4. Finally the number of echinoderms Panicker for some of the collections presented with their percentage from various regions and 'n this paper.

TABLE 1. List of Echinoderms Collected from the Lakshadweep (NR; New Record; C; Common; R: Rare; New genus & species T: test only)

o CD 5 ?^ > > > 3- rt Q] (Q 3 (D ^— Q. 3. Q> Q. Remarks ;rQ). § .. ™ * o 3 5' 3 o 0) 3- S —

ASTEROIDAE

OREASTERIDEA

Culcita novaeguineae -I- - -I- - + - + NR C. schcmideliana + — + -(-__ + — _ Halityle regularis — -I- NR Pentaceraster regulus - + NR OPHIDIASTERIDAE

Linckia laevigata — -I-- — -«- + - + — + C L. guildingi + ___ + + ___— R L. multifora + + + -I- + + - + + + C Dactylosas ter cylindricus -f- — + + -t- — — + — -h C Leiaster leachi — -f. — — _ — — - — -»- NR Paraferdina laccadivensis — — — — — — — — — -I- N. gen. et. sp. Fromia indica _.______+ -— R F. milleporella — + ------R

ASTEROPIDAE

Asteropsis carinifera ^._ + _. ______NR

ASTERINIDAE

Asterina burtonl ____ + ___-- R Patirella exigua _____ + ____ NR Tegulaster ceylanica _____ + _ + __ MR

ACANTHASTERIDAE

Acanthasttr planci + R

134 CMFRI Table 1 contd. ECHINASTERIDAE Cistina columbiae -••— — — — __ — _ — NR OPHIUROIDEA OPHIOMYXIDAE Ophiomvxa aulralis — — — — — — — — — + NR

AMPHIURIDAE

AmphiphoHs squamata + — — — — — — — — — NR

OPHIACTIDAE

Ophiactis savignyi ', — — — — — — — — — + OPHIOTRICHIDAE Macrophiothrix longipeda + — -1- + — — + — — — Ophiothrix (Keystonea) — + — — — — — — — — NR nereidina OPHIOCOMIDAE

Ophiocomella sexradia + + + — — — — — — — NR Ophiocoma scolopendrina — — + + + — — — + + O. dentata ^_+ + + — ___+ c O. brevipes + — — + — — — — — + R 0. anaglyptica + — — — — — — — — — NR Ophiomastix annulosa — — — — — — — — — + Ophiocoma erinaceus + — + + + — + + + — O. pica ^___-^___^__ OPHIURIDAE

Ophioclegans cincta — — — — — — + — — — NR Ophiolepis superba — — — — — — _-f._ — fijp

ECHINOIDEA CIDARIDAE

Eucidaris metularia — — — — — — + — • — Prionocidaris verticellata + — + — — — — — —

DIADEMATIDAE

Diadema setosum — — + — — — — — — — NR D. savignyi +______Np Echinothrix calamaris + — — — — — + — — — E. diadema .[-__ + + — _ + + ^ STOMOPNEUSTIDAE Stomopneustes variolarit + — -(- — — _ — — ^_

BULLETIN 43 135 Table I contd.

TEMNOPLEURIDAE

Mespila globulus — — — — — — — 4.__ NR Salmacis virgulata — — — — — — + — — — MR

TOXOPNEUSTIDAE

Toxopneustes pileolus — — — + — — + — — — NR

Tripneustes gratilla + — + + + — — — + —

ECHINOMETRIDAE

Echinomelra tnathaei + — + + + — + + — + Echinostrephus motaiis — — -- — — ~+ ^- — — ' •— NR Heterocentrotus mammillatus ~ — — — — + — t — —

ECHINONEIDAE

Echinoneus cyclostomus + — — •— — — — — — — T

CLYPEASTERIDAE

Clypeaster reticulalus -\- — — + — — i— — — — T

ECHIN0LA1V1PADIDAE Echinolairipas alexandri — -- + ^^ — — — — — — NR E. ovata ,- ~ + — — + + — + — — — NR

BRISSIDAE

Brissus latecarinatus — — — — — + — — — — T

HOLOTHURIOIDEA

HOLOTHURIIDAE Aciinopyga mauritiana + — + + 4- + + + + + C A. echinites — — — — + — — — — — R A. miliaris — — — — — — — — — + R Bohadschia argus + — + + + + — + — — C B. marmorata + + + — — — — — + — Labidodemas rugosum + — — + — — — — — — R Holothuria {Cysuipus) rigida — — + — — — — — — — NR H. {Halodeima) atra + — + + + + — + — — C H. (Lessonothuria) pardalis + + + + — + — — — + ^ H. (Mertensiothuria) + — + + + — + — — + C leuscospilota H. (M.) pervicax + — — — — — — — — + R H. (Microthele) nobilis + — -r + + + — + — — C H. (Playperona) difficilis + — + — + — — — -+ C H. (Semperothuria) cjnerascens -f- + + + + — — + — +

136 CMFRi Table 1 contd. H. {Thymiosycia) arenicola + — — + + — _ _ C H. (T) hilla + + + + + — — —- - + C H. (T.) impatiens + — + + + + — — c STICHOPODIDAE

Stichopus chloronhtus + - + + + + — + 4- — c S. variegatus + - + + + — - — — - Thelenota ananas + — - — — — - — —•»- R PHYLLOPHORIDAE Afrocucumis africana + ---— — --- + R phyrella fragilii + - — — + + + — -- NR SYNAPTIDAE Euapta godeffroyi — — + - - — + + R Ophioesma grisea ______— + __ NR Synapta maculata + — + + + + —— + + C

Total number of species 44 12 30 31 30 25 5 20 7 29

TABLE 2 Distribution of Echinoderms in Lakhsadweep, Sri Lanka and Andaman and Nicobar Islands

Echinoderms common to Echinoderms common to Sri Echinoderms common to Lakshadweep & Sri Lanka Lanka and Andaman and Lakshadweep and Andaman Nicobar Islands and Nicobar Islands

Capillasier multiradiatus Luidia suvignyi Comoster gracilis Comanthina schlegeli Astropecten zebra Astropecten monaeanthus Htterometra reynaudi Protoreaster nodosus Culcita novaeguineae Comatflla maculta Proioreaster lincki Archaster typicus Lamprometra palmata Nardoa lemonnieri Ophiocoma brevipes Stephanometra indica Metrodira subulata Ophiocoma dentata Decametra taprobanvs Asterina sarasini Ophiontreis porrecta Oligometra serripinna Euretaster bribrosus Prionocidaris verticellatus Astropectenindicus Echinaster purpureus Echinothrix calamaris Siraster tuberculatus Ophiomaza cacaotica Afrocueumis africana Dactylosaster cylindricus Ophiopteoon elegans Labidodemas rugosum Fromia milleporella Ophiaracnella gorgonia Patinapta oopeax Leiaster leachi Ophioplocus imbricatus Holothuria {Cystipus) rigida Linckia multifora Colobocentrus atratus Holothuria (Metriatyla) albiventtr Asteropsis carinifera ActinOpyga lacanora Phyrella fragilis Astroboa clavata Pol}cheira rufescens Holothuria (Thymiosycia) arenicola Gymnolophus obscura Bohadschia argus aUUEriN 43 137 Table 2 contd. Macrophiothrix langipeda Bohadschia vitiensis Ophiothrix purpurea Holothuria (Selenkothuria) erinaceus Ophiocoma pica Holothuria (Metriatyla) scabra Ophionereis dubia Acaudina molpadioides Ophiaracnella septemspinosa Asthenosoma varium Salmacis bicolor Salmacis virgulata Temnopleurus toreumaticus Temnotrema siamense Clypeaster rarispinus Clypeaster reticulatus Echinolampas alexandri Echinolampas ovata Martie planulata Pseudomaretia alta Lovenia elongata Actinopyga serratidens Bahadschia tenuissima Holothuria (Platyperona) difficilis Holothuria {Semperothuria) cinerascens Leptopentacta javanicas

TABLE 3 Distribution of echinoderms in Lakshadweep, Sri Lanka and Andaman and Nicobar Islands

Echinoderms reported from Echinoderms reported from Lakshadweep, Sri Lanka alone Sri Lanka and Andaman and Nicobar Islands

Comas ter parvicirrus Luidia maculata Comanthus samoanus Astropecten polyacanthus Comatella stilligera Culcita schmideliana Amphimetra molleri Fromia indica Heterometra amboinae Linckia guildingi Himerometra robustipinna Linckia laevigata Stemphanometra spicata Asterina burtoni Cenometra herdmani Patiriella pseudoexigua Tropiometra carinata Tegulaster ceylanica Luidia hard wick i Acanthaster planci Luidia hardmani Ophiomyxa autralia Astropecten andersoni Amphipholis squamata Astropecten bengalensis Ophiactis savignyi Astropecten eurycanthus Ophiocoma erinaceus

138 CMFRI Table 3 contd. Astropecten hemprichi Ophiocoma soolopendrina Astropecten sarasini Ophiocomella sexradia Anthenea pentagonula Ophiomastix annulosa Goniodiscaster scaber Ophioelegans cincta Goniodlscaster vallei Ophiolepis superba Stellaster equestris Ophiura kinbergi Pentaceraster affinis Eucidaris metularia Poraster superbus Prionocidarais baculosa Gomophia aegyptica Astropyga radiata Disarterina spinosa Diadema savignyi Amphiura (Fellaria) octacantha Diadema setosum Amphiura {Amphiura) lutkeni Echinothrix diadema Amphiodia microplax Stomopneustes vai iolaris Macrophiothrix variablis Toxopneustes pileolus Ophiocnemis marmorata Tripneustes gratilla Ophiothrix exigua Eckinometra mathaei Ophiothrix {Keystonea) neieidina Echinostrephus molaris Ophiaracna incrassata Echinoneus cyclostomus Phyllacanthus impeiialis Laganum depnssum Prionocidaris baculosa Actinopyga echinites Microcyphus ceylanicus Actidopyga mauritiana Salmaciella dussumieri Actinopyga miliaris Clyptaster fervens Bohadschia marmorata Pseudoboletia macula ta Holothuria {Lessono thuria) pardalis Gymnechinus robillardi Holotnuria {Halodeima) edulis Clypeaster humilis Holothuria {Holodeima) atra Fibularia volva Holothuria {Meriensiathuria) leucospilo Peronella oblonga Holotnuria {MicroteeU) nobilis Echinodiscus auritus Holothuria (rhymiosycia) hilla Echinodiscus bisperforatus Holothuria {ihymiosycia) impatiens Metalia latissima Stichopus chloronotus Rhynobrissus pyramidalis Stichopus variegatus Holothuria (Selenkothuria) moebi Ophiodesma grisea Holothuria (Semperothuria) imitans Synapta macula ta Holothuria (Theelothuria) kurti Holothuria (rheeiothuria) spinifera Stichopus naso Havelockia versicolor Polycheira siulhmanni Pentacta armatus Pentacta quadrangularis Pseudocolochirus viotaceus Labidoplax dubia Staurothyone rosacea Synaptula striata Stolus buccalis Stolus conjugens

BULLETIN43 139 Table 3 contd. Thyone papuensis Trachythyone imbricata Trachythyone typica Ohshimella ehrenbergi Phyllophorus (Phyllothurfa) cbuenis Phyllopeorus (UrodemeUa) brocki Table 4 Distribution of Echinoderms in Lakshadweep, Sri Lanka and Andamai and Nicobar Islands

Echinoderms reported from Echinoderms reported from Andaman Lakshadweep alone and Nicobar Islands alone

Heterometra flora Ceratonardoa carinata Heterometra sol Fromia armata Decameira mollis Nareoa jrianti Dorometra mauritiana Neoferdina offerti Archaster loriolis Tamaria dubiosa Halityle regular is Chaetaster vestitus Formia nodosa Ophiocentrus verticillatus Paraferdina laccadivensis Amphioplus (Amphioplus) inttrmedius Mithrodia clavigera Amphioplus (Lymanella) andrae Cistina columbiae Ophiactis tnodesta Ophiocentrus dilatatus Ophiopteron elegans Macrophiothrix speciosa Ophiothela danae Ophiarthrum pictum Ophiothix foveolata Ophiaranella infernalis Ophiotlirix trilineata Ophiolepis nodosa Ophioihrix {Keysiocea) propmqua Archnoides placenta Ophiocoma anaglyptica Breynia vredenburgi Ophiomastix variablis Moira stygia Ophiopeza spinasa Metalia sternaiis Chaetodiadema granulatum Holothuri {Acanthotrapeza) pyxis Parasalenia gratiosa Holotnuria {Mertensiothuria) fuscocinerea Mespila globulus Trachytnyone alcocki Parasaienia poehli Protankyra pseudodigitata Heterocentrotus mammillatus Echinoaamus crispus fibularia ovulum Peronella lesueuri Echinolampas alexandri Brissus latecarinatus Bohadschia graeffei Lab tdodemas semperianum Holothuria {Metriatyla) martensi Holothuria (Stauropora) discrepans Holothuria (rhymios)cia) aphanes Thelenota ananas Euapta godeffroyi Syanptula recta

140 CMFRI TABLE 5. Number of echinoderms l^nown from various regions of India

Lakshadweep, Lakshadweep Sri Lanka Andaman Lakshadweep Sri Lanka Laksha- Sri, Lanka only only & Nicobar & Sri Lanka & Andaman dweep El- Andaman only Nicobar Andaman & Nicobar & Nicobar

Crinodis 4 9 8 1 Asteroids 10 6 15 6 7 9 3 Ophiuroids 10 10 8 9 7 4 3 Echinoids 13 10 14 4 12 1 2 Holothuroids 11 8 21 6 5 7 7

Total 49 38 67 25 39 21 16 (19.5%) (14.9%) (26.2%) (9.8%) (15.2%) (8.2%) (6.2%)

REFERENCE Brandt, J. F. 1835. Prodromus descriptionis animal ium ad H. Metenio in or bis Agassiz, A. 1863. Synposis of the Echinoids terrarum circumnavigatione observato- collected by Dr. W. Stimpson on the rum. Petropoli. 1: North Pacific Exploring Expedition under the commands of Capts. Ringgold Bronn, H. G. 1860. Die Klassen und Ordnugen and Rodgers. Proc. Acad. net. sci. der Strahlenthiere (Actinozoa). Klassen Philad. 1863:352-360. und Ordnungen des Jier-reiches. Leipzig. (1)2:: 1-434. * Agassiz, L. 1835. Notice sur les fossiles du * Chamisso, A. de & Eysenhardt, C. G. 1821. terrain cretace au Jura neuchatelois. De animalibus quibusdam e classe Mem. Soc. sci. nat. neuchatel. 1: 126- vermium linneana, in circumnavigatione 145. Comite N. Romanzoff, Duce Ottone de * 1841. Monographie d'Echinoderme^ Kotzbue, 1815-18 peracta observatis. II. vivans et fossiles. II. Echnites. Famille Nova Acta Acad. Caesar. Leap. Carol. des Clypeasteroides. Des Scutelles. 10: 345-374. Neuchatel: 1-151. Clark, A. H. 1939. Echinoderms (other than holothurians) collected on the Presiden­ ^ Agassiz, L. In Agassiz, L. & Desor, 1846. tial cruise of 1938. Smithsonian Misc. Catalogue raisonne des families, des Coll. 98(11): 1-18 especes de la classe des Echinodermes Annis Sci. nat. (3) 6: 325-374. Clark, A. M. 1967. Notes on the family Ophitric- hidae (Ophiuroidea). Ann. Mat. nat. * 1847. Catalogue des especes, des Hist. 9: 637-655. genres, et des des families des Echini- des. Annis Sci. nat. (3): 7: 1 ^9-168. Clark, A. M. & P. S. Davies, 1966. Echinoderms of the Maldives. Ann. Mag. nat Hist. Bell, F. J. 1902, The Actinogonidiate Echino­ (13)8: 597-612. derms of the Maldive anp Laccadive Islands, n Gardines J. S. The Fauna Clark, A. M. & F. W. E. Rowe, 1971. Monograph GeographA of the Maldive and Lacca­ of the shallow-water Indo - West Pacific dive Archipelagoes. Cambridge. 1 (3): echinoderms. London. 238 pp. 223-233. Clark, H. L. 1915. The Echinoderms of Ceylon Blainviiie, H. M. de. 1825. Oursins. In: Diction- (other than Holothurians). Spolia zeylan- naire des Sciences Natureiles 37:59-102. JO (37): 83-102.

BULLETIN 43 141 1921. The Echinoderm fauna of Torres Gray, J. E. 1825. An attempt to divide the Strait. Pap. Dep. mar. bio I. Carnegie the Echinida or sea-eggs into natural /nstn Wash. 10: 1-223. families. Ann. Philos.. 26: 423-431.

1938. Echinoderms from Australia. 1840. A. Synopsis of the genera and Mem. Mus. comp. Zoo/. Harv. 55:1-596 species of the class Hypostomata Asterias Linn.). Ann. Mag. nat. Hist (1) 1946. The Echinoderm Fauna of 6: 175-184. Australia. Pubis Carnegie Instn No. 556: 1-567. 1855. An arrangement of the families of Echinida with descriptions of some Dartrall, A. J. 1971. Australian Sea stars of the new genera and species. Proc, zool, genues Patirlalla (Astersidea, Asterini- Soc. Lond. 1855 36-39. dae). Proc. Linn. Soc. N. S. W.. 96 (1): * Haacke, W. 1880. Holothurien. In Mobius. 39-49. K. Beitrage zur Meeresfauna der insel Mauritius und der Seychelles Berlin : Deichmann, E. 1958. The Holothurioidea collect­ 46-48. ed by the Velero III and IV during the years 1932 to 1954. Part 2. Aspidochi- Hayachi, R. 1933. Sea-stars of the Ogasawara rota. Ai/an Hancock Pacif. Exped. 11: Islands. Annotnes zool. Jap. 17 (1) : 249-349. 59-68.

* Delle Chiaje, S. 1828. Asteria. Mem. anim. Heding. S. G. & A. Panning 1954. Phyllophori- senza. vert. Napoli. 8 : 74-79. den dae. Eine Bearbeitung der polytenta- Herren Ores. Sarasin gesammelten culaten dendrochiroten Holothurien des Asteroidea, Ophiuroidea und Echinoidea. zoologischen Museums in Kopenhagen. Zool. Jb. 3: 822-846. Spoiia zool. Mus. haun- 13 : 1-209.

1916. Uber die Gattung Oreaster und •Jaeger, G.F. 1833. De Holothurlls. Turici: 1-40. Verwandte. Ibid., 40 : 409-440. James, D. B. 1969. Catalogue of echinoderms Duncan, P. M. 1887. On the Ophiuridae of the in the reference collection of the Central Mergui Archipelago, Collected for the Marine Fisheries Research Institute Trustees of the Indian IVluseum, Calcutta, Bull. cent. Mus. Fish. Res. Inst. 1: by Dr. J. Anderson. J. Linn. Soc. (Zool) 51-62. 21 : 85-106. 1973. Studies on Indian Echinoderms Ely, C. A. 1942. Shallow water Asteroidea and 5. New and little known starfishes Ophiuroidea of Hawaii. Bull. BerniceP. from Indian Seas. J. mar. biol. Ass. Boshop Mus. 176; 1-163. India 15 (2) : 556-559.

1944. A new brittle-star {Ophiocoma 198'a Studies on Indian Echinoderms anaglyptica) from Canton Island. J. 7. On a new Family Labidodematidae Wash. Acad Sco. 34 : 373-375. (Holothuroidea : Aspidochirotida, with detailed description of Labidodemas Fisher, W. K. 1907. The Holothurians of the rugosum (Ludwig) from the Andamans. Hawaiian Islands'. Proc. U. S. natn. Ibid.. 23 (1 & 2) : 82-85. Mus. 32: 537-744. 1981b. Studies on Indian Echino- 1913. New starfishes from the Philip­ derms-8. On a new genus Ophioelegans pine Islands, Celebes and the IVIoluccas. (Ophiuroidea : Ophiuridae) with notes Proc. U. S. Natn. Mus. 46: 201-224. on Ophiolepis superba H. L. Clark. 1938. ibid., 23 { 1 & 2) : 13-18. *Forskal, P. 1775. Descriptiones animalium quae in itinere oriental/ observavit P. Forskal _1986. Zoogeography of shallow water Hauniae. 1-164. echinoderms of Indian Seas. In;

142 CMFRI p. S. B. R. James (Ed.) Recent Advances genus Acanthaster. Vidensk. Meddr in Marine Biology. Today and Tomo­ danske naturh. Foren. 117 : 179-192. rrow's Printers and Publisliers, New * Martens, E. von. 1866. Ueber ostasiatische Deliii, pp. 569-591. Echinodermen. Seesterne des indeschen Koeinler, & C. Vaney, 1908. Littoral Hoiotiiu- Archipels. Echiniden, Arch. Naturgesch. roidea. Echinoderms of the Indian 32 : 57-88. Mesum. Calcutta: 1-192. * Michelin, H.M.1845. Zoophytes, Echinodermes 1922. Echinoidea. II. Clypeastrides et Stelierides de I, I le Maurice. Mag. et Cassidulides. Eciiinoderms of the zool. Paris (2). Zoophytes. 1845 : 1-27. Indian Museum. Calcutta: 1-161. Muller, J. & F. H. Troschel, 1842. System der 1927. Echinoidea. III. Echinides regu- Asteriden. Braunschweig. 134 pp. liers. Echinoderma of the Indian Mukhopadhyay, S. K. and T. K. Samanta 1983. Museum. Calcutta:!-158. On a collection of shallow water Lamarck, J. B. P. A. de. 1816. HIstoire naturelle holothnrians from the Lakshadweep. des animaux sans vertebres. Paris. Ed. Rec. zoolSurv. India. 81: 299-314. 1.2: 522-568 (Stelierides); 3 : 1-59 Nagabhushanam, A. K. &. G. C. Rao 1972. An (Echinides); 3: 60-76 (Fistulides). ecological survey of the marine fauna * Leske, N. G. 1778. Additamenta ad Jacob! of Minicoy Atoll (Laccadive Archipelago Theodori Klein Natural em Dispositionem Arabian Sea). Mitt. zool. Mus. Berlin, Echinodermatum et Lucubratiunculam 48 (2) : 265-324. de Aculeis Marinorum. Lipsiae: 1.214. * Nardo, J. D. De. asteriis. Oken's Isis. 7 : 716- •Lesson, R. P. 1839. Centurie zoologique ou 717. choix d'animaux ou imparfaltment Oshima, 1912. On the system of Phyllophorinae counues. Paris:1 -244. with descriptions of the species found Linnaeus, C. 1758. Systema Naturae. Holmiae. in Japan. Annotens zool. Jap. 8 (1) : Ed. 18.1:1-824. 53-96.

Livingstone, A. A. 1933. Some genera and Ostergren, H. 1898. Das system der Synaptiden. species of Asterinidae. Rec. Aust. Mus. Ofvers. K. Vetensk. Aakd. Forh., 55:111 - 19:1-22. 120.

* Ljungman, A. 1867. Ophiuroidea viventia hue Pearson, J. 1913. Notes on the Holothuroidea usque cognita enumerat. Ofvers. K- of the Indian Ocean. Spolia zeylan. 9 VetenskAkad. Forh. 1866 (9): 383-336. (35) : 173-193.

* Loriol, P. de. 1876. Note sur quelques especes 1914. Notes on the Holothuroidea of nouvelles appartenant a la classe des the Indian Ocean. Ibid., 9 (35): 173- Echinodermes. Mem. Soc. Phys. Hist, 190. nat. Geneve. 24 : 1-17. •Perrier, E. 1869. Recherches sur les pedicellares et les ambulacres des asteries et des Ludwig, H. 1875. Beitrage zur Kenntniss der oursnis. Ann. Sci. nat. 5 : 197-304. Hoiothurien. Arb. zool-zoot. Inst. Wurzburg 2 (2) : 77-120. •Peters, W. 151. Ubersicht von ihm an der Kuste von Mossambique eingesammelten * Lutken, C. 1869. Additamenta ad historian Ophiuren, unter denen such zwei neue Ophiuridarum. 3. Beskrivende og kritiske Gattungen befinden. Ber. K. preuss. Bidrag til kundskab om Slangestjernerne Akad. Wiss. 1851: 464 466. K. danske Vidensk. Selsk. Skr. 5 (8) : 1852. Ubersichat der Seesterne. 24-109. (Asteridae) von Mossambique. Akad. Madgen, F.J. 1955. A note on the sea-star Wiss. 1852: 177-178.

BULLETIN 43 143 1853 Abhandlung uber die an der chirotida). Bull. Br. Mus. nat. Hist. Kuste von IVlossambique beobachteten (Zooi. 18(4): 119-170. Seeigel und inbessondere uber die Selenka, E. 1867. Beitrage zur Anatomie und Gruppe der Diamemen von welcher fiier Systematil< der Holothurien Z. wiss. ein Auzing folgt Ber. K. preuss. Akad. Zooi. 17:291-374. Wiss 1853 : 484-488. Price, A. R. G. 1982. Echinoderms of saudi Semper, C.I 868. Holothurien. Reisen in Archipei Arabia, Red Sea and Suez. Fauna Saudi der Philippinen. 2. Wissemschaftliche Arabia, 4: 3-21. Resultate. Weisbaden : 1-228. * Quoy, J. R. C. and J. P. Gaimard. 1833. Thomas, L. P. 1962. The shallow water Amphi- Voyage de docouvertes de'1 Astroiabe' urid Brittle Stars (Echinodermata, Zoologie: Zoophytes. Paris : 1 -390. Ophiuroidea) of Florida. Bull. mar. Sci. GulfCaribb. 12 (4) : 623-694. • Retzius, A. J. 1805. Dissertatio sistens species congnitas Asteriaum. Lundae : 1-37. Verrill, A. E. 1913. Revision of the genera of starfishs of the subfamily Asterininae. Rowe, F. W. E. 1969. A review of the family Amer. J. Sci. 35 (4) : 477-485. Hoiothuriidae (Holothurioidae Aspido-

Not referred to in original 12- BECHE-DE-MER RESOURCES OF LAKSHADWEEP

D. B. James

Information on the beche-de-mer resources Haldar (1974) listed 23 species of holothurians of Lakshadweep is limited. Earlier no suveys from the Lakshadweep including deep sea were conducted to estimate the resources of forms. Mukhopadhyay and Samanta (1983) holothurians used in the preparation of beche- reported 12 species of holothurians from the de-mer. In fact very little information is avail­ Islands of Androtli, Kalpeni and Minicoy. Of able even on the holothurians of the Laksha­ these, three species viz., Actinopyga mauritiana, dweep Koehler and Vaney (19^5, 19C8, 1910) Bohadschia marmorata and Thelenota ananas reported 18 species from deep sea, eight species are used in the preparation of beche-de-mer from shallow-water and one species from deep Recently James (1983) stated that detailed sea around the Lakshadweep. Of the eight survey needs to be conducted in the Laksha­ shallow-water species reported only Actinopyga dweep especially for the commercially important mauritiana is of commercial importance. James species of holothurians. (1969) catalogued 15 species of holothurians RESOURCES from the Lakshadweep of which only four species viz., Thelenota ananas. Holothuria {Microthele) So far there is no quantitative estimation nobilis, Actinopyga miliaris and A. mauritiana of the resources of the holothurians from the are used for beche-de-mer preparation. James Lakshadweep. The holothurians chiefly live in (1973, 1986) pointed out that the Lakshadweep the lagoon and some species live only on coral is very important for the exploitation of reefs. According to Mannadiar (1977) the holothurians for beche-de-mer. Daniel and lagoon area in the Lakshadweep is about 420

144 CMFRI sq. km. Species of holothurians like Holothuria all over the surface which are conspicuously (Microthe/e) nobilis, Bohadschia argus, B. encircled with light colour. Because of the marmorata ind Thelenota ananas occur in the abundant supply of Cuvierian tubules it is not lagoon. Other species of holothurians like considered to have high value for beche-de-mer Actinopyga mauritiana. A mlliaris and A. since handling of the live specimen is difficult echinites are found to live on the reefs. In the in the field. In Kilakarai on the mainland when case of the species found in the lagoons actual they collect Bohadschia marmorata which is numbers are counted in unit areas and later also having abundant supply of Cuvierian raised to the total area of the lagoon of each tubules, they make a slit in the field itself and Island. When holothurians are distributed all throw out the Cuvierian tubules and viscera in over the lagoon from the shore to the reef their the sea and bring only the body wall of the numbers are enumerated at different transects and animal. The same method can be adopted for then the total number is estimated for the whole this species in Lakshadweep. It a very common lagoon. For species living on the reefs number species and is collected during the survey from of species are counted in unit areas and then Chetlat, Kiltan, Kadmat, Amini, Agatti and raised to the whole area of the reef. Kavaratti. It should be available in other Islands also. The resource is maximum at Kadmat and Although 35 species of holothurians are it is estimated at 1177 tonnes. At Kiltan 368 known from IVlaldive and Lakshadweep area, tonnes and at Chetlat 160 tonnes were estimated. during the present survey only 25 species of At Amini the resource was poor and the estimate holothurians are collected. Of these only seven came to only 11.9 tonnes. species viz. Holothuria (Microthele) nobilis, Thelenota ananas, Actinopyga miliaris. A. Holothuria (Microthele) nobilis (Fig. 2) is by echinites, Bohadschia argus and B. marmorata far the best holothurian suited for beche de-mer are used in the preparation of beche-de-mer. Of preparation. This species is popularly known the seven only four species viz., Holothuria as Test fish or Mammy fish. It commands {Microthele) nobilis, Actinopyga mauritiana, highest price in the beche-de-mer market. This Bohadschia argus and B. marmorata occur in species occurs in two colour forms, the white appreciable quantities in some of the Islands and black. The white form is said to be more which lend themselves for commercial exploitat­ valuable. The white form is usually found in ion.

Bohadschia argus (Fig. 1) is the most abundant species in the Lakshadweep, This is popularly known as Tiger or Leopard fish. Its size ranges from 300-500 mm and width ranges from 100-120 mm, with body wall 6-12 mm in thickness."! Live' weight' of.'nthe[; animal^ varies

.' Jo . - • -. •' :•••-••• • v.--s$.S;:

Fig. 2 Holothuria (Microthele) nobilis

more than 3 m depth of wafer. It occurs upto a Fig. \{Bohadschia argus depth of 30 m. It is most abundant on clean sand among the reefs., Young white forms live from}1-2kg. It is common on coral sand and among algae. The black form is found in shallow at depths from 2-6m. Body is cylindrical with waters from the reef to about a depth of 3 m. very smooth surface. Cuvierian tubules are During the present survey the specimens were extruded through the body in large quantities. collected only from the shallow waters and there­ Colour is black with distinctive eye-1 ike spots fore only black forms alone were encountered.

BU1.LEIIN43 145 It growes to a length of 300-40D mm and the Actinopyga mauritiana (Fig. 4) is a valuable width varies from 100-150 mm, with body wall species for beche-de-mar. It is popularly known 10-12 mm in thickness In the living condition as surf red fish. It grows to a length of 400 mm the body is like a loaf. The most distinguishing and width is 80-100 mm. Weight in live external feature is the presence of six to eight condition varies from 0.5 to 1 kg. The shape lateral teat-like projections which are evident of the body is almost cylindrical with the ventral only when seen under water in the living side flat with three rows of tubefeet. Body wall condition. Live weight varies from 2-3 kg. is 6 mm in thickness. Colour in the live Colour in the live condition is dark brown or condition is brick red on the dorsal side and black on the top and white beneath or yellowish white on the ventral side. In smaller forms the white mottled with black or brown on white dorsal side has white patches on the sides. It background. During the survey this species has been collected from Chetlat, Kiltan, Kadmat, Amini, Agatti and Kavaratti. Based on the survey 1882 tonnes were estimated at Kavaratti, 209 tonnes at Chetlat, 172 tonnes at Kiltan and at Amini. 165 tonnes

Next in abundance is Bohadschia marmorata (Fig. 3.) It is popularly known as brown sand fish. It grows to a length of 400 mm. The body wall is 10-15 mm in thickness. Body is cylind­ rical in shape with tubefeet distributed all over the body with the ventral side slightly flattened. Fig. 4 Actinopyga mauritiar'a is found to occur where the surf breaks on the outerside of the reef. The tubefeet are firmly attached to the rocks to prevent the ani nal being carried away by the waves. This species is never encountered in the lagoon and is found at the low water mark. It is one of the most common species in the Lakshadweep and is collected from ail the Islands surveyed except at Bitra. At Cheltat it is estimated 201 tonnes and Kadmat 130 tonnes. In Kiltan 23 tonnes and at Amini 10 tonnes were estimated. Epioring beyond the outer reef for this species will be profitable. Thelenota ananas[F\g. 5) is popularly known as prickly red fish. It is a very valuble species Fig. 3 Bohadschia marmorata for beche-de-mer. It is a massive form and the It lies freely on the surface of sand in the lagoon. length ranges from 400- to 700 mm The width A coating of sand is found on the body. Copious f Cuvierian tubues are extruded from the body when the animal is distributed. Therefore the method adopted for B. argus should be adopted for handling the animal during processing. Colour is golden brown with small brown dots. It is found on coarse sand and commonly occurs in depths of 2-6 m. During January, '87 it was found to be common at Kiltan in the lagoon. In Kiltan 103 tonnes and at Chetlat 33 tonnes JM '.J..i.f ^.•;.? ? estimated. Fig. 5 Thelenota ananas

146 CMFRI of this species varies from 150 to 2("0 mrn. Live from Amini islands. Deep water collection was weight varies from 3 to 6 kg. Shape is very not made during the survey and this accounts distinct and characterstic with numerous pointed for the collection of a stray specimen on the teats in groups of two or three all over the body reef at Amini Island. on the dorsal side. There are numerous large tubefeet on the flat ventral side. The colour Another important species for bechede-mer reported is reddish orange on the dorsal side is Actinopyga miliaris (Fig 7). This is popularly known as black fish. Its length ranges from but at Chetlat the two specimens collected were 200 to 300 mm and width from 80 to 120 mm. brown in colour. The lengths of the two speci­ Thickness of the body wall is about 8 mm. Live mens collected were 550 and 600 mm and their weight of the animal varies from 0.5 to 2 kg. weights were 2.5 and 2.7 kg respectively. It The body is cylindrical with three rows of tubefeet occurs in the lagoon and it is distributed at a arranged on the ventral side sometimes dark depth of 2-30 m on clean bottoms often beside large coral heads. Formerly one of the most valuable species for beche-de mer but there is only limited demand for it now. Due to high water content it shrinks more than other species during processing. During the present survey it is collected from Chetlat, Kavaratti and Minicoy Islands. It is not possible to give estimates for this species since it was collected only on a few occasions.

Actinopyga echinites (Fig. 6) is also another valuble species for bechede-mer. It is popularly Fig. 7 Actinopyga miliaris known as deep water red fish. Length ranges from 200-300 mm and width ranges from 80 to brown. It is found mainly in less than two 100 mm. Body wall is about 10mm in thickness. meters depth. It also lives on the reef flats Live weight ranges from 0,5 to 1 kg. The body among live corals and among algal beds. During the survey it is collected only from the Minicoy Island. Prices of beche-de-mer in the market rank second or third to teat fish.

HISTORY OF BECHE-DE-MER INDUSTRY The history of the beche-de-mer trade in the Lakshadweep is not well documented. Mannandiar (1977) stated that the bache-de-mer was once largely produced in Lakshadweep. According to him Sir. W. Robinson who visited the South Canara Islands in 1844-1845 reported that during the fishing season, a good many o^ the Islanders are employed by the Moplah merchants in the preparation of bechede-mer. This product was in good demand for the Chinese market at Bombay. But slowly the Fig. 6 Actinopyga echinites industry began to decline and by the time Mr. W. G. Underwood visited Malabar Islands in is sub-cylindrical with the ventral side flat. It 1881-83 the trade has almost died out. They is wider in the middle and slightly tapers at both used to be sent to Mangalore and thence shipped the ends and has a slightly wrinckled surface. to China. The local people do not use it in any Often sand settles on the dorsal side of the form. When the external demand declined, the ^ body, it is found to be distributed from 3 to people neglected the industry and quite naturally ^ 30 m depth and is found to live among live became extinct. When Hornell (1917) visited ' corals. During the survey it is collected only the Kiltan Island in 1908 he saw small quantities

BULLETIN 43 147 of beche-de-mer being processed from three species. Judging from the local names he has given they are Holothuria {Microthftle) riobilis, Bohadschia argus and Actinopyga maw/tiana, which are even abundant today. He also noted that the methods of curing were different from those practised in Palk Bay. They resembled the methods adopted in Australia and Polynesia. Obiviously these methods were introduced by the Chinese. Ayyangar (1922) who made a survey of the fauna and fishing industries of the Lakshadweep noted that the beche-de-mer industry which was a success for sometime in Androth had to be abandoned due to an epidemic of cholera and this was attributed to the insanitary condition in which the curer kept his Fig. 8 Vessel used for boiling holorhurisns at Chetlat yard at that time. He stated that at Kiltan except The Lakshadweep Administration made for the statement that it was once practised no some laudable attempts to revive the industry traces of the industry were found. The failure in recent years. In 1967 one Inspector of is attributed to poor prices for the manufactured Fisheries and a Fisherman belonging to the product. Fisheries Department were sent to Rameswaram for one month to learn the processing of The present author when he visited Amini, holothurians. They returned and processed Kadmat, Kiltan and Chetlat during January- different species of holothurians in the same February,'87 collected the following information manner as they adopt for Holothuria {Metiiatyla) on the beche-de-mer industry of Lakshadweep. scabra at Rameswaram. They found the About 65-70 years back one person who is still holothurian Holothuria (Microthale) nobilis alive at Chetlat used to process Holothuria suitable for processing and the processed (Microthele) nobilis. He used to cut the samples were ha ided over to the Fisheries Department. After that nothing is known. holothurian into four bits and boil the bits and Immediately after this one person from Madras dry them. He did this for four years. He started came to Androth and processed nearly seven the processing when somebody from mainland tonnes of Holothuria (Microthele nobilis) by suggested. When everybody ridiculed him for paying a royalty of Rs. 1.00 per kilo to the processing Koka (local name for sea cucumber) Administration. He purchased the holothurians he finally gave up. In a day he used to process by paying five or ten paise per specimen. He 5-10 specimens. He was paid Rs. 3.00 per kilo processed the material at Androth and Kavaratti. those days. In an year he could process about Details regarding the method he adopted for 20-30 kg. At Kiltan there is a place even today processing could not be collected. Fisheries known as Koka Pulikkayar which means a place Department rightly restricted the collection of to boil holothurians. Copper vessel used for material below the length of 150 mm. We have boiling at Chetlat is still available (Fig. 8). The to appreciate the foresight showed by the main reason why the beche-de-mer industry has Department to conserve the resource. After not established itself in Lakshadweep is due to two years the same person wanted to once the fact that it is difficult to export the material again visit Lakshadweep but the Administration directly to China or even to the main export did not give permission. markets in Singapore and Hong Kong those days. So they used to cater only to the needs FUTURE PROSPECTS of the Chinese population in Bombay and this The present survey has indicated good also died out when the demand for the product resources of holothurians used for processing. slowly dwindled with the disappearance of the In the whole of the Indian region only at Laksha­ Chinese population. dweep the best quality holothuran Holothuria

148 CMFRI (Microthe/e) nob/Us from which first grade dried. However smoke dried material is not beche-de-mer can be prepared is available in much favoured by the buyers. appreciable quantities. As stated earlier the holothurians are mostly concentrated in the ACKNOWLEDGEMENT lagoon while some of the economically I thank Dr. P. S B. R. James, Director. important species live on the reef. On a very C. M. F. R. Institute, Cochin for giving me this modest estimate the resource of Holothuria opportunity to take part in this survey and also (l\/licrothele) nobi/is and Bohadschia argus will for his kind interest and encouragement to write be between 3000 to 5000 tonnes when we take this paper. the whole Lakshadweep into consideration. REFERENCES Immediately processing can be taken up in the case of Holothuria (Microthe/e) nobilis since the Ayyangar, S. R. 1922. Notes on the fauna and processing is very simple and does not involve fishing industries of the Laccadives. much labour. Also since this is first grade Madras Fish. Bull., is: 45-69. holothurian for beche-de mer the returns will Daniel, A. and B. P. Haldar 1974. Holothuroidea be high. of the Indian Ocean with remarks on their distribution. J. mar. Ass. India, Since this species has not been processed 16(2): 412-436. earlier in the proper manner the processing is Horneli, J. 1917. The Indian bsche-dem?r described here in brief. The holothurians are industry: its history and recent revival- introduced into boiling water one by one after Madras Fish.. Bui I.. 11 (4) : 119-150. the viscera is thrown out and the inside water James, D. B. 1969. Catalogue of echinoderm is squeezed out. During boiling the flame has in the reference collection of the Central to be kept high. Only a few specimens should Marine Fisheries Research Institute. Bull. cent. Mus. Fish. Res. Inst, 7 : be boiled at a time to provide individual attent­ 51-62. ion to the specimens. The teat fish tend to 1973. Beche-de-mer resources of float as air is sealed inside with water which of India. Proc. symp. Living Resources. builds up pressure with rising temperature. After 3:706-711. some time the body wall breaks if proper care is l983.Research on Indian Echinoderms. not taken. Bloated specimens are taken out, -A review. J. mar. biol. Ass. India. 25 punctured at the mid dorsal region and put back (1 &2) : 91-108. ^or the completion of the cooking process. The _1986. The holothurian resources. R &• material is stirred frequently using spatula ended U Series No. 10 for marine fishery pole. The material has to be boiled for 30-45 resources management. CMFRI. Cochin, minutes. Since it does not become very rubber­ 1986, pp. 4. like, during boiling the bouncing test for sand Koehler, and C. Vaney 1905. Echinoderma of fish does not apply here. After boiling the teat the Indian Museum. Part III. An account fish are removed using ring-net end pole. The of the deep-sea Holothuriodea collected material is cooled by placing in raised platform by R. I. M. S. Investigator, 123 pp. or wooden planks or on top of logs. Each teat Calcutta. fish is cut on the mid-dorsal side leaving a little 1908. Echinoderma of the Indian uncut portions near mouth and cloaca. If there Museum. Part IV. An account of the are unremoved visceral portions, the same should littoral Holothurioidea collected by the be washed out by using lukewarm water. The R. I. M. S. Investigator, 55 pp. Calcutta. product should be again boiled for another 15-20 1910. Destribution d'Holothuries minutes. The product shrinks and the body wall nouvelles appartenment au Musee Indie. becomes hard. During boiling the material has Rec. Indian Mus.. 5 (2) : 89-108. Mannadiar, N. S. (Ed) 1977. Lakshadweep. to be stirred frequently. The material is removed Gazetteer of India, Adminstration of after boiling with a ring net ended pole. Then Union Territory of Lakshadweep, Kava- wooden splinters of 30-50 mm long are placed ratti, 375 pp. between the cut edges of the dorsal wall to Mukhopadhyay, S. K. and T. K. Samanta 1983. expose the interior. The material has to be On a collection of shallow water dried in the sun on drying platforms. During holothurians from Lakshadweep. Rec the rainy weather the material can be smoke zool. Surv. India. 81 : 299-314.

BULLETIN43 149 13. SPONGE FAUNA OF LAKSHADWEEP

p. A. Thomas

INTRODUCTION It is customary to classify the extant sponges under 4 Classes—Demospongiae or The present collection of sponges from silicious sponges, Calcispongiae or calcareous Lakshadweep is of great significance since this sponges, Hyaiospongiaeor hexactinellid sponges group had been left out while Gardiner (1903- and Sclerospongiae. Of the above 95% of 1906) dealt with the fauna and geography of the recent sponges as the members of this the Maldive and Laccadive archipelagoes. Since class are better adapted to meet any vtcissitu- then several works dealing with the sponge des of nature, and hence collection of porifera fauna of the Indian seas have appeared, but made from any ocean will contain more of unfortunatly, few of these relating to the sponge Demospongean members. From Lakshadweep fauna of Lakshawdeep. In this context the only species belonging to this class have been special interest taken by Dr. S. Jones, the then recorded so far. But, this does not necessa­ Director of the Central Marine Fisheries Research rily mean that the members of Calcispongiae Institute in the 1960's in studying and document- are not represented in this area; careful exa­ ting the fauna of Lakshadweep is worth mention­ mination might reveal the presence of a few ing. Besides obtaining data on the various calcareous species. However, the chances of fisheries of the island by the scientists posted at encountering species of Hyalospongiae and Minicoy, other scientists/research scholars, who Sclerospongiae are practically nil since hyalo- were deputed to Minicoy from time to time also apongean species are, by nature, deep-water collected voluminous data and material from the forms and Sclerospongiae form a highly spe­ different islands of this archipelago, to be later cialised group with regard to their habitat worked out by those interested. Sponges, thus preference. collected, formed the part of a Ph. D. thesis (11 species including one new species) submitted ORDERS OF THE CLASS DEMOSPONGIAE by the present author in 1968 to the Kerala SOLLAS AND THEIR COMPOSTION IN University. The subsequent collections of LAKSHADWEEP sponges from Minicoy were worked out and published serially (Thomas' 1973; 1979, 1980 Species of this class are adapted for a and 1980a). The above works have helped to life in both marine and freshwater realms and know mainly about the sponge fauna of Minicoy the skeleton is made of hydrated silica with island and these accounted for a total of 41 or without an admixture of spongin. Some species of Demospongiae falling under 23 may also incorporate arenaceous objects (sand families and 32 genera, while the sponge fauna grains, spicules of other sponges etc.) into of other islands still remained unexplored. their body for maintaining sufficient rigidity. In a few families a specialised skelton of any STRUCTURE AND COMPOSTION OF THE sort may even be wanting. Species of this MAJOR TAXA OF SPONGES IN class dominate in shallow water areas through­ LAKSHADWEEP out the world.

The present review is based on sponges This class is divided into 8 orders based collected from various islands of the Laksha­ on general structure and spicular compostion. dweep Archipelago and hence species already As in the other classes of the Phylum Pori­ recorded from Minicoy have also been included fera, here also there is considerable difference for the comprehensiveness of the account. A in the number of speciesj falling under each detailed systematic account of the sponges order. The species of the order Poecilosclerida collected during the present survey will be Topsent usually dominate in any collection published elsewhere. of Porifera. The relative numerical abundance

150 CMFRI (percentage) of species falling under each least impressive numerically with 4 species, order from 5 Islands (Kavaratti, Suheli, Kalp- which forms about 4.4% of the total number of eni, Androth and Minicoy) is given in Table species. The above composition is based on 1. The corresponding figures for the other the pooled data, when the number of species in regions such as the Gulf of Mannar, Palk each island is considered, the pattern may Bay and the Seychelles Bank are also included change considerably except in the case of the in the table for comparison. order Hadromerida. An order-wise appraisal of

Table: Order-wise composition of species (%)

Orders K* S KA A M P SE G

1. Keratosida 14.3 129 22.2 16.6 12.7 13.2 10.6 8.0 2. Haploscierida 17.8 3.2 16.7 9.6 7.3 13.2 9.6 14.2 3. Poeciiosclerida 17.8 16.1 16.7 11.1 21.8 19.7 26.0 26.9 4. Halichondrida — — 5.5 — 91 7.7 7.7 11.3 5. Hadromerida 35.7 38.7 30.6 61.1 29.1 23.1 20.2 15.6 6. Epipolasida — 12.9 2.8 — 73 7.7 11.5 6.2 7. Choristida 7.2 3.2 — — 9.1 11.0 10.6 10.9 8. Carnosida 7.2 12.9 5.5 5.6 3.6 4.4 3.8 6.9

K= Kavaratti; S = Suheli; KA—Kaipeni; A = Androth; M = Minicoy; P->Pooled data for all islands; SE = Seychelles Bank; G = Gulf of Mannar and Palk Bay; — = not represented

As has been mentioned earlier, species of the sponge fauna of the Lakshadweep may be the Order Poeciiosclerida dominate in any made as follows: collection (see the percentage composition of 1. Order Keratosida Grant species from the- various orders in areas like Seychelles Bank, Gulf of Mannar and Palk Bay), This is a polyphyletic group with utmost but in the present collection from Lakshadweep, variation in shape, size and colour. Mineral both Island-wise and in pooled data for all the skeleton, as a rule, is absent and its place is 5 islands, the members of the Order Hadromerida taken by spongin fibres which may be reticulate dominate (21 species). This deviation from the or dendritic in arrangement. Fibres may contain normal distribution is due to the abundance of arenaceous objects in varying degrees; spicules species belonging to the families Clionidae and made of spongin may be rarely noted in some. Spirastrellidae that are well known for their Some genera may completely be devoid of any boring habit. The abundance of calcium carbo­ skeleton. nate, in the form of coral skeleton, affords a condition quite congenial for the growth and Three families, Spongiidae Gray, Dysideidae proliferation of boring sponges belonging to Gray, Aplysillidae Vosmaer are represented in the aforesaid two families. Lakshadweep, accounting for a total of 12 species referable to 10 genera. Species of the Next, in order of abundance in the Laksha­ first family have elastic spongin fibres and hence dweep region, comes Poeciiosclerida which they are, at least some species, used as 'bath accounts for 18 species (19.7%). Species sponge'. The most common and widely distri­ belonging to the orders Keratosida and Haplos­ buted 'bath sponge' on the mainland of India cierida are equally abundant with 12 species {Spongie officinalis Lin.) is represented by its (13.2%) each. The order Choristida has 10 variety ceylynensis Dendy in Lakshadweep and species (11.0%) while the orders Halichondrida was collected, at least in stray numbers, from and Epipolasida have 7 species (7.7%) each. almost all the islands surveyed. Specimens Ot ail the orders represented Carnosida is the collected f rom the lagoon had an encrusting

BULLETIN 43 151 growth form while those washed ashore on the surveyed, and all of them were encrusting open side of the island (mainly Kavaratti and indicating the early stage in the life cycle. Kiltan) were of irregular, tuberous morphology. The fibres, in all these cases, were rather robust This order ranks second numerically in both and with poor resilience, indicating poor com­ Kalpeni and Androth. mercial possibilities. 2. Order Haplosclerida Topsent

Species falling under this family may be The skeleton, in this order, is very simple. divided into two subfamilies based on the nature It is reticulate with rectangular to triangular of skeleton. Fibres represented in the first meshes and the fibres may be uni or multi- subfamily (Spongiinae de Laubenfeis) may or spicular with spongin covering the spicules in may not be trellised or fascicular. Similarly, a degrees. Spicules are represented by diactinal sand cortex also may or may not be present. (oxeas or strongyles) megascleres and sigmoid Genera like Spongia Lin., Hippiospongia de or toxoid microscleres. Spongin may be seen Laubenfeis, Heteronema Keller, Hyattella cementing the spicules at their corners or just Lendenfeld and Pyllospongia Ehlers fall under covering the spicules (as in Haliclonidae de this subfamily. The second subfamily, Veron- Laubenfeis) or thickly (as in Callyspongiidad de giinae de Laubenfeis, may be divided into two Laubenfeis), forming stout fibres, In Adociidae subdivisions based on the nature of the fibres- de Laubenfeis the microscleres seen may be whether trellised and fascicular or not. The sigmas (genus Sigmadocia de Laubenfeis) or genus Fasciospongia Burlon, comes under the sigmas and toxas (genus Orina Gray) in addition former subdivision while the genus Thorectop- ^o the characteristic megascleres of the family. sa/77/r7a Burton, under the latter. Generally, the Genus Damirina Burton, also of the family species falling under this subfamily have very Adociidae, has dermal tornotes over an isodictyal tough fibres with poor resiliency and hence are reticulation of spined (often verticillately) of no commercial value. a canthostrongyles. During the present survey a new species of this genus (£>. laccadivensis) The second family, Dysideidae Gray, is could be collected. This has irregularly spined represented at Lakshadweep by two genera, acanthostrongyles instead of the normal Dysidea Johnston and Dendrilla Lendenfeld, the verticillate type. Specimens of the new species former with two, and the latter with a single were collected from two islands, Kalpeni (D-2) species. Species of Dysidea incorporate sand and Minicoy (J-3). The substratum beneath the grains etc., into their skeleton and hence are Specimen, in both cases, presented a highly quite friable on drying. The fibres of Dendrilla disintegrated look and it could not be confirmed never incorporate sand grains, and are laminated weather the sponge is intruding into cavities and pithed. These fibres often run in a feebly made by other boring sponges or not. The most dendritic fashion. The species represented is common and widely distributed species of the D. cactus Selenka. and the specimens, when family is Sigmadocia tibulata ^Schmidt). This macerated, ooze out a secretion of the sam® sponge grows in association with the alga colour. Ceratodictyon spongiosum (Zanard) and hence drefer to colonise well-lighted areas of the The third family, Aplysillidae Vosamer, is 'agoon This species could be collected from quite different from the aforementioned two 5 islands of this archipelago. families in that the fibres are distinctly dendritic and, besides, there may be diactinal or triactinal The fourth family Desmacidonidae Gray, spicules made of a substance very close to has reticulate or plumoreticulate skeleton with spongin in chemical composition. The only diactinal megascleres. Microscleres are re­ genus represented is Psammaplysilla Keller, presented by chelas and sigmas mostly, the which has no spongin spicules at all. P. pur­ former often with some curious modifications. purea (Carter) could be collected from 7 of the Genus lotrochota Ridley has both monacts and islands surveyed. Though a branching body form diacts as megascleres. Genus Cornulum Carter is very well noted in advanced stages, such is represented by a single specis, C. ves/culatum Specimens were not present in any of the islands (Dendy) from Kalpeni (1-3). This species was

152 CMFRI first reported from the Gulf of Mannar by Dendy well as in the pooled data for all islands (1905). The body is vase or bladder shaped surveyed at present. with fistules arising from the upper parts. de Laubenfels (1936) suggested 4 artific­ Usually these fistules project from the bottom as ial 'Divisions' for this order based on the the main body remains buried in the sand. nature of principal and auxiliary spicules, Spicules consist of strongyles and oxeas for whether diactinal or monactinal. In the first megascleres and isochelas for microscleres. Division, Phorbasiformes, the principal and The total number of species falling under at least some of the auxiliary spicules are the present order from Lakshadweep is 13 and diactinal while auxiliaries are monactinal; in may be classified under 8 genera and 4 families. the third, Myxilliformes, the principal ones are monactinal and auxiliaries, diactinal and fina­ 3. Order Poecilosclerida Topsent lly, in the fourth, Microcioniformes, both prin­ cipal and auxiliary spicules are monactinal. This is structurally the most diverse order Judging from the above grouping, families of the class Demospongiae and is very well such as Phorbasidae de Laubenfels, and Age- known for the different categories of spicules it lasidae Verrill fall under the first Division, contains. Megascleres are represented by both family Plocamiidae Topsent under the second; monacts and diacts and are with curious families Myxillidae Hentschel, Tedaniidae Rid­ modifications of some sort or the other. Spiny ley and Dendy and Raspailiidae Hentschel spicules are rather common. Spicules may show under the third; and families Microcionidae considerable regional differentiation. Spongin Hentschel, Ophlitaspongiidae de Laubenfels and may be noted in varying degree and in some Amphilectidae de Laubenfels under the fourth cases spicules may even get aggregated into a Division. reticulation of a very complicated nature Microscleres represented may be of different Only two genera of the family Phorbasi­ types, sigmas, chelas, toxas, raphides and so on. dae, viz, Echinodictyum Ridley and Damiri- But there are some genera in which the ana de Laubenfels, are represented at Laksha­ microscleres may totally be absent. dweep. The spiculation in the former genus consists of oxeas in fibres accompanied by The body form, in this order, may vary partly projecting styles; the fibres are echin- considerably; some may be encrusting throu­ ated by acanthostyles and no microscleres ghout their life, but others may be ramose, are represented. The only species represent­ bushy, massive or foliate. Species falling ed is £. longistylum Thomas. Genus Damiri- under this order may be beautifully coloured. ana has dermal tylotes and endosmal oxeas; Some species which cannot tolerate direct microscleres are represented by arcuate chelas sunlight may prefer to grow attched to the and sigmas. D. schmidti (Ridley) is a widely under surface of hard objects away .from distributed Indo-Pacific species which, in the siltfall. reef environment, retains the encrusting habit throughout life. This species has been coll­ A very large fraction of all the described ected from four of the islands surveyed. The genera of the Phylum Porifera fall under this next family of the present Division is Age|a- order, but this order has only second posit­ sidae. The members of this family have nei­ ion in Lakshadweep in the order of numer­ ther principal spicules or auxiliaries in the ical abundance, the first being the order Ha- strict sense and those represented may be put dromerida Topsent. It is still not known under the category 'echinating,. Spongin fib­ whether the abundance of calcium carbonate res are developed and form a fine reticulum. in the form of coral produces a favaurable The inclusion of this family under this Div­ condition for the growth of boring sponges ision is open to criticism and a better pos­ of the order Hadromerida or the sea bottom ition for this would be the fourth Division. covered with coral sand inhibits the growth Since reduction of spicules is so character­ of species of order Poecilosclerida. However, istic here, de Laubenfels (1936) concluded this is an exceptional condition noted in the that the family is polyphyletic and a still species composition of individual islands as aUUEIIN43 153 further reduction of spicules will lead to the from the latter in the presence of acanthostyles absence of spicules at all, as seen in the added to its spiculation. Principal spicules, in case of spongiidae Gray. Bergquist and Har- this case, are monactinal (styles) and the tman (1969) concluded that a better place auxiliaries, diactinal (tylotes). In addition to for this family would be among Axinellida these there are both acanthostyles and claydoty- since they noted some similarities in free lotes (or 'rose-stem') as echinating spicules. amino acid patterns and sterol composition Microscleres are represented by isochelas and of these two groups. Genus Agelas D & M. toxas. A. souriei Levi, a species common to the the representative of this monogeneric family, Atlantic Ocean, Mediterranean Sea and some has unique echinating spicules in which the parts of the Indian Ocean, is widely distributed spines are arranged in nodal whorls Two well- in Lakshadweep. Family Raspailiidae Hentschel known species (y4. mauritiana (Carter) and is represented by a single species, Rhabderemia A. ceylonensis Dendy) and an unidentified pro/ifera Annanda\e. Annandale (1915), in the species (Agelas sp. Thomas, 1980) have been original description, mentioned that this species hitherto known from Minicoy. However, no may utilise the cavities made by boring sponges, species of this genus could be collected during but during the present survey it was noted that the present survey. Of the aforementioned two no other boring sponge was present in species the first one is a widely distributed galleries occupied by this species. The charac­ Indo-Pasific species while the second enjoys teristic spicules are hockey stick-like rhabdosty- distribution only in the Indian Ocean. les, microstyles, microstyles and twisted sigmas. This species could be collected from 5 islands Only one family (Plocamiidte Topsent) of in this archipelago. the second Division is represented at Laksha- dweep and a s pecies {P/ocami/la mannarensis Under the fourth Division, Microcioniformes, (Carter) has been recorded by Burton and Rao families such as Microcionidae Hentschel, (1932). This is a widely distributed Indian Opiitaspongiidae de Laubenfels and Amphilecti- Ocean species and the specimens grow to a dae de Laubenfels are represented at Laksha­ bushy structure with a short peduncle bearing dweep. Species falling under the first family several dichotomously dividing branches of 3 to retain the encrusting habit throughout their life 5 mm diameter. time and are beautifully coloured. M. acertoob- tusa Carter is devoid of any acanthostyle which The third Division, MyxHliformes, is repre­ is quite characteristic of the genus and the sented at Lakshadweep by three families- isochelas, at least some, have a twisted appear­ Myxillidae Hentschel. Tedaniidae Ridley and ance. Two other species, M. rhopalophora Dendy andRaspailiidae Hentschel. Two Myxillid (Hentschel , is quite peculiar in the respect that sponges, Myxilla arenaria Dendy and Myxilla sp. there are two types of acanthostyles. Genera have been recorded so far, the first one from falling under the family Ophlitaspongiidae from Kalpeni and the other from Minicoy (Thomas, Lakshadweep are Ophlitaspongia Bowerbank, 1980). The former species exhibits the habit of Clathria Schmidt, Mycale Gray and Zygomycale incorporating sand grains etc., into the body Two genera of the family Tedaniidae, which are Topsent. The principal spicules, in all these found rather well distributed in the Lakshadweep, cases, are monactinal (styles or subtylostyles) are Tedania Gray and Acanthacarnus Levi. The and auxiliaries, subtyoystyles, sometimes of first genus has diactinal auxiliaries and different sets. In the first genus microscleres monactinal principal spicules together with are represented by toxas and arcuate isochelas. characteristic 'onychaetas' of the genus. A In the case of the genus Clathria the subtylostyles widely distributed cosmopolitan species, Tedania may be basally spined, and may be of different anhelans (Lieberkuhn), has been collected from sets; the acanthostyles that echinate the fibres 7 islands of this archipelago. It appears from are of common occurrence. Microscleres are the collection that specimens here do not grow representened by palmate isochelas, but in some to a massive size unlike in the inshore areas of cases they may be totally wanting. Genus the mainland. Genus Acanthacarnus Levi, a Mycale has anisochelas, sigmas, toxas and close relative of the genus Acernus Gray, differs raphides; there may be different sets in each

154 CMFRI category. Genus Zygomycale is peculiar in the those with spiny microxeas under the subfa­ respect that it has isochelas added to the typical mily Higginsiinae Higgin, Genera like Bubaris spiculation of the above genus. Species falling Gray and Phycopsis Carter fall, under the fo­ under the abova-mentioned genera are Ophlita- rmer and Myrmekioderma Ehlers under the spongia rimcsa (Ridley), Clathria reinvjardti latter sufamilies. Genus Bubaris has both styles Vosmaer, l\Aycale g'andis Gray and Zygomycale and/or subtylostyles erect on the substratum parisiiii (Bowerhank). Except ior O. rimosa, all and sinuous strongyles that may be arranged in the others are known only from Minicoy. ^he form of mat over the substratum or in an axial column, depending on the form of grow­ The family Amphilectidae de Laubenfels is th. From Minicoy a specimen of Bubaris was represented by a single species: Biemna fortis reported as Bubaris sp. (Thomas, 1980a). Ge­ (Topsent), which has styles, sigmas (two sets) nus Phycopsis has only oxeas, and two spe­ and raphides (often in groups). Specimens cimens (of different species) could be collected. usually grow buried in sand with finger-like (Sp. 1 from Agatti and Sp. 2 from Minicoy) projections arising from the upper parts. during the present survey. Specific identific­ ation, in both these cases, was not possible The total number of species falling under due to the small and inadequate nature of the this order from Lakshadweep is 18 and may material. The subfamily Higginfiinae is repres­ be classified into 9 families and 4 genera. ented by the genus A/lyrme/doderma and the species already reported from Minicoy is M. 4. Order Halichondrida Vosmaer granulata (Esper). This has a well developed cortex reinforced with small acanthoxeas. The Spicules encountered in this order may be main skeleton, in this case, is composed of monacts or diacts or a combination of both smooth oxeas together with raphides. Microscleres, as a rule, are rare. This order is represented at Lakshadweep by three families. Species falling under the family Hymenia­ Halichondridae Gray. Axinellidae Ridley and cidonidae have fleshy ectosome; but the end- Dendy and Hymeniacidonidae de Laubenfels. osome is quite comparable to that of any The first family has exceedingly simple spic­ typical exinellid species. Spicules are represented ulation consisting of only oxeas. A rspecia' by smooth oxeas, styles and crooked strong­ dermal skelton is sometimes present and com­ yles. Only one species, Acanthella cavernosa posed of tangentially placed oxeas over exten­ Dendy, is known from Lakshadweep (Minicoy) sive subdermal spaces. Halictiondria pan/cea Johnston, a typical cosmopolitan species of The order is represented at Lakshadweep the family, could be collected from Androth. by three families, 6 genera and 7 species. Another genus which may be considered under the present family is C/ocaiypta Bowerbank. 5. Order Hadromerida Topsent This has styles instead of oxeas and the dermal skeleton is composed of small styles. The sub- Demospongiae with radiate and corticate dermal spaces are quite extensive. Thomas architecture; megascleres are represented by (.1973) recorded C. Polymastia (Lendenfeld) monacts (tylostyles or subtylostyles), smaller from Minicoy extending its distribution west­ megascleres assume a brush-like arrangement ward to the Indian Ocean (previously known at the surface giving a pronounced fur-like from New Zealand and Australia). appearance to the surface. Microscleres may be of different types or totally absent; when pr­ Species of the family Axinellidae may be esent, they are of astrose type. differentiated from those of the other families of the order in that the axial and extra-axial Of the four families represented at Laks­ specialisations are well pronounced in this case hadweep, two families, viz., Spirastrellidae Megascleres are represented by monacts and Hentschel and Clionidae Gray are unique in diacts and microscleres, if at all present, may the respect that almost all the species falling be raphides and microxeas Those species under them exhibit the habit of boring into without spiny microxeas are grouped under calcium carbonate material such as shell, coral the subfamily Axinellinae de Laubenfels, while calcareous algae etc., causing considerable

BUUETIN43 155 damage or even death to these calcium sec­ Prostylyssa Topsent, Jaspis Gray and Zaple- reting animals. These species, hence, play an thea de Laubenfels. In the genus Prostylyssa important role in the bioerosion of the reef the megascleres may be monacts or diacts, system. Details on the bioerosion generated and the microscleres are represented by micro- by the various species of sponges are furnished styles. The only species represented is P. elsewhere in this Bulletin and hence such foetida (Dendy) which is widely distributed details are deleted from the present account. in the Indo-Pacific. Spiculation in tha genus The only genus from the family Spirastrellidae Jaspis consists of oxeas as megascleres represented in the present collection that does and euasters and microxeas as microscleres. not bore into calcareous matter is Timea Gray. Jaspis penetrans (Carter) is a boring The spiculation consists of tylostyles, mostly species commonly distributed in tha reef en­ erect on the substratum, and euasters of one or vironment in Lakshadweep. Genus Zaplethea more sets. These asters are seen densely packed resembles the above genus in spiculation, but inside the sponge. Two species, T. stellizar- the microxeas represented here are biangulated. ians (Carter) and T. stel/ata (Bowerbank), are A subspecies of Zaplethea digonoxea (ssp. represented at Lakshadweep. The other two diastra Vacelet and N/asseur), the only subsp­ families of this order, viz., Suberitidae Schm­ ecies in the Indo-Pacific, has been collected idt and Placospongiidae Gray are rather poorly from Suheli. Family Tethyidae is well defined represented. The former family possessess ty- family with strongyloxeas arranged jn lostyles/subtylostyles or rarely styles; and the radial bundles. The cortex is well marked radial arrangement of the skeleton is distinct and is densely packed with spherasters. Other only towards the outer part of the specimen. microscleres represented include euasters of Species falling under four genera have been one or more types. T. robusta Bowerbank, T. collected; they are, Suberites Nardo, Laxosub- japonica Sollas and T. diploderma Schmidt are erites Topsent, Pseudosuberites Topsent and the species represented at Lakshadweep Ano­ Aeptos Gray. Tylostyles form the main spicules ther genus of the same family, Tethytimea de in the former three genera, while in the last, Laubenfels, differs from the above genus in spicules are represented by strongyloxeas and the possession of tylostyles in the place of styles. The family Placospongiidae is repres­ strongyloxeas; microscleres resemble those of ented at Lakshadweep by the genus Placos- the genus Tethya. T. repens (Schmidt) is known pongia Gray. Spicules, in this case, are tylo­ only from Minicoy. styles for megascleres and sterrospires, spira- sters, spherasters and spherules for microscleres. The total number of species included under The sterrospires are densely packed in the this order from Lakshadweep is 7 and these are cortical region to form a thick crust which referable to 4 genera and two families. is subdivided into polygonal areas by pore- 7. Order Choristida Sollas bearing grooves. The only species represented at Lakshadweep is Placospongia carinata (Bo­ Radial architecture is well pronounced in werbank), which is known only from Minicoy. this order; a well defined cortex may or may not be present. Long shafted triaenes (tetractines) The total number of species falling under form the most dominant type of spicules follow­ the present order is 21 and these may be ed by oxeas. Microscleres represented are of classified under 11 genera and 4 families. different types; euasters, streptasters, sigmaspires, microxeas and so on.

6. Order Epipolasida Sollas Four families, Ancorinidae Gray, Geodiidae Gray, Craniellidae de Laubenfels and Kaliapsidae Architecture radiate and with well deve­ de Laubenfels, of this order are represented at loped cortex. Microscleres, if present, astrose Lakshadweep. The first family (Ancorinidae) type and Megascleres may be monactinal or may be divided into two subfamilies diactinal. Spongin, as a rule, absent. Two based on the nature of the microscleres. families, Jaspidae de Laubenfels and Tethyidae The first subfamily (Ancorininae) includes Gray are known to occur at Lakshadweep. species having streptasters, with or Genera falling under the former family are without euasters; while the second subfamily

156 CMFRI (Stellettinae) includes only those with euasters. 8 Order Carnosida Carter Genus Ecionemia Bowerbank, with its two species, E. acervus Bowerbank and E. thielei Corticate and radiate architecture is not Thomas, fall under the first subfamily and genera well marked, unlike in the previous order. such as Aurora Sollas and Stelletta Schmidt, Long-shafted triaenes are rarely met with in under the latter. Genus Aurora is represented this order, instead the tetraxon spicules repr­ by ^. globostellata (Carter) and A. rowi Dendy. esented here are with short, often stumpy, Spicules are represented by oxeas and triaenes rays These spicules are called 'calthrops'. for megascleres and spherasters, oxyasters, and Two families of this order, viz., Halinidae raphides for microscleres. Both these are wide­ de Laubenfels and Chondrillidae Gray only spread Indian Ocean species and are collected are known from the present survey. The fam­ from Suheli and Amini respectively. Genus ily Halinidae exemplifies to the fullest extent Stelletta has microscleres of two types; and is the characters of its order and has only cal­ represented by a single species S. tethyopsis throps and diactinal spicules for megacleres. Carter. This species has dichtriaenes and is The microscleres in this case are of astrose here reported outside its type locality, the Gulf type. Based on the structure of microscleres of Mannar. Family Geodiidae is unique in the this family may be divided into subfamilies; possession of a tough crust of sterrasters in the Halininae de Laubenfels having streptasters cortical region. The only representative of the and Corticiinae Vosmaer. with euasters. Under family in Lakshadweep is Geodia lindgreni the former subfamily two genera, Halina Bo­ (Lendenfeld). Family Craniellidae has, along werbank, the type of the family and Dercito- with the typical spicuiation of the order, peculiar ps/s Dendy are recorded. Halina Bowerbank and minutely roughened sigmaspires as micro­ has peculiar calthrops provided with dicho- scleres. Two genera of this family are known modifications and the streptasters represented to occur in this archipelago; they are Cinachyra are straight. Halina plicate (Schmidt) is a SoWas and Paratetilla Dendy, and are collected boring species and is fairly well distributed from Kavaratti and Minicoy respectively. The in almost all the islands surveyed. The other former genus has' the typical spicuiation of the genus, Dercltopsis, has calthrops, triods family while the latter is characterised by the and oxeas, the last one often centrotylote in presence of short-shafted orthotriaenes at the nature. The only species collected is D. Minor Dendy, from Suheli. The only genus falling junction of the ectosome and endosome. to the subfamily Corticiinae from Lakshadweep Paratetilla bacca (Selenka) is a well distributed is Samus Gray. It has lumpy amphitriaenes Indo-Pacific species. Finally, the family and lumpy sigmoid spicules. The species rep­ Kaliapsidae, a family created by de Laubenfels resented is Sa/nt/5 8/70/7//na Gray which is circ- (1936) for a group of genera that possess um equatorial in distribution. It is a coral boring lithistid spicules, is represented at Lakshadweep species and has been collected from 6 of the by two genera Theonella Gray and Lophacanthus islands surve/ed. The spicules of this species Hentschel. Spicuiation in the former genus are often found intermingled with those of the consists of ectosomal triaenes over endosomal genus Cliona, and no specimen could be desmas. Microscleres are represented by located in situ to record its general morph­ microstrongyles that are minutely roughened. ology. Burton (1928) described Theonella cupola from Laccadives, but this species has not been family Chondrillidae has only asters as obtained during the present survey. Genus spicules. There may be one or two categories Lophacanthus has lophotriaenes, desmas and of these spicules and no megasclere is rep­ rhabdostyles; but is devoid of any microscleres. resented. The typical genus, Chondnlla Sch­ L. rhabdophorus Hentschel is a widely distri­ midt, is represented at Lakshadweep by a single buted Indo-Australian species and has been species C. sacciformis Carter. This species reported from Minicoy. could be obtained only from Suheli The total number of species falling under this order from Lakshadweep is 4. These species The total number of species falling under may be classified under 2 families and 4 this order from Lakshadweep is 10 and these genera. The maximum number of species (4) are referable to 8 genera and 4 families. has been collected from Suheli.

IUUET/N43 157 ISLAND-WISE DISTRIBUTION OF SPECIES

The various species collected from the different islands of Lakshadweep are systematically enlisted in Table 2. The maximum number of species (58) was obtained from Minicoy.

Table 2. Island-wise distribution of sponge species

Sr. Distribution No: Species/Classification •= S- »-

. s a I -i •ai .c- *^™ '5— . tS™ % I Sr ^ c ~

Class Demospongiae Sol las Order Keratosida Grant Family Spongiidae Gray 1. Spongia officinalis Lin, ssp. cey/onens/s Dendy XXXXX — XX XX 2. Hippiospongia sp. — — — — ___-X — — 3. Heteronema erecta Keller — — X — — — — — — — 4. Hyattella cribriformis (Hyatt) X— — — X— X — X — 5. Phyllospongia foliascens (Pallas) — X — _X— — X — — 6. P. dendyi Lendenfeld ____X — — — — _ 7. Thorectopsamma sp. — — X — — — — — — — 8. Fasciospongia cavernosa (Schmidt) __X X— X X — — ~ Family Dysideidae Gray 9. Dysidea fragilis (Montagu) __X — X — — X— — 10. D. herbacea (Keller) __X — X — — X— — 11. Dendrilla cactus (Selenka) X XX— — — — — — _ Family Aplysillidae Vosmaer 12. Psammaplysilla purpurea (Carter) XXX XX X X ___ Order Haplosclerida Topsent Family Haliclonidae de Laubenfels 13. Haliclona oculata (Lin.) — — X — — — — __ — 14. H. tenuiramosa Burton — — X— — — — — — _ 15. H. exigua (Kirkpatrick) X— — — — — — — — — Family Desmacidonidae Gray 16. lotrochota baculifera Ridley X — X— — — — —— — 17. Gelliodes fibulatus Ridley X _— _— — _ __ _ 18. Cornulum vesiculatum (Dendy) — — X — — — — ____ Family Adociidae de Laubenfels 19. SIgmadocia fibulata (Schmidt) XXX— X — — — X — 20. S. pumila (Lendenfeld) ____ X — — — _ — 21. Orina sagittaria (Sollas) X — — — — — — — — — 22. Damirina laccadivensis n. sp. __X — X— — — — — Family Callyspongiidae de Laubenfels 23. Callyspongia diffusa (Ridley) — — __X— — — — — 24. C. fibrosa (Ridley and Dendy) ___X X— X ___ Order Poecilosclerida Topsent Family Phorabasidae de Laubenfels 25. Echinodictyum longlstylum Thomas ____ X— — — __

158 CMFRI 0) ( (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)(11)(12)

26. Damiriana schmidti (Ridley) XXX— X— — — — — Family Agelasidae Verrill 27. Age/as mauritiana (Carter) ____ x — — — — — 28. A. ceylonica Dendy ____X — — ___ 29. Agefas sp. ____X — — — — — Family Plocamiidae Topsent 30. Plocamilla mannarensis (Carter) ____x?— — — — — Family Myxillidae Hentschel 31. Myxilla arenaria Dendy _ — X — — — — — — — 32. Myxilla sp. ____X— — — — — Family Tedaniidae Ridley and Dendy 33. (Tedania anhelsns Lieberakuhn) XXXXXXX — — — 34. Acanthacamus sourlei Levi X — X — — — — __—. Family Raspailiidae Hentschel 35. Rhabderemia- prolifera Annandale XX XX X"""""""" 36. Microciona aceratoobtusa Carter X X— — __ — — — — 37. M. rhopalophora (Hentschel) _X— — — — — — — — Family Ophiitaspongiidae de Laubenfels 38. OpIUitaspongIa rimosa (Ridley) ____-_ — — — — X 39. Clathria reinwardti Vosmaer ____X — — — ~~ 40. Mycale grandis Gray ____ X — — — — — 41. Zygomycale parlshii (Bowerbank) ___— X — — — — — Family Amphilectidae de Laubenfels 42. Blemna fortis (Topsent) ____ x — — — — — Order Halichondrida Vosmaer Family Halichondridae Gray 43. Halicondria Panicea Johnstom __X— — — _ — — — 44. Ciocalypata Polymastia (Lendenfeld) ____X — — — — ~ Famil/ Axinellidae Ridley & Dendy 45. Bubaris sp. __— — X — — — — 46. Myrmekioderma granulate (Esper) ____X — — — — — 47. Phycopsis sp. 1 _____ — — — — X 48. Phycopsis sp. 2 — — — — X — — — Family Hpmeniacidonidae de Laubenfels 49. Acanthella cavernosa Dendy ___ — X — — — — [ Order Hadromerida Topsent Family Spirastrellidae Hentschel 50. Spirastrella coccinea (D&M) X— — XX — — — — 51. S. cuspidifera (Lamarck) — X — _X — — — 52. S. inconstans (Dendy) XXXXXXX X— X 53. S. aurivilli Lindgreu — XXX — — X — 54. Timea stellivarians (Carter) ___— X— — — — — 55. T. stellats (Bowerbank) ______X — — — Family Suberitidae Schmidt 56. Suberites csrnoses (Johnston) — — __X — — — — 57. Laxosuberites crucistus (Dendy) — X — — X — — ___ 58. Pseudosuberites sp. — — X — X — — — — —

BULLETIN43 169 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) 59. Aaptos aaptos (Schmidt) ____x _____ Family Piacospongiidae Gray 60. P acospongia carinata (Bowerbanit) ____x _ — __ — Family Clionidae Gray 61. Amorpiiinopsis excavans Carter X X XX X x— — — — 62. Ai(a minuta Thomas X X XX X — — -- — — 63. A. laccadivensis n. sp„ ____ X — — — — — 64. C liana celata Grant XXX XX — X — — X 65. C. vastifica Hancock XX X— — — — — — — 66. C. viridis (Schmidt) X— X — — — — — — — 67. C. carpenter! Hancock XXXXXX — - — — 68. C. ensifera Sol las X X X X X X — — — — 69. C. murconata Sol las — X — X X — — — — — 70. Thoosa armata Topsent Order Epipolasida Sollas Family Jaspidae de Laubenfels 71. Prostylyssa foetida (Dendy) __„_X — — — — — 72. Jaspis penetrans (Carter) — XX — — — — —— — 73. Zapleihea digonoxea ssp. diastra (V&V) _X — — — — — — — — Family Tethyidae Gray 74. Tetliya robusta Bawerbank — X— — XX — --— — 75. T. japonica Sollas — — __XX — — — — 76. T. diploderma Schmidt — X — — — — — — — — 77. Tettiytimea repens (Schmidt) _ ___X — — — — — Order Carnosida Sollas Family Ancorinidae Gray 78. Ec/onema acervus — ______— — 79. £. r/7/e/e/'Thomas — __._XX— — — — 80. Aurora rowi Dendy _ — — _ — _x— — — 81. A. g/obostellata (Caner) — x— — — —— — — — 82. Stelletta tethyopsis Carter X — ______— Family Geodiidae Gray 83. Geodia iindgreni (Lendenfeld) — ___x— — — — — Family Craniellidae de Laubenfels 84. Cynachyra cavernosa (Lamarck) X _____— — —_ 85. Paratetilla bacca (Selenka) — ___x— — — — — Family Kaliapsidae de Laubenfels 86. Theonella cupola — - __X? — — — — — 87. Lophacanthus rhabdophorus Hentschel — _— _x— — — — — Order Carnosida Carter Family Halinidae de Laubenfels 88. Halina plicate (Schmidt) X XX — XXX — — — 89. Dercitopsis minor Dendy — x— — — —— — — — 90. Samus anonyma Gray X X X XX x— — — — Family Chondrillidae Gray 91. Choudriila sacciformis Carter — X— — — — — — — — Total ii 31 35 18 58 13 12 6 3 s" X = Present; — = Absent; ? == Doubtful

160 CMFRl ZOOGEOGRAPHY OF THE SPONGE FAUNA RERGQUIRT, PR. AND W. D. HARTMAN. 1969. OF LAKSHADWEEP Free amino acid patterns and the clasi- fication of Demospongiae. Mar Biol., 3: Four the purpose of assessing the inter­ 247-268 relationship of the sponge fauna of Laksha- BURTON, M. 1918 Report on some deep sea dweep, the distribution of the various species sponges irom the Indian Museum represented was tabulated under 7 widely collected by R. I. M. S. 'Investigator', separated zoogeographical regions such as the Part 2. Tetraxouida (concluded) and Atlantic Ocean, Mediterranean Sea, Red Sea, Euceratosa. Rec Indian Mus., 30 : 109- Australian regions (same as the Indo-Australian 138 region given in 'Challenger' Report), Pacific BURTON, M. 1930. Norwegian sponges from Ocean, Arctic and Antarctic. The present the Norman Collection. Proc. Zool. Soc. analysis indicates that the sponge fauna of Lond., 487-546 Lakshadweep is very closely related to that of Australian region and 51 species (or 62.6%) are BURTON, M. AND H. S. RAO. 1932. Report on common to both these areas. Next to this the the shallow water marine sponges in the Lakshadweep fauna has more similarity with collection of the Indian Museum. Rec. that of the Pacific Ocean and this is evident Inaian Mus 34 : Pt. 3: 299-356 from the number (40 or 43.9%) of common DE LAUBENFELS, M. W. 1936. A discussion of species. The next zoogeographical area with the sponge fauna of Dry Tortugas in which the present fauna has more in common particular and the West Indies in is the Red Sea where 33 species (or 36.3%) general, with material for a revision of are found to occur. The Atlantic sponge fauna the families and orders of the Porifera. has 25 species (27.5%), Mediteranean fauna Pap. Tortugas. Lab. 30 : 1-225 has 16 species (17.6%), Arctic has 4 species DENDY, A. 1905. Report on the sponge collect­ (4 4%) and Antarctic has 3 species (3.3%) in ed by Prof. Herdman, at Ceylon, in common with the Lakshadweep sponge fauna. 1902. Rep. Govt. Ceylon Pearl Oyster Fish. Gulf Mannar. Suppl. 18:47-246 Burton (1930) advocating the theory of GARDINER, J. S. 1903-1903. The fauna and water currents in relation to sponge abundance geography of the Maldive and Laccadive and distribution in the oceans opined that Archipelagoes, being the account of the Indian Ocean forms a closed system since it is work carried on and collections made, bounded at its north and west by continents an expedition during the years 1809 and south by an impassable boundary of cold and 1900. Cambridge University Press. waters of the west wind drift. The water 2 Vols. 1-1979 currents prevailing in this closed system flow mainly from east to west and this may be the THOMAS, P. A. 1968. Studies on sponges prime reason for the spreading of Australian and Ph. D. Thesis, University of Kerala Pacific fauna into the Indian Ocean. Whenever THOMAS, P. A. 1973. Two new records of any species is introduced into this system its Demospongiae from the Indian Ocean. further migration is governed by equatorial and J. mar. biol. Ass India, 15 (1) : 443- monsoon currents which prevail to a greater 445 extent along the continental shelf in different THOMAS, P. A. 1979. Demospongiae of Mini- areas. coy Island (Indian Ocean) Pt. 1- Orders ACKNOWLEDGEMENT Keratosida agd Haplosclerida. Ibid., 21 (1 % 2): 10-16 The auther is thankful to Shri. C. Mukundan, THOMAS, P. A. 1980. Demospongiae of Mini- Scientist, for critically going through the coy Island (Indian Ocean) Pt. 2- Order manuscript suggesting improvements. Poecilosclerida. Ibid., 22 (1 % 2): 1-7 REFERENCES THOMAS, P. A. 1980a. Demospongiae of Mini- coy Island (Indian Ocean) Pt. 3-Orders ANNANDALE, N. 1915. Indian boring sponges Halichondrida, Hadromerida, Epipola- of the family Rec. Indian Mus, ii : sida and Choristida. Ibid., 22 (1 % 2): 457-478 8-20 eULLETIN43 161 14. SEAWEED AND SEAGRASS RESOURCES

N. Kaliaperumal, P. Kaladharan and S. Kalimuthu

INTRODUCTION 1962; Desai, 1967; Umamaaeswara Rao, 1973 and Anon, 1978) Kerala coast (Koshyanb All macroscopic algae occurring in the John, 1948); Goa (Untawale and Dhargalar' marine habitat and coastal bracl

The quantification of biomass was done using the following formula:

Total wt of seaweed harvested from the sampled area Estimable biomass Total area of zone from a zone Area studied in the zone

162 CMFRI Area of the zone was calculated by me­ have been shown in Figs 1 to 3. asuring the length and width of the extent of the vegetation cover and compared with Seag rasses the admirality chart From each island, zone A total number of 6 species of seagras- wise sampling was subjected to statistical ses Cymodocea rotundata, C. serru/ata, Hal- analysis in order to give species wise resour­ odula uninervis, Halophila ovata, Syringdium ces estimates. Gelidiella acerosa and Grac/, and Tha/assia hemprichii occurred in the islands /aria edulls are grouped under agarophytes- surveyed (see Table 2 given at the end). species of Sargassum and Turbinaria under Seagrasses were found in 10 islands and not alginophytes, and all other algae under observed in Kiltan and Bitra. 'other seaweeds'. ISLAND-WISE DISTRIBUTION AND RESULTS ABUNDANCE

Seaweeds Chetlat: 34 species of seaweeds are from Altogether 62 genera and 114 species the potential area of 156 ha. The estimable of seaweeds were recorded from all the 12 biomass or seaweeds is 805.680 tonne (wet Islands of which 18 genera and 43 species belong weight) consisting of 18.440 tonnes of agar­ to Chlorophyceae, 11 genera and 14 species ophytes, 183.860 tonnes of alginophytes and to Phaeopayceae, 30 genera and 54 species 603.380 tonnes of other seaweeds. to Rhodophycea and 3 genera and 3 species Kiltan: From the potential area of 153 ha, a to Cyanophyceae. The number of genera and total of 33 species of seaweeds are recorded. The species recorded in each island is given in estimable biomass of seaweeds is 665.760 Table 1. The list of seaweeds and seagras- tonnes (wet weight) consisting of 25.900 ses occurring in each island is given in tonnes of agarophytes, 78.200 tonnes of Table 1 Number of genera and species of marine algae collected from Lakshadweep

Name of the Chlorophyceae Phaeophyceae Rhodophyceae Cyanophyceae Tatal island Genera Species Genera Species Genera Species Genera Spec ies Genera Species

Chetlat 11 12 5 6 13 17 ^_ ..^ 29 34 Kiltan 11 14 2 2 13 17 — — 26 33 Kadamat 10 11 5 5 11 14 — — 26 30 Amini 10 11 3 3 12 13 — — 25 27 Bitra 4 4 3 3 9 10 1 1 17 18 Bingaram 6 6 6 6 17 20 — — 29 3/ Agatti 9 12 5 6 13 18 1 1 28 37 Androth 9 12 6 7 13 17 2 2 30 38 Kavaratti 13 17 4 4 18 23 3 3 38 47 Kalpeni 14 25 8 10 23 28 1 1 46 64 Suheli 6 7 7 8 13 16 2 2 28 33 Minicoy 12 21 6 6 18 23 2 2 38 52

Table 2 The estimated total standing crop of alginophytes and 561.600 tonnes of other the marine aigae for all the 12 islands was seaweeds. 19,345. tonnes (wet weight). The group wise biomass for each islands is given in Kadamat: From the potential area of 179 table 3. The commercially important seaweeds ha, 30 species of seaweeds are recorded. Gelidiella acerosa, Gracilaria edulis, Sargassum The estimable biomass of seaweeds is 984.. duplicatum and Turbinaria ornate and some 380 tonnes (wet weight), of which 143.200 of the other common algal species collected tonnes are aragrophytes, 146.100 tonnes are

BUU.ETIN43 163 D

Fig. 1. A. (jelldiella ac^rosd; 6. ^racilarla edulls C. Sargassum duplicatum; 0. Turbinaria ornata

164 CMFRI Fi§. 1. A, Geildiella ac< fidulls C. Sargassum d I ornata

164 CMFRI Pig. 1. A.

IULiellN41 • i;.5 Flf. 3, A, Chondrociicci tesa; c. Qracilaiia an e

166 CMFil Table 3 Estimated standing crop of agarophytes, alginophytes and other seaweeds in the islands of Lakshadweep

Name of the Agarophytes Alginophytes Other Total island G. acerosa G. edulis Sargassum ssp Turbinaria ssp seaweeds

Chetlat 18.440 18.160 165.700 603.380 805.680 Kiltan 25900 — 11.200 67.000 561.660 665.760 Kadamat 143.200 18.400 127.700 695.070 984.370 Amini 72400 84.200 357.150 513.750 Bitra — — — 642.600 342.900 985.500 Bingatum 2.640 — — 235.200 256.800 494.640 Agatti 6.325 416.250 — 768 075 2647.150 3836.800 Androth 0.800 — 0.100 2.200 273.600 276.700 Kavaratti 46.354 3'3.295 — 355.950 2167.208 2882.t07 Kalpeni 30.725 70.175 0.350 18.200 1441.300 1560.300 Suheli 9.000 — 49.500 783.000 3796.260 4637./6J Minicoy 16.400 — — 50.000 1635.000 1701.400 Total 371.734 798.720 97.710 3299.825 14777.478 19345.467 afginophytes and 695.070 tonnes are other aria ornata is 2.640 and 235.200 tonnes species. (wet weight) respectively. A total number of 32 species with a total standing crop of Amini: from the potential area of 148 ha 494 640 tonnes were recorded. 27 species of seaweeds are recorded, The estimable biomass (wet) of seaweeds is 513. Agatti; It consists of two islands, Agatti and 750 tonnes consisting of 72.400 tonnes of Kalpitti. The lagoon exists in the western side. agarophytes, 84.200 tonnes of alginophytes In the eastern side of the island the entire and 355.150 tonnes of other algae. shore area is with rocks, dead corals and live corals. Totally 37 species with a standing Bitra: It has a very extensive lagoon with crop of 3836.800 tonnes were recorded. very deep middle area, the shore area is Among the three islands with Grac­ sandy and devoid of vegetation. Algal vegetation ilaria edulis vegetation, maximum biomass of occurs in the areas extending from the reef G. edulis (415.250 tonnes-wet weight) was to the middle lagoon attached to the dead observed in Agatti. G. edulis was found grow­ corals. Among the islands surveyed, minimum ing attached to seagrasses in the nearshore number of algal species (18 species) were area of the lagoon. Gelidiella acerosa and recorded with a total standing crop of 985.5 Turbinaria ornata occurred on the reefs in tonnes (wet weightj. Turbinaria ornata is the the eastern and western side of the island only economically important alga growing in with a standing crop of 6.325 and 768.075 this island with a harvestable standing crop onnes respectively. Sargassum sp was not of 642.600 tonnes (wet weight). recorded in this island. Bangaram: The lagoon encircles four islands namely Bangaram, Tinnakara, Cheriya Parali and Androth: There is no lagoon in this island. Valia Parali islands. The shore area is sandy Totally 38 species of algae were recorded. and the vegetation is less with the growth Gelidiella acerosa and Turbinaria ssp. were of Cladophora fascicu/rais and C/ieatomorpha distributed sparsely on the reef at northern area attached to pebbles. Gracilaria edulis and and southern side of the island in very small Sargassum spp were not recorded. The stan­ quantity. Very young plants of Sargassum sp ding crop of Gelidiella acerosa and Turbin­ were seen on the reef in the southern side

BUUETIN43 167 while Gracilaria edulis was not observed in cast ashore. Plants of Gelidiella acerosa and this island. Among all islands surveyed Sargassum duplicatum were found on the reef. the tatal standing crop of seaweeds was Gracilaria edulis was not abserved at Suheli. found to be very less in this island and it was only 276.700, tonnes (wet weight). Minicoy : It consists of 2 islands Minicoy and Viringil with a vast lagoon. A total number of Kavaratti: Altogether 47 algal species with total 52 algal species with a standing crop of biomass of 2882.807 tonnes (wet weight) were 1701.400 tonnes (wet weight) was recorded in recorded in this island. More number of algal this island. Gelidiella acerosa and Turbinaria species were found growing in the lagoon side ornata occurred in the lagoon and the reef area of the island. The vegetation was poor on the around the islands. Only few plants of opposite side of the lagoon with only 10 species. Sargassum sp were seen on the reef in the other Gelidiella acerosa and Turbinaria ornata occurred side of the island and Gracilaria edulis was not almost continuously in 50 m wide zone along observed in Minicoy. the reef in the lagoon side. Gracilaria edulis REMARKS was distributed discontinuousiy in the nearshore area of lagoon at the depth ranging from 0.5 to The present survey indicates that seaweed 3.0 m. and seagrasses resources of Lakshadweep is quite considerable in quantity. Harvestable Kalpeni : It consists of 8 islands namely quantities of agar yielding seaweeds Gelidiella Cheriyam, Kodithala, Kalpeni, Tilakkam I, II and acerosa and Gracilaria edulis are available at III and Pitti I and II. Maximum number of algae Kadmat, Amini, Agatti and Kalpeni and algin (64 species) with a total standing crop of yielding seaweed Turbinaria spp in all islands. 1560.300 tonnes (wet weight) were found At present no commercial harvest of seaweeds growing in this island. Harvestable quantity of is in practise in Lakshadweep. Hence the sea­ Gelidiella acerosa (30.275 tonnes - wet weight) weed industry in the mainland can exploit these occurred continuously in the 10 m wide zone of seaweeds from the above mentioned islands for the intertidal rocky region from the light house manufacture of agar-agar and algin. Based on in the northern side to the southern end of the the available agarophytes and alginophytes island. Gracilaria edulis was found in 0 5m resources agar and algin industry could also depth near the jetty and in 1.0 m depth in the be established in Lakshadweep. nearshore area of the lagoon at the southern end ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS of Cheriyam island. Species of Turbinaria was sparsely distributed on the reefs at both sides of The authors wish to express their sincere the island and it was not available in harvestable thanks to Shri Ramadoss, Shri A. Chellam and quantity (18 200 tonnes-wet weight). Sargassum Dr. A. C. C. Victor for helping in the collection spp with standing crop of only 0.350 tonnes of seaweeds from deeper waters by skin diving. (wet weight) were seen in the intertidal rocky The authors are very grateful to Prof. V. Krishna- area at the eastern side of the island. murthy, Centre of Advanced Study in Botany, University of Madras for his help identifying Suheli: It consists of 2 islands namely Valiakara many species of algae. and Cheriakara with a wide lagoon. Totally 33 species of marine algae occurred in the sub­ REFERENCES merged reef, lagoon and in the intertidal area Anon. 1978. A report on survey of marine algal around Cheriakara island. Among all the islands resources of Tamil Nadu 1971-1976. surveyed, maximum standing crop of seaweeds CSMCRI, Bhavnagar. (4637.760 tonnes wet weight) occurred in Suheli. Abundant growth of Turbinaria spp Anon, 1979. A report on the survey of marine (3796.260 tonnes wet weight) were seen in algal resources of Lakshadweep 1977- about 20 m wide zone along the entire reef area 1979. CSMCRI, Bhavnagar. with continuous distribution. Detached plants Anon, 1984. A report on the survey of marine of Turbinaria were seen floating on the sea resources of Andhra Pradesh 1979- around these two islands and large quantity was 1982. CSMCRI, Bhaanagar.

168 CMFRI Bhanderi, P. P. 1974. An estimate of the iodine Gopinathan, C. P. and R. Panigrahy. 1983. yielding seaweed Aspagopsis taxiformis Seaweed Resources. Bu/I cent. mar. (Deiine) Collins and Harvey from some Fish. Res. Inst.. 34 : 47-51. subtidal reefs of Sourashtra coast. J. mar. biol. Assn. India /6 (1) : 288-289. Koshy, T. K. and John, C. C. 1948. Survey of Gracilaria resources of Travancore Bhanderi, P. P. and Y. B. Raval. 1975. coast. Dept. Res. Univ. Travancore Possibility of seaweed cultivation along Rep. for Septeri., pp. 53-55. the Gujarat coast. Seafood Export Jour., 7 (12) : 33-36. Mitra, G. 1946. Developwent of Dhilka Lake, Cuttack. Bhanderi, P. P. and Y. A. Trivedi. 1975, Sea­ weed resources of Hanumand and Sreenivasa Rao, P., E. R. R. Iyengar and F. reef and Vumani reef near Okha Port Thivy. 1964. Survey of algin bearing Indian J. mar. Sci., 4 (1): 97-99. seaweeds at Adatra reef, Okha. Curr Sci.. 53 : 464-465. Chacko, P. I. and C. Malu Pillai. 1958. stu­ dies on utilisation of seaweed reso­ Thivy, F. i960. Seaweed utiisation in India. urce of Madras state. Contr. Mar. Proc. Symp. Algology, ICAR, New Biol. St. Krusadai Island. 6: 1-12. Delhi, pp. 345-365.

Chauhan, G. D. 1978. Report on the survey Umamaheswara Rao, M. 1973. The seaweed of marine algae resources of Mahara­ potentia of theseas around India. shtra coast. Salt Res Ind., 14 (1) Proc. Symp. on Living Resources of 1-10. the Seas Around ndia. pp. 687-692. Chauhan, V. D. and V. Krisnamurthy. 1968. Untawale, A. G. and V. K. Dhargalkar. 1975 An estimate of algin bearing sea­ Report on the seaweed resources of weeds in the Gulf of Kutch.. Curr. the Goa coast. NIO, Dona Paula, Sci.. 37 : 648. Goa pp. 1-10. Chauhan, V. D. and 0. P. Mairh. 1978. Rep­ Untawale, A. G., V. K. Dhargalkar, V. V. Agadi ort oh the survey of marine algae and T. G. Jagtap. 1979. Marine algal resousces of Sourashtra coast, India. resources of the Maharashtra coast. Salt. Res. Ind., 4 (2) : 21 -41. Tech. Report., Natil. Inst, of Ocean­ ography, Goa. pp. 1-48. Desai, B. N. 1967 Seaseed resources and extraction of alginate and agar. Proc. Varma, R. P. and K. Krishna Rao. 1962. Semi. Sea Salt and Plants. CSMCRI, 4lgal resources of Pamban area. Bhavnagar, pp. 343-351. Indian J. Fish.. 9:205.211. Table 2. List of seaweeds and seagrasses collected from Lakshadweep

ChM- Kil- Kad- Amini Bitra Binga- Agatti And- Kava- Kalpeni suhtii Mini- S. No. Species lat tan mat ram roth ratti coy (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)

Class: Chlorophyceae Order: Ulvales Family; Ulvaceae 1. Enteromorpha clathrata (Roth) J. Ag. 2. £. compressa (Linn.) Grev. + + 3. E. Int9stinalis (Linn.) Link 4. f. tubulosa Kuetz.

BULLETIN 43 169 S. No. Species (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)

5. UNa lactuca Linn. + + + + + + + 6. U. reticulata Forssl

+ Present

170 CMFRI S. No. Species (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)

28. Codium sp _ _ 29 Halimeda gracilis Harv. exJ. Ag. — — — — — — ___ — _ _ 30. H. incrassata — 31. H. macroloba Deca'\sne — — 32. H. opuntia f typica (Lamour.) Barton — — 33. Penlcillus sibogae Gepp. — — Family: Valoniaceae 34. Anadyomene stellata (Wulf. C. Ag. — — — _____ 35. Boergesenia forbesii (Harv). Feldmann ______ZQ. Cladophoropsis zollingeri (Keutz.) Boergs. ______37. Dictyosphaeria cavernosa (Forssk.) Boergs. — _ _ _ _ _ 38. D. favuiosa (Ag.) Decaisne — — — — — 39. Microdictyon tenuis (Ag.) Decaisne — 40. Valonia aegagrophila C. Ag. _ _ _ 41. V. macrophysa — — 42. Valonia sp _ 43. Valoniospsis pachynema (iVIertens) Boergs. — — — Class: Phaeophyceae Order: Ectocarpales Family: Ectocarpaceae 44. Ectocerpus sp __ _ _ _ Order: Sphacelariales Family: Sphacelariaceae 45. Sphacelaria fur cigar a Kuetz. — — Order: Dictyotales Family: Dictyotaceae 46. Dictyopterls deiicatula Lamour. — 47. Dictyota barayresiana Lamour. — ______48. D. dichotoma ^Huds.) Lamour. 49. Padina boergesenii Allender at Kraft — Present

BULLETIN 43 171 S.No. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)

50. Lobophora minima (Umamaheswara Rao) Krishnamurthy and Baluswami — — — — — Order: Dictyosiphonales Family: Punctariaceae 51. Hydroclatiirus clathratus C. Ag. — - 52. Rosenvingaa intricata (J. Ag.) Boergs — Family: Chnoosporaceae 53. Chnoospora implexa — — _ _ __ Order: Fucales Family: Sargassaceae 54. Sargassum duplicatum JAg. ______55. Sargassum sp _ _ _ 56. Turbinaria conoidas (J. Ag.) Kuetz. — _ _ 57. T. ornata J. Ag. ___ — ______Class: Rhodophyceae Order: Nemalionales Family: Chandransiaceae 58. Acrochaatium sp — Family: Chaetagiaceae 59. Actinotrichia fragllis (Forssk.) Boergs. _ _ _ _ 60. Galaxaura marglnata Lamour. — 61. G. rugosa Lamour. — Family: Bonnemaisoni- aceae 62. Asparagopsis taxiformis (Delilo) Collins et Harvey _ _ _ _ _ Order: Gelidiales Family: Gelidiaceae 63. Gelidium pusillum (Stackhouse) Le Jolis _ _ _ — 64. Pterociadia heteroplaots (Boergs.) Umamaheswara Rao and Kaliaperumal _ _ — _- _ Family: Gelidiellaceae 65. Gelidiellacaae acerosa (Forsk.) Feldmann et Hamel ______— __ __

— Present

172 CMFRI S.No. (1) (2) (3) (4) (6) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)

66. G. indica P. S. Rao — — Order: Cryptomemiales Family: Rhizophyllidaceae 67. Chonerococcus horne- manii ^Mert.) Schmitz — — — ______Family: Corallinaceae 68. Amphiro anceps (Lamk.) Decsne. — — 69. A. fragilissima (L.) Lamour. 70. Amphiroa sp 71. Cheilosporum spectabile Harvay 72. Jan/a capillaceae Harvey 73. J. iyengarii 74. Lithott)amnion sp Family: Grateloupiaceae 75. Halymenia floras/a (Clem ) Ag. 76. H. gelinickii Gruenow Order: Gigartinales Family: Gracilariaceae 77. Gelidiopsis intricata (Ag. Vickers 78. G. variabilis (Grev.) Schmitz 79. Gracilaria arcuata Zanard. 80. 6. edulis (Gmel.) Silva 81. Gracilaria sp Family: Solieriaceae 82. Sarconema filiforme (Sond.) Kylin 83. S. furcellatum Zanard. Family: Hynpeaceae 84. Hypnea musciformis (Wulf.) Lamour. 85. H. pannosa J. Ag. 86. H. spinella J. Ag. 87. H. valentiaa (Turn.) Mont. Family: Gigartinaceae 88. Gigartina acicularis (Wulf.) Lamour.

— Present etJLLETlN43 173 S. No. Species (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)

Order: Rhodymeniales Family: Lomentariaceaa 89. Chlmpia parvula (Ag.) Harvey — _ _ _ — Order: Ceramiales — — — — — — — — — Family: Ceramiaceae 90. Centroceras clavulatum (Ag.) Mont. 91. Ceramium diaphanum — 92. C, fimbriatum Setchell and Gardner — _ _ _ 93. Caramium sp — — — — 94 Spyridia alternans Boergs. — 95. S. filamentosa (Wulf.) Harvey — — — — _ __ Family : Dasyaceae 96. Dictyurus purpuresens — — Family : Rhodomelaceae 97. Acanthophora • dandroides Harvey — 98. Spicifera (Vahl) Boergs. ______99. Chondira dasyphylla _ _ _ _ 100. C.//•fl/7Si'e/'5a//5 Boergs. — 101. Herposiphonia secunda (C. Ag.) Ambronn — 102. Lauranica cey/anica J. Ag. — — 103. L. nana Howe — 104. L. obtuse {Huds.) Lamour. — — — — 105. L. papillose (Forssk.) Greville ______106. L. parvula Boergs. 107. t. po/rt/(Lamour.) Howe 108. Laurenica sp 109. Leveillea jungermennioidea (Martet Hering) Harvey 110. Lophocladia lallemaudi (Mont.) Schimtz 111. Tolypocladie glomaruleta (Sonder) Silva

— Present

174 CMFRI S. No. (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (i2)

Class: Cyanophyceae Order: Nostacales Family: Oscillatoriaceae 112. Lyngbya confarvoiees C. Ag. Gomont — ______113. Oscil/atoria sp — — 114. Phorm/dium sp — — — —

SEAGR ASSES Family: Potomogetanaceae 1. Cymodocea rotundata Ehrenb. & Hemp, ex Aschers _ — — — . 2. C. serrulata (R. Br.) Aschers & Magnus — _ _ _ — _ __ 3. Holodule unirervisiJFotssk.) Aschers 4. Syringodium isoetifolium (Aschers) Dandy — — Family : Hydrocharitaceae 5. Halophi/a ovata Gaudin Freycin — — 6. Thalassia hemprichii (Ehrenb.) Aschers — — _ _

— Present

fiULLETIN43 175 15. TURTLE RESOURCES

R.S. Lai Mohan

The common species of marine turtles of about 0.5km2 (48.56 Hectares). Seashore namely Chelonia my das, Lepidochelus olivacea, on the western side of the island is formed Eretmochelys imbricata and the Dermoclialys by the coral stones while about 100 meters coriacea are known to occur in the Laksha- on the north eastern side is sandy where the dweep Islands. (Bhasker, 1978a, b, c, d; 1979 nests are made. The turtles make their nests Silas, 1984). Earlier reports deal with its about 20 meters away from the high tide occurrence, nesting habits, and trade (Ellis, mark below the thick growth of Rhododen­ 1924; Rammunni, 1965 and iVlannadiar, 1976); dron bushes locally known as 'Kanni,. Maxi­ Bhasker (op. cit) made detailed investigations mum number of nests found on the Suheji and monitored the frequency of nesting, sea­ Valiyakara was 202 during June to Septmber, sons of nesting and the occurrence of various 1977. (Kar and Bhaskar, 1982). The number species of turtles in the Islands. However has come down to 119-132 nests during May the turtles of Lakshadweep require more atten­ to October, 1982. These nests were made by tion with special reference to its reproduct. 20-27 turtles. However during the present ive bilogy, feeding habit and behaviour. The investigation about 130 nesting craters were breeding population of Che/on/a mydas needs observed. The average length, breadth and special attention as the species does not nest the depth of five nesting crater were 219cm. in large numbers along the mainland. 225cm, 62.5cm, respectively. The average dis­ tance between the craters was 45 cm. The The study was carried out from January turtle track of the Chelonia mydas on the to April 1987 covering all the inhabited and Valiyakara beach measured 106 cm in width and a few uninhabited islands as a part of anteriorly 166 cm posteriorly and the width the effort to estimate the fishery potentials of lateral marking was 36 cm. of the Lakshadweep islands. The information on the nesting, and nesting habits were collcet- The nesting intensity was much less in ed by observing the areas during the night other islands and no nesting was observed and investigating the ecology of the nest. during the visit. At Tannakara, Bangaram, The ecology of the feeding grounds were Pitti and ParIi the number of nests observed studied by underwater observations by skin were 11, 15,8 and 10 respectively. (Bhasker, diving with the help of mask, snorkal and 1984). fins. The sea weeds and sea grasses were col­ lected, identified and the total biomass was 2. Nesting population:- The nesting popula­ estimated for the major species. tion of Chelonia mydas in Suheli par (Valiya­ kara) may be about 30 and that of all the other The islands visited during the course of islands may be about 15. The intensity of nesting the study were Chetlat, Kiltan, Kadmat, Amini, of other species of turtles in the Lakshadweep Bitra. Agatti, Bangaram, Tinnakara, Kavarati, is less. One Dermochelys coriacaea nest was Suheli (Valiyakara and Cheriyakara), Kalpeni reported from Pitti island. (Silas; 1984). including Cheriyams, Androth and Minicoy. 3. Nesting seasons:- The peak nesting sea­ Nesting grounds son for the green turtle is during the south­ Nesting grounds of Chelonia mydas were west monsoon, starting from June to Septem­ observed in Suheli Valiyakara, Tinnakara, Ba­ ber though a few nests may be made during ngaram, Parii and Agatti. The largest nesting other months also. Bhaskar (1984) observed ground was found on the north eastern shore 119-135 nests in Suheli Valiyakara made by of Suheli Valiyakara (Lat: N. 10°, 08° long: 22-27 turtles during S. W. monsoon period £. 72°-18-20"). This island has a total area from May to October. However, the collection

176 CMFRI of neo-nates of C. mydas from Kadmat in During the present observation 28 species February indicate that a few turtles may nest of sea weeds belonging to 24 genera were in December also. The Hawk bills and Olive collected from the Suheli lagoon. Some of ridley were found to nest in Androth, Kadmat, the species like Ge/idieiia acerosa G. edulis, Agatti, Bangaram and Tinnakara. Silas (1984) and sargassum sp. were common forage species recorded a nest of Dermochelys coriacea from of C. mydas. Extensive beds of Cymodoea the Pitty island on 5-2-'67. sp and Haioptiila ssp were observed in the

Table 1. Nesting sites or sighting of turtles in Lakshadweep islands

Name of f. mydas L. olivacea f. imbricate D. coriaea island N S N S N S N S

Chetlat X X X X — — — — Kiitan — — X X — — — — Kadmat X X X X X — — — Amini X X — X — X — Bitra X X X X X X — — Agatti X X X X X X — — Bangaram X X X X X X — — Tinnakara X X X X X X _ _ Pitti — — — — — — X — Kavaratti — X — — — — — — Suheli (Valiakara) X X — — — — — — Kalpeni — X — X — — — — Androth - X X — X — _ _ Minicoy — X — X — — — —

N — Nesting S — Sighting

4. Feeding grounds:- Deraniyagala (1939) lagoon. In Kalpeni 44 species of seaweeds reports that C. mydas feeds on Cymodocea were observed. The availability of Gelidiella haiassia, Zostera, Haiopfiiia and algae in acerosa the common food of the turtle was Srilanka coast. Agastheesapillai and Thiagrajan about 3 tonnes in the island. The other for­ (1979) found Holoptiila ovalis, Ttialassia test- age species of sea grass like Cymodocea udinum, Gelidieila acerosa, Cymodocea sp and serrulata C. rotundata and Thalassia hemprlchi other sea weeds in stomach of C. mydas were found in abundance. 7". hemprichi is caught from Gulf of Mannar and Palk Bay. one of the favoured forage species of C. my­ Frazier (1971) found that turtles forage on das- (Mortimer, 1979). From Androth 39 spe­ Cymodocea sp., Geiidium sp., Laurencia and cies of sea weeds belonging to 28 genera Cauierpa sp. in Aldabra Atoll. Hughes (1974) were collected. Gelidiella acerosa, Laurencia also observed Geiidium, Codium dutt)ieae and spp. Sargassum spp. and Thalassia hemprichi Cauierpa fiiiformes in the stomach of green were the common seaweeds and sea grasses turtles of Mozambique. In Gulf of Aden. Hirth found in the islands forming the food of C. and Carr (1970) found that the green turtles mydas. The Minicoy island is also rich in feeds on Posldonia oceanica and Syrlngodium seaweed and seagrass flora. 51 species belong­ ssp. These studies illustrate that the green ing to 35 genera of seaweeds were observed turtles feed on sea grasses and sea weeds. in the lagoon. Of these green turtles feeds on

BULLETIN43 177 Gelidiella across, Sargassum ssp. Gracilaria nesting site may have adverse effect on the edulis and the seagrass Cymodocea serrulata nesting activities. Hence it should be shifted Halophlia ovata and M uninervis. to some other place.

Similarly the lagoons of other islands also The turtles in the lagoon also should be have extensive beds of seagrass and seaweeds protected from being killed. It is essential on which the green turtles feed. that the feeding population should be protec­ ted, The trade of the products of turtles 5. Feeding populatior):- During the survey, like turtle scutes, turtles meat and turtle oil the turtles were observed in all the lagoons. should be prohibited under appropriate provi­ The number of green turtles sighted in Suh- sion of the Indian wild Life Act 1972. elipar were 17 whereas in Kalpeni, Kavaratti and Minicoy the number of turtles seen were 8. Recommandation:- 5. 4 and 7. In all the islands the estimated C. mydas population may be about 100. Two 1) Suheli Valiyakara and its lagoons should pairs of C. mydas were found mating on be declared as the sanctuary for Che/on/a Kalpeni lagoon on P.2-3-87. The mating of mydas. The human activities in the island C. mydas was also observed in the lagoons should be reduced to minimum. The light of Kadmat and Bangaram. house near the nesting site at Suheli Valiya­ kara may be shifted as it can disturb the 6. Fishery:- Turtles are caught in the islands nesting turtles. (2) The lagoon should be for meat, oil and shell. The turtle oil is used preserved as it has a feeding population of for painting the boats and making the screws green turtles (3) Studies on reproductive of boats watertight. However there is no quan­ parmeters, feeding, migration and behaviour titative record of the turtle products used. of the green turtle should be undertaken. It is estimated that about 59 turtles are killed annually in all the islands for their products REFERENCES The turtles are caught by barbed harpoons by the islanders. The fishermen stand on the AGASTHEESAPILLAI, A. AND R. THIAGA- boat throw the harpoon on the feeding turtles RAJAN, 1979. Bilogy of the green and haul it up in to the boat. The turtles turtles Chelonia mydas (Linnaeus) are caught as bycatch in the gill nets also. in the Gulf of Mannar and Palk Bay. J. mar. Biol Ass. India, 21 : 45-60. 7. Conseivatton:- The nesting ground of ma­ BHASKAR, S. 1978 a. marine turtles in India rine turtles of Lakshadweep are gradually shr­ and Lakshadweep Island Marine Turtle inking due to human activities. Human pop­ news letter 8; 5 ulation is increasing in the islands though the area available is limited. The total land BHASKAR, S. 1978 b. Turtles and other ma­ area of the ten inhabited and 17 uninhabited rine life in Lakshadweep. Hornbill islands is 28.5 Km^ with a population of about (April-June) pp, 21-26. 35.000. Hence the density of population is 1,228/Km2 on the whole and 1315/Km2 in BHASKAR, S. 1978 c. Sea turtles in the Ara­ the inhabited islands. Hence the conflict bian Islands of Lakshadweep. In: between the environmental preservation and Tiger paper F. A. 0. Bangkok. human activities is inevitable. For example the BHSKAR, S., 1978 d. Sea turtles in Laksha­ number of fishing boats havs increased from dweep Island. Snakeparlc. 85-115. 145 in 1978 to 350 boats in 1987. But all the islands cannot be inhabited due to the BHARKAR, S. 1979. Notes from Lakshadweep. non-availability of fresh water. Hence at least Hamadryad: 4 (3) : 2-23. the uninhabited island may not become po­ BHASKAR, 1984. Distribution and status of pulated. One such island is Suheli Valiyakara. turtles in India. In: Proc. of the So it may be possible to declare the island workshop on Sea turtle conservation as a sanctuary for the green turtle. The light (Ed. E. G. Silas) CMFRTSpl Pul 18: house constructed very near to the turtle 21-35.

178 CMFRI DERANIYAGALA P. E. P. 1939, The tetrapod South East Africa II South Afrrcan reptiles of Ceylon. Vol. I. Testudinates Ass. Mar- Biol Resource Ocean. Res. and Drocodilians London, Dulac Co­ Inst. Invest. Rep: 36: 1-96 mpany. KAR, C. C and S. BHASKAR, 1982. The ELLIS R. H. 1924. A short account of the status of sea turtles in Eastern Indian Laccadive Island and Minlcoy Govt. Ocean. In Bilogy and Conservation Press, Madras. 122pp. of Sea Turtles: Smithsonian Institution (Ed. R. A. Bjorndal) pp. 103-109 FRAZITER. J, 1971 Observation on Sea turt- lies at Aldabra atoll. Phil Trans. RAMUNNI, M., 1965. Atlas of Laccadives. Royal. Soc London:^. 260:371-410. Minico"^ and Aminidive islands. 92 pages. HIRTH. H and A. CARR 1970. The green turtle in Gulf of Aden and Seychel­ SILAS, E. G., Observation on the turtles in les island, Ve'h. K Ned. Aad. Wet sea and Lakshadweep. In: sea turtles (A.F,0.) NAT week sect.) E 58 : 1-44. on Research and Conservation. C. M. F. HUGHES. G. R. 1974. The sea turtles of R. I. Bulletin. 35: 59-61. 16. THE CORAL FAUNA OF LAKSHADWEEP

C. S. Gopinadha Piilai and S. Jasmine

INTRODUCTION COMPOSITION OF THE CORAL FAUNA

Despite the early works of Gardiner (1904, In a previous paper, Piilai (1987; report­ 1905) and Piilai il971, 1971a, 1986, 1986a, ed a total of 78 species of corals divided 1987) the coral fauna of Lakshadweep, except among 31 genera from Lakshadweep which for Minicoy, remained virtually unknown to was based on Minicoy and Kiltan. Out of the scientific community. A. resume of corals these 27 genera and 69 species are herma- and coral reef research from this area is pre­ types and the rest ahermatypes. Piilai (loc. cit^ sented by Piilai (1987) along with a discu­ also felt that 40 to 45 genera of corals ssion on the structure and composition of should occur in Lakshadweep. In the present the fauna. During the survey of the marine account a total of 104 scleractinian corals resources by the Institute, corals were also divided among 37 genera are reported. Among collected from the various islands in Laksha­ the non. scleractanians, Millepora. Heliopora dweep, and the present report embodies the and Tubipora (The last mentioned for information thus gathered along with data the first time) are also recorded. Out gleened from early literature. A detailed tax- of the 104 species of scleractinians, 26 onomic treatment of the various species is species including a few hitherto undescribed not attempted in this communication. The are new records to Lakshadweep waters. material will be described in future work. An Alveopora, Polyphyllia, Cyphastrea, Echino- asterisk indicates a new record to this area. pora and Tubastrea are the genera newly The classification adopted is that of Vaughan recorded. The present collection has also and Wells (1943) as modified by Wells (1956) enchanced our knowledge of Montipora from

BULLETIN43 179 here which was previously known by a sin­ permitting to report on the corals collected from gle species. However, a few widespread but Lakshadweep during marine survey of islands. less common Indo Pacific genera such as They also presonaliy thank Mr. George Varghese Coscinarea, Siderastrea, Pachyseris, Oulophy- Director of Lakshadweep Fisheries and his llia, Trachyphyllia, Mycedium, Oxypoia, Plero- colleagues at Amini, Kiltan, Kadmat and Che­ gyra and Seriatopora still await detection tlat for all the help rendered during the coll­ from the reefs of Lakshadweep. ection trips. The authors also thank the various The following is a numerical representa­ scientists of the institute who took pains to tion of the various genera and species of collect corals from many islands under diffi­ scleractinians so far known from the different cult situations. islands of Lakshadweep. Details of distribut­ THE CORAL FAUNA ion of recorded genera are given below. CLASS. Order Island No. of genera No of species Suborder ASTROCOENIINA Minicoy 28 73 Family Thamnasteriidae Suheli 7 11 Genus Psammocora Dana, 1846 Kavaratti 18 38 Kalpeni 11 23 Psammocora contigua 1797 (Esper) Androth 7 15 Fig 1 Agatti 10 27 Bingaram 5 8 Amini 15 37 Kadamat 21 43 Kiltan 19 42 Chetlat 23 57 Bitra 6 15

Total for Lakshadweep 37 103 Subgenus 1 1

The relatively low number of genera in some islands is not altogether a clear reflec­ tion of the paucity of the fauna. It can be Fig. 1. Psammocora contigus due to less intense collecting. However, a Localities: Minicoy, Kavaratti, Kalpeni, Agatti sort of natural variation in the composition Amini, Kadmat, Kiltan, Chetlat. of the fauna at generic level seems to occur Distribution: widely distributed throughout the between Minicoy and the rest of the islands Indo-Pacific from Red Sea to Tahiti. in the archipelago. For example, D/p/oastrea, Podabacia and Lobophyllia occured in Minicoy Remariis: This ramose species is fairly common but were not found in central and northern on both the reef flats and lagoon shoals. It islands. l\Aontipora and Cypfjastrea along with is especially abundant at Chetlat lagoon where Echinopoia are recorded from northern islands it grows mixed with (Synaraea) con- while Cypfiastrea and Ectiinopora was never vexa among Heiiopora. seen in the shallow waters of Minicoy The extreme south (Minicoy) and north (Chetlat) Psammocora digitate Milne Edwards and have yielded the maximum number of genera Haime, 1851 Localities: Minicoy, Amini and Chetlat. and species. Distribution: From Seychelles to Fiji Islands. The authors are gratelul to Dr. P. S. B. R. Remarks: This species is not common in James, Director of the Ihiititute for providing Lakshadweep. It was cellected from the inner all facilities for the field trips an well as fo rreefs.

180 CMFRI Psammocora fiaimeana Milne Edwards and Remariis: Living colonies are not found in Haime, 1851 shallow waters. However dead branches are found washed ashore especialay at the wind­ Localities: Minicoy, Kavaratti, Agatti, Amini ward side of the islands indicating that it Kadmat, Chetlat. lives in deeper surf beaten habitat. Distribution: East coast of Africa, Red Sea Madagascar, Maldives, Lakshadweep, East Indies, Great Barrier Reef, Cocos-Keeling isla­ nds Marashall Islands.

Remarlfs: This encrusting species is found over-growing dead coralline material in the lagoon. A few colonies are lying free as submassive nodules over growing the substr­ atum.

Psammocora profundacella Gradiner, 1898

Locaiities: Minicoy, Kavaratti, Kadmat Distribution: South Africa, Mauritius, Laksha­ dweep, Andamans, Great Barrier Reef, Phili­ Fig. 2. Pociiiopora meandrina Var. nobilis ppines, Taiwan, Japan, Funafuti, Fanning Pociiiopora eydouxi Milne Edwards and island. Haime, 1860. Remarlis: Rare. Habitat the same as P. tiaim- eana. The relationship between these two Localities: Minicoy, Kavaratti, Bitra. needs further studies. Distribution: A fairly widespread Indo-Pacific Family Pocilloporidae species from Lakshadweep eastward to Hawaii. Genus Pociiiopora Lamarck, 1816 Remarlis: Living colonies rarely found in shal­ Pocillopora damicoinis (Linnaeus, 1758) low reefs. Dead branches found washed ashore along with P. meandrina. nobilis. Localities: Found fairly common in all the islands of Lakshadweep. Pocillopora verrucosa (Ellis and Solander, 1786 Distribution Widespread from Red Sea to Hawaii in the Indo-Pacific. Localities: Minicoy, Suheli, Kalpeni, Bitra, Bangaram, Amini, Kadmat, Bitra. Pocillopora ligulata Dana, 1846 Distribution: Red Rea (Scheer and Filial, I983j Localities Minicoy, Chetlat. to Hawaii and Cook Islands. Distribution: Maldives; Lakshadweep, Palau Remarks: Lagoon and reef flats. Island, Marshall Island, Solomon Islands, Cook Islands, Hawaii. Genus STYLOPHORA Schweigger, 1819.

Remarks: Not very common. A few speci­ Stylophora pistil lata (Esper, 1897) mens were observed in Minicoy in 1969. The Fig. 3 specific status of this species is still doubt­ Localities: Minicoy, Amini, Kadmat, Kiltan, ful. Chetlat. Pociiiopora meandrina var nobilis Dana, 1846 Distribution: Red Sea eastward to Fiji and Fig 2 Samoa but not known from the southeast Localities: Kalpeni, Androth. Agatti, Amini, coast of India. Kadmat and Chetlat. Remarks: The genus Stylophora is rare in Distribution: Through out the Indo-Pacific but Lakshadweep. Colonies were collected mostly not Red Sea. from the inner protectd reefs.

BULLETIN 43 181 Fig. 3. Stylophora pistillata

Family ACROPORIDAE Verrill, 1902 Genus ACROPORA Oken, 1815. Acropora intermedia (Brook, 1 891)

Localities: Minicoy, Kavaratti, Kalpeni, Agatti, Bangaram, Chetlat. Distribution: Maldives, Lakshadweep, Great Barrier Reef. Remarks: This arborescent species is found mixed with A. formosa in lagoon. These two are very close to each other except for the angle of the radial coraliites. Fig. 4. Acropora abrotanoides

Acropora formosa (Dana 1846) Distribution: Maldives, Lakshadweep Singapore, Localities; Found in all the islands. Sri Lanka. Distribution: East Africa eastward to Tuamotu Remarks: The species is rare in Minicoy. Only Archipelago. Fairly common. one colony was observed and collected. Remariis. The habitat is the same as A. inter­ Acropora robusta (Dana, 1846) media. Locality: Minicoy. Acropora ebrotanoides (Lamarck, 1816) Distribution: Chagos to Tahiti. Fig. 4 Remarks: This is the same as one reported Localities : Minicoy, Kavaratti, Androth, Amini by Pillai (1987) as A conigera. The species Kadmat, Chetlat. is essentially found on reef flat with a large encrusting base and thick stunted digitiform Distribution: Maldives, Lakshadweep, Singa­ branches. pore, Great Barrier Reef, Marshal} Islands, Tahiti, Cocos-Keeling Islands. Acropora teres (Verrill, 1866)

Remariis: The species which forms arborescent Localities: Minicoy, Kalpeni, Agatti: Bitra. But clusters with very thick main branches is should occur in all the islands. common at the south side of the Minicoy Distribution: Maldives, Lakshadweep, China atoll. On the reef flats the branches are Sea, Philippines, Marshall Islands, Samoa. more stunted. Remarks: Forms large arborescent colonies in Acropora efflorescens the deeper parts of the lagoon It was very abundant in the southern half of Minicoy Localities: Minicoy, (Pillai, 1971) till seventies. Mostly dead at present.

182 CMFRI Acropora irregularis (Brook, 1892) Acropora nasuta (Dana, g1846) Locality: Chetlat. localities: Minicoy, Kalpeni, Androth Distribution: Rodriguez, Seychelles, Maldives, Distribution: Widespread from Red Sea eastward Lakshadweep, Cocos-Keeling Islands. to Tahiti. Remarks. Only one colony was observed at Remarks: Reef flat and lagoon shoals as small the reef front of the lagoon reef of Chetlat corymbose or caespitose colonies. in the deep groove. Acropora humiiis (Dana, 1846) Acropora corymbosa (Lamarck, 1816) Fig. 6 Fig. 5 Localities: Jhis "species occursjn'all the atolls.

•«Js4il#*le*;'-'-

^%fk'^^

Fig. 6. Acropora humllls It is fairly common both on lagoon and reef flats. Distribution: A widespread and common Indo-Pacific species. Acropara squarrosa (Ehrenberg, 1834) Localities: Minicoy, Kavaratti. Distribution: Red Sea, Seychelles, Maldives, Lakshadweep, Philippines, Great Barrier Reef, Murray Island, Marshall Islands and Tahiti. Remarks: Not common. Acropora monticulosa (Brueggemann, 1879) Fig. 5. Acropora corymbosa Localities: Kadmat, Chetlat. Localities: Minicoy, Kavaratti, Kalpeni, Agatti, Distribution: Rodriguez, Lakshadweep, Eastern Amini, Kadmat, Kiltan and Chetlat. Probably /Australia. occurs in all the islands. Remarks: The identification of this species Distribution) Red Sea, and eastward to Tuamotu here in tentative. It's relationship with A: Archipelago. conlgera needs further study. Remarks: Lagoon shoals and reef flat. A microhabitat for many economically important Acropora granulosa (Milue Edwards and small species of fishes. Haime, 1860) Acropora hyacinthus (Dana, 1846) Locality: Minicoy. Localities: Found along with A. corymbosa in Distribution: Red Sea, Mascarene, Archipelago, all localities. Reunion, Maldives, Minicoy, Nicobar Islands, Distribution. Red Sea eastward to Tuomotu China Sea, Great Barrier Reef, Marshall Isl­ Archipelago. ands, Fiji, and Tahiti.

BULLETIN43 183 Remarks: A few specimens of this species Remarks: Rare. One colony was collected from was recorded from Minicoy in 1969 and re­ Minicoy in 1969. ported under the name>4. ramableri (Piliai 1971) Genus ASTREOPORA de Blainville, 1830 Acropora echinata (Dana, 1846) Astreopora myrlophtfialma Lamarck, 1816

Localities: IVlinicoy, Kavaratti, Kalpeni and Localities: Minicoy, Kavaratti, Chetiat. Kiltan. Disiribution: Widely distributed in tropical Distribution: Maldives, Lakshadweep, iVlarshali Indo-Pacific from Red Sea to the south Pacific. Islnds, Samoa. Remarks: Found along with massive Porites Remarks: Not very common. Found in the on inner lagooh reefs. The species is common deeper parts of the lagoon. in Chetalt Island.

Acropora aspera Dana, 1846 Astreopora listeri (Bernard, 1896) Localities: Amini, Kadmat, Chetiat. Localities: Minicoy, Kavaratti, Agatti, Bangaram Distribution: Maldives, Lakshadweep, Nicobar Amini, Kadmat, Kiltan, Chetiat, Bitra. Islands, Philippines, Marshall Islands, Cook Distribution: Central Indian Ocean eastward to Islands. Fiji. Remarks: The habitat is the same as A. myri- Remarks: Very common species throughout ophthalma Lakshadweep both on lagoon and reef flats forming large thickets. Genus MONT/PORA de Blainville Acropora hemprichi (Ehrenberg, 1834) Montipora teberculosa (Lamarck, 1816) Locality: Minicoy. Localities: Minicoy, Kadmat, Chetiat. Distribution: Red Sea, East Africa, Mascarene Disiribution: Wide spread Indo-Paclfic species Maldives, Minicoy, Sri Lanka, Great Barrier from Red Sea to Samoa. Reef, Solomon Islands. Remarks: Mostly found as small encrustations on littoral reef flats. Remarks: Rare. Was found mixed with other Acropora in Minicoy lagoon. l\/lontipora explanata Brueggemann, 1897 Locality. Chetiat. Acropora indica (Brook, 1893) Distribution: Mauritius, Lakshadweep, south­ Localities: Minicoy, Kavaratti, Chetiat, Bitra. east coast of India. Distribution: Lakshadweep, east coast of India. Remarks : This species was observed on the Remarks; Isolated colonies of this species are leeward reef flat of Chetiat island in fair found on open reef flats and inner lagoon numbers. Larger colonies were up to 30 cm in reefs. greater spread often with pink colour to the living corallum. Acropora palifera (Lamarck, 1816) Montipora turgescens Bernard, 1897 Localities: Minicoy, Kavaratti, /Agatti, Banagaram, Amini, Kadmat, Kiltan, Chetiat. Localities: Amini, Chetiat. Distribution: Western Indian Ocean eastward Disttibution : Central Indian Ocean, Great to Samoa. Barrier Reef, Solomon Islands, Philippines, Remarks: A. palifera with large palmate bran­ Marshall Islands, Ellice Islands. ches is essentially a lagoon species through­ Remarks : Found as encrustations on reef flat. out Lakshadweep. It is nowhere abundant, Montipora venosa (Ehrenberg, 1834) Acropora forskali (Ehrenberg, 1834) Locality: Amini, Chetiat. Localities: Minicoy (Pillai, 1971). Distribution: From Red Sea eastward ^ Distribution: Red Sea, Persian Gulf, Maldives, Marshall Islands. Minicoy. Remarks : Rarely found on reef fiat.

184 CMFRI Monltipora ^//'osa F(Pallas, 1766) Distribution: Red Sea, Maldives, Lakshadwjep Fig. 7 Nicobar Islands, East Indies, Palau Islands and Marshall Islands and Tahiti

Montipora foliosa Fig. 8- Pavona varians , Locaiities : Kadmat and Chetlat. Distribution : Indo-Pacific but not known from Remariis: Gardiner (1905) reported this species Red Sea. from Minicoy. But subsequent collections from Remarlis: The species was found as forming Minicoy did not include this species. One small foliaceous colonies on the windward side specimen in the present collection is doubtfully of the reef at Kadmat. A few specimens from placed under this species. Chetlat from the same habitat was however, Pavona duerdeni Vaughan, 1907. having closely set folia. Localities : Minicoy, Kiltan and Chetlat. l\/lontipOf» sp nov. 1 Distribution: Abd-el-Kuri, Seychelles, Maldives. A few specimens obtained from Kadmat Lakshadweep, Nicobar Islands, Great Barrier could not be placed satisfactorily to any of the Reef, Palau Islands, Carol! Islands, Marshall known species known to the authors. These Islands and Hawaii. will be reported in a subsequent communication. Genus GARDINEROSERIS Scheer and Pillai, IVIontipora sp nov. 2 1974 Locaiities : Amini, Chetlat. Reef flat. Gardineroseris planulata (Dana 1846) Suborder FUNGIINA Verrill Family AGARICIIDAE Gray Localities: Minicoy, Kavaratti. Kadmat, Chetlat. Genus P/4\/0A//!l Lamarck, 1893. Distribution : Red Sea, eastward to eastern Pacific. pavona variant Verril, 1801 Remar/(S : This species is found among lagoon Fig. 8. shoals though not a conspicuous element of the Localities: Minicoy, Kavaratti, Kalpeni, Androth, coral fauna. Kadmat, Kiltan Chetlat. Family FUNGIIDAE Dana, 1846 Distribution : Red Sea througout Indo-Pacific as far east as Panama. Genus CYCLOSERIS Milne Edwards and Haime, Remar/(s: The species form small encrustations 1849. in all habitats. It is much more common on the Cycloseris sp northern Lakshadweep Islands than at Minicoy. Display wide range of skeletal variations. Locality .- Bangaram. Pavona maldivensis (Gardiner 1905.) Remarks : There is only one specimen in the collection. Determination to species level is Localities: Minicoy (Gardiner, 1905), Chetlat. rather difficult.

BULLETIN43 185 Genus FUNGIA Lamarck, 1801 species. Fungia scutaria Lamarck, 1801. Remarks: Generally found on lagoon shoals Fig. 9 in Lakshadweep.

Genus POLYPHYLUA Quoy and Gaimard, 1830

Polyphyllia talpina (Lamarck, 1816) Locality: Kadmat. Distribution: Maldives, Lakshadweep, Mergui, Archipelago, Andaman, Nicobar Islands, Singa­ pore, Philippines, Japan, Great Barrier reef, Palau Islands. Remarks : Only one specimen of this species is obtained from Kadmat. The genus is rare in Lakshadweep reefs. It was found on the inner lagoon reef flat.

Fig. 9. Fungia secutaria Genus PODABACIA Milne Edwards and Localities: Minicoy, Kavaratti, Suheli, Androth, Haime, 1849 Agatti, Bangaram, Amini, Kadmat, Kiltan, Podabacia crustacea (Pallas, 1766) Chetlat, Bitra. Locality: Minicoy Distribution : Widespread Indo-Pacific species from Red Sea to Tuamotu Archipelago. Distribution: Red Sea east ward to Tuamotu Remarlis ; This is the most common species of Archipelago. Fungia found in Lakshadweep. Ofjen found in Remarks: This species is observed only at lagoon shoals among Acropra. At Chetlat and Minicoy near the Boaz Point towards the Kadmat this species is extremely common. lagoon side at a site, where it is fairly common. It has a restricted occurrence in Minicoy. Fungia somerviliai Grandiner, 1901. Family Gray, 1841 Locality: Minicoy. Distribution: Seychelles, Lakshadweep, Amira- Genus GONIOPOPRA de Blainville, 1830 ntee, Nicobar Islands, Andamans, Mergui Arc­ Though this genus is not profuse in Laksha­ hipelago, Sulu Sea. dweep, the collection include at least four Remarks: A Single specimen was collected in species. Two of them from the northern Lak­ 1969 (Pillai, 1971). It was not found later shadweep appear to deserve new specific in Minicoy nor the present collection include names. They are listed here as sp nov 1 and any. sp nov 2. Fungia danai Milne Edwards and Haime, 1851 Locality: Minicoy. Goniopora stokesi Milne Edwards and Haime, Distribution: Wide spread from Red Sea to 1860. Tahiti. Localities: Minicoy, Kadmat. Remarlfs: A few large specimens of this spe­ Distribution : Red Sea, East Africa, Seychelles, cies were collected from the southern half Maldives, Lakshadweep, East coast of India, of the Minicoy lagoon in 1969. The present Nicobar Islands, Mergui Archipelago, East Indies, collection does not include any specimen of Philippines. this species. Remarks : This species is very conspicuous in Fungia fungites ((Linnaues, 1758) living condition by its large expanded polyps during day time. It is rare in Lakshadweep. Locilities: Minicoy, Suheli, Androth, Agatti, Amini, Kadmat, Kiltan, Chetlat, Bitra. Goniopora minor Crossland, 1952 Distribution: k very widespread Indo-Pacific Locality: Minicoy, Kiltan.

186 CMFRI Distribution : Red Sea, Seychelles, Maldives, Distribution: Red Sea eastward in the Indo- Lakshadweep, Sri Lanka, Great Barrier Reef, Pacific as far east as Tuamotu Archipelago. Philippines. Remarks: Reef flats and lagoon, fairly common.

Goniopora sp nov. 1 Porites labotal Dana, 1846. Locality : Amini, Kadmat, Kiltan. Localtiies: Kavaratti, Amini, Kadmat, Kiltan, Goniopora sp. nov. 2 Chetlat, Bitra. Distribution : Lakshadweep, Nicobar Islands Localities : Amini, Kiltan. Great Barrier Reef, Hawaii, Galapagos Islands. Genus PORITES Link, 1807 Porites lichen Dana, 1846. The genus Porites is the most dominant Localities: Minicoy, Suheli, Kavaratti, Kalpeni coral on reefs in Lakshadweep though the Kiltan, Chetlat. number of species hitherto recorded is relatively low. Massive forms such as P. solida, P. lutea Distribution: Red Sea to Samoa and Fiji. and P. iobata (tentative identification) are Remarks: Fairly common both on reef flat and dominant on reef flats especially on the lagoon lagoon. Small encrusting to submassive colo­ reefs in all the islands. The branching Porites nies occur in all habitats. such as P. andrewsi and P. {Synaraaa) convexa Porites sp nov. 1 are essentially lagoon forms. Two or three forms of Porites in the present collection could not be Localities: Amini, Kadmat, Chetlat. assigned to any named species known to the Bemarks: It is a massive species fairly common. authors and appear to deserve new binominal names. Porites sp nov. 2 Localities: Kadmat. Porites solida (Forskal, 1775) Remarks: Corallum massive. Localities : Minicoy, Kavaratti, Amini, Kadmat, Porites andrewsi Vaughan, 1918 Kiltan, Chetlat. This species should occur in all islands though not collected. Localities Minicoy, Kavaratti, Kalpeni, Agatti, Distribution : Red Sea to Hawaii. Bangaram, Amini, Kiltan, Chetlat, Kadmat. Remarks : Fairly common often forms large Distribution: Madagascar, Maldives, Laksha­ massive corallum. dweep, Nicobar Islands, Java, Palau Islands Marshall Islands, Solomon Islands, Great Barrier Porites lutea Milne Edwards and Haime, 1860 Reef, Samoa, Fiji. Fig. 10 Remarks; This ramose species of Porites is very common in lagoon of most of the Laksha­ dweep atolls. However, it is rarely recorded from the reefs. Recently mass mortality to this species also occurred in Minicoy and Kiltan. Porites minicolensis Pillai, 1969

Locality. Minicoy Distribution: Known only by the type from Minicoy.

Subgenus SYNARAEA Verrill, 1864

The Subgenus Synaraee of Porites is Fig. 10. Porites lutea hitherto not recorded from Lakshadweep, though Local/ties: Minicoy, Suheli, Kavaratti, Kalpeni, found to be fairly common in some of the Agatti, Amini, Kadmat, Chetlat, Bitra. northern Lakshadweep islands such as Chetlat.

187 BULLETIN43 It occurs in Minicoy near the Boaz Point. collected. This species was fairly common on It is essentially a lagoon form found mixed lagoon shoals in Kadmat. with Psammocora contlgua and Pontes andrewsi in Chetlat, often forming large colonies 50 to Genus FAVIA Oken, 1815 60 cm in greater spread and height. Only Favia stelligera (Dana, 1846) one species as listed below is recorded. Localities : Minicoy, Kiltan, Chetlat. Porites {Synaraea) convexa (Verrill, 1864) Distribution : Red Sea to Hawaii. Fig.. 11 Remarks : This small calicled Favia which forms massive or columnar growth is rare in Lakshadweep.

Favia pallida (Dana, 1846) Fig.M2

Fig. 11. Pontes (Synaraea) canvexa

Localities: Minicoy, Kavaratti, Kalpeni, Chetlat Distribution: Maldives, Lakshadweep' Singapore, Samoa, Tahiti.

Genus ALVEOPORA de Blainville, 1830 Fig. 12. favia pallida The genus Alveopra does not include in the Localities : Minicoy, Amini. present collection nor there is any record of this Distribution : Red Sea to Hawaii. genus from Lakshadweep in literature. The Remarks: This is one of the most common Indo- senior author of this paper has examined a Pacific fawa. However, it is not very conspicuous specimen among the collections of the museum in Lakshadweep, It might occur more widely at Kavaratti which is tetentetively reported here than is recorded from the Lakshadweep at as follows, present. Alveopora superficial is Pillai and Scheer, 1976 Favia speciosa (Dana, 1846) Locality: Kavaratti. Distribution: Maldives, Lakshadweep,. Localities : Minicoy, Amini, Chetlat. Distribution: Red Sea to Tuamotu Archipelago. Suborder FAVIINA, Vaugham and Weels, 1943 Family FAVIIDAE, Gregory, 1900. Favia favus (Forskal, 1775) Genus PLESIASTREA Milne Edwards and Haime, Localities : Minicoy, Kavaratti. Distribution : Red Sea eastward to Tuomotu Plesiastrea versipora (Lamarck, 1816) Archipelago. Localities: Minicoy, Kadmat, probably more Remarks: Rare. Ocurs on Reef flats and lagoon wide spread in Lakshadweep. shoals. Distribution: Throughout Indo-Pacific from Favia valenclennesii (Milne Edwards and Red Sea to Fiji. Haime, 1948) Remarks: Gardiner (1904) mentioned its occurrence in Minicoy, but could not be re­ Localities: Kiltan.

188 CMFRI Distribution: Red Sea, Lakshadweep, Gulf of Genus GON/ASTREA Milne Edwards and Mannar, Andaman and Nicobar Islands, Banda, Haine, 1848 Philippines, Taiwan, Great Barrier Reef, Japan, Marshall Islands, New Caledonia. Three species of Goniastrea occur in Laksha­ dweep of which one viz. G. australensis is a Remarks : A dead specimen of this species was new record to this area. The genus is fairly collected from Kiltan from the eastern shore. common in all microhabitats, except the Living specimens could not be obtained. meandering australensis recorded only from Chetlat Island Genus FAVITES Link, 1807 Goniastrea retiformis (Lamarck, 1816) Like Favia, the genus Favites is also not a very conspicuous element of the coral fauna of Localities: Minicoy, Kavaratti, Kadmat, Chetlat. Lakshadweep. Isolated and patchy colonies Distribution: Red Sea eastward to Samoa. are found both on reef and lagoon. Remarks: This species was very common in Favites abdita (Ellis and Solander, 1786) Minicoy at the northern end opposite to the Old Leper Colony till early seventies. How­ Localities : Minicoy, Kavaratti. ever, they are mostly dead due to dumping or dredged soil. Distribution : Red Sea eastward to Fiji. Goniastrea retiformis (Ehrenberg, 1834) Favites complanata (Ehrenberg, 1834) Localities: Minicoy, Kavaratti, Kadmat, Chetlat. Locality. Minicoy. Remarks: Red Sea eastward to Samoa. Fairly Distribution : Red Sea, Lakshadweep, South­ common. east coast of India, Gulf of Kutch, Australia, New Caledonia, Tuamotu Archipelago, Japan. Goniastrea australensis (Milne Edwards and Haimo, 1857) Remarks : F. complanata and F. halicora is one and the same and the species has a wide distri­ Locaiitr- Chetlat. bution in the Indo-Pacific. Distribution: Red Sea, Natai coast, Seychelles Favites flexuosa (Dana, 1846) Lakshadweep, Lanka, Great Barrier Reef Kerm- adic Islands, New Caledonia. Localities : Kadmat, Kiltan and Chetlat. - Genus PLATYGYRA Ehrenberg, 1034 Distribution: Red Sea, Maldives, Lakshadweep, Nicobars, Gulf of Kutch, East Indies, Philippines, Platygyra daedalea (Ellis and Solander, 1786) Japan, Great Barrier Reef, New Caledonia, Localities: Collection includes samples from Solomon Islands, Marshall Islands, Fiji and Minicoy, Agatti, Chetlat, Kalpeni, Amini, Cook Islands. Kilton and Chetlat. Should occur in all the islands. FavUes pentagona (Esper, 1794) Distribution: A wide spread Indo-Pacific spec­ Locality : Minicoy. ies. ' Distribution: Red Sea eastward to new Platygyra sinensis (Milne Edwards and Caledonia. Haime, 1848)

Remarks : Rare. Localities: Found along with P. daedalea in all localities. Favites melicerum (Ehrenberg, 1834) Distribution: Similar to P. daedalea. Locality: Minicoy, Kalpeni, Agatti. Distribution: Red Sea, Maldives, Lakshadweep, Genus LEPTORIA Milne Edwards and Providence Island, Southeast coast of India, Haime, 1848 Mergui Archipelago, Cocos-Keeling Island, New Caledonia. The genus is monotypic. In Lakshadweep

BULLETIN 43 189 it is not very common though can be collected Kadmat, Kiltan and Chetlat. from the inner reef flat and lagoon shoals. Distribution : Red Sea to Hawaii in the Indo- Leptoriaphrygia (Ellis and Solander, 1786) Pacific. Fig. 13 Remarks: This species differs from L. transversa in larger calices and relatively more number of septa.

Leptastrea transversa Klunzinger, 1879

Localities : Minicoy, Kavaratti, Amini, Kadmat, Kiltan and Chetlat. Distribution: A common and wide spread species of Leptastrea, Often found in all places where L. purpurea occurs.

Genus DIPLOASTREA Matthai, 1914

Dipioastrea heiopra (Lamarck, 1816)

'fig.'13 Leptoria phrygia Locality: Minicoy Distribution : Red Sea weastward to Fiji and LocaZ/tiesji^ Minicoy, Amini.'.Chetlat. Samoa. It is not recorded from Southeast coast Distribution: Widely distributed in the«Indo- of India or Gulf of Kutch. Pacific and known from almost all coral growing Remarks: The genus is monotypic. It was areas. found only in Minicoy among the Lakshadweep Islands, that too at the northern part of the Genus HYDNOPHORA Fisher de Waldheim, lagoon along the shore. (Pillai, 197i). 1807. CYPHASTREA Milne Edwards and Haime, 1848 Hydnoptira microconos (Lamarck, 1816)

Localities : IVIinicoy, Suheli, Kavaratti, Kalpeni, Cyphastrea seralia (Forskal, 1775) Acatti, Amini, Kadmat, Kiltan, Chetlat and Bitra. Localities: Kavaratti, Kalpeni, Agatti, Amini, Ds'r tution : Red Sea, throughout Indo-Pacific Kadmat, Kiltan, Chetlat. upto C?' k Islands. Distribution: Widespread from Red Sea to Remarks : The genus Hydnopiiora is represented Hawaii only by H. microconos. Remarks: Inspite of very intensive collecting Genus LEPTASTFiEA Milne Edwards and Haime, over several years the species or the genus was 1848 not found in Minicoy, though it was fairly common in northern Lakshadweep, especially on Leptastrea bottae Milne Edwards and Haime, 1849 lagoon reefs.

Locaiity: Minicoy Cyphastrea? microphthalma (Lamarck, 1816) Distribution ; Red Sea, Somaliland, Reunion, Localities: Suheli, Amini. Chagos, Maldives, Minicoy, Cocos-Keeling Distribution : Red Sea east ward to Tahiti. Islands, Philppines, China Sea, Great Barrier Remarks: A few specimens in the present Reef, New Caledonia, Marshall Islands, Ellice collection display variation in the septal Islands, Tahiti. numbers. Some calices show three cycles of Remarks: The present collection does not include samples of this species. The inclusion complete septa as in C. seralia while others of the species herein is based on early record by have only 28 as in microphthalma Gardiner (1904). Genus ECHINOPORA Lamarck, 1816

Leptastrea purpurea (Dana, 1846) The genus Echinopora is recorded for the first time from Lakshadweep. Localities : Minicoy, Kavaratti, Amini, Kalpeni,

190 CMFRI The genus apparently does not occur in Mihicoy. Distribution: Red Siea to Tahiti. But not known from the southeast coast of India. Echinoporayamellosa (Esper.fl 795) Fig 14 Remarks: The genus Lobophyllia is known from Lakshadweep only from Minicoy. Even at Minicoy it has a very restricted occurrence at the northern tip of the lagoon where it was once very common. It is almost dead at present due to dumping of dredged soil in the area.

Genus ACANTHASTREA Milne Edwards and Haime, 1848

Acanthastrea echinata (Dana, 1816;

Localities: Minicoy, Kalpeni, Chetlat. Distribution : Red Sea to Tuamotu Archipelago. Remerks : Not common any where. Fig- U. Echinopora lamellosa^ Genus SYMPHYLLIA Milne Edwards and Haime, Localities: Kadmat. Androth. 1848 Distribution: Red Sea to Tahiti. For details of areas reference may be made to Scheer and The inclusion is based on early record by Pillai. (1983). Gardiner. The recent collections of corals from Remarics: Open reef flat. Rare. Colonies are Lakshadweep do not include the genus small, sometimes with closely set flat folia. Family OCULINIDAE Gray, 1847. Symphyllia nobilis (Dana 1846)

Genus GALAXEA Oken, 1815. Locality: Minicoy. Ga/axea fascicularis (Linn, 1758) Distribution : Western Indian Ocean eastwards to Samoa. Locaiities : Minicoy, Androth, Kadmat, Chetlat, Kiltan Symphyllia radians Milne Edwards and Haime, 1848 Distribution : Red Sea eastward to Fiji.

Family MERULINIDAE Verril,1866 Locality: Minicoy. Distribution : Maldives, Lakshadweep, Gulf of Genus MERULINA Ehrenberg, 1834 Kutch, Great Barrier Reef, Japan, Rotumana, Merulina ampliata (Ellis and Solander, 1786) Tongatabu. Locality Minicoy. Suborder CARYOPHYLLINA Vaughan and Wells, Distribution: Red Sea (Scheer and Pill i, 1983) 1943 to Samoa. Remarks: The genus Merulina does not include Family CARYOPHYLLIIDAE Gray, 1847 in the recent collection from Lakshadweep. Its inclusion is based on Gardiner (1905). One of Subfamily CARYOPHYLLIINAE Gray, 1847 us (Pillai) made carefull search for it at Minicoy over a long period but failed to detect its The two genera viz. Caryophyllia, Step- presence. hanocyathus are listed here based on the deep water collections of Investigator reported by Family Ortmann, 1890. Alcock (1898, 1902) from the Laccadive sea. Caryophyllia is known by C. clavus Scacchi and Genus LOBOPHYLLIA de Blainiville, 1830. C. araucta Milne Edwards and Haime. Stephana- Lobophyllia corymbose (Forskal, 1775) cyathus is known by S. nobilis (Mosely). Alcock Locality: Minicoy. (1898) may be consulted for the details.

9ULLETIN43 191 Subfamily EUSMILIINE Milne Edwards and Remarks : The calices are level and large. Haime, 1857 Genus TUBASTREA Lesson, 1834 Genus EUPHYLLIA Dana, 1846 Tubastrea aurea (Quoy and Gaimard,1833) Euphyllia glabrescens (Chamisso and Eysenhardt, Locality: Chetlat. 1821) Distribution: Red Sea to Hawaii. Remarks: The species occurs on the leeward Localities : Minicoy, Chetlat. Disiribution: East Africa, Red Sea, Saya de reef of Chetlat under boulders. Living coral Maiha, Maldives, Lakshadweep, Sri Lanka, red in colour. Nicobars, Mergui Archipelago, Singapore, NON SCLERACTINIAN CORALS Philippines, Japan, Great Barrier Reef, Palau Islands, Marshall Islands, New Caledonia, Among the non-scleractinian corals Heli­ Rotuma. opora is the most dominant genus in all reefs of Lakshadweep. Miliepora occurs in lagoon, Remarlis: The genus is rare in Lakshadweep. while Tubipora is only once collected. One colony was collected from Minicoy lagoon in 1969 and two from Chetlat in 1987. In Subclass OCTOCORALLIA Haeckel, 1866 Chetlat it is found on the inner lagoon reef on Order STOLONIFERA Hickson 1883 the sides of Heliopora. Family TUBIPORIDAE Ehrenberg, 1820

Super family FLABELLICAE Bourne, 1905 Genus TUBIPORA

Family FLABELLIDAE Bourine, 1905 Tubipora musica Linnaues, 1758 Genus FLABELLUM Locality: Bangaram. Fiabellum pavonium Alcock, 1902 Disttibution: Red Sea throughout Indian Ocean and Pacific but not found in southeast coast Locality Lakshadweep sea (Alcock) Investigator collection. of India. Remarks: The genus was not observed in Suborder DENEROPHYLLIINAVaughan and living condition on any collection sites but Wells, 1943 a small dead fragment was obtained from the Family DENDROPHYLLIIDAE shore of Bangaram. Genus TURBINARIA Oken, 1815 Order COEHOTHECALIA Bourne, 1895 One of the species of Turbinaria from the Family Helioporidae Mosely, 1876 northern Lakshadweep could not be satisfactorily Genus HELIOPORA de Blainville, 1830 assigned to any known species. It is listed as sp nov. and will be described in a later com­ ^Heliopora coeruleaj (Pallas,^-1766) munication. Fig.i15

Turbinaria masenterina (Lamarck, 1816) Localities : Minicoy, Kavaratti, Agatti, Chetlat, Kiltan Distribution: Red Sea, Rodriguez, Maldives, Lakshadweep, Caroline Island, Marshall islands. Turbina/ia crater (PaUas, 1766) Localities: Agatti, Kadmat. Distribution : Central Indian Ocean to Marshall Islands.

Turbinaria sp nov Fig, 15. Heliopora coerulea Loalities : Agatti, Kadmat and Chetlat. 192 CMFRI Localities: Occurs in all the islands in fair Locafities: Minicoy, Suheli. numbers especially on the lagoon reefs. At Distribution: Red Sea to Tahiti Minicoy and Chetlat the species covers exten­ sive areas. Miifepbra exe*a (Forskal, 1775) Distribution: Widespread Indo-Pacific species. Localities: Minicoy, Suheli, Kalpeni, Agatti, CLASS HYDROZOA Amini, Kadmat, Chetlat Order MILLEPORINA Hickson, 1901 Disiribuiion: Red Sea to Tuamotu Archipelago. Order MlLLEPORIDAE Flemming, 1828 Millepora dichotoma (Forskal, 1775)

Genus IVIILLEPORA Linnaeus, 1758 Localities: Minicoy, Kavaratti, Amini, Kalpeni, Miliepota platyphyllia Ehrenberg, 1834 Distribution: Red Sea to Tuamotu Archipelago.

Table. 1. Distribution of recorded genera of corals from the different islands in Lakshadweep

Localities

> 00 ?>; Pi O OQ 0) Q>_ (Q Q) D) 3- a 3 1 a =: CD s.- ^ CD S ;:: (Q 2. 3 CD 3 — a> 0) i S 3 1 8 9 10 11 12

Name of Genus

Pasammocora Dana X — X X - X - X X X X - Pociilopora Lamarck X XXX X X X X X X X X Stylophora Schweigger X - - - X X X X — Acropora Oken X XXX X XX XX X X - Mont/pora de Blainville X X — -—-XX X X — Astreopora de Blainville X — X — ---XX X - Pavona Lamarck y — X X X — - - X X X - Gardineroseris scheer and Pillai X — X — - — - - X X — Cycloseris — Fungia Lamarck , X X X - X X X X X Polyphylfia Q&G — _ _ _ _ X Podabacia MED-H X Porites Link X XXX X X X X X Goniopora de Blainville X X X X Alveopora de Blainville...... — — X — Plesiatrea MED-H X — X Favia Oken X — X — X - X X — Favites Link X ^ X X — X X X _

BULLETIN 43 193 1 8 9 10 11 12

Goniastrea IVIED-H X X — - X X X — Platygyra Ehrenberg X X X — X X X X Leptor/a MED-H X X X X — Hydnophora de Waldheim X X X — X X X X X X Leptastrea MED-H X X X X X X X - Diploastrea. Matthai X Cyphastrea MED-H - X XX — X — X X X X — Echinopora Lamarck — — — X - X Galaxea Oken X — — X — X X X - Merulina Ehrenberg X

Lobophyllia Blainville X Acanthastrea MED-H X X - — — — - X — Symphyllia MED-H X Caryophyllia Lamarck — Stephanocyathus Seguenza — Flabellum Lesson — Euphylli Dana X — — — — — — — — X Tubastrea Lesson.... — X Turbinaria Oken X — X — — X — — X X X Non Scleractinian Corals Mlllepora Linnues X X X X X X X X X X Hellopora Blainville X X X X X X X X X X X Tubipora Ehrenberg — — — — — X — — —

X ca recorded — = not recorded and not a negative indication of its occurrence

REFERENCES Maldiveand Laccadive Archipelagoes. Vol. 2: 758-790 pi. 59-64. ALCOCK, A. 1898. 1898. An account of the deep sea Madreporaria collected by the GARDINER, J. S. 1905 Madreporaria Pt. 3. Royal Indian marine survey ship Fungida. Ibid., Vol. 2: 933-957, pis, "Investigator". Indian Museum Cal­ 89-93. cutta : 1-29, pia. 1-3. PILLAI, C. S. G. 1971. Distribution of shallow ALCOCK, 1902. 1902 A naturalist In Indian seas, water stony corals at Minicoy Atoll in or four years with the Royal Indian the Indian Ocean. Atoll. Res. Bull, Marine survey ship "Investigator''. wash., 141: 1-12. John Murry London 328 pp. PILLAI, C. S. G. 1971a. Composition of the GARDINER, J. S. 1904. Madreporaria Pt. 2. coral fauna of the southeastern coast of Astreidae Fauna and geography of the India and the Laccadives. In: Regional

194 CMFRl venation in Indian Ocean coral reefs. PILLAI, C. S. G and G. SCHEER 1976 Report on Symp.Zooi. Soc. Land.. 28: 301-327 the stony corals from the Maldive Academic press. Archipelago. Zoologica (Stuff) 126 : 1-83, pis. 1-32. PILLAI, C. S. G. 1986 Recent corals from the southeast coast of India, in Recent SCHEER, G and C. S. G. PILLAI. 1983. Report advances in l\/larine Biology. Today and on the stony corals from Red Sea Ibid., tomorrow's printers and publishers New 133: 1-193. pis. 41. Delhi. : 107-201.

PILLAI, C. S. G. 1986a. Status of coral reefs in VAUGHAN, T. W. and J. W. WELLS. 1943. Lakshadweep. Mar. Fish, infor. Serv. Revision of the suborders, families and T.aE ser. 68: 38-41, genera of scleractiuia. Spec. pap. Geol. Soc. Am.. 44 : 1-363. PILLAI, C. S. G. 1987. Structure and generic diversity of recent scleractinia of India. WELLS, J. W. 1956. Scleractinia. In: Treatise J. Mar, biol. Ass. India, 25 (1 & 2) : In Invertbrate Paientolaogy pt. F. 328- 78-90. 444. univ. Kansas press. 17. SOME OBSERVATIONS ON THE MARINE MAMMALS AND MARINE BIRDS

R. S. Lai Mohan

INTRODUCTION Island in 1962. The Bombay Natural History Society under the leadership of Dr. Salim AM, The marine mammals found in the sea undertook several trips to the island to study around Lakshadweep are not well documented. migration and ecology of the nesting Our information on the distribution is based grounds of the birds (Mathew and Ambedkar, on a few records of cetaceans washed ashore. 1964). These studies paved way for the pro­ The remote nature of the islands may be the tection of nesting populations and prevention reason for the poor knowledge of the marine of egg collection, resulting in the declaration nammals occurring there. of Pitti island as a bird sanctuary. Recently Livingston (1987) recorded 23 species of The birds of the Lakshadweep are better marine birds and described the association known and have attracted the attention of of the birds and the tuna fishery. the naturalists as early as 1876, when A. 0. Humes (1876) published an account on the During the present study all the inhabited birds of Lakshadweep. He visited Pitti, Bali- and a few uninhabited islands were visited yapani and other islands where he found from January to April, 1987 and the marine large nesting grounds of birds. Later Aiock mammals and birds of the islands were obser­ (1902) observed nesting ground of birds in ved. Information were collected by enquiry Pitty, Baliyapani, Bitra and other islands and observing the tuna shoals and the giving a lucid account of the bird population. birds, and the tuna shoals and the dolphins. Betts (1938) also described the birds of MARINE MAMMALS Lakshadweep. Later Ramunni (1965) while serving as the Administrator of the islands Background information: Nishiwaki (1983) evinced great interest in the study of the considered that 46 species of Cetaceans birds of the islands. He visited the Pitti belonging to 28 genera inhabit the Indian

BULLETIN43 195 Ocean. James and Soundararajan (1979) while in the islands and were available in different studying the data on the cetaceans, stranded hues—black, white and dark bay colour or washed ashore along the main land of (Ramunni, 1965). India, reported 11 spp of cetaceans. Recently Tuna fishery and the dolphins James and Lai Mohan (1987) summarised the information available on all the 20 species The association of the dolphin with the of cetaceans found to occur along the Indian tuna fishery of the Tropical Pacific is well Coast and provided a field key to the identi­ documented (Perrin; 1968, 1969,1970). Very fication of the species. Lai Mohan (1987) high mortality of dolphins are reported brought to focus the need for intensifying (Martin, (1975) in Pacafic in the purse seines research on marine mammals with special operated for tuna. Though large scale killing reference to Indian Ocean as it is of dolphins has not been observed, the situ­ declared as a sanctuary for the whales ation has to be watched closely as there are by the International Whaling Commission in proposals to introduce purse seines for tunas 1979. Pillai (1987) reported the occurrence around Lakshadweep Island. of Ziphius cavirostris from Minicoy. The occurrence of Pseudorca crassidens also can Fishermen consider citing of dolphins as be inferred to occur in the islands as it's an indication for tuna shoals (Katsuwonus skeleton is displayed in the Kavaratti museum. pelamis). The species of dolphins involved with the tuna shoal are Stenella longirostris By-catch of dolphin and Delphinus delphis. The association of Though we have some information on the dolphin and tuna may be probably due to by-catch of dolphins along the Indian Coast sharing of the food by the two. (La! Mohan, 1985) we have no data on the Though there are reports of collection of number of dolphins caught in Lakshadweep. ambergris (Ramunni, 1965) there no authentic Dolphins are not consumed in Minicoy island report of it, in recent years. but it is taken in the northern islands like Kavaratti, Agatti, Amindevi and Kadmat. Alto­ BIRDS gether about 50 dolphins are caught annually in all the islands. The Lakshadweep attracts the attention of the conservationalists because of the bird During the survey two spinner dolphins, nesting grounds like the Pitti island. Protec­ Stenella longirostris of length 1390 mm and tion of these nesting grounds goes a long 1395 mm were harpooned and killed for its way for the preservation of the species. meat at Kavaratti by the fishermen. The meat was sold at a rate fo Rs. 5/- per Kg. it was Bird fauna of the Island also observed that the flippers and caudal The common species of birds found in flukes and the dorsal fins of the dolphins the islands are given below: are dried along with the shark fin and adul­ terated with it. Sterna anaethetus (Brown winged tern) Sterna fuscata nubilosa (Sooty tern) The common species of dolphins involved Sterna bergil veioz (Large creasted tern) in the by catch are Stenella longirostris, Sterna bengalensis (Lesser creasted tern) Sousa chinensis. Turslops truncatus aduncus and Delphinus delphis tropicalis. 60% of the Anous stolides plleatus (noddy tern) catch belongs to Stenella longirostris and 20% Egretta gularls (Reef heron) to Turslops truncatus aduncus and the rest Pluvial is squatarola (Grey plover) to Sousa Chinensis and Delphinus delphis Pluvialis domlnica (Golden plover) tropicalis. Dromas ardeoia (Crab plover) Charadrlus alaxandrinus (Kentish plover) The dolphins are caught mainly during October to April during fair fishing reason. Numenius phaseopus (Whimbrel) Masudi, the great traveller recorded that the N. arguata (curlew) ambar (ambergris) was found abundantly in Tringa hypoleucos (Common sandpaper)

196 CMRFI TABLE 1 : Distribution of the birds in various islands of Lakshadweep.

Name of Birds 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1. Sterna anaethtus X XXX XXX XX X X XXX X _ X X 2. S. fuscata nubilosa X XX XX XX X X XX X X — • X X 3. S. Bergii vefoz X XX XX X X X XX X — — — — 4. S. benga/ens/'s — X X X X X XX — — X — — 5. Anous stolldes plleatus X XXX XX XXX X X XXX X X X X X 6. Egretta gularis X X X X X X X — — — — X 7. Pulvlalis squatarola XX — — X X — — X -- — — — 8. P. domlnica X 9. Dramas ardeola — X — — X — X — — — X 10. Charadrius alexandrinus X — — X — — X X X X — — 11. Numenius phaeopus X X X — — — X X X — — X 12. N. argusta X X X X X X — X — — — X

13. Tringa hypolaucos X — — X ~ X X — • — X X X 14. Arnaria interpres — — X 15. Calidris minutus X X X X X X — X 16. Oceanites oceanIcus X X X — — — — — X X — 17. Ocaanodroma leucorhoa monorhls X X X X X 18. Ardeola grayli — X X X 19. Sraptopelia orientalis X X — — — — 20. Eudjnamys scolopacea X — 21. Alcodo atthis — X X X X — 22. Hirundo rustica — — — X — X — — — -- X , X 23. Dellchon urbica 24. Motacilla flava thunbergi 25. Zosterops palpebrosa X X X X X X X

X - Stray number 1. Agatti. 2. Bangram 3. Tinnakara- Parali 4. Bitra. 5. Kadmat. 6. xX 5 to 100 numbers 7. Suheli 8. Kalpeni 9. Androth 10 Chetlat 11. Kiltan 12. Amini XXX more than 100.

Arnaria interpres (Turnstone) Some of the birds are migratory while others are residents. Calidris minutus (Little stint) Oceanites oceanicus (Wilson strom petrel) Pitti island Oceanodroma leucorhoa monorhls The Pitty island deserves special mention. Ardeola grayii (Pond heron) Located at longitude 10* 46"-30-"N. and Streptopslia orientalis (Rufous turtle dove) 72°-31"-30"E, the island has an area of about Eudynamys scolopacea (Koel) 1 21 hectres lying about 10 K. M. north west Aleedo atthis (Common King fisher) of Kavaratti. The shore of the island is bound Hirudo rustica (Swallwo) by reef with sandbanks on the southern end. Dellchon urbica (House merlin) The island is devoid of vegetation. It is diffi­ cult to land on the island due to the heavy Motacilla flava thunbergi (Grey head) breakers and boulders. The fishermen land on Zosterops palpobrosa (White eye) the northern side of the island in country The distribution of the birds observed in crafts. The island is a favoured nesting ground the islands are given in Table 1. The birds of the sooty tern (S. fuscata nubilosa) and found in large numbers are Amous stolldes the nody terns, Anaus stolidus plleatus. Humes pileatus, S. fuscata nubilosa, S. anaethetus. (1876) found thousands of chicks of terns

BULLETIN 43 197 hatching from the eggs when he visited Pitti erved and the number of tuna caught. The two island during February, 1876. Alcock (1902) peaks in the occrrence of the birds, coincide visited the island in 1891 and stated that with the two peaks of the tuna landing in ground above the high water mark was lite­ Minicoy island. However his postulation that rally carpeted with young terns of two spec­ the birds feed on the mucus and the cope- ies, many dead and rotting and many reduced pod parasites attached to the tuna appear to clean picked skeleton with only the quill untenable as the beaks of the birds are neither feathers, still sticking to the wing bones. He suitable for picking the parasites or taking attributed the reason for the wholesale destru­ mucus from the body of the tuna. Further no ction of the young birds to the swarm of tuna (Katsuwonus palamis) was found infected large hermit crabs (Coenobita). When Ramunni with parasites to the extent of being picked (1965) visited the islands in 1962 found up by the seabirds. As the tuna and marine thousands of birds, most of tthem sitting on birds feed on fishes, the occurence of the their eggs. He observed that apart from the forage fishes may be attracting the birds and chicks which did not move, the birds hovered tuna to the same place. Further when the tuna around like a cloud. He could see only two forages on the shoals of fishes, the fishes types of birds "Sooties and terns" and did jump out of the water attracting the birds. not see any dead birds or carcases. There were plenty of hermit crabs also. Later many The marine birds also have enriched the teams from organisation like Bombay Natural mineral resources of island consisting of low History Society and Zoological Survey of grade phosphates derived from the bird droppings India (Venkateswarlu, 1982) have visited the for many thousands of year. It is one of the island to study the migration, and nesting reasons for the fertility of some of the islands. habits of the birds. The island has been declared (Ramunni 1964, Jones, 1986). as a bird sanctuary. IViathew and Ambedkar (1969) observed the large scale nesting of Conservation:- it is suggested that regular Sterna anaethetus at Baliyapani island. Bitra monitoring should be carried out on the dol­ island was nesting ground for flocks of sea phin catch and the whale beaching. CM.F.R.I, birds before 1940 (Ramunni, 1965). During has recently initiated a project to monitor the survey large number of noddy terns of the dolphin catch and stranding of whales about 5000 were observed in Agatti. The in Lakshadweep. As the islands are far apart sooty terns (S. fuscata) numbering 8.10 it will be difficult to collect data by a single thousands were also found on the shore of individal. Hence the fisheries inspectors of Bangaram and Bitra. Lakshadweep administration should be instruc­ ted to monitor the dolphin catch. The local Nesting season:- The noddy terns and the people also should be made aware of the sooty terns start laying eggs from late Decem­ endangered status of the species. The Wild ber to January and their eggs are of the size Life Act of 1972 should be implemented so of the hen with brown blotches. Humes that the killing of dolphin is prevented. (1876) observed fully fledged chicks in Historically marine birds were nesting in February in Pitti island. large numbers in some of the islands like Bitra and Baliyapani about hundred years before. Bird-J una interaction:- Now birds no more nest in these islands The terns are known to follow the tuna in large numbers due to human interference. shoals in Minicoy (Ramunni, 1964) which help The same fate should not fall on Pitti island the fisherman to locate the tuna shoals. This weich is the only island left for birds to association seems to stem from the food nest. Though it has been declared as a sanc­ habits of the birds and tuna. The birds involved tuary it is reported that the eggs are being are Anous stolides, S. terna bergii. S beng- collected surreptiously. This should be pre­ alenls and S. fuscata. Livingston (1987) descri­ vented. The local fishermen and the people bed, the utiity of the birds in locating the tuna should be informed by suitable attractive shoals in Minicoy. He found a positive co- print outs and pamphelets, the delicate and relation between the number of sea birds obs­ vulnerable position of the birds. The emphasis

198 CMFRI shouid be placed on the importance of saving endanagered Marine Animals and the eggs and the nesting population, if the Marine Parfcs M B A I. Cochin Voll hermit crabs are found to attact the hatch- Pap No 3:1-10 (Mimeo) lings as observed by Alcol< (1902) steps should Lai Mohan R S., 1987. Research needs for be taken to control them It is needless to the better management of the dolp­ say that but for scientific studies the nesting hins and dugongs of Indian Coast populations should not be disturbed even from Natn. Symp. Res. devel Mandapam the tourist point of view. Camp. CMFRI, Abstract) CMFRISpi. REFERENCES Publ. No. 4:98-99. Alcock, A. 1902. A. naturalist in Indian seas or Mathew. D. N , V C. Ambedkar, 1964. A bird four years witti Royal Indian Marine study trip to the Laccadive island J. Survey Ship "Investigator" John Murray Bombay, rat Hist. sec. 61 (1):185-190 London. 328 pp. Nishiwari, M. 1983. Marine mammal species Betts, F.N. 1938. The Birds of Laccadive islands considered to be in the Indian Ocean. J. Bombay nat Hist. Soc. 40 (3): 382- Symp marine mamm. of the Indian 387. Ocean Columbo. Srilanka. Humes, A. 0. 1876. The Laccadive and the Perrin. W. F., 1968. The porpoise and tuna. West Coast. Stray featliers. AA\2A^2 Sea Frontiers. 14 (3):166-174 James, P. S. B. R. and R. Soundarajan 1984. Perrin W. F., 1970. Using porpoise to catch On a sperm whale Physeter macros- tuna, world fishing, 18 (16):42-45 ceplialus Linnaeus stranded at Krusadi Perrin W. F., 1970 The problem of porpoise in Gulf of Mannar with up to date mortality in U. S. Tropical tuna fishery. list and diagonostic features of whales Proc. 6th Ann. Conf. Biol, sonar and stranded along the Indian Coast. J. diving mammals, Stanford Res. Inst. Mar. Biol. Ass. India. 21:1740. Membo Park Calif: 45-48. James P. S. B. R. and R. S. Lai Mohan, 1987. Pillai, Gopinatha S. 1981. On a new record The Marine mammals of India. Mar of Cuviers beaked Whale ZIphius Fish, infor. Ser. T a E. Ser. No. 71; cavirostris In Indian waters Journ. 1-13. mar, biol India: 23; (1 & 2) 218-221 Jones S. 1986. Lakshadweep-General features (1988). and some considerations Mar Fish. Ramunni, M., 1965. An atlas of Laccadive Infor. Ser. 68:2-6. Minicoy and Aminidive Island- 92pp. Lai Mohan, R. S. 1985. Observations on the Madras. by-catch of dolphins. Stenella longi- Venkateswarlu. T. 1982. The tern rookery of rostris. Tursiops aduncus, Sousa Pitty, Lakhsadweep archipelago as chinensis Delphinus delphis in the a bird sanctuary. Ind. Jour. Zootomy gill nets off Calicut Coast. Symp. 23 69 70.

aUUETiN43 199 18. HYDROBIOLOGY OF LAGOONS

K. G. Girijavallabhan, I. Oavidraj and S. V. Alavandi

ABSTRACT

The hydrography, productivity, zooplsnkton biomass and faunistic composition of the lagoons of Lakthadweep were studied during January-March 1987 period. The surface temper«ture of lagoon waters off Agatti and Kalpeni reached the maximum temperature of 38"C. Even during night period the temperature was in the range of 32-33°C in the Minlcoy lagoon. Salinity values of surface samples of lagoons of Kalpitti, Bangaram and Kalpeni mere in the range 36%o to 39.39%o. Low dissolved oxygen value of 1-1B ml/litre was observed in Suhelipar lagoon. In most of the lagoons the secondary production was very poor but biomass of zooplankton from the seaward side of the lagoons was slightly higher suggesting that the oceanic zooplankton might be nourished by coral reef community. MInicoy lagoon is an exception where the biomass of zooplankton was very high being 61.25 ml and the biomass of samples collected from the sea was 9.5 ml. Swarming 'of Lucifer sp, Copepods and Linglea sp. (algae) has increased the standing crop of lagoon. In most of the lagoons, decapod larvae and copepods constituted the dominant items, other zooplankters like fish eggi, chaetognaths, siphonophores and appendicularians also occurred In small numbers. In lagoon samples of Bangaram and Kavaratti fish eggs formed 8.73% and 17.38% of total biomass respectively.

INTRODUCTION Pratap (1977), Silas era/. (1985) and Mathew (IVI.S). The hydrobiological studies viz. physical, chemical and biological parameters of the marine The present studies are confined to lagoons environment of Lakshadweep islands have been of Lakshadweep islands during Jan. March '87. studied by different groups of scientists based Three teams surveyed 13 islands viz. I team- on the data collected during the survey of these Kadmat, Kiltan, Chetlat, and Amini during Jan. islands and also during the oceanography cruises '87, Ilteam-Agatti, Kalpitti, Bangaram and Bjtra undertaken on board R. V. Varuna, R. V. Kalava, during February '87 and III team-Kavaratti, R. V. Gaveshani, R. V. Sagar Kanya. R. V. Bluefin Suhelipar, Kalpeni, Androth and Minicoy during and FORV. Sagar Sampada. A complete list of March '87 to study the fishery potential of the bibliography of marine biological and fisheries lagoons and coral reefs of Lakshadweep islands. research in Lakshadweep is given in MFIS (1986) Along with these investigations fishery environ­ of which the following few are pertaining to mental studies covering physicochemical condi­ environmental features of Lakshadweep seas. tions, productivity and plankton were also under­ Jones (1959) reported the importance and taken to get a complete picture of the lagoons special ecological conditions of this area. during Jan. to March 1987. Cooper (1957) and Jayaraman et al. (1959, 1960) have studied the oceanographic conditions of this sea. The chemical characteristic of the IVIATERIALS AND i\^ETHODS Lakshadweep waters were studied by Sankara- narayanan (1973), Rao era/. (1966) Rao et al. The ph/sico-chemical conditions viz. (1970) Rao ef a/. (1976) reported the oceano­ temperature, salinity and dissolved oxygen of graphic conditions around Lakshadweep islands. surface samples of different lagoons and open sea along with their maximum and minimum Primary productivity and secondary product­ during 24 hours based on diurnal studies are ions of this sea were studied by Nair and Pillay given in Table 1. For Agatti, Kalpitti, Bangaram (1972), Gardiner (Ed) (1906), Wolfenden (1906), and Bitra islands, the maximum and minimum Prasad and Nair (1964) Qasim and Bhattathiri different physicochemical parameters during day (1971), Silas (1972), Tranter and George (1972), time alone were given and diurnal studies could Goswami (1973), Nair & Rao (1973), Madhu not be undertaken.

200 CMFRl Table 1: Physico-Chemical Parameters (Min-Max) of Lagoons of Lakshadweep Islands

Kadmat Chetlat Kiltan Amini Agatti Kalpitti Bangaram Bitra Kavaratti Suhelipar Kalpeni Minicoy

January February March

ATMOSPHERIC TEMPERATURE {MIN-MAX)^ 25-25.5 26-30 26-31.8 24-30 33-38 36 35-37 36-38 28.2-31 .£ 28-32 29-33

SURFACE TEMPERATURE (MIN-MAX)°C 27-29.2 28-31.3 27.5-31 26-31 34-38 36 34-36.2 35-36 25-31 29.2-30 30-38 30-35

SURFACE 34-34.5 34.4-34.69 33.61 - 34.59- 33.4- 39.2 36.2- 37.2 29.5- 33.38- 34 68 - 31.93- SALINITY%o 33.91 - 35.48 39.5 36.9 38.2 34.4 35 39.30 35.41

SURFACE DISSOLVED OXYGEN ml/litre 3.32- 3 64- 2.79- 3.4- 2.8- 4.8 5.2- 4.34 2 54- 1.01 1.15- 3.39- 4.86 5.7 5.70 6.43 6.7 6.3 5.8 6.1 6.6 6.52 6.2 s Productivity studies were also conducted in and their average biomass and occurrence of lagoons of some islands. major zooplankters are calculated and given in % for composition. Biomass was determined by Surface townet collections of zooplankton of 10 minute duration were taken with \ meter displacement volume method and depending on plankton net at different stations of lagoons and the volume of zooplankton a set sample of also outside the reef to study the faunistic 12i% to 25% was examined for numerical composition of zooplankton. Samples of lagoon abundance and the number of organisms was and open sea are pooled separately and analysed calculated for the whole sample.

TABLE 2 Estimated average number of zooplankton (in percentage) per standard haul in the lagoons and open sea of Lakshadweep islands January 1987.

Organism Kadmat Kiltan Chetlat Lagoon Sea Lagoon Sea Lagoon Sea

Displacement Volume 0.65 3.15 0.2 60 2.3 4.1 Copepod 13.59 69.0 33.37 35.80 5.95 50.83 Decapod 59.46 3.63 35.99 38.95 79.55 1.50 Alima larva 1.62 1.24 0.11 0.04 0.10 0.11 Appendicularia — 3.08 5.81 1.52 — 0.27 Chaetognath 0.41 5.36 9.45 2,69 0.74 8.73 Cladocera — 2.10 1.13 0.14 — 1.16 Doliolid — 0.14 0.11 0.24 — 0.11 Heteropod — 0.96 1.25 1.02 0,03 0.69 Lamellibranch 1.43 2.21 9.23 6.96 0.68 11.38 Medusa — 0.04 9.11 0.07 — 0.11 Siphonophore 0.05 0.67 0.23 2.08 .0.52 18.34 Gastropod 0.62 4.76 0.57 0-75 0.07 1.81 Pteropod 0.04 0.19 — 0.19 — " 0.27 Foraminifera 22.48 4.33 1,03 0.50 12.02 0.58 Echinoderm Larva — 0.05 — 0.02 — 0.08 Fish Eggs 0.11 1.88 — 8.60 0.11 2.77 Fish Larvae 0.10 0.13 0 46 0.07 0.09 0.23 Salp 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.04 — 0.08 Ostracod 0.06 — 0.34 0.05 — 0.04 Amphipod 0.01 0.01 0.46 0.C8 0.03 0.35

Ctenophore 0.01 0.01 — • — Lucifer — 0.04 — 0.01 0.01 0.42 Polychaete — 0.17 0,23 0.07 — 0.11

RESULTS minimum and maximum were observed at 04.00 hrs and 14.00-18.C0 hrs respectively. The SURVEY TEAM I JANUARY '87. ISLANDS maximum atmospheric temperature of 27.5°C COVERED - KADMAT, KILTAN, CHETLAT AND was observed during 10.00-14.00 hrs and the AMINI (TABLE 1,2) minimum of 24°C was noticed at 04.00 hrs. KADMAT Salinity: The salinity range in the lagoon was Temperature: The surface temperature range in 34.20 to 34.50%o In the sea the range was the lagoon was from 26.0° to 29 0''C. The 34.40 to 34.89%,

202 CMFRI Dessolved oxygen: The range of dissolved Biomass and faunistic composition oxygen in the sea was 3.76 to 4 25ml/l. In The average zooplankton biomass in the the windward side it was 4.49 to 5.34ml/I lagoon was 0.65 ml indicating that the secon­ dary production is poor whereas outside the reef In the lagoon reef the range was 4.37 to in the sea it was 315 ml. 4.9 ml/1. In the diurnal studies marked change was observed in the dissolved oxygen distribu­ In the lagoon decapod constituted the tion inside the lagoon. The dissolved oxygen of dominant portion (59.46%) followed by foramini- 4.86 ml/I observed at 1800 hrs gradually fera (22 48%), Copepod (13.597o). Lamellibranch decreased to 3,40 mil (minimum) at 08.00 hrs. (1.43) and the other groups chaetognath, and then gradually increased to 4.86 ml at siphonophore, gastropod, pteropod, salp, 16.00 hrs. ostracod, amphipod, ctenophore, fish eggs and fish larve were less than 1 % each. Appendi- Productivity : The estimated gross production cularia, cladocera doliolid, heteropod, madusa, of surface waters of lagoon was 154mg C/m'/ echinoderm larva, lucifer and polychaete were day in January 1987. absent (Table 2)

Tabie 3 Estimated average number of zooplankton (in percentage) per standard haul in the lagoons and open sea of Lakshadweep islands February '87.

Agatti Kalpitti Bangaram Bitra Lagoon Open Lagoon Open Lagoon Open Lagoon Open Sea Sea Sea Sea

DISPLACEIVIENT VGLUME Negligiable 5.8ml 1 ml. 0.5ml — 0.6 ml — DECAPODS 93.10 — 23.4 90.13 — 73.4 — COPEPODS 90.25 5.3 —^ 2.2 0.22 — 18.59 — FISH EGGS 4.25 0.88 — 73.7 8.73 — 3.05 — GASTROPODS 0.85 0.4 — 0.15 0.14 — 0.4 — FISH LARVAE 0.85 0.001 — 0.2 0.09 — 0.08 —• APPENDICULARIA 0.40 0.03 — — — — — — LAMELLIBRANCH 085 0.4 — — 0.15 ^ 0.39 — FORAMINIFRA 0.85 0.8 — — 0.31 — 0,53 — MEDUSAE 1.7 O.OOI — — 0.01 — — — POLYCHAETES — 0.01 — 0.1 0.01 — 0.15 — AMPHIPODS — 0.01 — 0.1 0.11 — 0.04 — CLADOCERA — 0.05 — — — — 0.59 — CHAETOGNATH — 0,36 — — — — 2.45 —

ALIMA — 0.01 — — 0.04 — 0.53 • — HETEROPODS — 0.01 — 0.05 — — 0.06 — PTEROPODS — 0.002 — 0,1 0.5 — — — SIPHONOPHORE — 0.05 — — 0.01 — — — OSTRACOD — 0,1 — — — — — LUCIFER 0.01 — — — — CEPHALOPODS — 0.003 — — — — — DOUOLUM — 0.003 — __ — _ ECHINODERM URVAE — — — — — — — —

BULLETIN43 203 In the sea the dominant group was copepod saelp, ostracod, amphipod and polychaete) less (69.0%) followed by chaetognath (536^^), than 1% each. gastropod (4.76%), foraminifera (4.33%), decapod In the sea, the major groups were decapod (3.63%), appendicularia (3 08%), lamellibranch (38.95%) and copepod (35.80%) followed by (2.21%) cladocera (2.10%) fish egg (1.88%), fish eggs (8.60%), Lamellibranch (6.96%), alima larva (2 24%) and other groups (doliolid, chaethgnath (2.69%), siphonophore (2.08%) heteropod, medusa, siphonophore, pteropod, appendicularia (1 52%), heteropod (1.52%) echinoderm larva, salp, amphipod, Lucifer and and others (alima larva, cladocera, doliolid, polychaete, were less than 1%each (Table 2) salp.medusa, gastropod, pteropod, foraminifera, KILTAN echinoderm larva, fish larva, ostracod, amphipod, ctenophore, lucifer, polychaetete) less than Temperature: The maximum temperature of 1% each. surface water was 31.0°C at 1600-1800 hrs and the minimum was 27.5°C at 0600 hrs. The CHETLAT range of bottom temperature was 27.0°. From Temperature'. The water temperature in the 30.0*C at 1800 hrs, it gradually came down to lagoon ranged from minimum of 28.0°C during 27.5°C at early morning 0600 hrs and again 2400 to 1000 hrs to 30 0" during 1400-1800. hrs gradually increased to 31 0°C during 0200- The range of atmospheric temperature was 0400 hrs and it started increasing gradually to 25.0''C to 30.0°C. maximum (31.8°C) at 1200 hrs. Salinity. The salinity range was 34.4 to 34.69%, Salinity: The salinity range was 33.61 to in the lagoon and 34.69%, in the sea. 33.91 %o in the lagoon and 34.20%o in the sea. Dissolved Oxygen: The range of dissolved Dissolved Oxygen: The range of dissolved oxygen was 2.79 to 4.13 ml/I in the wind­ oxygen was 4.25 to 4.37 ml/1 in the sea outside ward reef. In the lagoon reef the range was the lagoon, in the windward reef the range 5.34 to 7.28 mi/I. The maximum value was 3.88 to 4.25 ml/I. In the lagoon reef the obtained from the area where live coral and oxygen range was 5.10 to 5.34 miyl. In the seaweeds were found in very good numbers. diurnal studies from 1800 hrs to 1800 hrs, 5.34 The value in the sea was 3.88ml/l. In the ml/I observed at 18C0 hrs gradually decrease to diurnal studies conducted inside the lagoon 2.79 ml/I (minimum) at 0.400 hrs and then it the oxygen fluctuated between 3.13 to 5.70 gradually increased to 5.22 ml/I at 1400 hrs ml I. The maximum (5.70 ml/i) was observed and 5.70 ml/I (maximum) at 1800 hrs. A at ISCOhrs. The oxygen gradually decreased decrease in the oxygen level was observed in to 4.13m/l (minimum) at 0600 hrs. Again it the night, gradully increased 4.13mi at 1000 hrs, 4.86 ml/1 at 1400 hrs and 5.10 ml/I at 1800 hrs. Productivity: The estimated gross production of surface waters of the lagoon were 238 mg Productivity: The estimated gross production C/m»/day in January 1987. and net production were 392 mg C/m»/day and 309 mg C/m',day respectively. Blomass and faunistic composition Blomass and faunistic composition The average displacement volume of zooplankton in the lagoon was 0.2ml and in The average displacement volume of zoo- the sea it was 6.0ml. plankton was 2.3 ml in the lagoon and 4.1 ml in the sea showing higher secondary In the plankton samples collected from production. the lagoon decopod larva (35.99%) and cop­ epod (33.37%) dominated in the sample In the lagoon decapod (79.65%) was the followed by chaetognath (9.45%), lamellibranch dominant group followed by foraminifera (12.02%) (9.23%), appendicularia (5.81%), heteropod copepod (5.95%) and others (alima larva, (1.25%), cladocera (1.14%), foraminifera chaetognath, heteropod, lamellibranch, sipho­ (1.03%) and others (alima larva, doliolid, nophore, gastropod, fish eggs, fish larvae, medusa, siphonophore, gastropod, fish larvae. amphipod and lucifer) less than 1% each.

204 CMFRI In the sea major group was copepod SURVEY TEAM II: FEBRUARY '87, ; (50 83%) followed by siphonophore (18.34), ISLANDS COVERED, AGATTI, KALPITTI, lamellibranch (11.38%), chaetognath (8.73%), BANGARAM AND BITRA TABLE. 18 3 fish eggs (2.77%), gastropod (1.81%) decapod (1.50%), cladocera (1.19%) and others each AGATTI (alima larva, appendicularia, doliolid, salp, Temperature: The maximum and minimum heteropod, medusa, pteropod, foraminifera, temperature in the lagoon were 38.0°C and echinoderm larvae, fish larvae, ostracod, amp- 33 0°C respectively. hipod, lucifer, polychaete) less than 1%. The decapod which was 79.65% in the lagoon Salinity: The salinity values of the surface was only 1.50% in the sea. waters of lagoon bluctuated between 34.4 and 39.5%o In the open sea the range was 36.5 AMINI to 40.5% „ Temperature: The surface temperature in the Dissolved Oxygen: The dissolved oxygen level lagoon was in the range of 26.5^ to 30.0°C- of surface water was in the range of 2.80 The temperature at 1800 hrs ^28.0°C) gradually to 6.70ml/l in the lagoon. The samples decreased to 27.©"C at 2200 hrs and remained collected from outside the reef showed wide same upto 0400 hrs and came down to 26.5°C fluctuations (3.80 to 7.S0ml,l). at C600 hrs. Then it increased to 30.0°C at 1400 hrs and showed a decrease towards Biomass arid Faunistic Composition 1800 hrs. The atmospheric temperature was in the range of 24.0° to 30.0°C A drastic The biomass of plankton collected from increase of 3°C was observed between 0600 the lagoon is very low where as in the open and O&OO hrs. sea, outside the reef the average displacement volume of zooplankton was 5-8ml. Salinity: The salinity in in the lagoon was The order of abundance of zooplankton in the range of 34.40 to 34.79%„ . The salinity in the lagoon was decapod (90.25%), copepod range was 35.48 to 35.87%„ in the windward (4.24%), foraminifera (1.7%) and others reef. (gastropod, appendicularia, lamellibranch, fish Dissolved Oxygen: The range of dissolved oxy­ eggs and fish larve) each less than 1%. gen was 3.04 to 6.43ml,I in the windward In the open sea the dominant group was reef In the lagoon reef the dissolved oxygen decapods (93.13%) followed by copepod (5.3%) range was ^.49 to 5.70ml/l. During the diurnal and othets (gastropod, appendicularia, lamelli­ studies the range was 3.16 to 6.43ml/1. From branch, polychaete, madusa, amphipod, clado­ 4.61 ml/I at 1800 hrs, the dissolved oxygen cera, chaetognath, alima, heteropod peteropod' value gradually came down to 3.16ml/l at siphonophore, ostracod, Lucifer, cephalopod, 24.00 hrs. Then it gradually increased to 3.52 doliolid, fish eggs, and fish larvae) each less ml,l at 0400 hrs, 3.88ml/l atlOCOhrs, 6.43 than 1%. ml/1 at 1600 hrs and started coming down afterwards. Higher values were obtained KALPITTI during afternoon period and lower values in Kalpitti is a' tiny Island sftuatad insid^ the night. the the igoon of the Agatti Island.

Due to shallowness of the lagoon' of Hydrography: Surface water samples collected this island plankton net could not be operated from the lagoon in the forenoon showed in the lagoon. temperature of 36.0''C, salinity and dissolved Oxygen values 39.2%o and 4.80ml/l respe­ Productivity ctively. The estimated gross and net production Biomass and Faunistic Composition: The volume of surface waters of Amini Island were 785mg of zooplankton collected from the sea was C/m»/day and 154mg C/m*/day respectively. 1.0ml and comprised of fish eggs (7'3.7%), eULLETiN43 205 TABLE 4 Estimated average number of zooplankton (in percentage per standard haul) in the lagoons and open sea of Lakshadweep Islands. March - 1987

Kavaratti Su helipar Androth Minicoy

Lagoon Open Lag(Qo n Open Lagoon Open Lagoon Open Lagoon Open Sea Sea Sea Sea Sea

DISPLACEMENT 333 09 2.66 25 0.89 3.5 3.3 61.25 9.5 VOL. ml. MEDUSAE SIPHONOPHORE 1.6 0.43 4.35 5.68 — 2.42 6.0 1.78 5.69 POLYCHAETE LARVAE 3.76 — — — — — — EVADNES?. — 3.00 2.55 — — 0.80 — 0.89 — COPEPODS 25.50 55.26 17.65 27.93 46.66 86.65 45 34.88 57.55 AMPHIPODS 2.47 — — — 0.19 0.40 - — — — DECAPOD LARVAE 50.42 22.50 56.30 52.68 41.64 0.40 -- 10 11.65 5.0 ACETES LUCIFER SP. — 0.66 — 0.21 0.85 0.80 — 23 82 6.00 GASTROPODS — 1.63 4.27 18,62 6.66

BIVALVES 5.48 CHAETOGNATHS 2.63 3.45 2.50 1.23 1.66 6.62 7 56 5,24 9.50 PELAGIC TUNICATES — — 1.45 0.3 — 1.31 3.27 — — FORAMINIFERA APPENDICULARIA — 3.08 3.20 5.97 — — 5 27 — 7.00 FISH EGGS 17.38 10.00 825 6.00 8.38 0.60 13 3.12 2.60 FISH LARVAE — — — — 0.62 — 0.15 — —

decapod (23.4%), copepod (2.2%) and others The dominant group was decapod (90.13%) (gastropod, fish larvae, polychaete, amphipod, followed by fish eggs (8.73°/,). The other heteropod and pteropod) each less than 1%. groups such as copepod, gastropod, fish larve, lamellibranch, foraminifera, polychaete, medusa, BANGARAM amphipod, alima, pteropod and siphonophora Hydrography were each less than 1 %.

The minimum temperature record was BITRA 34.0''C and the maximum 36.2°C. Temperature: The maximum and minimum The minimum and maximum salinity temperatures recorded were 36.0° and 35.0°C values recorded were 36.2 and 36.9%„ respec­ respectively. Where as the maximum and tively. minimum atmospheric temperatures recorded were 38.0°C and 36.0° respectively. Dissolved oxygen values were in the range of 5. 2 to 6.3 ml/i. Salinity: The salinity values ranged between 37.2 and S8.2%„ Biomass and Faunistic Composition : Dissolved oxygen : Dissolved oxygen of the The average displacement volume of zoo­ surface water fluctuated between 4.34 and 5.89 plankton was only 0.5 mi inside the lagoon. ml/1.

206 CMFRI Biomass and Faunistic Comp''mposit/on : Salinity: The salinity was within the range of 33 38 to 35.0%,. The average zooplankton displacement volume was 0.6 ml in the lagoon. The major Dissolved Oxygen. The dissolved oxygen values group present was decapod (73 4%) followed by were in the range 1 01 ml/litre to 6.6ml/litre- cropepod (18 59%), fish eggs (3.05%) and The low values of I.OIml/litre was noticed chaetognath (2 45%). The other groups each in the lagoon waters very close to shore. below ^% were gastropod, fish larva, iameili- This was either due to decomposition or put- branch, foraminifera, polychaete, amphipod, rification of gut contents of tuna which were cladocera, aiima and heteropod. thrown into the sea by the fishermen before the fish is boiled and sundried for making SURVEY TEAM III MARCH-1987 mas. A close examination of the water sam­ ISLANDS COVERED - KAVARATTl SUHELIPAR, ples and plankton collected from this area KALPENI, ANDROTH AND MINICOY did not show the presence of any organisms Table 1 & 4 KAVARATTI which might cause red water phenomenon or depletion of dissolved oxygen. Temperature:- The maximum and minimum surface temperatue of lagoon waters recorded Productivity: The estimated gross and net during 24hrs was 31.5"C and 28.2=C. The production values of Suhelipar lagoon surface atmospheric temperature was in the range of water samples were 244.41 mgC/m^day and 25°C to ai^C. Nil respectively.

Sa/in/ty:- In the lagoon the maximum salinity Biomass and faunstic Composition: The value of 34.4%,o was recorded at 20.00 hrs average displacement volume of plankton and the minimum of 29.5%^ was noticed at collected from the lagoon area was 2.66ml. 08.00 hrs. In the open sea the salinity of Decapod larvae and copepods which consti­ surface sea water was 32.28 to 32.45%o tuted 56.30% and 17.65% were the two major groups of zooplankton. The other groups which Dissolved Oxygen: The minimum and maximum occurred in less than 10% were fish eggs, values of dissolved oxygen recorded from the siphonophores, chaetognaths, appendicularians, surface waters of lagoon were in the range pelagic tunicates, gastropods and Evadne sp. 2.54/mi/litre to 6.1 ml/litre. In the surface In the open sea plankton collections also the waters of open sea it was 5.51 ml/litre. decapod larvae and copepods were the domi. nant items which accounted for 52.68% and Productivity: The estimated gross and net productivity values of lagoon waters of Kavaratti 27.93% respectively. during March 'b7 were 294.44mg C/m^day KALPENI and 48.59nigC/ms/day respectively. Temperature: The temperature of surface water Biomass and Faunistic Composition: samples of lagoons fluctuated between SO'-C The average displacement volume of plan­ to 38°C within 24hrs of observation. From kton collected from lagoon is 3.33ml. Decapod 02.00 hrs to 08.00 hrs the temperature was only 30=C and it increased to 32''C at 10.00 larvae consitituted 50.42%, copepods 25.50%, hrs and then there was a sudden increase fish eggs 17.38% and chaetognath 2.63%. The to 36°C anb 38°C at 12.00 and 14.U0 hrs other organisms which occurred less than 5% respectively and it gradually decreased from were chaetognaths, amphipods, appendicularians, 37X at 16.00 hrs to 32°C at 24.00 hrs. Evadne sp. and Lucifer sp. In the open sea The maximum and minimum atmospheric tem­ samples collected outside the reef area, perature recorded during 24 hrs of observation copepods were dominant (55.25%) and deca­ were 32°C and 28°C. The lagoon surface pod larvae formed 22.50% followed by fish water sample has reached maximum tempera­ eggs which constituted 10.00%. ture of 38°C higher than the maximum atmos­ SUHELIPAR pheric temperature of 32''C.

Temperature: The surface temperature of lagoon Salinity : Salinity values of the surface water water samples ranged between 29 2°C to 30X. samples of lagoon showed high range within

BULLEriN43 207 24 hrs of diurnal studies The maximum biomass was less in samples collected outside recorded value was 39.39%o and the minimum the reef in the open sea. was 34.68%o . In the inshore area copepods constituted Dissolved Oxygen: The dissolved oxygen values 44.99"/, decapod larvae and chaetognaths fluctuated from minimum of 1.15 ml/litre. The constituted 11.24% and 10 44% respectively. low oxygen values were recorded during the hrs Fish eggs formed 8 8% and siphonophores 02 00 to 08.00 when there was no sunlight or formed 8 5% Other organisms which occurred less light. But the higher values were recorded in small numbers are Limacina sp (a gastropod,) during the period 12.00 to 20.00 hrs. pelagic tunicates and appendicularians. The same trend was seen in samples collected from Productivity : other stations outside the reef in the open sea, except fish eggs which occurred in slightly larger The gross and net production of Kalpeni numbers ranging from 12.5% to 20%. lagoon surface waters were 1072.30 mg/m»/day and 328 88 mgC/ms day respectively during MINICOY March '87. Temperature :- The surface water temperature Biomass and faunistic composition : of lagoon was maximum of 35°C at 16.CO hrs and minimum was 30"C at 06.00 hrs, 1200 hrs The standing crop of the plankton samples and 20.00 hrs The temperature was always collected from lagoon area was just 0 89 ml and 30'C and above throughout the day and night. it is the lowest figure compared to lagoons of The atmospheric temperature was in the range all the other islands. Decapod larvae and 29=C to 33X. copepods formed 41.62% respectively. Fish eggs formed the third group in order of Salinity:- The salinity fluctuated between abundance (8.38/i). In the open sea collections 31 93 to 35.41 %„ during different periods of formed the bulk of plankton (86.55%) and day and night. chaetognaths constituted only 6.62% Dissolved Oxygen: The maximum dissolved ANDROTH oxygen value was noticed at 12.00 hours it being 6.2 ml/litre and the minimum of 3.39 mi/ This is an island without lagoon. However litre was noticed at 08.00 hrs. plankton and water samples were taken from, a small area in between the shore and the coral Productivity: The surface water samples of reefs, areas outside the coral reef in the open lagoon collected during iVlarch '87 indicate that sea, so as to study and compare the occurrence the gross and net productions were 551 mgc/m'/ of various zooplankters in this island, with that day and 369.36 mgc/m^/day respectively. of other islands. Biomass and faunistic composition : Temperature : The temperature of surface waters The average standing crop of zooplankton of the inshore and open sea were in the range samples collected from the lagoon area was 3rC to 32.8°C during day time, coinciding with very high during IVlarch '87 being 61.25 ml. the atmospheric temperature. This is mainly due to flowering of algae Salinity: Salinity values of surface water {Lingbea sp.) Other zooplankters which occurred samples were higher and fluctuated between in large numbers were copepods (34.88%) and 33.60 to 35.12%„ Lucifersp. (2382%). The other minor consti­ tuents of plankton were gastropods (18.62%), Dissolved Oxygen : Dissolved oxygen of surface decapod larvae (11.61%) and chaetognaths, fish waters were in the range 3.18 ml/litre to 3 60 eggs and siphonophores occurred in very meagre ml/litre. numbers. In the open sea samples collected outside the coral reef the volume of plankton Biomass and faunistic composition : was just 9.5 ml and Lucifer species and The displacement volume of plankton gastropods occurred only in less numbers collected inshore area is 6 ml whereas the (6.31%) and (6.66%) respectively.

208 CMFRl DISCUSSION attributed to heavy evaporation due to high atmospheric temperature and heat within the The Lakshadweep sea comprising of 10 lagoon and also poor inflow of oceanic waters inhabited islands and 17 uninhabited islets with from outside the reef into the lagoon and a total land area of 32 Sq. km with total extent maximum saturation of chemicals of the coral of lagoon of almost 420 sq.km is an important reef with the water masses inside the lagoon. zone in the fishery potential map of the Indian Ocean. A knowledge of the environmental The minimum and maximum dissolved conditions of the water in and around (including oxygen values of surface waters lagoon lagoons) Lakshadweep is essential for studying fluctuated between 2ml/litre to 6 ml/litre in most several problems of new and existing fishery of the lagoons except Suhelipar where the resources. minimum value of 1.15 ml/litre was noticed. This has resulted in the mortality of polychaetes, The Central Marine Fishers Research Institute clams and crabs. The sudden changes in the is a pioneer in starting detailed oceanographic same place might be due to water movements, investigations of the environmental conditions circulation and mixing and different biological of Lakshadweep Sea (Jayaraman etal., \^bS, changes of different marine erganisms including 19DU) and since then several investigators have phytoplankton, seaweeds and sea grass. added more information on tnis aspect. A detailed uptodate riview of the literature on the It is reported by Rao et al. (1966) that environmental features of the Lakshadweep Sea from the distribution of temperarure, salinity, has been given by James etal. (19Uti), Nair dissolved oxygen and density that up welling etal. (I9bt»j, which covers wind system, sea occurrs during the Nov.-December period in surface circulation, hydrographic conditions the Lakshadweep Sea close to minicoy and (Water masses, water movements, chemical this phenomenon is confined to only upper charscteristics of waters, sea surface temperature^ 160 metres depth. It is also found that a dissolved oxygen maxima and minima, water divergence vone (around 71 "E and9'30 N) characteristics, convergence and divergence and a convergence zone (with an axis roug­ zones) and environmental features in relation to hly along 79^t and 8^N) be in the same area. fishes. The waters of lagoons of Lakshadweep The salient findings of physico-chemical are productive and production rata during Jan. conditions and plankton ot lagoons and seas March '87 showed wida variation in different around the Lakshadweep islands based on the islands (Tabla-I). Earlier reports (Tranter and studies conducted by three survey teams during George; 1972) indicate that inside the lagoon Jan, Feb and iViarch '87 respectively are as the secchi disc visibility is 27 metres and follows. extenction coefficient is 0.017 and rate ^ of production is 3.7gm3 c/m»/day. Nair et al The high value of SS^'C temperature of (,1936) reported that the euphotic zone of surface waters observed in Agatti and Kalpeni the Lakshadweep sea is almost over 90m. lagoons during February and March is significant. As such thd production per unit voluma in In Minicoy the surface temperature of lagoon the surface waters may not be high. Howavar waters remained in the range 32'C to 33X, according to them the integrated value for higher than the atmospheric temperature even the whole water column is of the range of during the night time (20.00 hrs to 04.00 hrs) almost iOJmgC/m^day and this high value is after sunset and before sunrise. Otherwise the highly significant for oceanic waters. sea surface temperature observed in the open Arabian sea was high during May-June period different authors reported different aspects and low in the month of July '87. of secondary production in the lagoon and open sea of Lakshadweep Islands. Silas (1972) During the period Jan.-March '87 the high studied bioscattaring in the shallower depths salinity values of surface samples of lagoon off Minicoy, Agatti, Pitty, Kavaratti, Kalpeni, waters observed were, Kalpitti lagoon (39.2%J, and Androth islands and of Snheripar. According Bangaram (36%,,), Bitra (38.2%j and Kalpeni to him the estimated monthly mean standing (39.39%,). These high salinity values could be crop of zooplankton varied between 26 and

L'-ETIN43 209 144ml per lOOOm' of water in rhe sea around coral reefs form an ideal ground for settle­ Lakshadweep According to Mathew (MS) ment for crustaceans especially crabs. The euphausid fauna is an important constituent occurrence of zoea end megalopa larvae is in the DSL and it is the staple food for tunas also an indication to show that the lagoon and bill fishes which form the main fishery and adjacent areas are ideal breeding grounds of Lakshadweep Sea. He has reported occurr­ for crabs and this is proved by the presence ence of 19 species of Euphausids from this of berried crabs in coral reefs during the area but according to him there has been no period Jan-March '87. record of catching any of these species from Other organisms which occurred in very the coral lagoons and atolls. Tranter and small numbers in the plankon samples of lagoon George (1972) who studied zooplankton abu­ were Pluteus larva, of Ophuroid and Echinoida, ndance of Kavaratti and Kalpeni atolls during Bipinnaria larvae of starfishes and Auricularia October and December period observed swar- larva of holothurians. Evadne sp, amphipods, of ostracods, Cypridina sp. According to them polychaete larvae, pelagic tunicates, foraminifera, the biomass was greatest seaward of the ostracods and fish larva also occurred in lesser western lagoon of Kavaratti and gets depleted numbers. enroute ocean to lagoon. From zooplankton samples collected from the lagoons of different An intensive stud/ of the physio-chemical islands during Jan-March'87, Eupshausid spe­ conditions and productivity studies with special cimens could not be obtained. The biomass reference to various zooplankton asemblages of of zooplankton of most of the lagoons is the lagoon during different seasons is essential negligible except Minicoy The occurrence of to get a complete picture of marine fishery Lucifer sp, copepod sp. and Lingbea (Algae) resources which include Tuna and Billfishes, in the lagoon has increased the s;anding crop ornamental fishes, echinoderms, sea weeds, o1 zooplankton to 61.5ml, The lower values sponges, molluscs, crustaceans and corals. of biomass of the lagoon sample than the open sea sample might be due to feeding of ACKNOWLEDGEMENT zooplankton by reef communities during their The authors are grateful to Dr. P. S. B. R. transit across the reef to lagoon as reported James, Director and Dr. Alagarsamy, Joint by Tranter and George (197.^). Goswamy (1973) Director, Central Marine fisheries Research studied the zooplankton assemblages of the Institute, for active encouragement. The field lagoons and seas of Lakshsdweep. He has work at various islands was possible only with recorded very high value of 178ml of zoo­ the facilities provided by the Lakshadweep. plankton biomass per 1000^ and encountered Administration and the willing co-operation of different species of copepods (b2sp), chaet- its officers especially Mr. George Verghese, ognaths (8sp), mysids (3sp) polychaetes (5sp) Director of Fisheries. amphipods (28 sp) decapods, fish eggs and larvae. Most of the above mentioned organisms REFERENCES occurred in plankton samples collected from Bhattathiri, P.M. and V. P. Devassy 1979: the Lakshadweep lagoons during this survey Biological Chracteristics of the Lacca- conducted during Jsn-March'87. In most of dive sea. In THE LACCADIVE SEA the lagoons decapod larvae and copepod (Lakshadweep), N/0 Techenical Reports'- the constituted the dominant items of zoo­ 182 pp. plankton sample. The other zooplankters which occurred in moderate quantities were Cooper. L. H. N. 1957 : Some chemical and siphnophores, chaetognaths, fish eggs, bivalves physical factors controlling the biolo­ and appendicularians. A plankton sample gical productivity of temperature and collected near Kalpitti, a tiny island, just tropical ocenic waters. Proc. 8th Pacific outside the reef showed very high conce­ Sci. Congr. Philllppines, 3A: 1157-1163. ntration of fish eggs (73.2%) followed by Goswamy, S C. 1973: Observation on some decapod larvae constituting 23.4%. The high planktonic group of Kavaratti Atoll precentage of decapod larvae in the lagoon Laccadives). Indian Nat Sci. Acad, or outside the reef samples show that the 391 (6) : 676-686.

210 CMFRI Goswamy, S. C. 1979 : Zooplankton studies in Scomb. Fishas Pt. 11: IdA-lQl. Mar. the Laccadive sea (Lakshadweep). NIO Biol. Ars. India. Tech. Rep , 180 pp. Qasim S. Z. P. M. A. Bhattathiri 1971: Goswamy, S. C. 1983:- Production and Zoo- Primary productivity of a seagrass plankton community structure in the bed on Kavaratti Atoll (Laccadives) lagoon and surrounding sea at Kavaratti Hydrobiol. 38: 29-38. Atoll (Lakshadweep)- Indian J. Mar. Rao, Gangadhara L V. and R. Jayaraman Sci., 12:31-34. 1966:- Upwelling in the Minicoy Reg­ Jayaraman, R., C. P Ramamirtham and K. V- ion of the Arabian sea. Curr. Sci, Sundararaman 1959 : The vertical distri­ 35 (15):378-380. bution of dissolved oxygen in deeper Rao, Panakala, D. and R. Jayaraman 1970:- waters of the Arabian Sea in the neigh­ On occurrence of oxygen maxima bourhood of the Laccadives during the summer, 1959, J. mar, bio/, Ass. india, and minima in the upper 500 meters 1 ,2): 206-211. of north western Indian Qcean. Proc. Indian Acad. Sci., 71 (6) B; Jayaraman, R., C P. Ramamirtham, K. V. Su- 230-246. ndraraman and C. P. Aravindakshan Nair I960:- Hydrography of the Lacc­ Rao, Panakala, D. R. V. S. Sarme. J. S. adive offshore waters Ibid, 2 (1) 24-o4 Sastry and K. Premachand 1976:- On the lowering of the surface temper­ Jones, S. 1959:- Research vessel Kalava and atures in Arabian sea with the adva­ cooperative Oceanographic Investiga­ nce of south West Monsoon season, tions of Indian waters: J. mar. bio/, Proc. 11th Symp. on Tropical Mon­ Ass india, 1(1): 1-6. soons, Pune, India. Madhupratap, M., M. V. M. Wafar, P- Hari- das, B. Narayanan, P. Gopala Menon Sankaranarayanan, V. N. 1973:- Chemical and P. Sivadas, 1977:- Comparative characteristics of waters around Kava­ studies in the abundance of zooplan­ ratti Atoll (Laccad'wj&s), Indian J, Mar. kton in the surrounding sea and Sci., 2:23-26. lagoons in the Lakshadweep. Indian Sen Gupta. R., Carotine, Moraes, T. N. Kur- J. l\Aar. Sci., 6:138-141. eishy, V. N. Sankaranarayanan, T. K. Nair, P. V. R. and C. S. Gopinadha Pillai Jana, S. W. A. Naqui, M. D. Raja- 19/2;- Primary productivity of some gopal 1979:- Chemical oceanography coral reefs in the Indian seas. Proc. of Arabian sea Part IV- Laccadive Sea. Symp. Corals and Corai Raefs. Mar. Indian J. Mar. Sci, 8:216-2^1 Biol. Ass. India ;33-42. Silas. E. C. 1962:- Investigations on the deep Nair, P. V. R., A. V. S. Murty, C. P. Ramamirt­ scattering layers in the Laccadive sea. ham, D. 8. Rao and V. K. Pillai Proc symp. Coral and Coral reafs, 1986:- Environmental features in the 1969. Mar Biol. Ass. India: loQ-^A. sea around Lakshadweep. Mar. Fish. Silas E. G., S. K. Dharmaraja and K. Renga- Infor. Serv. T & E Ser., 68:10-13. rajan 1976:- Exploited marine fishery NairP. V. R., G. Subburaju, K. T. Mathew, resources of India. Bull. Cant. Mar. Fish Res. Inst., Cochin, 27:1-2h. V. K. Pillai and V. K. Balachandran 1986:- Productivity of the seas around Sivadas P., B. Narayanan and K. Sivaprasad Lakshadweep. Ibid., 68:13-35. 1983:- An account of the Vegetation Patil. M. R. and C. P. Ramamirtham 1963:- of Kavaratti Island, Laccadives, Atoll, Hydrography of Laccadive offshore Rio. Bull. Wash, 266:1-9. waters. A study of the winter condi­ Tranter, D. J. and Jacob George 1972:- tions. J. Mar. Biol. Ass. India' 5 Zooplankton abundance at Kavaratti (2):159-169. and Kalpeni Atolls in the Laccadive Prasad. R. Raghu and P. V. R. Nair 1964:- Sea. Proc. symp. corals, and cora/ Preliminary cbservations on the prod­ reafs: 239-256. Mar. Biol. Ass. India. uctivity of certain tuna waters of the Wblfenden. R. N. 1906:- Notes on collection west coast of India. Proc. Symp. of Copepods, Ibid., 989-1040.

BULLETIN 43 211 19. ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE AND CONSEQUENCES

P. S. B. R. James, C. S. Gopinadha Filial, P. A. Thomas, D. B. Jamas and Said Koya

INTRODUCTION Pillai and Madan Mohan, 1183). Pillai (1989) has presented a detailed account of the envi­ The atoll environment, in general, is a ronmental damages in the Minicoy atoll based relatively restricted ecosystem where the impact on his observations both in the terrestrial and of interference of man and nature will mani­ marine habitats over a period of 15 years. fest conspicuously within a short time. The Wells {in lit) has presented a status report on habitat is fragile, diverse and easily vulner­ the ecological problems faced by these atolls able and the effects of adverse factors on such stressing the need for conservation of the systems are often of very serious consequences. islands. During the present survey attention Almost ail inhabited atolls of the world to­ was paid to the ecological conditions in man. day are facing environmental stress both in islands including factors such as siltation^ the terrestrial and aquatic habitats. The post death of corals, bio-erosion etc., and their Worldwar II activities on the Indo-Pacific consequences. These observations are reported atolls, such as active settlement, extensive in the present communication. cultivation of crops, military establishments, atomic tests, oil exploitation, pollutions of CHANGES IN SURFACE MORPHOLOGY various kinds, over exploitation of resources, Ever since human settlement, the natural wanton destruction of fauna and flora, intro­ surface morphology of the islands appears to duction of exotic plants and animals, dredging have been altered. The surface soil was remov. and construction activities among the man ed in many places and du.mpad to form made factors; cyclones, sea erosion, El-Nino, hillocks as seen in Minicoy by earl/ settlers pests and predators coupled with natural senescence of corals among the natural factors to make the land cultivabla. Lime stone and are the major agents that have effected not­ Sand stones were mined in large quantities as able changes in the physiography, morphology 'n Minico/, Kad.nat and Kiitan for construction and biotic communities of the atolls all over work. In Minico/ the eastern sidd has still the world. Lack of large buffer zones around several pits from whsre lima stone is quarried, oceanic islands is a major impediment in the In Kadmat island there is solid lime stone replenishment of the fauna, if subjected to stratum at the central part of the island depletion due to causes either natural or man which is mined in large quantities for con­ made. struction work. Kiitan has a sand stone stratum at a depth of about 1 m which was Many of the oceanic islands are threaten­ cut out into large slabs for the construction ed, endangered or modified. The protection of residential buildings (Figs. 1, 2). A large and conservatian of various atolls needs dif­ number of pits and ponds present are all man ferent approaches and this can be achieved only made. These longterm activities have changed with the understanding, co-operation and sup­ the terrestrial face of the Lakshadweep atolls port of the local people and administrators as in the case of many other inhabited Indo- lOhal, 1985). Pacific islands.

The Lakshakweep atolls are no exception VEGETATION to this global phenomenon of deterioration of reefs and their environs. The post independent Mangroves are not found in Lakshed\A/aep years have witnessed brisk developmental at present. The natural vegetation dominated activities in these atolls which have visibly by Thespesia and Pandanus along with many improved the living conditions of the inhabitants others are almost lost. Pillai (1983) has but not without side effects on the marine and pointed out the recent destruction of natural terrestrial habitats (Pillai, 1983; 1985, 1986' vegatatisn at Minicoy atoll in the last few

212 CMFRI Fig. 1. Sancistona mil 1874. Fig. 2,

Fi§, 3. Human relyse thrown at the iVIinicoy lagoon,

t, .. . . ! • ',» I! UiHf I |H

BULLETIN 43 FiB. S. The blackened iritertidal r«ef fiat and cJeac! shors ,„ „ ^ crabs at Kllten as a rasiilt of Transhuron oii spill, ''' *' ^"** °* "''* '"'* *''^' ^'^^ Sriss and 1974. ' holothurian*.

Fig. 7. An instance of oil pollytiori at Minicoy from unclaterniinecl source in 1981.

.^ -.. - .> .-ersnci of sand flat on reef flat at tht windward Fig. 11. Sea erosion of very high magnituda at thi tafloon I >. -)f Amini restfictirig coral Bfo^t/th to the oytor sliore of llinicay as sasn in 1932.

214 CMFRI Fig. 12. Granite bunds and concrci , _ - '• ;/,,,'. eroiion at IVIinicoy Atoll. , ,. ' ,i . ., , ,

Fig. 13, The lagoon t.»3cli ot ' i ''•-•' i ' - •'.• '< ' '' '•• 'y "•• ' '" ' "" '•'--. - ' •> '•*••< i >'> fi "• •'••

.,14. Th« northarn tip of ICiltan lagoon is almost fillscl Fig. I ' ' i - ,,,• n < •>ii • . .; -u ,, ,(.';» I.KC! , i.i /•.'•'<,•-.').;, with deposition of dredgid soil. Loeal people ,a t^',,,.. „ • i • sr i •,-..,„ „'j iMiU,.-:,'-^ »h : I ich for Oetoptis along with dead shoals. .,-(?,, u.,'' Fig, 18. A ttiicltet of Acropora aspera at the windward Fig. 21. Stonts tu rtsf of Arniiii island (soutli side). fiBt.

f'm- 19. Mass mortality to corals at IVIinii Fig. 23. Tht crown of thorn Acanthaster planei. rtsylf of 8xcessi¥« siltino- The B' Is elto (Jtid in large numbers (' years as a consequence ol expanding settle, merit and agricultral operation (Figs. 16,17) During a study visit to Kiltari in 1974 thick­ ets of Tiiespesia were observed at the north­ ern half. However, none was visible in 1987. The introdtJction of cattle and goats into atolls has also pot servers grazing preassure on tli8 groyrid vegetation and most atoJLs in Lakshadweep w/ill sl-iortly face fodder scarcity unless the level of live-stock is scientifically managed (Pillai, 1983). On the whole the natural vegetation of the atolls is fast vaoishing and plants introciuced from the mainland are taking roots.

THE COASTAL ZOIMES

Fig. 20. Holothuria (MertBnsiothurla) leuoospilota The coastal zones of the islands have ft«ciifig on algae to convert in to lagoon tancl beiti subiected to many changes. Ttiess includs at Anclroth. construction activities, ssa erosion and

CMFRI pollution of the beaches. Sea erosion is the shore. It was furnace oil with a pungent rampant in many atolls as is evident at smell. There was no major fish mortality. Minicoy, Kavaratti, Amini and Chetlat (Figs. However, intertidal organisms met with in­ 10, 11, 12, 13). The loss of land to sea in stant mortality. After a week of the oil spill these tiny islands is of relatively very high (5th of October, 1974) large number of the magnitude Preventive measures by putting planktonic ostracod Cyprinida dentata was tripods have already taken shape. But a more found dead and washed ashore on the lagoon careful and effective costal zone management side, though vertical and horizontal hauls for for these islands are called for to protect plankton in the lagoon and open waters them from sea erosion. The effect of sea revealed no dead plankton soon after the erosion is also manifested in the lagoon by oil spill. Due to the continued presence of way of the deposition of sediments affecting oil at the low water mark in the lagoon the the coral growth. benthic and interstitial organisms in the la­ goon and shore slowly started dying after a POLLUTION fortnight of the spill. The worst aftected were the holothurians Holothuria pardalis and H. Coastal zones of the atolls are also sub­ impetians in the lagoon; many of which were jected to pollution by human refuse (Fig. 3), found dead and washed ashore. H. rigida excreta and fish wastes. In Minicoy, the lan­ was struggling in shallow waters where oi| ding places are strewn with the wastes from presisted. many eviscerated and died slowly. tunas. The tendency to defecate on the bea­ Stichopus chlorodotus which were profusely ches by the local people due to lack of present in Kiltan during 1974 also died in modern facilities is also a major problem large numbers (at present there is a marked along the beaches in many islands. reduction in their number in the lagoon). Polychaetes such as Mesochaetopterus minutas During monsoon, tar balls and oil from came out of the tubes and died after a week undetermined sources reach the shores of onwards. However, Hippa which were very Lakshadweep and was observed in Minicoy. common in the lagoon shores were healthy Large quantities of withered oil reached and active even after a fortnight of the oil Minicoy in 1981 and got deposited on the spill. The beach clam Mactra cuneata started beaches near the Jetty (PiMai unpub. observ surfacing on the affected shores after two ation, Fig. 7). But no mortality to animals weeks and many died, showing that prolong­ was observed. ed exposure to oil is lethal to them, though they can survive short exposures to crude oil A large scale oil pollution (Figs. 4, &, 6) by rightly closing the shells. from the American Tanker ''Transhuroh" took place in Kiltan Atoll in September 1d74. On the northern shore, the shore crabs There was considerable spillage of oil at the Eriphia smithi, Leplodius exaratus, Grapsus northern tip of the atoll and large quantities aibolineatus, Actaeodes hirstutissimus, Pseudo- got deposited along the intertidal and upper liomera lata and P. vanofosa were the reef flats and lagoon shore. A long term species that met with instant mortality. The study of the immediate and subsequent effects isopod Ligia exotica also faced mass morta­ of this spill on marine fauna of Kiltan atoll lity. The hermit-crabs, though found heavily was undertaken by the scientists of CM.F.R.I. coated with oil on their shells, ware not Approximately 3325 tonnes of oil was affected. The intertidal gastropods such as thought to be spilled from the Tanker as Celiana radlata. Trociius radiatus and Drupa per the estimate of the officials of Indian tuberculata were found to be dying after two oil Corporation who visited the Thanker on weeks of the first oil spill. They all met with aground. The northern tip of the island was a slow death. the worst affected. Upper zones of the reef flat and the shores were blackened. The south­ Live corals were not affected by this spil ern side of the island along the lagoon either on the reef flats or on lagoon shoals. beach was also polluted by oil. Floating oil Oil generally floats on the water and unless was present for a week in the lagoon along it gets clogged on the coral colonies dil

BULLETIN 43 217 spills generally do not cause mortality to studied with a view to assessing the effect of corals. However, prolonged and chronic oil human interference. But as already pointed out, pollution can affect them adversely. effective comparison is not possible due to lack of early information on the ecology and fauna No beach cleaning operation or any de­ of most of the atolls. Dredging of the reef flats tergent was used at Kiltan during this oil at the channels and lagoon bottom, construction spill. The cleaning was effected by the natural of jettys in the lagoon and near shore, sea process of wave action. A team (including erosion and exploitation of the limited resources one of us,) (Pillai) again visited the Atoll without restriction are the major factors that in March 1975 to study the prospect of re- have adversely affected the lagoon habitats. colonisation of intertidal organisms where mort­ ality was observed soon after the spill. Though DREDGING adult crabs were absent, smaller ones were observed in rock pools and on intertidal rocks. The deleterious effects of dredging (both This indicated that recolonisation was not direct and indirect or instant and long term) on due to the migration of adults but was only corals was stressed by many scientists (Nashihira due to the recruitment of larvae after the and Yamazato, 1994; Wells, 19b6). Pillai (1983) conditions were improved. However, in the has pointed out dredging as a major factor that intertidal sandy shores there was no notice­ killed large number of corals in the Minicoy able improvement in the interstitial fauna. lagoon. The lagoons of Lakshadweep including Examination of the affected area in 1987 Minicoy, Kavaratti, Amini, Kadmat and Kiltan January, nearly after 12 years of the Tran- were subjected to long term dredging by the shuron oil spill in Kiltan, shows that the area Lakshadweep Harbour Department to permit is still having a paucity of shore crabs. entry of the mechanised vessels into the lagoon. At least in Minicoy and Kiltan it was observed Although there is no major pollution now that dredged soil was deposited on the lagoon at Lakshadweep, the coconut husks kept for shoals (as in Minicoy) and lagoon reef flat (as retting along the beach under stones is one in Kiltan) (Fig. 14) killing corals of extensive source of pollution. The essence from the areas. Instances of mass mortality of corals are coconut fibres oozes into the sea water killing still visible at the northern end of Minicoy near all the intertidal organisms. It has been observed the shore (opposite to old Leper's colony) and at Kiltan and Chetlat Islands that there are no at Kiltan. Subsequent sediment transport in the intertidal organisms under stones where the lagoon is adversely affecting the coral growth. coconut husks are kept. There is also a coir For some time in the past the administration factory in Kadmat Island from where consider­ stopped all t/pes of dredging in the Laksha­ able amount of effluents are let into the sea. dweep, but it was re started in Amini in January 1987. Amini is an island with mostly filled up THE MARINE HABITATS lagoon and very few corals and fishes are found in the habitat. Without dredging it is rather The marine, especially the lagoon habitat in impossible for the mechanised boats to enter almost all habited atolls in the Lakshadweep has the lagoon. Since the coral growth is poor undergone drastic changes. Lack of earlier and there is no live-bait fishery associated surveys and documentation of the fauna, except with corals the effect of this operation in perhaps in Minicoy and Kiltan, as well as Amini will be only minimum. However, in paucity of continuous observations by marine Kavaratti, Minicoy and as far as seen at Kiltain biologists is a major handicap in tracing recent dredging has certainly done damage to coral change, if any. We have such continuous growth. observations in Kiltan and Minicoy at least for a period of 12 to 15 years based on which some Natural calamities: Natural calamities like conclusions are already drawn (Pillai, 1971, cyclones, storms and tidal waves take a heavy 1983, 1985, 1985; Pillai and Madan Mohan, toll of the fauna of the coral reefs. Cyclones 1986). Some habitats are threatened, others not only destroy the vegetation but also the endangered, though not fully modified. During coral reefs and their fauna. An account of the present survey most of these atolls were cyclones that hit Lakshadweep island has

218 CMFRI been given by Jones (1989). Though the exetnt. The small-polyped Acropora which natural calamities cannot be prevented it is forms the dominant lagoon coral in Laksha­ essential to document the damage done to dweep, is perhaps, the most sensitive to silting the reefs and associated fauna after cyclones. (Pillai, 1975). This may be the reason for their large scale death and disintegration in THE STATE OF CORAL GROWTH IN the recent past. In 1974 the lagoon of Kiltan LAKSHADWEEP was found to have a very luxuriant growth of Acopora teres, A. aspera (Fig. 17), A Corals all over the world are fast dying corymbosa' and A humilis along with large out due to several reasons. They have domi­ thickets of A. formosa. However, the present nated the benthic marine communities of the survey has indicated that the corals of the tropical waters for several millions of years Kiltan lagoon have vastly died. Enquires with and might be experiencing natural senescence local people have revealed that there was and may vanish from the warm waters in intensive interference from the local people in course of time following the footsteps of their the lagoon habitats in the recent past. The ancestral-tetra corals. But such an assumption lagoon fishes found in association with is no solution to the mass mortality of corals corals were exploited for food especially by experienced in several reef provinces all over the women folk at low tide They put small the world due to many man made causes and nets over the coral colonies and break the sudden natural calamities Dredging, chronic branches to drive away the fishes (Fig. 15). During the low tide many people particularly oil pollution, sedimentation, prolonged exposures women and children turn the coral stones El-Ninos, cold water runoff on to the reefs, to collect cowries and other gastropods. They exploitation, predators and overexploitation for leave the stones upside down without putt­ industrial purposes (Pillai, 1975) are some the ing ttiem back to original position. All these major factors that hasten the destruction of have caused the disintegration of already recent reef corals. dead and live corals throughout the lagoon. Today, Kiltan lagoon looks depopulated and Some of these factors are certainly in is getting filled up fast due to siltation. operation on the reefs of Lakshadweep and the deleterious effect is apparent, especially During the present studies one of us during the last two decades, concomitant (Thomas) made an attempt to estimate quan­ with developmental activities. Mass mortality titatively the percentage coverage of dead to corals has occurred In minicoy in some and live corals in some sample plots of the sites as a direct result of dredging. The large islands both in lagoon and reef flat habitats. colonies of Lobophyllia, Diploastrea and The sample plots were of the area af approx­ faviids mentoined and charted by Pillai 1917 imately 25 sq. m. General observations on the opposite the Leper's colony are all found state of growth of corals was also made as dead by 1981 as a result of deposition of summarised below. dredged soil on them. The Heliopora and other ramose coral thickets found in 1974 Minicoy: The damage to corals in the lagoon (Pillai unpub.) in Kiltan were mostly found of Minicoy has already been brought to the dead in 1987. Dredging has also a long-term notice of the scientific public (Pillai, 1 d83), consequence on coral growth. The silt and Thomas found that the coverage of corals in sediments generated by dredging and thejr sample plots ranged from 5 to 10% of the excessive transportation over the reefs and bottom area. Of these 50 to 80 present was into the lagoon coupled with saa erosion are dead - a clear indication of the paucity of slowly killing many corals. live corals in the lagoon at present. The southern portion of the lagoon is fast getting In Minicoy and Kiltan many massive filled with excessive sedimentation, for the corals were found to be dead at the top due sediments brought by the water current from to silting, and the growing zone of large the north of lagoon has no escape further into massive colonies is confined to the periphery. open ocean since the reef flat is elevated and Even Without human interference this natural remain exposed most of the time acting as process is taking place on reefs to some an effective barrier.

6UL.LETIN43 219 killed many corals and large areas of lagoon PREDATORS reef flat is (F,g. 15) covered by the soil dredged and dumped on the reef flat. The lagoon is Of recent, the role of the crown of thorns mostly filled at the southern tip and there are starfish. Acanthaster p/anci, in the mortality of few corals. The dominant species of corals in corals in various parts of Indo-Pacific has been (he lagoon in 1974 were Acropora aspera.A. stressed by many authors A review of the formosa, A. intermedia A. coiymbosa and recent works on this aspect is presented by Porites andrewsi all of which formed large Endean (1973). The occurrence of A. p/anci thickets. However, these are not certainly found was reported at Kavaratti (Sivadas, 1977) and there at present in a great profusion though the Minicoy (iVIurty et al., 1980). Predation of species can be collected still from the various Acropora spp by this starfish (Fig. 22) and habitats. On the eastern reef flat, near the shore consequent death was recorded at Minicoy and just opposite the Dak Bunglow, there was a Kavaratti. However, the number of the starfishes profuse growth of Acropora in 1974. A re­ was not in any great proportion to call it a examination of the site in 1987 showed very plague. Recent surveys have not shown the little corals in this site. The inescapable presence of these predators in many of the conclusion is that the coral growth of Kiltan islands. was affected due to natural silting as well as dredging. The disintegration of ramose corals in BIOFOULING the lagoon was hastened by human interferences According to Nair and Dharmaraja (1983) Chetlat Island : Chetlat seems to have retained fouling on man-made objects in Lakshadweep most of its natural conditions in the lagoon is not very severe when compared to mainland habitats The northern side of the lagoon is waters. The structure and abundance of shallow, mostly exposed at low tide, and the fouling community is insignificant though rock bottom is covered upto bO% with large dome- oysters and serpulids are found on jetties and shaped colonies of Heliopora caeiulea, Psammo- other coastal installations, as seen in Minicoy, cora contigua, Porites andrewsi and Porites Kavaratti, Amini, Kadmat and Chetlat. Major (Synaraca) convexa. Other reef corals, though fouling organisms such as barnacles, bryozoans, occur, are not very dominant. The inner lagoon mussels and hydroids are extremely rare. Wood reef flat is covered predominantly with the boring bivalves and crustaceans occur that cause massive coral, Porites. No sign of large scale damage to timber structures. death of corals due to excessive interference from natural or artificial factors was recorded BIOEROSION from Chetlat. The reefs and reef associated organisms are rich and the marine habitat Many boring organisms attack both living presents a healthy look. However, the lagoon and dead corals. The major groups tha^ is also getting filled by natural processes. The cause erosion to coral skeleton include algae, open reef flats have a profusion of encrusting sponges, polychaetes, sipunculids, bivalves Montipora and Porites. Fishing activities in the and echinoderms. The activities of these lagoon are very limited and it is learnt that only organisms on both massive and ramose corals during active monsoon, the local people fish in cause their break down. The sediments that the lagoon for food. Live-baits are not exploited are produced by the boring activities also in any large quantities from this atoll. Sea contribute to filling up of the lagoon. Though erosion is taking place at some sites and preven­ many of these agents occur on the reafs of tive measures are being taken by the local Lakshadweep, to date no serious stud/ on administration. their occurrence and role in the breakdo/vn and erosion of calcareous material in our The state of coral growth in some islands waters was taken up. During ths present study such as Androt and Agatti is reported to be some observations ware made on boring good. In the absence of any lagoon in Androth the coral growth on the reef flat alone is of any sponges, molluscs and the role of holothurians importance. Agatti is rich in corals and inter­ in converting calcareous algae into sand ference, if any, is yet to be ascertained. which are given beiow:

BULLETiN43 221 Sponges: The number of species of boring sponges recorded is 18 as listed below:

Many species of sponges are well known Phylum porifera Grant for their capacity to bore into calcareous Glass Demospongiae Sollas objects such as shells, corals, calcareous algae etc. Studies made in the past have shown Order poecilosclerida Topsent that the sponges etch out minute calcareous Family Raspailiidae Hentschel particles of an average size 56 x 47 x 32/^ 1 Rhabderemia prolifera Annandale (length x width x height) from the interior of Order Hadromerida Topsent the substratum by the activity of filopodial Family Spirastrellidae Hentschel structures produced by certain specialised cells so common at the site of boring. These filo­ 2. Spirastrella coccinea (D & M ) podial structures grow and form fine crevices 3. S. cuspidifera (Lamarck) around a future chip, subsequently, these 4. S. inconstans (Dandy) filopodial structures borne by different such 5. S. aurivilli Lindgren cells fuse together to form a filopodial basket around a future chip and then it is pulled Famfly Clionidae Gray out from the site. Such chips are expelled 6. Amorphinopsis excavans Carter through the excurrent stream of water. These 7. Aka minute Thomas chips contribute much to the mineral fraction 8. A. laccadivensis n. sp. of sediments produced in the reef environment and in the Fanning Island, it is estimated 9. Cliona celata Grant that, such chips contribute to about 30% of 10. C. vasiifica Hancock the total sediment load (Rutzler, 1975 Rutzler 11. C. viridis (Schmidt) and Rieger, 1973). 12. C. carpenter! Hancock 13. C. ensifera Sollas The quantity of calcareous chips thus 14. C. mucronata Sollas produced by the activity of sponges vary considerably both in time and space. It was 15. Thoosa armata Tapsent calculated that in Bermuda reef the total Order Epipolasida Sollas chipping activity of sponge release as much Family Jaspidae de Laubanfels as 250 gm-2 year-i which corresponds to a Coral layer of 0.1 mm thick. In areas of high 16. Japis penetrans (Carter) sponge concentration this figure may go up Order Carnosida Carter to 3 kg-3 year-' (or Imm/year). From these Family Halinidae de Laubenfels figures the part played by sponges in the 17. Hal/na plicata {Schmidt) bioerosion of the reef environment can be well imagined (Rutzler,1975). It has also bean 18. Samus anoyma Qra^ calculated that only 2-3% of the eroded sub­ In order to get clear picture on the abundance stratum is removed in dissolved form. of the various boring species in each island the total incidence of each species was estimated Composition of boring sponge population in for Kavaratti, Suheli, Kalpeni, Androth and Lakshadweep: An interesting feature noted Minicoy separately, and this indicated that with regard to the sponge fauna, both island- Cliona celata Grant dominates in both Kavaratti wise and morphozone-wise, is dominance of and Suheli, C. ensifera Sollas in Kalpeni and boring species in relation to non-boring ones. C. mucronata Sollas in Androth. Howavar, The percentage occurrence of boring species the distribution pattern noted at Minicoy is in the total number of species represented at quite different since both C. calata Grant and each island may be given as follows : Kava- C. vastifica Hancock are equally dominant. '•atti-46.4%; Kalpeni-36.1%; Suheli-48.3%; An- Summarising the distribution pattern of both droth-66.6%; l\/linicoy-50.0%; Amini-38.4%; C mucronata Sollas and C. ensifera Sollas, it Kiltan-20.0%; Agatti-60 0% and Kadmat-58.3%. may be stated that these two are typical coral

222 CMFRI boring species in both reef and lagoon habitats. will, no doubt, accelerate the activity of secon­ At Androth the former dominates while in dary borers such as polychaetes, molluscs, Kalpeni, the latter. In these two lagoons the sipunculids etc. activity of C cefata and C. vastifica is at a low Boring sponges can make extensive galleries level, and it is not known fully at present inside the coral, but the magnitude of damage whether they are being checked by the activities caused cannot be assessed by exrernal examina­ of C. mucronata or C. ens if era. tion alone. This is because the outer layers of Four species of the genus Spirastrella are the coral remain practically untouched and commonly found in various lagoons surveyed; more or less intact except for a few pores for the of which two, viz., S. inconstans (Dendy) and excurrent and incurrent papillae to project out. S. cuspidifera (Lamarck), show the tendency to Atleast some of the massive corals examined overgrow the substratum after disintegrating it from different islands were in this advanced totally (gamma stage). Both of them usually stage of boring, and their interior was found make extensive galleries inside massive corals. practically hollow except for a few calcareous It is very interesting to note that both pillars stretching across the different tunnels C. margaritifera Dendy and C. lobata Hancock within the skeleton. which have infiltrated into the moiluscan beds An Acropora colony (partly dead; weighing of the mainland, mainly along the southwest 600 g with a maximum diameter of 15 cm, coast (Thomas, 1983) recently, have not yet bearing 48 upright branches arising from a flat made their appearance in the Lakshadweep. it base, was collected from Kavaratti, It was is possible that these may invade the Laksha­ found that out of 48 branches 34 were infested dweep water also. Attempt to transport pearl severely by boring sponges. Species-wise break oyster, mussel, edible oyster etc., infested with up of incidence may be given as follows: these borers to Lakshadweep, can cause their C. ensifara on 12 branches; C. celata on 11 introduction. Hence, any consignment of branches, C. mucronata on 6 branches; C. vasti­ molluscs (or culture from the mainland or else­ fica on 4 branches and C. viridison 1 branch. where to Lakshadweep must be screened Apart from the above mentioned species, other properly before it is despatched. borers such as polychaetes were found boring on two branches, molluscs on two and sipunculids Hartman (1958) feels that the coral reefs do on one branch. The above details indicate that not present as wide a variety of clionids as sponges, as a group, dominate among the might be expected. De Laubenfels (1950,1954) various groups of organisms that destroy the could report only two species from Bermuda branching coral colonies in Lakshadweep. and five from the West Central Pacific, while Burton (1934) could record no clionids from the The assessment of damage caused to the Great Barrier Reef. But the present survey stalk portion of branching coral is based on indicates that the boring sponge fauna is rather Acropora sp. collected from Kalpeni. The stalk rich and varied in Lakshadweep. portion of this colony has an average diameter of 5 cm and the various boring organisms Damage caused to corals: Analyses of the data occupying the cut end of the stalk were collected from the various islands during the identified incidence-wise. Sponge infection present survey indicate a very high rate of could be noted at 8 places, pol/chaete at 6 infestation in all the islands surveyed. It is places, mollusc at 5 places and sipunculid at noted that the sponge can bore into both live 3 places. Species-wise Incidence of sponge and dead corals alike. The death of coral will indicates that C. ensifara has the maximum never affect the activities of the boring sponge incidence (3 numbers; followed by C. cefata and since there is no trophic relationship between C. vastifica {whh 2 each). However, the inci­ them. Under this situation the chipping of dence noted in the case of C. mucronata is the calcium carbonate material can go on incessantly minimum (one). even after the death of corals and this will considerably weaken the entire reef frame-work Data collected from massive coral, from making it more susceptible to the wear and tear Kavaratti, show that boring sponges form by far, caused by waves. Such a weakened substratum the most dominant group causing biological i I LLETIN43 223 erosion here also. Only one species of sponge deep and massive burrows at the base of ramose (C. celata) could be collected and this species corals are present in most of the reefs of the occupied three different locations inside the Archipelago. These molluscs are more common coral. The other groups noted were polychaetes, on the reef habitat than in the lagoon. Another molluscs, crustaceans, sipunculids and algae; mytilid Botula cinnamomea which makes shallow polychaetes were noied at two different spots burrows was recorded from IVlinicoy. Its occur­ while the others at one spot each. In an area- rence in other atolls awaits confirmation. Yet wise analysis, C. celata ranked first. another group that burrows into limestone is the venerid Petricola lithophaga and P. diver- From pooled data obtained from the above gens. Both these species were collected from three samples it may be concluded that among Minicoy reefs. Two spicies of gastrochaenid, the boring organisms, the sponge ranks first viz, Gastrochaena gigantea and G. impressa also followed by polychaetes and sipunculids in- make burrows into corals. The former is wide­ Lakshadweep reefs. spread while the latter is recorded only from Minicoy. While Lithophaga bores the coralline Activity factor relationship : The factors influ­ material by chemical action, the gastrochaenids encing the activity of boring sponge in the, reef act mechanically to make burrows 1.5 to 3 cm envivonment are many. Rutzler (1975) has deep. Jouannetia cumingii is found throughout experimentally proved that when a coral piece Lakshadweep and this species makes deep infested by boring asponge is cut into two it will burrows on massive corals; the siphon of this stimulate the boring activity in the resultant species project 2 to 3 cm from the burrow. This bits considerably. Cutting channels across the is also an effective mechanical borer. reef will produce a similar effect and the chipping will go on at an accelerated rate atleast A few wood boring bivalves such as along the cut edges of the channel. Illumination Teredothyra, Uparotus, Teredo, Lyrodus, Bankia, also plays an important role in the accelerated Pholas and Martesia were also recorded from activity of boring sponges (Rutzler, 1975). The the Lakshadweep waters that cause damage to clarity of water in the lagoons of the various wooden structures and timber (Nair and Dharma- islands surveyed is rather exceptional and hence raja, 1983. this may be cited as an important factor that Holothurians: affect boring in a positive way. The role of the holothurians in the lagoon In conclusion, it may be stated that the sand formation has to be commented here. damage caused to corals by boring sponges is Several species of holothurians like Holothuria {Ludw'gothuria) atra, H. {Microthale) nobils rather widespread in all the morphozones of the and H. (Mertensiothuria) leucospilota feed on reefs investigated. In many cases it was noted the calcareous alga Halimeda sp. and convert that the infestation may kill the corals partly the same into largoon sand (Fig. 4). In some or fully. Localised death of a colony may not places 500 to 1000 tonnes of sand is known to produce any far reaching results unless consi­ pass through the holothurians in an year. This derable damage occurs to the stalk portion. In will have a direct bearing on the filling up of any branching colony that occupies the reef the lagoon. In some places liKe Klltan the front zone, a dead or disintegrated stalk can holothurian Holothuria {Ludw/igothuria) atra is result in the sliding away of the entire colony thickly distributed with 5-7 specimens in one into ddeper waters where it will be buried sq, m. The role of holothurians in filling up by sediments But, branching colony which the lagoon with sand in such places will be occupies level bottom will never experience significant. such a fate since ihe interlocking sf the branches of adjacent colonies will keep it in position, POPULATION AND ATOLL ENVIRONMENT even after the total disintegration of the stalk. Human activities on coral atolls is an Molluscs : important aspect that needs a detailed study in Lakshadweep; for the effect of changing Appukuttan (per. comm.) informs that the environment on population needs careful mytilid Lithophagt nigra and gracilis making assessment for future planning. As pointed out

224 CMFRI by Weins, (1971) the availability of percapita The death of corals in the Minicoy lagoon land, fresh water, reef area and lagoon for was found to have a direct inverse impact on population are criteria for estimating the popu­ the coral associated fishes and tuna fishery as lation pressure in restricted geographical areas explained in detail by Pillai (1983). Pillai and like small atolls. Though reliable statistical Madan Mohan (1986) have noted the micro- data on these aspects from the inhabitated habitat selection of many coral associated fishes atolls of Lakshadweep are still required, it may in Minicoy. For example Chromis caeruleus be assumed that due to improved medical the blue puller, which is an important tuna supplies, education, sanitation, nutrient food live-bait in Lakshadweep was found to be supply, and recreational facilities in the recent predominantly associated with arborescent decades the population pressure in the atolls is corals like Acropora intermedia, A. formosa, gradually increasing. A. teres and A. aspera (Fig. 18) which were very common in lagoon. The species is also found CONSEQUENCES OF ENVIRONIVIENTAL along with Pocillopora spp. and Stylophora DAMAGE pistillata. Hovyever, recently Pillai has observed their presence among large colonies oiHeliopora Mortality to corals set chain actions and caerulea at Chetlat. As pointed out by Pillai interactions bringing out visible changes in the and Madan Mohan (in press) this species co­ ecosystems. The loss of live corals directly exists with Dascyllus aruanus. It was observed brings out adepletion of associated organisms that mass mortality to the arborescent corals as well as an advancement of algae and animals in the traditional fishing areas of Minicoy that thrive on dead corals. Pillai (1983,1986) coupled with over exploitation have caused a and Pillai and Madan Mohan (1986) have marked dwindling of C. caeruleus. It is not described the adverse impact of mass mortality successful with dead corals though D. aruanus to corals in Minicoy atoll (Fig. 19). As already gets adapted to dead corals in the absence of pointed out by Endean (197j) the coral skeleton, sufficient living habitat of live corals (Pillai and on death, display a whitish colour due to loss Madan Mohan in press^). The resident fishes of living matter and many remain so, for a few such as Archamia sp , Apogon spp; Pristiapogon weeks or month. Soon, they get coated by and Spratelloides japonicus on corymbose corals green filamentous algae and assume a dark green are also found not able to adapt to dead corals. colour. Subsequently, coralline algae make an The overall result is that death of corals causes a dwindlmg of many important reef fishes that over coat. Dead corals are more vulnerable to are used as live-baits in Lakshadweep. Mass the attack of borers and bioerosion of the mortality to corals and dwindling of resident colonies starts at a fastur rate. Sponges, live-baits may affect the traditional tuna fishery sipunculids, molluscs and echinoderms start by pole and line, for they form a steady sources attacking the colonies and the resulting calca­ for baits, while the availability of migrant forms reous sediments cause more sedimentation in the is unpredictable. reef habitats. When ramose corals die and remain insitu they act as effective sediment RECOLONISATION OF CORALS AND trappers in between the branches and thus effect ECOSYSTEM IMPROVEMENT filling of the lagoon, ultimately the corals them­ selves get burried. Recolonisation of reefs and lagoon habitats by hard corals depends on many factors includ­ Coral associated or coral haunting fishes ing the magnitude of the destruction, modifica­ such as chaetodons, some humbugs (eg. tion of the habitat, availability of planulae, Dascyllus aruanus as seen in Minicoy) and rock nature of water current to favour the inflow of cod may remain associated with corals when the planulae; recurrent damage to habitat and the latter die but may disappear as the algal coating like. When a reef is damaged by catastrophic on dead skeletons increases (Endean, 1973). events (both natural and man-made) there Most of the live coral associates, including should be some hard bottom still left so that fishes, abandon the coral colonies. What is settlement of planulae can take place. As far found mostly are borers and a few crustaceans as one could judge, in some of the lagoon of and molluscs. Lakshadweep as in Minicoy, Kavaratti and

BULLETIN 43 225 Kiltan, the interference of sadim3ntation is of GO:^E\'J, T. E. AJD W. D. H\1TVI\N '93^ . high magnitude and there is great sadimant Boring sponges as controlling factors transport in the lagoon. Few new settiaTiants in the formation and maintenance of of colonies were seen in both Kiltan and coral reefs. Am. Ass Advmt. Sci. Minicoy though over growth of fresh living Publ. No. 75: 25-54. layers are seen on many dead and intact coral HART\/IAN, W. D. 1953. Natural history of the colonies. Reefs subjected to human activities marine sponges of Southern New appear to have lost capactty to re-generate since England. Bull. Peabody Mus. nat. the impact is long lasting (Wells, 1984). Based Hist.. 12: 1-155. on a study of the south Indian reefs, Pillai (1975) felt that within a period of 20 to 25 JONES, S. 1986. Lakshadweep—Generel features years reasonable recolonisation of Acropora will and some considerations. Mar. Fish. take place provided the conditions for recoloni­ Infor. Serv. T&E Ser., 68:3-6. sation are favourable. As far as Lakshadweep atolls are concerned even if any recolonisation MURTY, A. V. S. etal 1980. On the occurrence on the lagoon is to take place absolutely no of Acanthaster planci (The Crown of further interference should be there. Dredging Thorns) at Minicoy Atoll. Mar. Fish. has to be abandoned. Effective measures to Infor. Serv. T&E Ser., 13: 10-13. check sea-erosion have to be taken up. Des­ NAIR, N. BALAKRISANAN AND K. DHARiVIA truction to live corals has to be avoided. It is RAJ 1983. Marine wood boring molluscs rather difficult at this stage to say whether of Lakshadweep. Indian J. mar. science active re-growth of corals in the lagoon habitat 12: 96-99. will take place in future, where significant damages have already taken place. NAIR, P. V. R., G. LUTHER AND CLE.VIENT ADOLPH 1967. An ecological study REFERENCES of some pools near Mandapam (South India) formed as a result of the cyclone BURTON, M. 1934. Sponges. Sc/. Sap. Gt. and tidal wave of 1964. J. mar. piol. Barrier Reef. Exped. (1928 29) Brit. Ass. India, 7 (2): 420-439. Mus. Nat. /y«., 4 (14): 513-614. NASHIHIRA, M.AND YAMAZATO, K. 1974. CRIBB A. B. 1973. The algae of the Great Barrier Human interference with coral reef Reefs. In Biology and Geology of Coral community and Acanthaster infestation A#e/s: Academic Press, N. Y., 47-75. at Okinayft/a. Proc. IInd. Intarnat. Coral Symp. i: 577-590. DAHL, ARTHUR LYON 1985. Conservation on small islands, the human dimensions. PILLAI, C.S. GOPIiMADHA 1971. Distribution lUCN Bill., 16 (7-9); 88-89. of shallow water stony corals at Minicoy Atoll in the Indian Ocean. Atoll. Res. DE LAUBENFELS, M. W. 1954. The Porifera of Bull. Wash.,^^^•. 1-12. Bermuda Archipelago. Trans. Zool. Soci. Lond.. 27: 1-154. PILLAI, C.S. GOPINADHA 1975, An assessment of the effects of environment and DE LAUBENFELS, M. W. 1954. The sponges of human interference on the coral reefs the West-Central Pacific. Ore. St. of Palk Bay and Gulf of Mannar along Monogr. St. Monogr. Stud. Zool. the Indian coast. Seafood Export J., No 7; 1-306. 7 (12) : 1-13.

ENDEAN, R. 1973. Population explosions of PILLAI, C.S. GOPINADHA 1933. The endan­ Acanthaster planci and associated gered marine and terrestrial habitats of destruction of hermatypic corals in the Minicoy Atoll in Lakshadweep Proc. Indo-West Pacific Region. (In) Biology Seminar. World Conservation Deveolp- and Geology of Coral reefs, Academic ing Countries, Bombay. Nat. Hist. Soc. Press, 2: 350-4 6. (in press).

226 CMFRl PILLAI, C. S GOPINADHA 1985 Ecoioiaicaf larnpa Jjerietratlng calcareous sflbslrata. crisis in coastal and nharine habitafs A^anfi/bX, 2ir144-162. In: India's Environment Crisis 6nif SILAS, JE. Q ,,;S. lyiADHADEVAN AI^D IC, N^4-? Responses Natraj Publications. Dehra- APPAI^NAIR 19-5 Existing aodpfoROr dun, 120-130. vsed f^arififiRarks ^nd: reserves in Indian; PILLAI, C. S. GOPINADHA 1986 Status of coral ,j) review. rSymp. Endangered' l\Aarir>e^ reefs in Lakshadweep. l\Aar. f^ish Infqr. pnimals %nd Marine P^rks Mar. biof,> Serv. /•&£ 5er, 68: 38-41. rAsSi^ India, t985,(mefiio:) 28 p ,

PILLAIX S.GOPINADHA AND MADAN MdHAN SI\/ADAS, P. 1977. Report on ttie'lotc&rrence of 1986. Ecological stress in Mihicdy' Acanthasthi §p , in LaWshadWeep waters, lagooti and its impact on tuna livie-bajfls Matiasagar, io (3 4): l79-i80. " ''" ' lbid..6Q: 33-37. THOMAS,P.A. eta/.. 1983. Calcibiocavitological investigations^ Mar.^ fisij. /nfor.Serv., QASIM, S. Z., P. N. R. NAIR AND P. SlVADAS J d^i'Ser.. 49; 1-13. 1974. Oil spill in Laccadives fron) tl^e oil tanker Transhuron'. l\Aatiasagar., WEINS, J. HEROLD 1971. Atoll environment 7 J &2) : 83-91. and ecology. Ya/e Uni., 1-532.

RUTZLER, K. 1975 The role of burrowing WELLS, M. TURAN 1984. What's happening to sponges in bioerosion. Oceologia (Berl.) coral reefs. ICLARM News letter (87): 19: 203-216 5 7.

RUTZLER, K. AND C RIEGER 1973. Sponge WEELS, M. SUE 1986. A future for coral reefs- burrowing : Fine structure of Cliona New Scientists 1532: 1 5. 20. UNDERWATER OBSERVATIONS IN THE LAGOONS

A. C. C. Victor, A Chellam and K. Ra-nadoss

INTRODUCTION For the purpose of mapping the distribution pattern of different species of marine fauna and The paper deals with the results of the flora, if was felt convenient to divide each underwater observations carried out on the island into different sectors (Figs 1&2) and faunistic and topographical features by direct observations by diving were made on a transect underwater observations at selected localities line commencing from the low water mark to covering the entire length and breadth of the the outer reef crest In each transect line 4 to 6 lagoons of Minicoy, Suheli paar, Kalpeni, stations were selected for observation taking Kavaratti Androth, Agatti, Bangaram, Amini, care to include the shoreward lagoon, mid lagoon, outer lagoon, reef flat and reef. Kadmat, Kiltan, Bitra and Chetlat between January and April 1987. In each island a MINICOY week long survey was carried out by means of Sector I: This sector commences from the diving The scope of this report is limited and middle of the southern portion of the eastern by no means exhaustive It enables us to provide shore and extends upto the southern end. The first hand information on the nature of intertidal region is sandy intermittent with coral substratum, disposition of coral reefs, fauna and boulders. Along the shoreward portion of the flora of the lagoon. lagoon, the substrattim is mostly sandy. ^

• ULlEriN43 227- Massive corals (Porftes sp) are widely region oftha sand/ sho^e possesses a dense distributed in this region. Silt deposition is population of the clam belonging to the genus high in this region and due to this effect huge Mesodesma. Along the shoreward portion of shoals of corals lie buried into the sand. On the the lagoon, the substratum is sandy where dense mid portion, the lagoon's bottom is sandy. settlement of the clam belonging to the genus Here too, heavy silting is observed. Molluscs Lucina is observed The maximum density of and holothurians appear to be absent. The clam recorded is over 1030/m'. The coral branching acroporans are the donninant corals in community is sparse in this region, Silt deposi­ this region, of which the commonest and the tion is high. The mid portion of the lagoon most characteristic one is Acropora formos$. floor is formed mainly of coral sand. Majority Porites sp is also seen in certain locations. The of corals found in this region are dead ones. reef flat is coralline, intermingled with coral IHowever patches of branching acroporans are sand. Tridacna maxima occurs in stray numbers. seen here and there. Silt deposition is high in Sector II: This sector commences from this region. Corals found fo be dominant in the the middle of the island and extends upto the reef flat include several species of Acropora and commencing point of sector 1. The intertidal Porites.

MINICOY ISLAND SUHELI PAR ISLAND KALPENI ISLAND

''t,,,^

KAVARATTl ISLAND ANDROTH ISLAND AGAT Tl ISLAND

Fifl. 20 Figuro showing different sectors of the lagoons Whsre undsr Wetter observations were made

228 CMFRl BANGARAM ISLAND AMINI ISLAND KADAMATH ISLAND t

"'''>'>;r.ra'.-.->''''''''^^.>..

KILTAN ISLAND BITRA ISLAND CHETLAT ISLAND

Fig. 2. Figure showing different sectors of the lagoons where underwater obser\/ations were made

Sector III: This sector commences from SUHELI PAAR the mid point of the island and extends upto the point of commencement of sector JV. The The Suheli paar lagoon is very extensive intertidai region is sandy. Along the shoreward and deep in certain localities, inside the lagoon portion, the lagoon bottom is sandy intermittent two islets are located. One is Valiakara which with corals where dense settlement of clam is located pn the northern end of the lagoon and Luciria sp is observed. The sea grass Cymodocea the other is Cheriyakara which is located on the is abundant over wide areas. Sedimentation is southern end. observed to be high in few numbers. The fauna and flora of the mid portion of the lagoon are Sector I: This sector commences from the similar to those that occur in the sector II. The middle of the southern portion and extends reef flat is formed mainly of coral boulders on upto the southern end. On the eastern side of sand. Several species of branching acroporan the lagoon, the reef flat is submerged in water. and Porites corals occur in this region. The reef flat is constituted mainly of coral Molluscan fauna is sparse in this region. boulders with intermittent coral bits. The coral reef in this region comprised mainly of Acropora Sactor IV: This sector commences from the spp. Besides this, the other forms noticed are middle portion of the northern side and extends the pearl oysters (P/nctada sugillata) and sea upto the northern end. The fauna and flora of weeds (Halitneda sp, Padina sp. and Turblnaria this region are almost identical to those of sp.). Below this region is the shoreward portion sector II and III. of the lagoon where the floor is constituted

BULLETIN43 229 mainly of sand with occasional corals. The substratum is hard with dead coral bits and coral depth varies between 1m and 3m. This zone boulders. The coral communities of this region supports a variety of fauna and flora. These include Acropora sp and Porites sp. include the common corals (Acropora spp and Sector III: This sector lies in between the mid Fungia sp), molluscs (Tridacna maxima and point and the middle of the northern portion of Co/7U5spp) and the sea weeds {Ctiaetomorpha the lagoon. In this sector too, the outer reef flat sp, Halimeda sp, Sargassum sp and Padina sp.) of the eastern side is formed mainly of coral In the mid portion the bottom components boulders. The massive coral Porites spp are seen constituted mainly of sand with decayed corals. in abundance. The giant clam Tridacna sp is The depth in this zone ranges between 3 and seen in some part of the reef flat. On the 5 m. Corals like Acropora spp and Haliopora shoreward portion of the lagoon corals belonging sp. are very common. Fishes inhabiting the to the genera Porites and Acropora are moderately corals are Ostorhync/ius sp., Labroides dimidi- abundant. The gaint calm Tridacna maxima is atus, Dascyllus sp and Acanthurus sp. Two occasionally noticed. Patches of Turbinaria sp pelecypod molluscs namely Pinctada sugillata and Cymodocea sp are seen in some parts of the and Tridacna maxima are frequently seen. Note­ lagoon. The mid portion of lagoon floor is worthy among the sea weeds growing here are covered mainly with sand and dead corals. The Chaetomorp/ia sp., Halimeda spp, Turbinaria sp depths here varies between 3 and 5 m. Branch­ and Sargassum sp. The reef flat is submerged ing acroporan coral and the solitary cota\ Fungia in water and the depth range is between 0.5 and sp. are abundant. The reef flat is submerged in 2.0 m. The substratum is firm with dead coral water and the fauna and flora are identical to boulders. Frequenting the rocky bottom, fishes those that occur in the same zone of sector I & II. Vike Ostorhynchus sp and Rhinecanthus sp and Labroides dimidiatus are very common. The Sector IV: This zone commences from the middle molluscan fauna is sparse except for the occur­ of the northern portion of the lagoon and rence of Lambis sp, Conus spp and Tridacna extends upto the northern end. The islet maxima. The density of algal vegetation is very Valiakara is located in this sector. The eastern thin. side reef flat is composed mainly of coral boulders. The shoreward portion of the lagoon's floor is sandy with coral rocks where the depth Sector il: The sector commences from the varies between 1 and 3 m. The giant clam middle of the southern portion and extends upto Tridacna maxima is the most abundant mollusc the mid portion of the lagoon. On the outer in this region. The coral communities and algal reef flat of the eastern side, the substratum is vegetation are less abundant. The middle of the hard with stretches of coral rocks where the lagoon floor is sandy where the depth range is depth ranges between 0.5 and 2.0 m. The between 3 and 5 m. Molluscs and holothurians slope from the lagoon reef to the lagoon floor is are not observed in this region. The area gradual and the floor itself is covered thickly supports a wide variety of acroporan and Porites with sand and coral bits. The fauna and flora of corals. The reef flat is composed mainly of reef these 2 regions are similar to those found in the rocks and dead corals. The molluscs, Tridacna same zones of secfor I. In between the mid and sp and Lambis sp are generally abundant and shoreward portion of lagoon, Cheriyakara is larger in size. The area supports a thick growth located. The intertidal region of sandy shore of algae such as Halimeda sp, Padina sp and possesses dense population of the clam belong­ Laurencia sp. ing to the genus Mesodesma. Besides this, the other forms include polychaete worms siphun- KALPENI culid worms and Emerita sp. The mid portion of the lagoon bottom component constituted mainly Unlike the topography of other Lakshadweep islands, Kalpeni has an extensive lagoon in of sand with live and dead corals. The area is which 3 pitties and 2 Thilagams are located on poor in animal life but covered by patches of the southern portion of the lagoon. On the algae such as Halimeda sp. Turbinaria sp and northern porton of the lagoon, an islet called Padina sp. The reef flat on the western side o^ Cheriyam and a sand dune called Kodithala are the lagoon is submerged in water. The located.

230 CMFRI Sector I: This sector commences from the in some parts of lagoon. The reef flat is formed middle portion of the lagoon's western shore and mainly on coral boulders where the depth ranges extends upto the southern end. All along the between 1 and 2 m. Among corals, species of south west region of the island, the intertidal Acropora and Porites predominate. The less expanse is shallow and broad (100 m). The important genus is Fungia. This region supports length is about 500 m. The substratum is formed a small association of molluscs such as Tridacna mainly of coral sand. Dense population of the sp., Cyprea sp and Trochus sp. Among sea clam belonging to the species Tellina Idae occur weeds, Halimeda sp and Gelidium sp are the in this region. The shoreward portion of the most common ones. lagoon is heavily silted. The corals lie buried in the sand. Among molluscs. Tridacna maxima Sector III: This sector lies in between the and Pinctada sugillata are the common ones. northern end of island and the southern end of Among the echinoderms, Acanthaster plane/ and the islet 'Cheriyam'. The eastern side of the Linckla sp predominate. Among sea weeds. reef flat iss formed mainly of coral boulders Gracllaria edulis is abundant over wide areas. where the cowrie Cyprea sp is very common. In the mid portion, 3 pitties and 2 Thilagams The algal vegetation is very sparse. The shore­ are located. The shore area of these pitties and ward portion of the lagoon's substratum is Thilagams consists mainly of coral sand and formed mainly of sand. The most characteristic coral stones. Few dead shells of Codakia sp molluscs of this region are Tridacna sp and are also observed. Over the remaining portion Pinctada sugillata. Two species of echinoderms of the lagoon's floor, dead corals were found namely Actinopyga and LInckiasp occur in this strewn in abundance. Algal growth is poor In region. Among corals, species of Acropora this area. Parts of the reef flat are often exposed and Porites are found spread on the bed. Among during low tide. Coral growth is not observed sea weeds, Turblnaria sp predominate. The in this zone. The characteristic molJusc of this lagoon's depth at mid portion varies between 3 region is the giant clam Tridacna maxima. Algal and 6 ni. The lagoon floor is mostly sand with vegetation is seen to be poor. occasional corals. The fauna and flora that occur in this region are similar to those which Sector II: This sector commences from the m\^ occur in the same zone in sector II. The reef point of the island and extends upto the northern flat is formed mainly of coral boulders where the end of the island. The intertidal region is sandy range of depth is between 1 and 2 m. Molluscan intermittent with coral bits. Animal life inhabit­ and echinoderm fauna are generally absent. ing the beach sand is very poor. The shoreward Among corals, species of Acropoia and Porites portion of the lagoon is shallow and the sub­ predominate. Small patches of algal vegetation stratum is formed mainly of coral rocks and are seen here and there. sand. This area supports a tew species of echinoderms {Bohaclschia sp and Actinopyga Sector IV : This commences from the southern sp) and molluscs (Tndacna maxima). The sea end of the islet Cheriyam and extends upto the weed Gracilaria edulis and the sea grass northern end of the lagoon. The intertidal zone Cymodocea sp are common. However, the coral is sandy and the fauna and flora inhabiting this growth seems to be poor in this region. Heavy zone is very sparse. The shoreward portion of silting is observed in this zone. On the mid the lagoon is sandy intermingled with corals and portion of the lagoon the floor is sandy with debris. The coral community is represented by dead and live coral patches. The depth varies species of Acropora and Porites. Several species between 3 and 6 m. The sandy areas between of coral associated fishes occur in this region. the coral patches support a wide variety of The echinoderm and molluscan fauna are sparse. organisms. Among corals, species of Heliopora, Several species of sea weeds namely Entero- Acropora, Porites and Fungia predominate. morpha sp, Cheaetomorpha sp, Turblnaria sp^ Alcyonarians are seen in this region. Tridacna and Laurencia sp occur in this region. On the maxima is the chracteristic mollusc of this mid portion of the lagoon, the substratum is region. The echinoderms Linckia laevigata lie sandy with live and dead corals. The depth on the coral sand. Sea weeds such as Halimeda varies between 3 and 5 m. In most areas, the sp, Caulerpa sp and Gracilaria edulis are seen upper part of coral shoals shows profound

BULL£riN43 231 growth whereas the lower portion seems to be 3 m. The floor is sandy intermittent with ilive in a decayed condition. Silt deposition is very and dead corals. {Acropora formosa, Ar teres high in this region and due to this effect huge and A. fjyacinthus). The algal vegetation is shoals of coral lie buried into the sand. The sparse in this region. However, two species of echinoderms and molluscs are sparse in this holothurians namely Holothuria atra and H. region. The common sea weed which occur in cineracens are very common. In this zone, the this region are Halimeda sp, Caulerpa sp, and giant clam Tridacna maxima is the only mollusc Turbinaria sp. On the reef flat, the bottom to predominate. The mid portion of the lagoon-s constituents consists mainly of coral boulders floor is formed mainly of calcareous rocks where and sand The coral community is represented the depth ranges between 2 and 3 m. Molluscs by species of Acropora and Pontes. Except and holothurians appear to be absent. However Tridacna maxima, no other mollusc observed in many species of corals namely Acropora teres, this zone and Turbinaria sp are common. Porites lutea, P. solida and Fung/a sp are very common. The sea weeds {Gelidiella acerosa, KAVAR ATT I Turbinaria spp and Padina sp) and the sea grass Cymodocea sp are abundant over wide areas Sector I: This sector commences from the forming rich green tufts. The reef flat is southern portion of the lagoon's western partially exposed in this region. Corals are the shore and extends upto the southern end. dominant organisms of the reef flat. These The intertidal zone is composed mainly of include Acropora teres and Porites spp. Among coral sand with intermittent coral bits. Among molluscs, Tridacna maxima is generally the shoreward portion of the lagoon, the abundant in this region. In some areas, the substratum is sandy with large shoals of live weeds Gelidium sp, Turbinaria sp and Padina and dead corals distributed equally. The depth sp are abundant. in this zone ranges between 2 and 3 m. On the mid portion, the lagoon floor is mostly sandy. Sectoral: This sector commences from the Corals are the dominant organisms on the middle portion of the island and extends upto lagoon's floor. These include Acropora formosa, the point of commencement of sector IV. Along A. teres and A. espera. The most characteristic the intertidal region, the clams belonging to the molluscan fauna of this region is the giant clam genus Mesodesma and the mole crab, Emerita Tridacna maxima These clams are found sp occur in stray numbers. On the shoreward attached to or buried in corals and are firmly portion of the lagoon, the substratum is sandy. attached to substrate by means of byssus. The substratum is perhaps unsuitable for many Holothuiia atra is the only echinoderm occurring molluscs and corals. The echinoderm fauna is in this region. The lower portion down to the mostly represented by Hotothuria cineracens and middle zone is occupied by Tridacna maxima, H. atra. They live mostly on the sandy bottom Holothuria atra, Acropora formosa, A. teres, Porites lutea and P. solida Beyond this region and a few live ones under rocky crevices. Sea is the reef flat, which is composed mainly of weeds and sea grass are well represented; the reef rocks and dead corals. The depth of the important species being those of Gelidium, water ranges between 1 and 2 m. Tridacna Padina, Turbinaria and Cymodocea. Compared maxima, Cyprea spp and Conus spp are the main to the shoreward portion of the lagoon, the mid molluscs of this region. The sea weeds portion is richer in fauna and flora qualitatively encountered in this region are Gelidiella acerosa, and quantitatively. The lagoon floor consits Gracilaria edulis and Turbinaria sp. The sea mainly of calcareous sand inrermittent with grass Cymodocea serrulate also occur here and broken corals and live and dead corals. The there in this region. The surface living clarity of water is good and the depth ranges holothurians are sparse. between 2 and 5 m. This zone is characterized by thick assemblage of various coral communi­ Sector II: This zone starts from the middle of ties namely Acropora teres, A. formosa, A. the island and extends upto the commencing aspera and Fungia sp. The corals provide ideal point of sector I. The molluscan fauna is very habitat for many species of lagoon fishes- sparse. The shoreward portion of the lagoon Octopus macropus is the only cephalopod is shallow and the depth ranges between 2 and noticed in this region in pits and crevices. Two

232 CMFRI species of holothurians viz: Holothuria atra many spots. Two species of echinoderms namely and H. cineracens axe very common. Fishes Ophiocoma sp and Echinometra mathaei occur in vivid colours and various sizes inhabit this in this region. The sea weeds Gelidium sp and zone Besides these organisms, this zone is Trubi'aria sp are seen near the eastern end. The characterised by a dense growth of sea weeds zone that lie about KO to 200 m beyond the such as Gracilaria edulis, Padina sp and intertidal region constitute mainly of coral rocks Turbinaria sp. The occurrence of massive corals intermittent with sand patches. The depth at this and boulders is the most characteristic feature Zone ranges from 5 to 7 m. Corals are the of the reef flat The organisms found in this dominant organisms on the sea floor. These zone include the gastropods {Turbo spp, Trocfius include species oi Acropora, Porites and Fungia. spp and Cyprea spp). Among echinoderms, Ectiinothrix sp occur in stray numbers. The gastropod, Lambis sp are Sector IV : This sector begins from the middle distributed here and there. of the northern part of the lagoon and extends upto the northern end. The intertidal region Sector II: This sector commences from the is composed mainly of coral sand intermittent middle of the northern side and extends upto with coral rocks and debris. The shoreward the western end. The intertidal zone is mainly portion of the lagoon is sandy and shallow and sandy but becomes hard deeper down. Dense the environment is dominated by thick growth settlement of Modiolus sp is noticed along with of coral Acropora and Porites. The corals the pearl oyster spat Pinctada sugillate. Two harbour many lagoon fishes. The characteristic species of echinoderms namely Echinothrix sea weeds noticed here are Gelidium sp and diadoma and E. calamris cccur in this region. Turbinaria sp. Below the shoreward region is Live and dead corals mostly branching {Acropora the mid portion of the lagoon. The depth ranges sp) and masive {Porites) are seen in this region. between 2 and 4 m. The substratum is hard Good growth of sea weeds Gelidium sp and with live and dead corals evenly distributed. Turbinaria sp is noticed in this zone. The zone Acropora fornriosa, A. teres, Porites sp and that lies about 100 to 2JJ m beyond the Fungia sp with associated fishes characterised intertidal region has depth ranging between 5 this zone. Ov6r the lagoon's floor, patches of and 7 m. The substratum is hard and the algae such as Laurencia sp, Caulerpa sp and composition of the fauna and flora which occur Sargassum sp. could be seen. The reef flat gets in this region are identical to those that occur exposed during low tide. This region supports in the same zone in sector 1. very poor animal life The molluscan fauna is Sectoral: This sector begins from fhe dominated by Lambis truncata, Tridacna maxima, middle of the southern side of the island and Cyprea spp and Trocfius spp. The sea weed extends upto the eastern end. The bottom of flora consists of predominantly Halimeda sp and this zone is hard with coral boulders distributed Gelidium sp. here and there. Species of Acropora and Porites corals predominate in this region. The algal ANDROTH vegetation is poor. The zone that lies about Androth has no lagoon and therefore the 100 to 200 m beyond this zjne is deeper where the survey had to be carried out on the open sea. the depth ranges between 6 and 8 m. The substratum is hard with a film of coral sand. Sector I: This sector commences from the There is a very heavy underwater current here. middle of the northern side of the island and Deep channel like structures filled with sand extends upto the eastern end. The intertidal are evident in several localities. Different species region is sandy but a little farther the substratum of Acropora and porites corals are common. is hard where the depth is about 1 m. In this Molluscan fauna is not observed in this zone. zone, thick growth of i\/Jodiolus sp was seen over Turbinaria sp and Padina sp are the most the substratum underneath luxuriant growth of abundant sea weed occuring in this zone. The sea weeds. Spat of the pearl oyster Pinctada soft alcyonarians are seen on certain localities. sugillata also occur along with Modiolus. Large type boulder corals {Porites sp) and branching Sector JV: This sector commences from the corals mostly of Aoropara spp are s een in middle of the southern side of the island and

8ULLETIN43 233 extends upto the western end. The substratum beach is sandy. In the intertidal region, dead is hard. About 50 m width of this zone get coral beds are found exposed during low tide exposed during low tide. During low tide the along the southern region of the sector. The Modiolus beds are completely exposed. Sparse sea grass Cymadocea grows profusely in some settlement o\ Pinctada suglllata is also noticed part of the lagoon towards the shore. The middle on the substratum. The entire bed is covered lagoon and the regions towards the shore is by a thick mat of sea weeds. The coral sandy. Patchy growth of sea grass is found community is sparse in this region. The zone here and there in the middle lagoon. No fauna that lies about 100 to 200 m beyond the inter­ could be observed on the sandy bottom. The tidal region has a depth which varies from 6 to reef flat of this sector is discontinuous in some 8. m. Both live and dead corals of Acropora parts and the substratum is sandy mixed rock sp and Porites sp are abundantly seen. Bivalve bits. On the lagoon side of the reef flat, fresh molluscs are not seen in this zone. growth of corals could be seen. Branching corals are sparse The solitary corals Fungia sp AGATTI and the giant clam Tridacna maxima are abundant on the coral mounts. Sector 1: This sector commences from the northern point of the island's tip and extends Sector ///: This sector commences from the upto the passenger jetty. The lagoon's main highly eroded portion of the island on the entrance is located at the northern end and the north and extends upto the southern tip of the passage of all the mechanised fishing vessels Kalpitti Island. The beach is sandy throughout are effected from this point only. The bottom excepting the Kalpitti island where large of the lagoon is entirely of dead corals belonging quantities of dead coral bits are seen washed to both branching and massive types spread all ashore. The beach as well as the intertidal area over this region, Silt deposition is heavy on of the Kalpitti Island is only with dead corals the dead corals and the associated sea weeds and coral flats throughout. A small creek inter­ perhaps due to human interference. As a result cept the two islands, the bottom of which is of this, the sea weeds growth is retarded. sandy. The mid lagoon is mostly sandy with Gracilaria sp and Turbinaria sp are found along boulders and mounts of corals mostly massive the northern side of lagoon. Among gastropods, and branching type. The solitary coral Fungia sp Lamb/s spp and Conus spp are found in large and the giant clam Tridacna sp are found in numbers. Holothurian; sea urchins, star fishes good numbers. Lambis spp, Cyprea spp and and brittle stars are also represented in few Coows spp are also found in fair numbers. The numbers. Sea anemones with their associated sea anemones and their associated fishes fishes are in abundance in the northern part of Grammistes, Upeneus, Ctiaetodon. Amphiprlon. the lagoon. The mid lagoon towards the south Acanthurus. Canthigaster, Blennids. Chromis, is mainly sandy. The lagoon side of the reef Apogon, Piatax. Abudefduf, Batistes and flat is mostly with live growth of massive corals Callyodon are the other fishes found in good towards the northern portion. Towards the numbers in this area. south it is discontinuous in some places. Holo- BANGARAM thurians, Cyprea spp, Lambis spp and Conus spp are widely distributed on the lagoon side of Sector I: This sector extends from the pass­ the reef flat. Sea weeds are few in numbers. enger jetty situated in the middle of the northern Octopus is present in good numbers in the side of the island to the northeast corner of the shallow coralline crevices. This area, particular­ island. All along the sea shore the beach is ly the northern lagoon abound with many sandy. The bottom of the lagoon is mostly species of ornamental fishes like Chaetodon, sandy. Broken pieces of branching corals are Amphiprlon, Blennlds, Acanthurus, Apogon, found spread on the sandy bottom. The fauna Platax, Callyodon, Chromis etc. and flora are sparse in this region. Patchy growths of Turbinaria sp and Gracilaria sp on Sector II: This sector starts from the passenger dead coral pieces are found in small quantities. jetty in the north and extends upto the highly Holothurians, star fishes, Conus spp, Lambis eroded portion of the island, about 300 m sp and Tridacna sp are seen at random on the away from the southern end of the island. The sand/ bottom.

234 CMFRI Sector II: This sector extends from the pas­ side of the islands. Fishes such as Zanclus senger jetty on the south to the north eastern cornutus, Holocentrus sp, Callyodon sp, GobidS' corner of the islands. The beach is sandy. The Apogon sp' Platex sp, Amphiprion sp, Chaetodon lagoon bottom is mostly sandy. The mid lagoon spp, Epinephelus sp, Chromis sp are found is very deep. Massive blocks of corals rising hovering around coral growths in the northern from the deep and reaching 1-2m below the part of the lagoon. water level are seen here and there, Faunistic AMINI richness of the area is evident here. Solitary corals Fungia sp, Lami/s spp, Conus spp, Sector I: This sector starting on the middle of Cyprea spp, Tridacna sp, holothurians and star the eastern shore extends upto the southern tip fishes are seen in good numbers on the mounts. of the island. The entire beach is sandy in Sea weeds are totally absent. nature. The reef flat in this zone is more of rocky bottom with broken dead coral bits. At In between sector I and II, Tinnakara and the extreme south eastern side of this zone, the Parali islets are situated. The northern sides of depth of water is 2 m during low tide when the these islets are facing lagoon and mostly sandy reef edge is exposed. The bottom is more sandy while the southern side is either covered by dead in nature with good growth of sea grass, l-jere coral blocks of massive type or the reef commen­ a good population of echinoderms belonging to ces from the beach head. There appears to be the species Holothuria (microthele) noblis are paucity of fauna and flora in the islet zones. observed. On the other areas the entire reef Sector III: This sector extends fiom the north flat is exposed during low tide. The reef edge eastern corner of the island to the south western lies at about 200 m from shore line and is steep. corner. The beach of the island in this secto'' Sector II: This sector covers the central point is hard with coral debris spread throughout the of the eastern shore to northern most tip of this beach and also on the intertidal regions. It is island. The shore line is generally rocky in devoid of any notable animal life. The lagoon nature except on extreme north. The extent of adjacent to the beach is shallow covered with a reef flat is 10 m from the shore and during low wash of dead coral pieces. Some portions of tide about 25 cm of water is retained. The the lagoon towards the reef is deep with coral bottom of the reef flat constituted mainly of mounts reaching 1-2 m below the water surface. dead coral bits and reef edge is composed of Lambis sp, Conus spp, Cyprea spp, Tridacna sp big dead coral boulders. The observations made and Fungia are found on the mounts. The reef during low tide in this area revealed the fiat on the lagoon side having the characteristic presence of mostliy intertidal molluscs such as fauna such as Cyprea spp, Tridacna sp, Conus Conus chaldaeus, C. zonatus, Lambis truncatus spp, Drupa sp and Chama sp. Octopus sp is Vasum ceramicus and Tricardium magnum. also found in good numbers in the crevices of the dead corals. Sector III: This sector starts from the western side of the jetty and extends upto the southern Sector IV : This sector extends from the north­ tip of island. This area occupies half of the east corner of the island to the south west lagoon. At the jetty the depth of the water is corner. The beach is sandy towards the south, about 3 m. The bottom is mostly sandy and in west and of dead corals mixed towards the some places it is hard. Damage done to the northwest beach. The mid jagoon is sandy. fauna and flora due to dredging is evident in A sand mount is located off this sector in the this area. On the southern side, the shore is mid lagoon where sea weeds such as Gelidiella sandy and the lagoon is partly exposed during spp, Gracilaiia sp, Turbinaria sp are found in low tide. The reef flat lies about 500 m away heaps having been washed ashore amidst broken from shore line and constituted mainly of small bits of branching corals. Sea gulls in hundreds dead coral stones. During high tide the lagoon are found resting on the sand mount. Lambis retains 2 m of water and in some places big sp is found in good numbers in the sandy coral blocks of 1 m height were seen alive. Jagoon. Large numbers of the sea turtle Branching corals are few in numbers. The fisher­ Erytmochelys imbricata in group of 5-7 are men here have constructed the fish aggregating found moving about in the lagoon on the eastern device end they catch fishes during low tide.

6ULLET1N43 235 The bottom is mainly sandy and in some places tide. The bottom is sandy. At the northern side it is firm. of the lagoon the depth is about 2 m where huge block corals are found. At a point just Sector IV: This sector begins from the jetty west to the jetty area many species of branching and extends upto the northern end of the island corals occur. Pearl oyster spat are found attached The beach is mainly sandy and in the lowest to dead corals Different species of algae are low tide mark level of the extreme north the observed. The giant clam Tridacna sp are found bottom is composed of hard sand stone The attached in block corals sand deposition is high inside the lagoon and during low tide substratum gets fully exposed 5e< tor N: This sector begins from the jetty Water retention is noticed in exposed areas and extends upto the end of the southern side. where coral fishes and intertidal molluscs occur The depth of the lagoon is 1 m during low tide in few numbers. The gaint clam Tridacna sp The bottom is sandy and a few patches of live occurs sparsely in this region. At the northern branching corals are seen in this region. Large most point the bottom of the lagoon is sandy. shoals of bait fishes are common. At the extreme It is 3 m deep during low tide. At the bottom southern end of this lagoon live block corals line block corals belonging to the genus Porites are found. The gastropods are well represented have grown to a height of 5n cm and branching by Conus sp and Strombus sp. Holothurians corals to a height of 20 cm. A rich growth of occur in moderate numoers. sea grass is seen in this region harbouring quite a good number of holothurians. KILT AN

KADMAT Sector I: This sector starts on the middle of the eastern shore of the island and extends upto Sector I: This sector starts from the middle the southern end. Generally the beach is sandy region of the eastern shore and extends upto the and the reef flat rocky. Since no water is retained southern end. The entire shoreline is sandy. Sea during low tide no molluscs could be seen. At erosion is noticed at some places. The bottom the extreme southern end accumulation of dead of the reef flat is hard, interspersed with dead corals are seen along the shore line. coral stones. At the reef edge huge dead coral stones are seen. At the extreme southern point Sector II: This sector is from the eastern of the island's eastern shore, the reef fiat shore's middle point to the northern end of the extends to a distance of about 500 m from the island. The entire shoreline is made up of dead shore line. The depth of the water during low coral bits. The reef flat extends for about 10 m tide is 2m. New colonisation of corals was from shore line. Water is not retained during evident on the sandy bottom. The water pool low tide and hence no important molluscs are occupies an area 300 X 400 m. sq. seen in this area. At the reef edge profuse growth of algae are obsetved and beyond the Sector II: This sector commences from the ridge the depth is more than 10 m. middle region of the eastern side and extends upto the northern end of the island. The reef Sector III: This area extends from the jetty of flat possess a hard substratum and about iO cm the northern end of the island on western shore. of water is retained during low tide. The bottom Generally the shore line is sandy and at the components consisted mainly of dead coral bits extreme northern end the shore is rocky which and thick growth of algae are seen on these is formed of sand stones. The lagoon extends coral bits. Pearl oyster spat are found attached 0.5 km from the shore line and the bottom is on the algae (4/m^). Conus sp, Strombus sp sandy. The water is very clear. In this region and Littorina sp are predominantly seen. The the gastropod molluscs and echinoderms are extreme northern end of the island is made up very common. of coral boulders and exposed during low tide. Sector IV : This sector extends from the jetty Sector III: This sector extends on the western area towards the southern end of the island's shore from the jetty to northern end of the island. western shore. The shore line is generally sandy At the jetty, lagoon is 2 m deep during low and the lagoon begins at the extreme south.

236 CMFRI The bottom of the lagoon is very hard. Live CHETLAT block corals, holothurians and echinoderms are the main occupants of this area. Srtiall sized Of all the lagoons of the islands surveyed Tridacna sp (less than 20 mm) are also present. the Chetlat lagoon with rich fauna and flora is Small sized Conus sp and Cyprea sp are also undisturbed. seen. Sector I: This sector extends from middle shore BITRA to southern end on the eastern side of the island. The extent of reef flat is about 8-10 m Sector I: This sector commences from the along the shore. The sandy shore has a gentle north west tip of the island where the beach slope which is periodically exposed during low and the intertidal regions are strewn with bits of tide. Littorina sp and Nasa sp are abundant in broken corals and shingles to the passenger jetty some places on the shore. At the extreme which is situated in the middle of the island, southern end the shore line is made up of dead The beach is sandy throughout. The intertidal corals and hard sand rocks which acts as a region is also sandy but intermingled with pieces natural barrier and prevents sea erosion. of dead corals The lagoon is shallow and sandy towards the shore but becomes deeper Sector II: This sector spreads from middle in the middle. Here and there mounts of dead shore to northern end of the island. The entire corals are seen projecting from deep waters. shore is sandy except the middle point where Dead corals and broken pieces of corals are some hard sand rocks are found intermittently. found spread over the bottom of the mid lagoon, The intertidal reef flat possess populations of wherever it is shallow. Fresh coral growths are algae and gastropods. The near shore at the seen on the coral fiat and also on the dead coral northern end is sandy with dead coral bits. The beds towards the reef flat The most characteris­ fauna are less here due to periodic exposure tic fauna found on the coral formations are during low tide. holothurians, Fungia sp, Lambh sp Drupa, Sector III: This sector lies on the western side Conus spp, Cyprea spp, Troctnis spp and extending from the middle shore to the northern Tridacna sp. Moderate growth of sea weed end of the island. The shore line is entirely like Turbinaria sp is noticed in these regions, sandy. Profuse growth of live corals are seen Fishes such as Acanthurus sp, Epinephelus sp, all along 2 m depth towards the lagoon side. scarids. Anemone fishes, Holocentrus sp, Occurrence of pearl oysters of the size range Chaetodon spp upeneids, Chromis spp, 10-15 mm are seen on dead corals at a density Amphlprion spp, leather jacket, Abudefduf. of 1/10 m 2 and Tridacna sp at a density of Platax sp, sharks, Caranx spp and Lethrmus 1/20m^ Numerous echinoderms are also spp are found inhabiting the shallow areas recorded in this sector. towards the lagoon side of the reef flat. Sector IV: The extension of the sector is Sector II: This sector commences from the between the middle point and the southern end passenger jetty in the north to the heavily eroded in the western side. The nature of bottom is southern tip. The beach is sandy and the lagoon sandy but on the southern end it is hard with towards the shore is shallow with pieces of dead dead corals. Sea grass are seen throughout the corals spread through the breadth of the shallow sector along with gastropods such as Cyprea sp, bottom. As in sector T, the middle lagoon is Conus sp, Nasa, sp and Vasum sp. Echinoderms deep with projecting coral mounts. Holothurians are seen in good numbers. The width of the star fishes, Fung/a sp Haliotis sp, Conus spp, southernmost part of the island is about 10 m Tridacna sp and a few pearl oysters are collected and lies in close proximity to deep open sea. from the coral mounts and the shallow coralline The reef flat with dead coral boulders extends beds. Almost all the fishes preserit in sector 1 uptoa width of 15 m along the snore and is are also characteristic of this region. exposed during low tide. On the western side A sand mount exposed during low tide is the beach shoyvs gentle slope and within a seen on the southern border of the lagoon very a distance of 10 m a depth of about 15 m is close to the reef flat with sea gulls in hundreds reached. The bottom is rocky and it consists of resting on it. live and dead coral blocks.

BULLETIN 43 237 REMARKS TABLE 2

Although the present underwater obser­ Distrubution of important fauna and flora in the Ifigoon of Kalptni. vation in the lagoon areas of Lal

8 - Abundant Echinoderms 0 - Common Holothuria sp. X - Present Molluscs --Nil Lucina sp. i ridacna sp. Table: 3 Corals Distribution of important fauna and flora Acroporra spp. X x x in the lagoon of Suheli paar. A. Formosa sp. x X — Sector x Forties spp. X X Name of Faunaand Flora I II III IV Algae Cymodocea sp. Echinoderms Holothuria sp. X — - Abundant Molluscs 8 - Common Pinctada sugillata X X - Present Tridacna sp. 0 0 0 -- Nil Mesodesma sp. 8 8 —

238 CMFRj Conus spp. X — — Algae Lambis sp. x — — Halimeda sp. X Corals Caulerpa sp. X Acropora spp. 0 0 0 0 Trubinaria sp. Pontes spp. 0 0 0 0 Sargassum sp. Fungia sp. x — x padina sp. — X X Heliopora sp. x — — Gracilaria edulis X — X Algae Laurencia sp X Chaetomorpha sp- x — — Gelidella acerosa X X X X Halimeda sp. x — — Cymodocea sp. X X — Caulerpa sp- x x x X g- Abundant Turbinaria sp. x 0 x X U - Common Sargassum sp. x ~ — X - Present Pudina sp. x x x -- Nil Fishes TABLE: 5 Ostorhynchus sp. x — — Rhinecanthus sp. x — — Distribution of important fauna and flora Dascyllus sp. x — — occurring around Androth. Labroides dimidiatus x x — Sector Acanthurus sp. x — — Name of fauna and flora I 11 III IV 8 - Abundant Echinoderms: 0 - Common Ophiocoma spp. X x - Present Echinothrix calamaris X --Nil Echinothrix diodema X Table 4 Echinometra sp. X Molluscs: Distribution of importani fauna and flora in the Modiolus sp. X X X lagoon of Kavaratti. Pinctada sugil/ata X X X Sector Lambis sp. X Name of Fauna and Flora I II III IV Corals: Acropora spp. 0 0 0 0 Echinoderm Porites spp. 0 0 0 0 Fungia sp. Holothuria cineracens — X X X X Algae: Holothuria atra X X X Molluscs Padina sp. X Turbinaria sp. X Tridacna sp. U X — X X Gelidium sp. Mesodesma sp. X Conus sp. X — 8 - Abundant Lambis truncate 0 - Common Trochus sp. X — X - Present Turbo spp. X X - - Nil Cyprea spp. X — X X Octopus sp. X — TABLE; 6 Corals Distribution of important fauna and flora Acropora formosa 0 X in the lagoon of Agathi Acropora aspera X — Sector Acropora teres X X X X Name of Fauna and Flora I II III Acropora hyacinthus — X Porites spp. 0 X X X Echinoderms Fuugia sp. X X Holothuria &g. 8 -

PULLETIN43 239 Star fish 0 Drupa sp. 0 Brittle star X Octopus sp. — 0 — Sea urchin' X Corals Molluscs Acropord sp. X X — Tridacna sp. 0 8 8 Porites X X — Lambis spp. 8 X Algae — X Conus spp. 8 X Turbinaria sp. X X Cyprea spp. 0 X Gracilaria sp. X Qelidiella sp. — — Octopus sp. X Fishes Coelenterates (Corals) X Chaetodon sp. — X Sea anemone X Amphipriun sp. — X Acropo'a spp. X 0 0 Gobids X Fungia 0 8 0 Chromis sp. — X Porltes sp. 8 8 P/afex sp. __ X Algae Apogon sp. — — X Turbinaria sp. Callyodon sp. X Qracilaria sp, Zanclus sp. — — X Cymodocta sp. 8 — Holocentrus sp. — — X Fishes Ehinephelus sp. — — X Grammistes sp. X 8 I Abundant Upemussp. X 0 - Common Chaetodon sp. X X X - Present Amphiprwn sp. X X --Nil Biehnids' X X Acanthurus sp.- X X TABLE: 8 Canthigastor sp. X X Distribution of important fauna and flora in Chromis sp. X X the lagooh of Amini. Platax sp. X X Apogon sp. X X Sector Abudefdufsp. — — X /Vame o/ Fauna and Flora I II III IV Balistes sp. — — X Echinoderm Callyodan sp. x — X Holothuria at a 8 X X 0 • 8 - Abundant Hotothuria sp. X X X 0 0 - Common Molluscs X - Present Pinctada sp. - - Nil' Crassostrea sp. X TABLE: 7 Tridacna sp. X Mesodesma sp- X X Distribution of important fauna and flora in Conus spp. X X 0 the lagoon of Bangaram. Lambis sp. X X X Sector Trochus sp. X ^ame of Fauna and Flora I II III IV Cyprea sp. 0 Echinoderms Nasa sp. X 0 Vasum sp, Holothurian X X X 0 Octopus sp. Starfish .,. X X X 0 Mollusc Corals Chama sp. X Acropora spp. X Tridacba. X X X Acropora formosa X Conusspp. X X K Acropora aspira X Lambis spp. X X X Fungia sp. X X Cypree spp. - X X Porites spp. X X

240 CMFRI Algae TABLE: 10 Halimeda sp. X X X Caulerpa sp. X X X Distribution of important fauna and flora in Turbinaria sp. the lagoon of Kiltan. Sargassum sp. X X X Sector Padina sp. X X X Name of fauna and flora I II III IV Gracilaria sp. X X Echinoderms 8 - Abnudant Holo thuria spp. X X u u 0 - Common Holothuria atra X 0 X X - Present Molluscs --Nil Pinctada sp. X X X — Crassostrea sp. X — X — TABLE: 9 Tridacna sp. X X X Sector Mesodesma sp. X 0 X Distribution of important fauna and flora in Conus spp. 0 X 0 X the lagoon of Kadmat. Lambis sp. X 0 0 X Trochus sp. liame of Fauna and flora I II III IV X — 0 — Cyprea spp. X X 0 X Nasa sp. 0 0 X 0 Echinoderms Vasum sp. 0 0 X X Holothuria sp- X X X Octopus sp. X X X X Holothuria atra X X X Corals Molluscs Acropora spp. X X Pinctada sp. X X X Acropora formosa X X X Crassostrea sp. X X X Acropora aspera X X X Tridacna sp. X X X Porites sp. 0 0 0. X Mesodesma sp. X — Fungia sp. X — X X Conus spp. X X 0 0 Algae Lambis sp. X X 0 0 X — Trochus sp. X X — Halimeda sp. X X 0 X Cyprea spp. X X X X Caulerpa sp. Turbinaria sp. 0 X X — Hasa sp. X X 0 X Saragassum sp. 0 — — — Vasum sp. 0 0 0 X Padina sp. 0 X X X Octopus sp. X X X X Corals Gracillaria sp. _. 0 X Acropora sp — X X 8 -Abundant Acropora formosa X 0- Common Acropora aspira X X - Present Fungia X X X X -- Nil Porites spp. X X 0 X Algae TABLE: It Halimeda sp. X X — — Distribution o important fauna and flora in Caulerpa sp. X 0 — the lagoon of Bitra Turbinaria sp. — X — Sargassum sp. X Sector Padina sp. X 0 X Name of fauna and flora I II Gracilaria sp. 0 X Echinoderms 8 - Abundant Holothurian X X 0 - Common Star fish X X X - Present Molluscs --Nil Pearl oysters — X

9ULLET(N 43 241 Tridacna sp. X X Nasa sp. X X 0 0 Conns spp. X X Vasum&p. X X X 0 Lambis sp. X X Octopus sp. X 0 X X Trochus spp. X X Corals Cyprea spp X X Acropora spp. 0 X Drupa sp. X X Acropora formosa X X Haliotis&p. X Acropora aspera 0 X CoelenteratesI Corals Fungia sp. X X 0 0 Sea anemones X Porites sp. X X 0 0 Acropora spp. X X Algae Fungia sp. X X Halimeda sp. X X Porites sp. X X Caulerpa sp. X 0 Al^ae Turbinaria sp. X 0 Tur bin aria sp. Sargassum sp. X X Fishes Padina sp. X 0 X Upentus sp. X X Gracilaria sp. X X X Chaetadon sp. X X 8 - Abundant Amphiprion sp. X X 0 - Common Acanthurus sp. X X X - Preset CAroffz/JSp. X X -- Nil Plat ax sp. X X ACKNOWLEDGEMENT Abudefdul sp. X X The authors wish to express their sincere talistis sp. X X thanks to Dr. P. S. B. R. James, Director for his Holocentr.us rp. X X guidance and encouragement and to Shri Ephineph.elus sp. X X S. Mahadevan, Scientist for his inspiring Lethrinus sp. X X guidance and help in shaping this paper and Cfiranx sp. X X correction. They wish to thank Shri S.Dharmaraj, Scads X X Scientist for the help rendered. Anemone fishes X X Sharks X X REFERENCES 8 - Abundant GARDINER, J. S. 1903 a. Introduction. In: 0 - Common J. S. Gardiner (Ed.), The Fauna and X - Present Geography of the Maldiveand Laccadive -- Nil Archipelagoes 1: 1-11, Cambridge Univr Press, Cambridge. TABLE: 12 GARDINER, J. S 1903 b. The Maldive and Distribution of impoi tant fauna and flora in Laccadive groups with notes on other the lagoon of Chetlet. coral formations in the Indian Ocean. Sector lbid:12-50, 146-183,313-346,376-423. Same of fauna and flora I II III IV GARDINER, J. S. 1906 a. Madreporaria I-IV, Introduction with notes on Variation; II- Echinoderms Astraeidae, 754-790; III. Fungidae; IV. Holothuria sp. X 0 0 Turbinolidae, 933-957. Ib/d. Holothuria atra — 0 0 GARDINER, J. S. 1906 b. Notes on the distribu­ Mo lluscs • tion of the land and marine animals with Pinctada sp. — X X a list of coral reefs, /bid., 1046 1057. Crossostrea sp. "— X X JONES, S 1986. Lakshadweep-General features Tridacna sp. — 0 0 and some considerations. Mar. Fish. Mesodcsma sp. X — 0 X Infer. Serv. T& E Ser., 68 : 3-6. Conus spp. X X 0 0 MANNADIAR, N. S, (ED.) 1977. Lakshadweep. Lambis sp. X X X 0 Gazetteer of India, Administration of Trochus sp. — 0 0 Union Territory of Lakshadeep Kavaratti, Cyprea sp. X X 0 X 375 pp.

242 CMFRI 21. MARICULTURE PROTENTIALS

R. S. Lai Mohan, D. B. James and Kalimuthu

INTRODUCTION Apart from these areas, the lagoons can be utilised for culture of mussels in the rafts and The protected bays and lagoons of the island the seaweeds in the coir net frames. provide suitable sites for maricuiture. Further there are many potential candidates for marl- Candidates for culture : culture - food fishes, bait fishes, ornamental fishes, holothurians, turtles and sea weeds. Fish cuiture ;- Making use of the recent tech­ Apart from the indigenous varieties of culturable nology evolved for culture, food fishes, bait species, fry of fast growing fishes and prawns fishes and ornamental fishes can be cultured can be transported from the mainland and in the island. There are many species of food fishes, bait fishes and ornamental fishes that can cultured. But so far no serious attempts have be cultured in the islands. been made to utilise the maricuiture potentials of islands. Culture of food fishes :- Food fishes like Mugil sp. Caranx sp. can be cultured in the fish pens- CULTURE SITES The tuna-waste available in large quantities during fishing season can serve as food for the The lagoons serve as an ideal site for culture carnivoirous fishes. Seeds of fishes like chanos of fishes and other organisms. The coral reefs can be transported from the mainland and protect the lagoons preventing the heavy breakers. cultured in the lagoons in fish pens, feeding Fish pens can be located in the lagoon with them artificially. the aid of nylon webbings supported by poles. Bait fish cuiture :- The culture of bait fishes The foot rope of the webbing can be burried has attained importance due to the demand for in the sand, with the aid of stones as sinkers. it in the pole and line fishing for tuna. The The organisms can be stocked during September Spratelloides delicatulus and Spratelloides and harvested in March. Fast growing fishes' japonicus, are the two species which are in the prawns and holothurians can be reared in it. great demand. Culture of other bait fishes can also be tried. Due to the specific habitat of Floating cages also can be suspended in these fishes and due to their sensitive nature the lagoons. There can be a battery of small culturing them may require the infrastructural cages. The cages can be made of nylon facilities like aquarium, suitable feed and other webbings, or velon screens as the case may be. ecological requirements. Carnivorous fishes like Serranus spp, Lutianus spp, and Caranxspp, can be cultured in the Culture of ornamental fishes : Lakshadweep system. The stock has to be fed artificially. lagoons are rich in ornamental fishes. The ornamental fishes have acquired importance due The low lying areas can be converted into to its export potentials. Many species of orna­ fish farms. Though there are not many such mental fishes occur in the islands (Please refer areas in the islands, a few places are identified to the chapter on ornamental fishes of this in Minicoy and Kalpeni. volume). But they may not withstand commercial At Minicoy the fish farm near the helipad exploitation from the natural habitat. Supply in the Southern part of the island can be of ornamental fishes from the island will be renovated. It has sluice gate and partly damaged possible only if it can be cultured in large bunds. The accumulation uf decaying sea grass numbers. Here also due to the specialised has to be removed from the farm. The water habitat and food habits it will be difficult to flows out during lowtide. This farm can be used culture them without proper infrastructral by deepening it and strengthening the bunds. facilities. But survival of the ornamental fishes

BULLETIN 43 243 in the Kavarati aquarium indicates the feasibility may also prove to be potential candidates for of rearing them. It will be possible to develop culture. But we have no information on the a hatchery for the ornamental fishes by creating food, growth, reproduction, survival and recruit­ the necessary infrastructural facilities like ment potential of these holothurians. running water, aeration, storage facilities, filtr­ The culture of holothurians can be taken ation and feeding Seeds of ornamental fishes up in two ways. The juveniles can be collected are found during the months of March and April. in large numbers and stocked in the pens with They can be collected by using specially made nylon webbing. It can be fed with the calcarious nets. algae like Halmlda spp., the favoured food of Prawn culture : The nonavailability of prawn holothurians, found abundantly in the lagoons. seeds in the lagoon is the major constraints for For any large scale culture, hatchery system, developing prawn culture in the island. Never­ has to be developed. IVlortensen (1937, 1938) theless due to the availability of proper site for reported spawning of the holothurian, Actinopyga culture the fast growing species of prawns can maurltiana in the Egyptian Coast. The auricularia be grown in the lagoons of the islands. Intensive larvae can be produced by keeping a number of culture of prawns can be tried in the floating specimens in a large tank. The depth of the cages made up of nylon webbing. The seeds of tank should be more than 1 metre, (Mortensen, P. ind/cus can be transported from the main land. 1921). The auricularia larvae are planktonic The low laying areas also can be utilised and have to be fed with microalgae. The for prawn culture. The fish farm at the southern plankonic phase of the larvae being short, soon end of Minicoy island can be converted into they are transformed into doliolaria larva and a prawn farm after making necesssary alteration. settle on the bottom. At this stage it feeds on fine mud and sand deriving the nutrients from Culture of holothurians : the organic matter present in them. The calcari­ ous algae, Halimeda spp also can be provided as Large scale culture of holothurians, food. Holothuria scabra was found to grow Stichopus sp. is being carried out in the main trom 65 to 160 mm, to 190 mm to 290 mm, land of China with considerable success (Anon. during 5 months, February 1978 to July 1978 1983). James, (1983) conducted preliminary indicating fast growth in Port Blair, (James, trials on the culture of Holothuria scaJbra at 1983). The advantage of the holothurian culture Port Blair in Andaman islands and obtained is the very low inputs in its farming. The promising resulls. There is a great demand for expenses involved in the maintenances of the bache-de-mer in South eastern countries. Hong­ farm, feed making and other infrastructural kong and Singapore alone require about 500 facilities are very low. But the returns from the tonnes of beche-de-mer annually. But the culture is very high. The low grade beche-de- demand outstrips the production. Further the mer from Holothuria scabra costs Rs. 140/kg. natural resources of holothurian will not with­ at Hongkong market. The cost of high grade stand commercial exploitation as the holothurian beche-de-mer from other holothurians like beds in the lagoons are not very extensive. Its Holothuria nobllis and A. maurltiana is much exploitation may also affect the ecology of fhe higher (about Rs. 903,kg). The post harvest lagoons. Hence culture of holothurians will be technology of processing and preparation of a means of increasing the production of holothu­ beche-de-mer is also not costi/. rians in large number without depleting the natural stock. The southern parts of Kalpeni, Kavaratti, Amini and Kadmat lagoons are suitable fof Holothuria nobllis, H. scabrea, Actinopyga holothurian farms. These lagoons have a natural maurltiana, Thelenota ananas and Stichopus population of holothurians and the holothurian chloronotus are some of the beche-de-mer farms can be established in these islands. yielding holothurians found in Lakshadweep 4. Molluscan Culture:- Of the above species Holothuria scabra and Stichopus sp can be cultured. The other species a) Pearl Culture:- The experiments conducted like Thelenota ananas and Actinopyga maurltiana at the Bangaram lagoon in culturing pearl oyster

244 CMFHI {P/nctada vulgaris) demonstrated the possibility The low lying areas near the northern end of pearl culture in the island. It has been of the Suheli lagoon can be converted into a reported that the pearl oyster transported from Turtle pen. Suheli lagoon also has a good the mainland of India has established well. growth of seagrass and seaweeds on which the During the survey a few stray numbers of turtles feed. These seaweeds also can be fed Pinctada fucata were also collected. Culture of to the turtles in addition to the seaweeds Pearl oysters can be tried in other island also. available from the natural bed.

Culture of Seaweeds: b) Mussel culture:- It has been demonstrated that very high production can be obtained from Mariculture of economic seaweeds has been culturing the mussels, Perr)a viridis (green practised successfully in countries such as mussel) and Perna indica (brown mussel) in Japan, China, Korea, Philippines and Taiwan. floating rafts in open sea along the South West The Central Marine Fisherieries Research Institute Coast of India (Kuriakose, 1980, Appukuttan and Central Salt 8- Marine Chemicals Research efd/., 1981). The lagoons offer suitable sites Institute have made attempts to cultivate G- for floating mussel culture rafts. Seedling can acerosa (Krishnamurthy et al., 1975; Subbara- be transported from mainland and grown in the maiah etal., 1975;) and G. edulis (Raju and mussel culture rafts on coir ropes. The seedlings Thomas, 1971; Rao, 1973 and 1974; Krishna­ also can be produced by establishing a hatchery murthy era/., 19/5; Chennubhotia etal., 1978; in the islands to meet the seed requirement. Anon, 1983) using different techniques. The suitable methods for cultivation of G. edulis and Twtle farmmg : G. acerosa were found to be coir rope net method and coral stone method respectively. There are large turtle farms in the Grand- cayman island in Carribean which began its The survey indicated the availability of operation in 1968. Turtle farms are found in culturable agarophytes, alginophytes, edible Torres strait in Australia, in Seychelles, South seaweeds and the seaweeds used for cattle feed Yenam, Malayasia, Philippines, indonesial and fertilisers, in the island. But due to the Surinam and other places. (Dodd, 1981). small size of the lagoon the prospects of harvest Farming is carried out with different views of of the seaweeds from the natural bed for com­ protecting the natural nesting populations'" mercial use is limited. Hence seaweeds have getting supply of high source of protein and to be cultured if large scale production is other products, salvaging the eggs that are required. The common culturable agarophytes doomed to be destroyed and to augment found in the island are Gelidiella acerosa and research. (Reiger, 1975; Hendricksoe, 1976). Gracilaria edulis, The alginophytes available in the island are Sargassum spp. and Turbinaria A small turtle farm can be established in spp. The edible seaweeds observed in the Suheli Valiyakara with an annual stocking of lagoon are H^pnea spp. and Acanthophora spp- 200 neonates of Chelonia mydas. Though the demand for edible species of Seaweed is very low, agarophytes and algino­ Lakshadweep is one of the few places in the phytes are in great demand. The availability Indian Ocean where the green turtles Chelonia of natural stock of seedling, suitable sit^ mydas nest. |t has been observed that about for farm, highly productive lagoons and clear 30 green turtles nest in Suheli Valiyakara (Kar water devoid of sediments are great assets and Bhaskar, 1982). Usually these turtles nest ^or sea weed culture. three times in season depositing about 100-130 eggs at each nesting About 9c00 eggs are laid It has been demonstrated that 5m x 2m. in Suheli Valiyakara during each season. If coir net frame yield 30 kg of wet sea weeds removal of 5% of the eggs is considered to be (Gracilaria edulis) in about 60 days in Gulf of safe, it will be possible to collect about 200 Mannar. (Ramalingam and Selvaraj, 1979.) neo-nates, for rearing without affecting the Though we have a wealth of information on population. the seaweeds of mainland of India (Rao, 1971^'

BULLETIN 43 245 we have no information on the culture of to be monitored carefully. This aspect requires seaweeds in Lakshadweep. However there is more attention when transplantation of cultur­ high potentials for the culture of seaweeds in able species is attempted. the islands. 4. Literacy rates in the island is very high. Cultivation of G. acerosa is successful by Hence it will not be difficult to motivate the coral stone method. In this method, the local people and impart training to them. The fragments of G- acerosa were tied to nylon mariculture activities like seaweed culture, twines at regular intervals and the seeded holothurian culture and ornamental fish culture twines were then wound round the nails erected can be taken up with proper initiative and on coral stones. Seed material is available in financial assistance from the grovernment all islands except Bitra. agencies, involvement of the local people in these activities is very essential for its success- Almost all the lagoon where the water level is about 1-2 m can be utilised for seaweed REFERENCES culture. Wooden frames of 5 x 2 m with coir net can be seeded with fragments of seaweeds ANON, 1978. Culture of Sea Cucumber at Anda- like G. edulis. The coir rafts can be harvested mans. CMFRI Newsletter 8:1-2 after two months. As the fair season of the islands extends from September to March it ANON, 1983. Proven Technology 7. Technology will be able to make atleast 3 harvest in a year. of cultured seaweed production. Mar. Fish. Infor. Ser. TBE Ser. No. 54. The main constraint in the seaweed culture pp. 19-20. is that the islanders are not familiar with the seaweeds and its culture. As it is a new area ANON, 1985.C/7//7a'5 fishery: Bureau of Aquatic for them the work has to be demonstrated and products. Ministry of Agriculture Animal the benefits explained to them. The culture husbandary and Fishery. Peoples' Re­ sites should not be of any hindrance to the public of China: 1-i6. fishing operations or to the boat traffic in the APPUKUTTAN. K K., T. PRABHAKARAN NAIR. lagoon, it will be possible to establish a small M.ATHEW JOSEPH AND K. T. agar-agar cottage industry based on the seaweed THOMAS, 1981. Culture of brown cultured in the island. mussel at Vizhinjam. In. Mussel farming. CMFRI pull: 29;30-32 SUGGESTIONS CHENNUBHOTLA, V. S. K., N. KALIAPERU- 1. The mariculture is new to the islanders' MAL AND S. KALIMUTHU. 1978. hence experimental farms should be started Culture of Gracilaria edulis in the sponsored by the public sector to demonstrate inshore waters of Gulf of Mannar its feasibilities and benefits. (Mandapam). Indian J. Fish., 25 2. We have no information on the culture of (1&2); 228-229. various species available in the island. Hence DODD. C. K. Jr„ 1981. Does sea turtle aqua- for a better scientific base more research inputs culture benefit conservation. In are required. For instance, many species of Biology and Cnservation of Sea turtles culturable holothurians are available in the Ed K. A. Bjrndal, Smithsonian Institut­ island. But we have no information on its rate ion, Washington, 473-480. of growth, reproductive parameters, survival, etc. The same thing can be said about bait HENDRICKSON J. R., 1976. Marine turtle fishes, ornamental fishes and seaweeds. culture an overview. Proc. 5 th Annual meeting World Mariculture Society. 3. The lagoons are small hence proper care 167-181. should be taken so that the ecology of the lagoon is not disturbed resulting in the damage JAMES, D. B., 1983. Sea cucumber and sea to the eco-system. The interaction of the urchin resources. Bull. Cent. Mar. culture system and the natural population has Fish. Res. Inst 34 : 84-93.

246 CMFRI KAR C. C, and s. BHASKAR, 1982. The status of sea turtles in Eastern Indian Ocean. RAJU, P V. and P. C, THOMAS. 1971. Experi­ In: The Biology and Conservation of mental field cultivation of Gracilaria Sea turtles. Smithsonian Institutions. edulis {Gme\.) Silva. Bot. Mar. 74 Washington. (2): 71-75.

KRISHNAMURTHY, V., P. V. RAJU and P. C. RAMALINGAM. J R. AND SELVARAJ. M., THOMAS. 1975. On augmenting 1979. Impact of seaweed culture on seaweed resources of India. J- Mar. the Socio economics of farmers. Proa biol. Ass. India, 17 (2) : 181.185. first, workshop on technology transfer. Cochin. Mandapam, July, 1979. KURIAKOSE P. S.. 1980. Open sea raft culture CMFRI, Cochin. of green mussel at Calicut. In Mussel Farmiug, CMFRI bull, 29 : 33-38. RAO, M. U., 1967. Seaweed Resources of India Souvenir, CMFRI, 20th Ani: MORTENSON. T, 1921. Studies on the deve­ Mandapam Camp: 125-129. lopment and larval forms of RAO, M. U. 1973. The seaweed potential of echinoderm. 266, pp. the seas around India. Proc, Symp. MORTENSEN. T., 1937. Contribution to the on Living Resources of the Seas Aiound study of development of larval forms of India (1968). pp. 687-692. Echinoderms, 111. K. danski Vidensk REIGER. G., 1975. Green turtle farming, Silkskr. (Nature. Math (a) / (1) : growing debate Sea frontier: 215-223 1-65 51 Fig. 15 pis. SUBBARAMAIAH, K., K. RAMA RAO, P. C. MORTENSEN. T., 1938. Contribution to the THOMAS, M. R. P. NAIR, B. V. GOPAL study of the development of larval AND V. R. NAGULAN. 1975. forms of echinoderms IV ib/'a; (9) 7 ,3j: Cultivation of Gelidlella acerosa. Salt 1-59. Res. Ind.. 77 (1) : 33-36.

BULLETIN43 247 22. SUGGESTIONS FOR ESTABLISHING A NATIONAL MARINE PARK IN LAKSHADWEEP

p. S. B. R. James and C. S. Gopinadha Pillai

INTRODUCTION the lagoon for starting small scale industry has been suggested. Since the islands have A marine park is a reserve and should be no infrastructure and raw material for starting managed along sound ecological principles any major or minor industry the greatest and should serve many relevant purposes such potential for additional income generation for as habitat and species preservation, scientific Lakshadweep is the development of tourism research, recreation and financial gains (Ray, (Anon, 1986). The islands with their palm fringed 1975). The deteriorating coastal and marine sandy shores, the crystal clear logoon with corals habitats due to many natural and man-made and coral fishes, the cultural heritage and the factors have generated a tremendous awareness blue-waters around are potential paradise for among developing and developed countries tourists. These islands have been rightly known in nature conservation and ecodevelopment. as Coral Paradise of India. However, develop­ The marine and coastal habitats of India are ment of tourism to a large scale in Laksha­ also facing environmental crisis (Pillai, 1983, dweep is a matter to be decided on national 1985) from many aspects and the worst policy. The establishment of marine parks in affected habitat in this country seems to be some of the islands can certainly serve the coral reefs and reef resources. Proposals are cause of tourism. in vouge to establish marine parks and preserves along the coast of India such as Gulf of Mannar (Silas et a/., 1985) and Malvan, NEED FOR A MARINE PARK IN Venguria coast of Maharashtra (Quasim, 1980). LAKSHADWEEP First Marine National Park in Inida came in­ to existence in Gulf of Kutch in 1980 (Rashid, All Lakshadweep islands are of coral 1985). Silas ef a/. (1985) have discussed in origin and some of them like Minicoy, Kalpeni. detail some theoretical aspects of selection Kadmat, Kiltan and Chetlat are typical atolls. and management of large marine preserves The corals and associated fauna and flora form and parks. In this short communication some the most dominant marine benthic community of the problems and prospects for establishing in these islands. As already pointed out by some coral reef reserves in Lakshadweep to Pillai (1985) and also discussed elsewhere generate scientific interest, additional income in this publication the reefs and reef associated as well as conserving the endangered habitats organisms of Lakshadweep in general are fast (Pillai, 1985) are discussed. deteriorating due to natural and man-made causes. In many atolls like Minicoy, Kavaratti Background: The Lakshadweep is mainly of and Kiltan, mass mortality of corals due to coral origin and constitute 11 major islands human interference is severe. The terrestrial (Kavaratti, Kalpeni, Agatti, Androth, Amini, habitats have also undergone drastic changes Kadmat, Kiltan, Chetlat, Bitra, Bangaram and due to total destruction of natural vegetation, Minicoy) and a few submerged banks and mining of lime stones and sand stones for reefs such as Veliyapani, Cheriyapani Pitty the preparation of lime and construction of (Bird Island) Pitti 1 and Pitti 2 and Suheli. houses; all natural corollary of expanding Coconut and tunas form the mainstay of the settlement and population pressure. The overall economy of these islands. In addition the result is that the terrestrial and marine minor and ancillary resources from the reefs habitats of Lakshadweep are fast changing. It is are also exploited. Mining of calcareous sand imperative that conservation measures have to which amounts to several thousand tonnes in be urgently implemented in some of these

248 CMFRI islands to preserve and protect these critical island in the archipelago to establish a marine habitats for scientific, cultural and economic park or national reserve. It may not be possi­ purposes. Selection of coral preserves and ble to apply the various criteria for selection establishment of parks in and around some of with equal priority to all islands, since the the islands may serve this purpose. Lakshadweep priority will shift according to the purpose can still boast of being the richest coral and function of the proposed park. growing area around the Indian subcontinent, but it needs protection urgently. Establishment During the recent (January-March 1987) of marine parks and reserves can generate an marine living resources survey of the islands additional income to the territory, if and by the CMFRI, Scientists paid some attention when further development of tourism is effected. to examine some of these aspects in the various islands based on which the following Basic requirements for Marine Parks and islands were identified. preserves MInicoy: Minicoy has a vast and relatively Ray (1975) discussed in details the cri­ deep lagoon The northern tip of the island is teria to be observed in site selection, some uninhabited and very narrow where once the of which are presented below and an attempt Leper colony existed. The tuna fishery by is made to evaluate the existing conditions traditional pole and line with live.bait is in some of the islands in Lakshadweep. famous. Minicoy lagoon once had a luxuriant growth of corals but today there is mass a) Since a marine park basically should serve mortality due to human interference (Pillai, both recreation and education, the site selected 1983). The lagoon looks barren since corals should have existing or potential for infrastruc­ are very few. Further, imposing conservation ture development. measures on lagoon fishery and other minor resources will tell upon the tuna fishery. b) The area should be deep enough to faci­ This is a place where user-conservationist litate SCUBA and skin diving and should be conflict can reflect. Social and cultural pro­ safe for auch activities. blems are peculiar to Minicoy when compared c) The benthic communities should be rich to other Lakshadweep islands. and varied for observation. The adjacent Wiringili Island on the leeward d) The climatic condition should be suitable reef flat is uninhabited and is a panoramic for operation during a large part of the year. site with vast sandy lagoon stretching infront. However the present paucity of marine fauna e) The area should be "ecologically stable" in the lagoon as well as practical problems in the sense that drastic natural changes that may crop up in imposing conservation though unpiedictable should not bring forth measures may be a major constraint for cataclysmic changes in the ecosystem. Minicoy. f) The area available should be sufficient Kavaratti: it is the Headquarters of the Union enough and should be accessible for surveill­ Territory and as such has got more credence. ance and eco-development, if necessary. But recent survey has shown that the lagoon is mostly depopulated of corals. Land and Suitability of Islands other aminities may not be available. Existing Since most of the islands are relatively tourist accommodation facilities include family small and now thickly populated the land is huts and bathing huts. Further, shipping scarce for any major development. This can, service to Kavaratti is more often than to to a certain extent, put constraints on living other islands. The Headquarters of the local quarters and tourist resorts. The marine habitat fisheries department at Kavaratti can get involved should be rich and varied. Inspite of these in the development and management of the basic difficulties there may be more than one Park. But the deteriorating environment and

BULLETIN 43 249 anticipated developmental activities in tuna demerits and priority should be given only after with other developments in the lagoon may due consideration of administrative and practi­ not improve the natural condition of the cal aspects. lagoon.

Chet/at Island: In the northern Lakshadweep, CONSTRAINTS AND PROSPECTS Chetlat Island is one which still preserves User - conservation/St conflict: The reefs and the natural habitat to an extent in the lagoon. reef resources of Lakhadweep are the mainstay Exploitation of fishes and other marine of local people for construction material, fish organisms is limited. The lagoon has a luxuriant and other food items. It is true that the local growth of corals But the major problem is administration has banned the exploitation of the shallow nature of the lagoon which gets corals and lime stones for construction work partially exposed at low tide. Diving and in these islands. Live corals are also not swimming facilities are limited. Further' the permitted to be removed except for scientific island needs many more infrastructural facilities purposes. The local people seem to have for tourists. traditional rights of exploitation of live-baits from the lagoon. The traditional tuna fishery Kadmat: The beach is sandy. It is a typical of Lakshadweep chiefly thrives on the availabi­ atoll. The lagoon is deep enough for diving lity of live-baits which are caught from the and swimming. The growth of corals is relati­ lagoon. Imposing restrictions on the live-bait vely profuse. Already family huts, honeymoon fishery can trigger user conflict and hence huts and youth hostels are available for the needs a critical study, especially in islands tourists. This island has many amenities that like Minicoy. A high level commitfee including the representatives of the local people can be developed. Exploitation of fiving should examine this traditional rights of resources is not very severe. Regular tuna exploitation before a park is established in any live-bait fishery is absent except when fishermen of the inhabited islands. from Amini come to collect a few. Kadmat has potential and infrastructure that merit Demarkation of zones for fishing, exploit­ consideration for the establishment of a Marine ation, diving, scientific studies and replenish­ Park. ment without disturbance is likely to confront practical difficulties since the area available Kalpeni: This island also is a typical atoll in each island is small. However, in a national with relatively rich lagoon. The growth of marine park and preserves such demarkation coral is very good. At present there exists little of zones is a must for its successful manage­ living facilities for tourists. The advantage ment. These aspect needs careful consideration with Kalpeni is that it can serve as a central before proposals are made for the establishment place from where conducted tours to nearby of a marine park. uninhabited Tilakkam, Pitti, Cheriyam and other places could be arranged. The area-wise Priority on criteria for selection of sites. The coverage for the marine park and reserve will physiography, fauna and flora, environmental condition, infrastructure available, develop­ be much more in this island. The entire island mental feasibility, economic viability and along with the nearby uninhabited banks and socio-economic conditions of the island should islets can be declared as a marine sanctuary or be given due emphasis in the final choice of park with the administrative nucleus at Kalpeni. the park. it is also understood that the interference from local people in the lagoon habitat is not of a Scientific value: Since the corals and coral severe magnitude. associated fauna of most of the Indian waters are fast deteriorating due to many reasons it is The above facts indicate that each of the imperative that we should carefully preserve islands considered has certain merits and some areas in Lakshadeep for scientific research

250 CMFRI and protection of the habitats. The economic be observed to assess the research needs and viability and gains alone should not be modifications required- criteria. Financing should be from the central authorities and Lakshadweep Administration MANGEMENT ASPECTS can manage it-

Ecodevelopment: All efforts should be made The Tourism Development Corporation to protect and propagate the natural atoll should have an active role in this. vegetation which is fast disappearing from almost all atolls It is worth trying planting of Regulations: Effective implementations of trees like Calophyllum inophyllum, wild betham, certain regulations will become necessary in Thespesia populnea, bread fruit {Artocarpus the effective scientific management of a marine incissa) and screw-pines along the beaches park and reserves. Dredging in the lagoons that may provide shore protection to an extent, should be avoided as far as possible. If dredged rather than introducing further exotic plants the soil at any cost should not be deposited from the mainland. in the lagoon or on reef flats (eg. Minicoy, Kiltan where this has resulted in death of corals it was observed that introduction of sea •n large areas). Blasting of the reef flats should grass from Kavaratti to Chetlat lagoon was very be stopped. successful by a local man. The introduced grass has established well in many square Collection of corals and other reef orga­ meters. This should be tried in places where nisms from the reserves should be restricted there is a lack of seagrass bed in the lagoon, and certain zones may totally be banned It will enhance productivity and, will form (Regulations already effected by Administration). excellent forage ground for lagoon jfishes and Sport fishing should be banned in the lagoon turtles. Further, they act as effective sediment habitat and explosives and use of poisons trappers and prevent silt transportation upstream should never be allowed. Sport fishing by by erosion of the shore by wave action into tourists on a minimum level may be allowed in the lagoon. reef front only. Anchorage damage, diver damage, reef walking, turning of corals boulders etc. that can cause damage to .marine denizens Restoration of the deteriorating and micro- and micro-habitats in the lagoon and reefs in the paik should be minimised. At any cost should be attempted. Enrichment of lagoon collection of aquarium fishes and bait fishes corals may be possible if hard substratum is for economic purposes should not be allowed provided at sites where there is least interference in the reserved zones. All efforts should be from silt. This will favour the settlement of made to protect the lagoon shores from sea planula larvae. erosion and subsequent sediment interference (already effective). Introduction of animals Even in small islands, total preserves of of economic importance and aesthetic value several square meters of area should be selected in the habitat may be done after careful assess­ upstream and left totally undisturbed which ment of the species interaction. should help in the propagation of species by natural ways. There should not be any involve­ Construction activities along the near ment of wanton ecological disturbance at the shore areas and lagoon in the reserves should selected zones. Since establishment and be minimised. management of Marine Parks and reserves in this country is a new concept few persons may The most important problem in all the be trained abroad for the effective management. Lakshadweep islands is the lack of hygiene on the beaches. Clean beach is a sinQ qua-non Display stones, markings etc. should be for the development of tourism. Sanitary effectively displayed. Strict surveillance should conditions should improve and a public

BULLETIN 43 251 awareness has to be created among the local In: India's Environmental Crisis and People against polluting beaches. Responses. Nataraj Publication; Deh- radun: 120-130. Preparation of Red data booic on endangered species as well as threatened species in the QASIM efa/ 1980. Proposal for the deve­ habitat should be done and strict surveillance lopment of Marine Paik at Malvan against their exploitation made. (Maharashtra), pp. 1-27, NIO Goa.

Only some general guidelines are presented RASID, M. A. 1985. Gujarat's Gulf of Kutch- above and the Modus operandi and functional A marine paradise. Proc. Symp. viability of the various aspects need careful Endangered Marine animals and Marine assessment and implementation. parks (memio), Marine Biological Ass. India, 1985 pp, 14.

REFERENCES RAY, C. GARLETON 1975. Critical marine ANON 1986. Future prospects as viewed by habitats. Definition, Description, Lakshadweep Administration. In : An Criteria and Guidelines for identification information kit for Lalistiadweep futures: and Management. In: An International Regional Research Lab. Trivandrum. Conference on Marine parks and Reserves lUON Publication New Ser. BAKUS, J. GERALD 1983. The selection and 37: 15-63 Tokyo. management of coral preserves. Ocean Management B (1982;83): 305-316. SILAS, E. G., S. MAHADEVAN AND K. NAGAP- PAN NAYAR 1985. Existing and PILLAI, C. S. GOPINADHA 1983 The endan­ proposed Marine Parks and Reserves gered marine and terrestrial habitats in India - A review. Symp. Endangered of Minicoy Atoll in Lakshadweep. Marine animals and Marine Parks. Mar. Proc. Seminar, World Conservation biol. Ass. India. 1985 (memo:) 28p. Developing Countries: Bombay Nat. Hist- 5oc.(in press). SALM, V. RODNEY AND JOHN, R. CLARK 1984. Marine and coastal protected PILLAI, C.S. GOPINADHA 1985. Ecological areas: A guide for planners and mana­ crisis in coastal and marine habitats. gers lUON Gland : 1 301.

252 CMFRI 23. DEVELOPMENT OF FISHERIES IN LAKSHADWEEP -RECOMMENDATIONS

p. S. B. R, James, M. Kumaran, C. S. Gopinadha Pillai and R. S. Lai Mohan

INTRODUCTION et a/., 1977). The use of mechanised boats for pole and line fishing has resulted in consider­ Investigations conducted by the Central able increase in the catch per boat The other Marine Fisheries Research Institute have fish resources which constitute about a fourth indicated the possibilities of exploitation of the of the total production are mainly exploited by potential marine resources especially tunas and traditional gears like hook and line, harpooning, other commercially important fishes around surface trolling, drag nets and cast nets. The Lakshadweep. Realising the need for the important resources oiher than tunas are increased exploitation of the marine fishery Acanthocybium solandri, Elagatis bipinnulatus, resources, emphasis has been given to the Coryphaena hippurus, perches, sharks and rays. biology and assessment of the resources of As the traditional methods of capture of fishes tunas, fishery and biology of tuna live-bait other than tunas have not undergone any fishes and the environmental factors affecting change, landings of other fishes are more or their distribution and abundance. Of the various less at a stand still when compared to the developmental schemes proposed to be imple­ increasing trend in tuna landings by pole and mented in Lakshadweep in recent years, line. The magnitude of the landings of other exploitation of fishery resources has. been given fishes depends on the fluctuation in the considerable importance by researchers and availability of tuna shoals around the islands. planners alike. As the land area being limited, the scope for the development of land based industries is very meagre and hence any major IMPROVEMENTS SUGGESTED development programme envisaged has to be centred on the exploitation of marine fish Various suggestions have been made by resources. different authors for the exploitation and utilization of the resources of tunas, bill fishes sharks and other fishes (James et al., 1386, PRESENT STATUS OF FISHING James and Pillai, 1987; Kumaran and Gopa- kumar, 1986; Mannadiar, i973; i>iair, 1986; The present average annual yield of 4949 Silas and Pillai, 1982; Silas etal.. 19b&). As tonnes (for 1983-86) of marine fishes from the the tuna fishermen are not able to go far out in islands is only a small fraction of the reported small mechanised boats to scout for tuna potential of the Sea around Lakshadweep which shoals, Silas and Pillai (1982) suggested the is as high as 90,000 tonnes (Jones and Banerji, introduction of large pole and line boats to 1973). Pole and line fishing for tuna practised increase the area of operations. The use of in an organised manner only in Minicoy was navigational aids and adequate storage facilities adopted with the introduction of mechanised for enabling prolonged fishing operations boats in the other islands of Lakshadweep beyond the traditional fishing grounds by pole after 1960 based on the suggestion made by and line and improving the operational techni­ Jones and Kumaran (1959). This has consi­ ques and post-harvest technology and marketing derably enhanced the landings of tunas' were proposed b/James etal, (1986). The especially the oceanic skipjack, the production prospects of acquiring and utilising vessels, of which has reached an annual average of equipment and expertise from technologically 3983 tonnes during 1983-86' thereby bringing advanced countries were also considered prosperity to the islands. However, a reasonable (James and Pillai, 1987). Diversification of estimate of the exploitation potential of tunas fishing effort for exploitation of fishery resources around Lakshadweep is 50,000 tonnes (George other than tunas and practiisng cheaper preser-

BULLETIN 43 253 vation methods and effective marketing have RECOMMENDATION been suggested by Kumaran and Gopakumar (1986). Development of tuna fisheries

Most of the earlier workers on the resource IMPORTANCE OF LIVE-BAIT potential of the islands are of the view that tuna stocks are at present under exploited Live-baits are of paramount importance for and that the production can be increased the success of pole and line operations for considerably. The pole and line fishery for skipjack. Shortage of live-baits at times is tuna is the main fishing operation of the found to be a constraint for pole and line islands and hence developmental efforts should operations in the islands especially after be directed towards the adoption of improved mechanisation. Seasonal changes in the techniques. Indigenous manufacture of lure- availability of bait fish in the lagoon have been hooks, fibre reinforced plastic poles, introduction observed and their scarcity sometimes affects of fishing boats with large holds for bait skipjack fishing operations. However, obser­ fish are worth the attempt to improve the vations made at Minicoy have shown that the tuna catch. The use of larger pole and line total catch of live-baits is only increasing year vessels will definitely be of advantage to after year from 1981-82 season and that [the increase the area of fishing operations and enable better catches. Drift gill netting and catch per unit effort fluctuates in different years. long lining from larger fishing vessels will The fluctuations in the seasonal recruitment to yield large species of tunas. Fish aggregating the populations of migrant live-baits like devices could be set up around all submerged Spratelloides delicatulus, S. japonicus. Lepidozy- banks and isolated reefs in the archipelago gustapeinosoma, Caesio spp. etc , environmental for attracting tuna and other large fishes and deterioration and the demand exceeding the thereby enable the fishermen to increase the available live-bait stocks are the main reasons landings. attributed to the apparent shortage of live-baits (Pillai et a/., 1986). The increase in the Development of bait fishery number of pole and line units consequent on mechanisation of boats has resulted in the As the availability of live-bait is important progressive increase in the tuna catch and for the development of pole and line fishing hence the demand for live-baits also has for skipjack, suggestions have been made increased, while the area of cotlection of live- already tor the proper management of bait bait remains the same. Pillai and Madan Mohan fishery, preservation of the ecosystem, identi­ (1986) are of the opinion that adverse changes fication of new varieties of bait fishes, locating brought about in the environment by human fishing grounds so far remaining unexploited, interference are responsible for the declining culture of bait fishes and adopting improved trend in live-bait. Excessive erosion and methods of stocking live-bait tanks. However, concerted efforts have not yet been made on siltation ot the lagoons by the fury of nature, the above aspects so far. it has been observed blasting of reefs and dredging to deepen the that the requirement of bait fishes for pole boat channels and removal of coral stones for and line fishery often outstrips the supply construction purposes damage the ecosystem resulting from acute shortage of conventional causing mortality of corals and associated species of bait fishes. As there is greater fauna including live-baits (Pillai and Madan demand for live-baits than in the past due Mohan, 1986). Tilapia Sarotheroden mossam- to the expansion of the pole and line fishery, bicus) was introduced in Minicoy as an alternate the use of artificial baits could be tried. The for live-baits. Though the species has availability of bait fish in regions of submerged established there, now in all the freshwater reefs and around isolated islands have to be ponds, wells and tidal pools, it has failed as an explored using better methods of capture alternative to other live-baits. which will definitely relieve to a great exten*

254 CMFRI the pressure on conventional species of bait Improvement In fishery products fishes caught from the lagoon at present. Over stocking of the bait tanks and also the The local demand for tuna being limited, storage tanks floated in the lagoon results in adequate attention has to be given for the mortality. Optimum requirement of live bait for storage, processing and marketing of the a day's fishing operation as well as the maxi­ catches. 'Masmin', the smoked and dried mum storage capacity of the tanks for retaining product of tuna has good shelf life* but baits in captivity for long durations have to deteriorates on keeping for several months by infestation by beetles. Steps have to be taken be estimated to avoid wastage. Preservation to improve the quality depending on the of the ecology of the lagoons and reefs is of market preferences on the mainland and else­ considerable importance for the maintenance where. Large quantity of firewood is consumed of flora and fauna. For sustaining the populations for the preparation of 'masmin' and shortage of coral associated live-bait resources, the of firewood is already felt in some of the coral reef ecosystem has to be conserved as islands. Alternate source of energy has to be far as possible. The possibilities of culture of used to remedy the situation. The production Chromis caeruleus, Chromis ternatensis Lepi- capacity of the tuna canning plant has to be dozygus tapeinosoma and atherinds which are increased to cope up with the increased tuna hardy and forming a good percentage in the live landings. Transportation and marketing the bait catches during ceitain seasons can be tuna in the mainland after freezing can also explored. be done to dispose of the catches. The head and entrails of tuna are thrown while cutting Development of other fish resources tuna for the preparation of 'masmin'. These wastes can be converted into good quality About one fourth of the total fish produ­ manure or chicken feed. ction of the islands consists of crangids, perches, wahoo, dolphin fish, rainbow runner, sharks, rays etc. As the capture of other Export of ornamental fishes fishes is inversely related to the availability A good number of species in the lagoon of tuna shoals in close proximity to the and reefs of Lakshadweep are valuable orna­ islands, and the annual landings of other mental fishes. Export of ornamental fishes on fishes are declining year after year consequent a limited scale can be attempted with suitable on the highly remunerative pole and line fishing, arrangements for storage, transportation and diversification of fishing gears will definitely marketing. However, the impact of exploitation increase the catches of other fishes. Drift of ornamental fishes have to be carefully gillnetting, surface trolling and long lining studied to obviate depopulation of the region. in the open sea are suitable propositions for the capture of larger fishes. Rays could be Other minor resources captured in good numbers by harpooning. Diversification will also generate employment Crustaceans, holothurians, seaweeds, turtles opportunities for the youth of the islands. and molluscs are some of the resources that Surveys aimed at locating productive fishing are available to a limited extent. The exploi­ areas and finding out the suitability of tation of holothurians, seaweeds and crustaceans different gears have to be carried out. Experi­ will not be an economical of proposition and enced fisherman of the south-west coast of at the same time bring about deterioration the mainland who are adept in trolling and in the ecosystem. Octopus in the reefs and long lining can be engaged in Lakshadweep squids in the open ocean which are likely for the capture of sharks and larger fishes. to occur in good concentrations could be Immediate development of the shark fishery exploited on a limited scale. Attempts have can boost the fish catches and lead to export to be made to assess the potentialities of of a number of products from this resource. the resources of squids around Lakshadweep.

BULLETIN 43 255 REFERENCE KUMARAN, M. AND G. GOPAKUMAR 1986 Potential resources of fishes other GEORGE, P. C, B. T. ANTONY RAJA AND than tuna in Lakshadweep. Mar Fish. K. C. GEORGE 1977. Fishery resources Infor. Serv. THE Ser, 68; 41-45. of the Indian Economic Zone. Silver Jubilee Souver)ir, JFP: 79-116. MANNADIAR, N. S. 1973. Laccadive and AmindivB Islands-27 years in retrospect.

JAMES, P. S. B. R., T. JACOB, C. S. GOPl- NAIR, K. S. 1986. Fisheries development in ISIADHA PiLLAI AND P. P. PILLAl Lakshadweep. Fishing Chaims, 6 (2): 1986. Prospects of development of 20-25. Marine fisheries resources in Laksha- dweep. l\Aar. Fisti. Infor. Serv. 7" & £ PILLAl, C. S. GOPINATHA AND MADAN Ser.. 68 51-54, MOHAN 1986. Ecological stress in Minicoy lagoon and its impact on tuna JAMES, P. S. B. R. AND P. P. PILLAl 1987. live baits. Mar. Fish. Infor Serv. TQE Strategies for tuna fisheries develop­ Ser. 68: 33-37. ment and management in the Indian PiLLAI, P. P., M. KUMARAN, C. S. G. PILLAl, Exclusive Economic Zone. Abstract MADAN MOHAN, G. GOPAKUMAR. 113. National Symposium on Research P. LIVINGSTON AND M. SRINATH and Development in Marine Fisheries, 1986. Exploited and potential resources Mandapam Camp, 16-18 September of live-bait fishes of Lakshadweep. 1987 (Abstract;. Mar. Fish. Infor. Serv. T & E Ser. 68: 25-32. JONES, S. AND S. K. BANERJI 1973. A riview of the living resources of the SILAS, E. G. AND P. P. PILLAI 1982. Resources Central Indian Ocean. Froc. symp. of tunas and related species and their Living, resources of the seas around fisheries in the Indian Ocean. Bull India, Cent. mar. Fish. Res. Inst., Cent. Mar. Fish. Res. Inst., 32: 1-174. Cochin: 1-17. SILAS, E. G„ K. V. N, RAO, P. P. PILLAI, MADAN MOHAN, G. GOPAKUMAR, JONES, AND M. KUMARAN 1959. The fishing LIVINGSTON AND M. SRiNATH 1986. industry of Minicoy Island with Exploited and potential resources of special reference to the tuna fishery, tunas of Lakshadweep. Mar. Fish. Infor Indian. J. Fish. 6 (1): 30-54. Serv. T a E Ser. 68 15-25.

256 CMFRl